Cisco ONS 15454 SONET Multiservice Provisioning Platform (MSPP) Guide
Advertentie
Advertentie
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide
Product and Documentation Release 5.0
Last Updated: September 17, 2007
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA http://www.cisco.com
800 553-NETS (6387)
Customer Order Number: DOC-7816299=
Text Part Number: 78-16299-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCSP, the Cisco Square Bridge logo, Follow Me Browsing, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco
Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Empowering the Internet Generation,
Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, FormShare, GigaDrive, GigaStack, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, the Networkers logo, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet , PIX, Post-Routing,
Pre-Routing, ProConnect, RateMUX, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StrataView Plus, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient,
TransPath, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0411R)
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, Release 5.0
Copyright © 2007 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved.
December 2004
C O N T E N T S
About this Guide
xxxix
xl
xl
xl
xl
xl
xli
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
xlvii
xlvii
xlvii
xlvii
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
xlvii
xlviii
Obtaining Technical Assistance
xlviii
Cisco Technical Support Website
xlviii
xlix
Definitions of Service Request Severity
xlix
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
xlix
General Troubleshooting
1-1
1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks
1-2
1-3
1-3
1.1.1.2 ONS 15454 Card Behavior
1-4
1-5
1-5
1.1.2.2 ONS 15454 Card Behavior
1-6
1-8
1-8
1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1-9
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
1-10
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1
1-10
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Facility Loopback Circuit
1-11
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
iii
Contents iv
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
1-11
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Facility Loopback Circuit
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to East)
1-15
Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Source-Node Electrical Port
1-15
Test and Delete the Electrical Port Hairpin Circuit
1-16
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-17
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-18
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East) Carrying an Electrical
1-18
Create the XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OCN STS
1-19
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
1-20
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-20
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-21
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
1-22
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1
1-23
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Destination Port Terminal Loopback
1-24
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination DS-3E or DS3XM Port
1-24
Test and Clear the DS-3E or DS3XM Destination Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-26
Test the Destination Electrical Card
1-26
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
1-27
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Destination DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1
1-28
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Facility Loopback Circuit
1-28
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
1-29
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Facility Loopback Circuit
1-30
1-30
1-31
1-31
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
1-32
Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Destination-Node Port
1-33
Test and Delete the Electrical Hairpin Circuit
1-34
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-34
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-35
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West)
Carrying an Electrical Circuit
1-36
Create the XC Loopback on the Source OC-N Port Carrying an Electrical Circuit
1-37
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
1-37
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-38
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-39
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
1-40
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1
1-40
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Terminal Loopback
1-42
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
1-42
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-43
Test the Source Electrical Card
1-44
1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks
1-45
1-46
1.3.2 DS-3E and DS3i-N-12 Inhibit Loopback
1-46
1.3.3 DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12 Inhibit FEAC Loopback
1-46
1-46
1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1-47
1.4.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
1-47
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source Optical Port
1-48
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-48
1-49
1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
1-49
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
1-50
Test and Clear the Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-51
1-52
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
1-52
Create the XC Loopback on the Source-Node Optical Port
1-53
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
1-54
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-54
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
1-55
1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
1-56
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
1-57
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-58
1-58
1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
1-59
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
1-60
Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-61
1-62
1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
1-62
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
1-63
Test and Clear the Optical Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-64
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
v
Contents vi
1-65
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
1-65
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
1-66
Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-67
1-68
1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1-69
1.5.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
1-69
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source-Node Ethernet Port
1-70
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-70
1-71
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
1-71
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
1-72
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-73
1-74
1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
1-75
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
1-75
Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-76
1-77
1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
1-78
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
1-78
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-79
1-80
1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-81
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-81
Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-82
1-83
1.5.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-84
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-84
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-85
1-86
1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1-87
1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-88
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-88
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-89
1-89
1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-90
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-90
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-91
1-91
1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-92
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-93
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-93
1-94
1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
1-94
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
1-95
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-96
1-96
1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-97
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-97
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
1-98
1-98
1.6.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-99
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-100
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit
1-100
1-101
1.7 Troubleshooting DWDM Circuit Paths With ITU-T G.709 Monitoring
1-102
1.7.1 G.709 Monitoring in Optical Transport Networks
1-102
1-102
1.7.3 Optical Multiplex Section Layer
1-103
1.7.4 Optical Transmission Section Layer
1-103
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
1-103
Set Node Default BBE or SES Card Thresholds
1-104
Provision Individual Card BBE or SES Thresholds in CTC
1-105
Provision Card PM Thresholds Using TL1
1-106
Provision Optical TCA Thresholds
1-107
1.7.6 Forward Error Correction
1-108
1-108
1.7.7 Sample Trouble Resolutions
1-109
1-110
1-110
Verify General Card LED Operation
1-110
Verify G-Series Ethernet or FC_MR-4 Card Port-Level LED Operation
1-111
Verify E-Series and ML-Series Ethernet Card Port-Level LED Operation
1-112
1.8.2 Retrieve Diagnostics File Button
1-112
1-113
1.8.3 Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
1-113
Create a Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
1-114
1.9 Restoring the Database and Default Settings
1-116
1.9.1 Restore the Node Database
1-116
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
vii
Contents viii
1-116
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
1-118
Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows)
1-119
Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX)
1-120
1.10 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting
1-122
1.10.1 PC System Minimum Requirements
1-122
1.10.2 Sun System Minimum Requirements
1-122
1.10.3 Supported Platforms, Browsers, and JREs
1-122
1.10.4 Unsupported Platforms and Browsers
1-123
1.10.5 Unable to Verify the IP Configuration of Your PC
1-123
Verify the IP Configuration of Your PC
1-124
1.10.6 Browser Login Does Not Launch Java
1-124
Reconfigure the PC Operating System Java Plug-in Control Panel
1-124
1-125
1.10.7 Unable to Verify the NIC Connection on Your PC
1-126
1.10.8 Verify PC Connection to the ONS 15454 (ping)
1-126
1-127
1.10.9 The IP Address of the Node is Unknown
1-127
Retrieve Unknown Node IP Address
1-127
1.11 CTC Operation Troubleshooting
1-128
1.11.1 CTC Colors Do Not Appear Correctly on a UNIX Workstation
1-128
1-128
1.11.2 Unable to Launch CTC Help After Removing Netscape
1-128
Reset Internet Explorer as the Default Browser for CTC
1-129
1.11.3 Unable to Change Node View to Network View
1-129
Set the CTC_HEAP and CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for
1-129
Set the CTC_HEAP and CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Solaris
1-130
1.11.4 Browser Stalls When Downloading CTC JAR Files From TCC2/TCC2P
1-130
Disable the VirusScan Download Scan
1-130
1-131
Redirect the Netscape Cache to a Valid Directory
1-131
1.11.6 Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
1-131
Delete the CTC Cache File Automatically
1-132
Delete the CTC Cache File Manually
1-133
1.11.7 Node Icon is Gray on CTC Network View
1-134
1.11.8 CTC Cannot Launch Due to Applet Security Restrictions
1-134
Manually Edit the java.policy File
1-134
1.11.9 Java Runtime Environment Incompatible
1-135
Launch CTC to Correct the Core Version Build
1-136
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
1.11.10 Different CTC Releases Do Not Recognize Each Other
1-136
Launch CTC to Correct the Core Version Build
1-137
1.11.11 Username or Password Do Not Match
1-137
Verify Correct Username and Password
1-137
1.11.12 No IP Connectivity Exists Between Nodes
1-138
1-138
1.11.14 “Path in Use” Error When Creating a Circuit
1-138
1.11.15 Calculate and Design IP Subnets
1-138
1-139
1-139
1.11.17 VLAN Cannot Connect to Network Device from Untag Port
1-140
Change VLAN Port Tag and Untagged Settings
1-141
1-142
1.12.1 OC-N Circuit Transitions to Partial State
1-142
View the State of OC-N Circuit Nodes
1-142
1.12.2 AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits
1-143
Clear AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits
1-143
1.12.3 Circuit Creation Error with VT1.5 Circuit
1-144
1.12.4 Unable to Create Circuit From DS-3 Card to DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card
1-144
1.12.5 DS-3 Card Does Not Report AIS-P From External Equipment
1-144
1.12.6 OC-3 and DCC Limitations
1-145
1.12.7 ONS 15454 Switches Timing Reference
1-145
1.12.8 Holdover Synchronization Alarm
1-145
1.12.9 Free-Running Synchronization Mode
1-146
1.12.10 Daisy-Chained BITS Not Functioning
1-146
1.12.11 Blinking STAT LED after Installing a Card
1-146
1-147
1.13.1 Bit Errors Appear for a Traffic Card
1-147
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
1-147
Verify Fiber-Optic Connections
1-148
1.13.2.1 Crimp Replacement LAN Cables
1-149
1.13.2.2 Replace Faulty GBIC or SFP Connectors
1-151
1-152
1-152
Installing a GBIC with a Handle
1-153
1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels
1-154
1-155
Isolate the Cause of Power Supply Problems
1-155
1.14.1 Power Consumption for Node and Cards
1-156
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
ix
Contents
Alarm Troubleshooting
2-1
2.1 Alarm Indexes by Default Severity
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-7
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
2-7
2-12
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
2-14
2-26
2-27
2-27
2.6.2 Condition Characteristics
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-31
2-31
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-32
AMPLI-INIT
2-32
Clear the AMPLI-INIT Condition
2-33
2-33
2-33
Clear the APC-DISABLED Condition
2-33
2-34
2-34
Clear the APC-OUT-OF-RANGE Condition
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-35
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
x December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
Clear the APS-PRIM-FAC Condition
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-41
Clear the APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM Alarm
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-44
Clear the AUD-LOG-LOSS Condition
2-44
2-45
AU-LOF
2-45
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-47
Clear the AUTOSW-AIS Condition
2-47
2-47
Clear the AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON) Condition
2-48
2-48
Clear the AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON) Condition
2-48
2-48
Clear the AUTOSW-PDI Condition
2-48
2-49
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xi
Contents xii
Clear the AUTOSW-SDBER Condition
2-49
2-49
Clear the AUTOSW-SFBER Condition
2-49
2-49
Clear the AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON) Condition
2-49
2-50
Clear the AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON) Condition
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-51
2-51
2-51
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-53
2-54
2-54
2-54
Clear the CARLOSS (CE100T) Alarm
2-54
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F)
2-54
Clear the CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F) Alarm
2-55
2-56
Clear the CARLOSS (EQPT) Alarm
2-57
CARLOSS (FC)
2-58
2-58
Clear the CARLOSS (G1000) Alarm
2-59
2-61
2-61
2-61
2-62
2.8.53 CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000)
2-62
Clear the CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000) Alarm
2-62
2-63
Clear the CARLOSS (TRUNK) Alarm
2-63
2-63
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-63
2-64
Clear the CLDRESTART Condition
2-64
2-64
2-65
2-65
2-65
2-66
2-66
2-66
2-67
2-67
2-67
2-68
2-68
2-69
Clear the CTNEQPT-MISMATCH Condition
2-70
2-70
Clear the CTNEQPT-PBPROT Alarm
2-70
2-71
Clear the CTNEQPT-PBWORK Alarm
2-72
2-73
2-73
2-73
2-74
2-74
2-74
2-75
2-75
2-75
2-75
2-76
2-76
2-76
2-76
2-77
2-77
2-77
2-77
Clear the ENCAP-MISMATCH-P Alarm
2-78
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xiii
Contents xiv
2-79
2-79
2-81
2-82
2-82
2-82
2-83
2-83
2-83
2-84
2-84
Clear the ERFI-P-CONN Condition
2-84
2-84
Clear the ERFI-P-PAYLD Condition
2-85
2-85
Clear the ERFI-P-SRVR Condition
2-85
2-85
2-85
2-86
Clear the ETH-LINKLOSS Condition
2-86
2-87
Clear the E-W-MISMATCH Alarm with a Physical Switch
2-87
Clear the E-W-MISMATCH Alarm in CTC
2-88
2-89
2-89
2-89
Clear the EXERCISE-RING-FAIL Condition
2-89
2-90
Clear the EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL Condition
2-90
2-90
2-91
2-91
Clear the EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT Alarm
2-91
2-91
2-92
2-92
Clear the FAILTOSW-PATH Condition in a Path Protection Configuration
2-93
2-93
Clear the FAILTOSWR Condition in a BLSR Configuration
2-94
2-95
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-96
2-97
2-97
2-98
2-98
2-99
2-99
2-99
2-99
2-100
Clear the FE-DS1-MULTLOS Condition
2-100
2-100
Clear the FE-DS1-NSA Condition
2-101
2-101
2-101
2-101
Clear the FE-DS1-SNGLLOS Condition
2-102
2-102
Clear the FE-DS3-NSA Condition
2-102
2-102
2-103
2-103
Clear the FE-EQPT-NSA Condition
2-103
2-104
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN Condition
2-104
2-104
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING Condition
2-104
2-105
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN Condition
2-105
2-105
2-106
2-106
Clear the FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN Condition
2-106
2-106
2-107
2-107
2-107
2-107
Clear the FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN Condition
2-108
2-108
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xv
Contents xvi
Clear the FE-MANWKSWPR-RING Condition
2-108
2-109
Clear the FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN Condition
2-109
2-109
Clear the FEPRLF Alarm on a Four-Fiber BLSR
2-109
2-110
2-110
2-110
Clear the FORCED-REQ Condition
2-110
2-110
Clear the FORCED-REQ-RING Condition
2-111
2-111
Clear the FORCED-REQ-SPAN Condition
2-111
2-111
2-111
2-112
2-112
2-112
2-112
2-113
2-113
Clear the FULLPASSTHR-BI Condition
2-113
2-113
2-113
2-115
2-115
2-115
2-115
2-115
2-116
2-116
2-116
2-116
2-116
2-117
2-117
2-117
Clear the GFP-DE-MISMATCH Alarm
2-117
2-118
Clear the GFP-EX-MISMATCH Alarm
2-118
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-118
2-119
2-119
Clear the GFP-NO-BUFFERS Alarm
2-119
2-119
Clear the GFP-UP-MISMATCH Alarm
2-120
2-120
2-120
2-120
2-121
2-121
2-121
2-121
2-122
2-122
2-122
2-123
2-123
2-124
2-124
2-125
2-125
2-125
Clear the HLDOVRSYNC Condition
2-126
2-126
2-127
2-127
2-127
2-128
2-128
2-129
2-129
2-129
2-129
Clear the INTRUSION-PSWD Condition
2-130
2-130
2-130
2-132
2-132
Clear the KB-PASSTHR Condition
2-132
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xvii
Contents xviii
2.8.159 KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE
2-133
Clear the KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE Alarm
2-133
2-133
Clear the LAN-POL-REV Condition
2-133
2-134
2-134
2-134
2-134
Clear the LASERBIAS-FAIL Alarm
2-134
2-135
2-135
2-135
2-135
2-136
2-136
2-137
Clear the LCAS-RX-FAIL Condition
2-137
2-137
2-138
LKOUTPR-S
2-138
2-138
2-138
2-139
2-139
Clear the LOCKOUT-REQ Condition
2-139
2-139
2-140
2-140
2-141
2-141
2-142
2-142
Clear the LOF (EC1, EC1-12) Alarm
2-142
2-143
2-143
2-143
2-143
2-144
2-144
2-144
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-144
2-145
2-145
2-145
2-146
2-146
2-146
2-147
2-147
2-147
2-148
2-148
2-148
2-149
2-150
2-150
Clear the LOS (EC1, EC1-12) Alarm
2-150
2-151
2-151
2-151
2-152
2-152
2-153
2-153
2-153
2-155
2-155
2-156
2-156
2-157
2-157
2-159
2-159
2-161
Clear the LOS-P (OMS, OTS) Alarm
2-162
2-163
2-163
2-164
2-165
2-165
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xix
Contents xx
2-165
2-166
Clear the LPBKDS1FEAC Condition
2-166
2-166
2-166
Clear the LPBKDS3FEAC Condition
2-167
2-167
2-167
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (CE100T) Condition
2-167
2.8.207 LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)
2-168
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3) Condition
2-168
2-168
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (EC1, EC1-12) Condition
2-168
2-169
2-169
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (FC) Condition
2-169
2-169
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (FCMR) Condition
2-169
2-169
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (G1000) Condition
2-170
2-170
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (GE) Condition
2-170
2-170
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (ISC) Condition
2-171
2-171
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (OCN) Condition
2-171
2-171
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK) Condition
2-172
2-172
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (CE100T) Condition
2-172
2.8.218 LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)
2-172
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3) Condition
2-173
2-173
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (EC1, EC1-12) Condition
2-173
2-173
2-173
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (FC) Condition
2-174
2-174
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR) Condition
2-174
2-174
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (G1000) Condition
2-174
2-175
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (GE) Condition
2-175
2-175
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (ISC) Condition
2-175
2-175
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (OCN) Condition
2-176
2-176
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK) Condition
2-176
2-176
2-177
2-177
2-177
2-177
2-177
2-178
2-178
2-178
2-178
Clear the MANUAL-REQ-RING Condition
2-179
2-179
Clear the MANUAL-REQ-SPAN Condition
2-179
2-179
2-179
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-181
2-183
2-183
2-183
2-184
2-184
2-184
2-185
2-185
2-186
2-186
2-186
2-187
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxi
Contents xxii
2-187
Clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM Condition
2-187
2-187
Clear the ODUK-2-AIS-PM Condition
2-187
2-188
Clear the ODUK-3-AIS-PM Condition
2-188
2-188
Clear the ODUK-4-AIS-PM Condition
2-188
2-188
Clear the ODUK-AIS-PM Condition
2-189
2-189
Clear the ODUK-BDI-PM Condition
2-189
2-189
Clear the ODUK-LCK-PM Condition
2-190
2-190
Clear the ODUK-OCI-PM Condition
2-190
2-190
Clear the ODUK-SD-PM Condition
2-191
2-191
Clear the ODUK-SF-PM Condition
2-191
2-191
Clear the ODUK-TIM-PM Condition
2-192
2-192
2-192
2-192
2-193
2-193
2-193
2-195
2-195
2-195
2-195
2-196
2-196
2-196
2-196
2-197
2-197
2-197
2-197
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-198
2-198
2-199
2-199
2-199
2-199
2-200
2-200
2-200
2-200
2-201
Clear the OUT-OF-SYNC Condition
2-201
2-201
2-201
2-202
2-203
Clear the PEER-NORESPONSE Alarm
2-203
2-204
2-204
2-205
2-205
2-205
2-205
2-205
2-205
Clear the PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW Alarm
2-206
2-207
2-207
2-207
2-208
2-208
2-208
2-209
2-209
2-209
2-210
2-210
2-210
Clear the PWR-FAIL-RET-A Alarm:
2-211
2-211
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxiii
Contents xxiv
Clear the PWR-FAIL-RET-A Alarm
2-211
2-211
2-211
2-212
2-212
2-212
2-212
2-213
2-213
2-213
2-213
2-214
2-214
2-215
2-215
2-215
2-215
2-216
2-216
2-216
2-217
2-217
2-217
Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition
2-218
2-219
Clear the SD (TRUNK) Condition
2-219
2-219
2-220
2-220
2-220
2-220
2-221
2-221
Clear the SF (DS1, DS3) Condition
2-222
2-222
Clear the SF (TRUNK) Condition
2-222
2-223
2-223
2-223
2-223
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-223
2-224
2-224
2.8.314 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIGH
2-224
2.8.314.1 Clear the SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIGH Alarm
2-224
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LOW
2-225
2.8.315.1 Clear the SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LOW Alarm
2-225
2-225
Clear the SHUTTER-OPEN Condition
2-225
2-225
2-226
2-226
2-226
2-227
2-227
2-227
2-228
2-229
2-230
2-230
2-231
2-231
2-231
2-231
2-232
2-232
2-232
2-232
2-233
2-233
2-233
SSM-SETS
2-233
2-233
2-234
2-234
2-234
2-234
2-235
2-235
2-235
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxv
Contents xxvi
2-235
2-236
2-237
2-237
2-237
2-237
2-238
2-238
2-238
2-238
2-239
2-239
2-239
2-240
2-240
2-240
2-240
2-241
2-241
2-242
2-242
2-242
2-243
2-243
2-243
2-243
2-244
2-244
2-244
Clear the TPTFAIL (CE100T) Alarm
2-244
2-244
Clear the TPTFAIL (FCMR) Alarm
2-245
2-245
Clear the TPTFAIL (G1000) Alarm
2-245
2.8.358 TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000)
2-245
Clear the TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000) Alarm
2-246
2-246
2-247
2-247
2-247
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
Contents
2-247
2-248
2-248
2-248
2-248
2-248
2-249
2-249
2-251
2-251
2.8.366 UNREACHABLE-TARGET-POWER
2-251
2-252
2-252
2-252
2-252
2-253
2-253
2-253
2-253
2-253
2-254
2-254
2-254
2-254
2-254
2-255
2-255
2-255
2-255
2-255
2-256
2-256
2-256
2-256
2-257
2.9.1 DWDM Card LED Activity After Insertion
2-257
2.9.2 DWDM Card LED Activity During Reset
2-257
2.10 Traffic Card LED Activity
2-257
2.10.1 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity After Insertion
2-258
2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset
2-258
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxvii
Contents xxviii
2.10.3 Typical Card LED State After Successful Reset
2-258
2.10.4 Typical Cross-Connect LED Activity During Side Switch
2-258
2.11 Frequently Used Alarm Troubleshooting Procedures
2-258
2.11.1 Node and Ring Identification, Change, Visibility, and Termination
2-259
Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number
2-259
2-259
2-259
Verify Node Visibility for Other Nodes
2-260
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
2-260
Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Force Switch Command
2-260
Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Manual Switch Command
2-261
Clear a 1+1 Protection Port Force or Manual Switch Command
2-261
Initiate a Card or Port Lock On Command
2-262
Initiate a Card or Port Lock Out Command
2-262
Clear a Card or Port Lock On or Lock Out Command
2-262
Initiate a 1:1 Card Switch Command
2-263
Initiate a Force Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
2-263
Initiate a Manual Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
2-264
Initiate a Lock Out of Protect-Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
2-264
Clear a Path Protection Span External Switching Command
2-265
Initiate a Force Ring Switch on a BLSR
2-265
Initiate a Force Span Switch on a Four-Fiber BLSR
2-265
Initiate a Manual Ring Switch on a BLSR
2-266
Initiate a Lock Out on a BLSR Protect Span
2-266
Initiate an Exercise Ring Switch on a BLSR
2-266
Initiate an Exercise Ring Switch on a Four Fiber BLSR
2-267
Clear a BLSR External Switching Command
2-267
2.11.3 CTC Card Resetting and Switching
2-267
2-268
Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card
2-268
Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Cards
2-269
2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement
2-269
Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card
2-270
Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card
2-270
Physically Replace a Traffic Card
2-271
Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card
2-271
2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures
2-272
Verify the Signal BER Threshold Level
2-272
2-272
Verify or Create Node Section DCC Terminations
2-272
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Contents
December 2004
Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit
2-273
Clear an OC-N Card Cross-Connect (XC) Loopback Circuit
2-273
Clear a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Loopback Circuit
2-273
Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks
2-274
Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit
2-274
Clear an Ethernet Card Loopback Circuit
2-275
2.11.6 Air Filter and Fan Procedures
2-275
Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter
2-275
Remove and Reinsert a Fan-Tray Assembly
2-277
2-277
2-278
Replace the Electrical Interface Assembly
2-278
Replace the Alarm Interface Panel
2-279
Error Messages
3-1
Performance Monitoring
4-1
4.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring
4-1
4.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
4-2
4.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
4-3
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
4-4
4.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards
4-11
4.5.1 EC1-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-11
4.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-13
4.5.2.1 DS-1 Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring
4-15
4.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-15
4.5.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-16
4.5.5 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-18
4.5.6 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-20
4.5.7 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-22
4.5.8 DS3/EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-24
4.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards
4-26
4.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-26
4.6.1.1 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
4-26
4.6.1.2 E-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
4-27
4.6.1.3 E-Series Ethernet History Window
4-27
4.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-28
4.6.2.1 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
4-28
4.6.2.2 G-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
4-29
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxix
Contents
xxx
4.6.2.3 G-Series Ethernet History Window
4-30
4.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-30
4.6.3.1 ML-Series Ether Ports Window
4-30
4.6.3.2 ML-Series POS Ports Window
4-31
4.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-33
4.6.4.1 CE-Series Card Ether Port Statistics Window
4-33
4.6.4.2 CE-Series Card Ether Ports Utilization Window
4-34
4.6.4.3 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
4-34
4.6.4.4 CE-Series Card POS Ports Statistics Parameters
4-34
4.6.4.5 CE-Series Card POS Ports Utilization Window
4-35
4.6.4.6 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
4-35
4.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards
4-36
4.8 Performance Monitoring for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
4-38
4.8.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Payload PM Parameters
4-40
4.8.1.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Statistics Window
4-40
4.8.1.2 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Utilization Window
4-41
4.8.2 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G History Window
4-41
4.9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking Cards
4-41
4.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window
4-42
4.9.2 FC_MR-4 Utilization Window
4-43
4-43
4.10 Performance Monitoring for DWDM Cards
4-43
4.10.1 Optical Amplifier Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-44
4.10.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-44
4.10.3 4MD-xx.x Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-44
4.10.4 OADM Channel Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-44
4.10.5 OADM Band Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-44
4.10.6 Optical Service Channel Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4-45
SNMP
5-1
5-1
5-2
5.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement
5-4
5-4
5-4
5.6 SNMP Management Information Bases
5-4
5-6
5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
5-7
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5.10.2 Ethernet Statistics RMON Group
5-14
5.10.2.1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable
5-14
5.10.2.2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
5-15
5.10.2.3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable
5-15
5.10.2.4 64-Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table
5-15
5.10.3 History Control RMON Group
5-15
5.10.3.1 History Control Table
5-15
5.10.3.2 Row Creation in historyControlTable
5-16
5.10.3.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
5-16
5.10.3.4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table
5-16
5.10.4 Ethernet History RMON Group
5-17
5.10.4.1 64-Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable
5-17
5-17
5-17
5.10.5.2 Row Creation in alarmTable
5-17
5.10.5.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
5-19
5.10.5.4 Row Deletion in alarmTable
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
Contents
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxxi
Contents xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
F I G U R E S
Facility (Line) Loopback Path on a Near-End DS-N Card
1-3
Facility (Line) Loopback Path on a Near-End OC-N Card
1-3
OC-N Facility Loopback Indicator
1-3
Terminal Loopback Path on an OC-N Card
1-5
Terminal Loopback Indicator
1-5
Terminal Loopback Path on a DS-N Card
1-5
Terminal Loopback on a DS-N Card with Bridged Signal
1-6
Terminal Loopback on an OC-N Card with Bridged Signal
1-7
Hairpin Circuit Path on a DS-N Card
1-8
Network Element with SONET Cross-Connect Loopback Function
1-9
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source DS-N Port
1-10
Hairpin on a Source-Node Port
1-15
XC Loopback on a Destination OC-N Port
1-19
Terminal (Inward) Loopback to a Destination DS-N Port
1-22
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Destination DS-N Port
1-27
Hairpin on a Destination-Node DS-N Port
1-33
XC Loopback on a Source OC-N Port
1-36
Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS-N Port
1-40
Accessing FEAC Functions on the DS3XM-6 Card
1-45
Diagram of FEAC Circuit
1-46
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source OC-N Port
1-47
Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N Port
1-50
Terminal Loopback Indicator
1-50
XC Loopback on a Source OC-N Port
1-53
Facility (Line) Loopback Path to an Intermediate-Node OC-N Port
1-56
Terminal Loopback Path to an Intermediate-Node OC-N Port
1-59
Facility Loopback Indicator
1-59
Facility (Line) Loopback Path to a Destination-Node OC-N Port
1-63
Terminal Loopback Path to a Destination-Node OC-N Port
1-66
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source Ethernet Port
1-69
Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a G-Series Port
1-72
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxxiii
Figures
Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
1-75
Terminal Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
1-78
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-81
Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
1-84
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-88
Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-90
Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-92
Terminal Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-95
Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-97
Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1-99
Optical Transport Network Layers
1-102
Performance Monitoring Points on ONS DWDM
1-104
Set Default BBE/SES Card Thresholds
1-105
Provision Card BBE/SES Thresholds
1-106
Provision Optical TCA Thresholds
1-107
Provision Card FEC Thresholds
1-108
CTC Node View Diagnostic Window
1-111
CTC Node View Diagnostic Window
1-114
Network View Circuit Creation Dialog Box
1-115
Reinitialization Tool in Windows
1-119
Reinitialization Tool in UNIX
1-121
Deleting the CTC Cache
1-133
Ethernet Connectivity Reference
1-139
VLAN with Ethernet Ports at Tagged and Untag
1-141
Configuring VLAN Membership for Individual Ethernet Ports
1-141
RJ-45 Pin Numbers
1-150
LAN Cable Layout
1-150
Cross-Over Cable Layout
1-151
GBICs
1-152
GBIC Installation (with Clips)
1-153
Shelf LCD Panel
2-46
Shelf LCD Panel
2-124
Error Dialog Box
3-1
Monitored Signal Types for the EC1-12 Card
4-11
PM Read Points on the EC1-12 Card
4-12 xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Monitored Signal Types for the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
4-13
PM Read Points on the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
4-14
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
4-15
PM Read Points on the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
4-16
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
4-17
PM Read Points on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
4-17
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3i-N-12 Cards
4-18
PM Read Points on the DS3i-N-12 Cards
4-19
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-6 Card
4-20
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-6 Card
4-21
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-12 Card
4-22
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-12 Card
4-23
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3/EC1-48 Card
4-24
PM Read Points on the DS3/EC1-48 Card
4-25
Monitored Signal Types for the OC-3 Cards
4-36
PM Read Points on the OC-3 Cards
4-36
Monitored Signal Types
4-38
PM Read Points for TXP_MR_10G card
4-39
PM Read Points on OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards
4-45
Basic Network Managed by SNMP
5-2
Example of the Primary SNMP Components
5-3
Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager
5-3
Figures
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxxv
Figures xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
December 2004
T A B L E S
ONS 15454 Card Facility Loopback Behavior
1-4
ONS 15454 Card Terminal Loopback Behavior
1-6
Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
1-132
JRE Compatibility
1-135
LAN Cable Pinout
1-150
Cross-Over Cable Pinout
1-151
OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels
1-154
ONS 15454 Critical Alarm Index
2-2
ONS 15454 Major Alarm Index
2-2
ONS 15454 Minor Alarm Index
2-3
ONS 15454 NA Conditions Index
2-4
ONS 15454 NR Conditions Index
2-7
ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index
2-7
Alarm Logical Object Type Definition
2-12
Alarm Index by Logical Object
2-14
DS3-12E Line Alarms
2-27
BIC Compatibility Matrix
2-180
Error Messages
3-1
ONS 15454 Line Terminating Equipment
4-2
Performance-Monitoring Parameters
4-4
EC1-12 Card PMs
4-12
DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card PMs
4-14
DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card PMs
4-16
DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card PMs
4-18
DS3i-N-12 Card PMs
4-19
DS3XM-6 Card PMs
4-21
DS3XM-12 Card PMs
4-23
DS3/EC1-48 Card PMs
4-25
E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
4-26
maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
4-27
Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval
4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxxvii
Tables
G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
4-28
ML-Series Ether Ports PM Parameters
4-30
ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode
4-31
ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for GFP-F Mode
4-32
CE-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
4-33
CE-Series Card POS Ports Parameters
4-35
OC3 Card PMs
4-37
OC3-8 Card PMs
4-37
OC12, OC48, OC192 Card PMs
4-38
Muxponder and Transponder Card PMs
4-40
MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Statistical PMs
4-40
FC_MR-4 Statistics Parameters
4-42
maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
4-43
FC_MR-4 History Statistics per Time Interval
4-43
Optical PM Parameters for OPT-PRE, and OPT-BST Cards.
4-44
Optical PMs for 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards
4-44
Optical PMs for 4MD-xx.x Cards
4-44
Optical PMs for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards
4-44
Optical PMs for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards
4-45
OSCM/OSC-CSM (OC3) Card PMs
4-45
ONS 15454 SNMP Message Types
5-4
IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15454 System
5-5
ONS 15454 Proprietary MIBs
5-6
ONS 15454 Traps
5-7
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings
5-8
RMON History Control Periods and History Categories
5-16
OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable
5-18 xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
About this Guide
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
•
•
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xxxix
About this Guide
Revision History
Revision History
Date
03/27/2007
09/05/2007
09/17/2007
Notes
Revision History Table added for the first time
Updated the About this Guide chapter
Updated the caution below “Side Switch the Active and
Standby Cross-Connect Cards” section in Alarm Troubleshooting chapter. Added a Note, Caution and Rules in “Side Switch the Active and Standby Cross-Connect Cards” section in Alarm
Troublesooting chapter.
Document Objectives
This guide gives general troubleshooting instructions, alarm troubleshooting instructions, equipment replacement instructions, and a list of error messages that apply to the ONS 15454. This information is contained in four chapters. Use this guide in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the
Related Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and preferably have experience as a telecomunications technician.
Document Organization
The Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide is organized into the following chapters:
•
Chapter 1, “General Troubleshooting,” provides methods to discover hardware errors, such as failed
ports, that adversely affect signal traffic; it also gives typical software problems that occur and their solutions.
•
•
•
•
Chapter 2, “Alarm Troubleshooting,” provides indexes, descriptions, and troubleshooting methods
for all alarms and conditions generated by the ONS 15454.
Chapter 3, “Error Messages,” provides a comprehensive list of all ONS 15454 error messages and
their identification numbers.
Chapter 4, “Performance Monitoring,”
defines performance monitoring parameters for all ONS
15454 cards.
describes simple network management protocol (SNMP) applications as they apply to the Cisco ONS 15454.
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide in conjunction with the following publications:
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xl September 2007
About this Guide
Document Conventions
•
•
•
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Provides procedures (NTPs) and tasks (DLPs) to install and configure the system.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
Provides relevant information such as specifications or system use information.
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
Provides a comprehensive list of TL1 commands for the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15600,
ONS 15327, and ONS 15310-CL.
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 Release 5.0
Provides caveats, closed issues, and new feature and functionality information.
Refer to the following standards documentation referenced in this publication:
• Telcordia GR-253 CORE
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Convention boldface italic
[ ]
{ x | x | x }
Ctrl screen font boldface screen font
< >
Application
Commands and keywords in body text.
Command input that is supplied by the user.
Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. The user must select one.
The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
Examples of information displayed on the screen.
Examples of information that the user must enter.
Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Note Means reader take note . Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document.
Caution Means reader be careful . In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xli
About this Guide
Document Conventions
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Varoitus
Attention
Warnung
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil, référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
About this Guide
Document Conventions
Avvertenza
Advarsel
Aviso
¡Advertencia!
Varning!
IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xliii
Document Conventions
About this Guide xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
About this Guide
Document Conventions
Aviso
Advarsel
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xlv
Document Conventions
About this Guide xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
About this Guide
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 systems. It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Obtaining Documentation
Cisco documentation and additional literature are available on Cisco.com. Cisco also provides several ways to obtain technical assistance and other technical resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems.
Cisco.com
You can access the most current Cisco documentation at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm
You can access the Cisco website at this URL: http://www.cisco.com
You can access international Cisco websites at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml
Ordering Documentation
You can find instructions for ordering documentation at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/es_inpck/pdi.htm
You can order Cisco documentation in these ways:
• Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from the Ordering tool: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/index.shtml
• Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, USA) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in
North America, by calling 1 800 553-NETS (6387).
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15454 product documentation, is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
xlvii
About this Guide
Documentation Feedback
Documentation Feedback
You can send comments about technical documentation to [email protected].
You can submit comments by using the response card (if present) behind the front cover of your document or by writing to the following address:
Cisco Systems
Attn: Customer Document Ordering
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
Obtaining Technical Assistance
For all customers, partners, resellers, and distributors who hold valid Cisco service contracts, Cisco
Technical Support provides 24-hour-a-day, award-winning technical assistance. The Cisco Technical
Support Website on Cisco.com features extensive online support resources. In addition, Cisco Technical
Assistance Center (TAC) engineers provide telephone support. If you do not hold a valid Cisco service contract, contact your reseller.
Cisco Technical Support Website
The Cisco Technical Support Website provides online documents and tools for troubleshooting and resolving technical issues with Cisco products and technologies. The website is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Access to all tools on the Cisco Technical Support Website requires a Cisco.com user ID and password.
If you have a valid service contract but do not have a user ID or password, you can register at this URL: http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do
Note Use the Cisco Product Identification (CPI) tool to locate your product serial number before submitting a web or phone request for service. You can access the CPI tool from the Cisco Technical Support
Website by clicking the Tools & Resources link under Documentation & Tools.
Choose Cisco Product
Identification Tool from the Alphabetical Index drop-down list, or click the Cisco Product
Identification Tool link under Alerts & RMAs. The CPI tool offers three search options: by product ID or model name; by tree view; or for certain products, by copying and pasting show command output.
Search results show an illustration of your product with the serial number label location highlighted.
Locate the serial number label on your product and record the information before placing a service call.
xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
About this Guide
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
Submitting a Service Request
Using the online TAC Service Request Tool is the fastest way to open S3 and S4 service requests. (S3 and S4 service requests are those in which your network is minimally impaired or for which you require product information.) After you describe your situation, the TAC Service Request Tool provides recommended solutions. If your issue is not resolved using the recommended resources, your service request is assigned to a Cisco TAC engineer. The TAC Service Request Tool is located at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/servicerequest
For S1 or S2 service requests or if you do not have Internet access, contact the Cisco TAC by telephone.
(S1 or S2 service requests are those in which your production network is down or severely degraded.)
Cisco TAC engineers are assigned immediately to S1 and S2 service requests to help keep your business operations running smoothly.
To open a service request by telephone, use one of the following numbers:
Asia-Pacific: +61 2 8446 7411 (Australia: 1 800 805 227)
EMEA: +32 2 704 55 55
USA: 1 800 553-2447
For a complete list of Cisco TAC contacts, go to this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/contacts
Definitions of Service Request Severity
To ensure that all service requests are reported in a standard format, Cisco has established severity definitions.
Severity 1 (S1)—Your network is “down,” or there is a critical impact to your business operations. You and Cisco will commit all necessary resources around the clock to resolve the situation.
Severity 2 (S2)—Operation of an existing network is severely degraded, or significant aspects of your business operation are negatively affected by inadequate performance of Cisco products. You and Cisco will commit full-time resources during normal business hours to resolve the situation.
Severity 3 (S3)—Operational performance of your network is impaired, but most business operations remain functional. You and Cisco will commit resources during normal business hours to restore service to satisfactory levels.
Severity 4 (S4)—You require information or assistance with Cisco product capabilities, installation, or configuration. There is little or no effect on your business operations.
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online and printed sources.
• Cisco Marketplace provides a variety of Cisco books, reference guides, and logo merchandise. Visit
Cisco Marketplace, the company store, at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/
• The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL: http://cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/pcat/
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 xlix
About this Guide
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
•
•
•
•
•
Cisco Press publishes a wide range of general networking, training and certification titles. Both new and experienced users will benefit from these publications. For current Cisco Press titles and other information, go to Cisco Press at this URL: http://www.ciscopress.com
Packet magazine is the Cisco Systems technical user magazine for maximizing Internet and networking investments. Each quarter, Packet delivers coverage of the latest industry trends, technology breakthroughs, and Cisco products and solutions, as well as network deployment and troubleshooting tips, configuration examples, customer case studies, certification and training information, and links to scores of in-depth online resources. You can access Packet magazine at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/packet iQ Magazine is the quarterly publication from Cisco Systems designed to help growing companies learn how they can use technology to increase revenue, streamline their business, and expand services. The publication identifies the challenges facing these companies and the technologies to help solve them, using real-world case studies and business strategies to help readers make sound technology investment decisions. You can access iQ Magazine at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/iqmagazine
Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering professionals involved in designing, developing, and operating public and private internets and intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/ipj
World-class networking training is available from Cisco. You can view current offerings at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/index.html
l
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
C H A P T E R
1
General Troubleshooting
July 2005
Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter provides procedures for troubleshooting the most common problems encountered when
operating a Cisco ONS 15454. To troubleshoot specific ONS 15454 alarms, see Chapter 2, “Alarm
If you cannot find what you are looking for, contact the Cisco Technical Assistance
Center (1 800 553-2447).
This chapter includes the following sections on network problems:
•
1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks, page 1-2
—Describes loopbacks and hairpin circuits, which you can use to test circuit paths through the network or logically isolate faults.
Note For dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network acceptance tests, refer to “NTP-G16” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.
•
•
•
•
•
1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks, page 1-9 —Explains how to use
loopback tests described in
“1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks” to
isolate trouble on DS-1, DS-3, or EC-1 electrical circuits.
1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks, page
1-45 —Describes how DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12 card far-end alarm and control (FEAC) functions.
1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks, page 1-47
—Explains how to use loopback tests described in
“1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks” to
isolate trouble on OC-N optical circuits.
1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks, page 1-69
—Explains how to use loopback tests described in
“1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks” to
isolate trouble on G-Series or CE-Series Ethernet circuits.
1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks, page 1-87
—Explains how to use loopbacks tests described in
“1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with
to isolate trouble on muxponder (MXP), transponder (TXP), or Fibre Channel
(FC_MR) circuits.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-1
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks
•
The remaining sections describe symptoms, problems, and solutions that are categorized according to the following topics:
•
1.8 Using CTC Diagnostics, page 1-110 —Explains how to perform card LED tests, download a
diagnostic file for Cisco Technical Support, and create a bidirectional diagnostic VT circuit.
•
1.7 Troubleshooting DWDM Circuit Paths With ITU-T G.709 Monitoring, page 1-102
—Explains how to utilize performance monitoring (PM) and threshold crossing alerts (TCA) to locate signal degrades on DWDM circuit paths.
•
1.9 Restoring the Database and Default Settings, page 1-116
—Provides procedures for restoring software data and restoring the node to the default setup.
1.10 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting, page 1-122 —Provides troubleshooting procedures for PC
and network connectivity to the ONS 15454.
•
•
•
•
1.11 CTC Operation Troubleshooting, page 1-128 —Provides troubleshooting procedures for
Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) login or operation problems.
1.12 Circuits and Timing, page 1-142 —Provides troubleshooting procedures for circuit creation
and error reporting as well as timing reference errors and alarms.
1.13 Fiber and Cabling, page 1-147
—Provides troubleshooting procedures for fiber and cabling connectivity errors.
1.14 Power Supply Problems, page 1-155
—Provides troubleshooting procedures for power supply problems.
1.1 Troubleshooting Non-DWDM Circuit Paths with Loopbacks
Use loopbacks and hairpin circuits to test newly created SONET circuits before running live traffic or to logically locate the source of a network failure. All ONS 15454 electrical cards, OC-N cards, G-Series
Ethernet cards, MXP, TXP cards, and FC_MR-4 cards allow loopbacks and hairpin test circuits. Other cards do not allow loopbacks, including E-Series Ethernet, ML-Series Ethernet, and DWDM cards such as Optical Booster (OPT-BST), Optical Preamplifier (OPT-PRE), Optical Service Channel and
Combiner/Splitter Module (OSC-CSM), Band Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing (AD-xB-xx.x), and
Channel Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing (AD-xC-xx.x) cards.
To create a loopback on a port, the port must be in the Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance
(OOS-MA,MT) service state. The resulting service state is Out-of-Service and Management, Loopback and Maintenance (OOS-MA,LPBK & MT).
Caution Facility (line) or terminal loopbacks can be service-affecting. To protect traffic, apply a lockout or Force switch to the target loopback port. Basic directions for these procedures exist in the
Troubleshooting.” For more information about these operations, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Caution On all OC-N cards, a facility (line) loopback applies to the entire card and not an individual circuit.
Exercise caution when using loopbacks on an OC-N card carrying live traffic.
1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1.1 Facility Loopbacks
1.1.1 Facility Loopbacks
The following sections give general information about facility loopback operations and specific information about ONS 15454 card loopback activity.
1.1.1.1 General Behavior
A facility (line) loopback tests the line interface unit (LIU) of a card, the electrical interface assembly
(EIA), and related cabling. After applying a facility loopback on a port, use a test set to run traffic over the loopback. A successful facility loopback isolates the LIU, the EIA, or the cabling plant as the
potential cause of a network problem. Figure 1-1
shows a facility loopback on a DS-N electrical card.
Figure 1-1 Facility (Line) Loopback Path on a Near-End DS-N Card
DS-N XC OC-N
Test Set
To test an OC-N card LIU, connect an optical test set to the OC-N port and perform a facility (line) loopback. Alternately, use a loopback or hairpin circuit on a card that is farther along the circuit path.
Figure 1-2 shows a facility loopback on an OC-N card.
Figure 1-2 Facility (Line) Loopback Path on a Near-End OC-N Card
DS-N XC OC-N
Test Set
In CTC, OC-N cards with facility loopbacks show an icon (
Figure 1-5 ). Loopback icons are not shown
on other cards in this release.
Figure 1-3 OC-N Facility Loopback Indicator
July 2005
Caution Before performing a facility (line) loopback on an OC-N card, be sure the card contains at least two data communications channel (DCC) paths to the node where the card is installed. A second DCC provides a nonlooped path to log into the node after the loopback is applied, enabling you to remove the facility loopback. Ensuring a second DCC is not necessary if you are directly connected to the ONS 15454 containing the loopback OC-N card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-3
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1.1 Facility Loopbacks
1.1.1.2 ONS 15454 Card Behavior
ONS 15454 port loopbacks either terminate or bridge the loopback signal. All ONS 15454 optical, electrical, Ethernet, MXP, TXP, and FC_MR-4 facility loopbacks are terminated as shown in
.
When a port terminates a facility loopback signal, the signal only loops back to the originating port and is not transmitted downstream. When a port bridges a loopback signal, the signal loops back to the originating port and is also transmitted downstream.
Note In
Table 1-1 , no alarm indication signal (AIS) is injected if the signal is bridged. If the signal is
terminated, an applicable AIS is injected downstream for all cards except Ethernet cards.
Table 1-1 ONS 15454 Card Facility Loopback Behavior
Card/Port
DS-1
DS-3
DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
All OC-N cards
EC-1
G-Series Ethernet
MXP, MXPP trunk ports
MXP, MXPP client ports
TXP, MXPP trunk ports
TXP, MXPP client ports
Facility Loopback Signal
Terminated
Terminated
Terminated
Terminated
Terminated
Terminated
1
Bridged
Terminated
Bridged
Terminated
1.
G-Series facility loopback is terminated and no AIS is sent downstream. However, the Cisco Link Integrity signal continues to be sent downstream.
The loopback itself is listed in the Conditions window. For example, the window would list the
LPBKFACILITY condition in the for a tested port. (The Alarms window will show AS-MT, which means that alarms are suppressed on the facility during loopback.)
In addition to the Conditions window listing, the following behaviors occur:
•
•
If an electrical or optical port is in the Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled
(OOS-MA,DSBLD) service state, it injects an AIS signal upstream and downstream.
When an electrical or optical port is placed in the OOS-MA,MT service state before loopback testing, the port clears the AIS signal upstream and downstream unless there is a service-affecting defect that would also cause an AIS signal to be injected. For more information about placing ports into alternate states for testing, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 11, “Change
Card Settings.”
MXP, TXP, and FC_MR-4 card facility loopbacks behave differently from other ONS 15454 cards. With a client-side facility loopback, the client port service state is OOS-MA,LPBK & MT; however the remaining client and trunk ports can be in any other service state. For cards in a trunk-side facility loopback, the trunk port service state is OOS-MA,LPBK & MT service state and the remaining client and trunk ports can be in any other service state.
1-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1.2 Terminal Loopbacks
1.1.2 Terminal Loopbacks
The following sections give general information about terminal loopback operations and specific information about ONS 15454 card loopback activity.
1.1.2.1 General Behavior
A terminal loopback tests a circuit path as it passes through the cross-connect card (XC10G) and loops back from the card with the loopback.
Figure 1-4 shows a terminal loopback on an OC-N card. The
test-set traffic comes into the electrical port and travels through the cross-connect card to the optical card. The terminal loopback on the optical card turns the signal around before it reaches the LIU and sends it back through the cross-connect card to the electrical card. This test verifies that the cross-connect card and terminal circuit paths are valid, but does not test the LIU on the optical card.
Figure 1-4 Terminal Loopback Path on an OC-N Card
DS-N XC OC-N
Test Set
In CTC, OC-N cards with terminal loopbacks show an icon (
Figure 1-5 ). Loopback icons are not shown
on other cards in this release.
Figure 1-5 Terminal Loopback Indicator
Figure 1-6 shows a terminal loopback on a DS-N electrical card. The test-set traffic comes in on the
optical card and travels through the cross-connect card to the electrical card. The terminal loopback on the electrical card turns the signal around before it reaches the LIU and sends it back through the cross-connect card to the optical card. This test verifies that the cross-connect card and terminal circuit paths are valid, but does not test the LIU on the electrical card.
Figure 1-6 Terminal Loopback Path on a DS-N Card
DS-N XC OC-N
Test Set
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-5
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1.2 Terminal Loopbacks
1.1.2.2 ONS 15454 Card Behavior
ONS 15454 terminal port loopbacks can either terminate or bridge the signal. In the ONS 15454 system, all optical, electrical, Ethernet, MXP, TXP, and FC_MR-4 terminal loopbacks are terminated as shown
terminate it.
If a port terminates a terminal loopback signal, the signal only loops back to the originating port and is not transmitted downstream. If the port bridges a loopback signal, the signal loops back to the originating port and is also transmitted downstream.
ONS 15454 card terminal loopback bridging and terminating behaviors are listed in
Figure 1-7
Test Set
Note
AIS is injected downstream for all cards except Ethernet cards.
Table 1-2 ONS 15454 Card Terminal Loopback Behavior
Card/Port
DS-1
DS-3
DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
All OC-N cards
EC-1
G-Series Ethernet
MXP, MXPP trunk ports
MXP, MXPP client ports
TXP, MXPP trunk ports
TXP, MXPP client ports
Terminal Loopback Signal
Terminated
Bridged
Bridged
Bridged
Bridged
Terminated
1
Bridged
Terminated
Bridged
Terminated
1.
G-Series Ethernet terminal loopback is terminated and Ethernet transmission is disabled. No
AIS is inserted for Ethernet, but a TPTFAIL alarm is raised on the far-end Ethernet port.
Bridged DS-N and OC-N terminal loopback examples are shown in
Terminal Loopback on a DS-N Card with Bridged Signal
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
1-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Figure 1-8 Terminal Loopback on an OC-N Card with Bridged Signal
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
1.1.2 Terminal Loopbacks
Test Set
July 2005
G-Series Ethernet cards placed in terminal loopback have different performance monitoring behavior from other ONS 15454 cards. (For more information about performance monitoring counters, see
not stop the Tx Packets counter or the Rx Packet counters on the CTC card-level view Performance >
Statistics page from increasing. The counters can increment even though the loopbacked port has temporarily disabled the transmit laser and is dropping any received packets.
The Tx Packet statistic continues to increment because the statistic is not based on the packets transmitted by the transmit (Tx) laser but on the Tx signal inside the G-Series card. In normal in-service port operation, the Tx signal being recorded does result in the Tx laser transmitting packets, but in a terminal loopback this signal is being looped back within the G-Series card and does not result in the Tx laser transmitting packets.
The Rx Packet counter might also continue to increment when the G-Series card is in terminal loopback.
Receive (Rx) packets from any connected device are dropped and not recorded, but the internally looped-back packets follow the G-Series card’s normal receive path and register on the Rx Packet counter.
MXP and TXP card trunk and client ports have different service state behaviors and requirements from other ONS 15454 cards. The cards can simultaneously maintain different service states.
• For TXP and TXPP cards with a client-side terminal loopback, the client port is in the
OOS-MA,LPBK & MT service state and trunk port must be in IS-NR service state.
•
•
For MXP and MXPP cards with a client-side terminal loopback, the client port is in the
OOS-MA,LPBK & MT service state and the remaining client and trunk ports can be in any service state.
In MXP or TXP trunk-side terminal loopbacks, the trunk port is in the OOS-MA,LPBK & MT service state and the client ports must be in IS-NR service state for complete loopback functionality.
A terminal loopback affects all client ports because it is performed on the aggregate signal.
The loopback itself is listed in the Conditions window. For example, the window would list the
LPBKTERMINAL condition or LPBKFACILITY condition for a tested port. (The Alarms window would show AS-MT, which indicates that all alarms are suppressed on the port during loopback testing.)
In addition to the Conditions window listing, the following behaviors occur:
•
•
If an electrical or optical port is in the Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled
(OOS-MA,DSBLD) service state, it injects an AIS signal upstream and downstream.
When an electrical or optical port is placed in the Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance
(OOS-MA,MT) service state before loopback testing, the port clears the AIS signal upstream and downstream unless there is a service-affecting defect that would also cause an AIS signal to be injected. For more information about placing ports into alternate states for testing, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 11, “Change Card Settings.”
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-7
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.1.3 Hairpin Circuits
1.1.3 Hairpin Circuits
A hairpin circuit brings traffic in and out on a electrical port rather than sending the traffic onto the OC-N card. A hairpin loops back only the specific synchronous transport signal (STS) or virtual tributary (VT) circuit and does not cause an entire OC-N port to loop back, thus preventing a drop of all traffic on the
OC-N port. The hairpin allows you to test a specific STS or VT circuit on nodes running live traffic.
shows the hairpin circuit path on a DS-N card.
Figure 1-9 Hairpin Circuit Path on a DS-N Card
DS-N XC OC-N
Test Set
1.1.4 Cross-Connect Loopbacks
A cross-connect (XC) loopback tests an OC-N circuit path as it passes through the cross-connect card and loops back to the port being tested without affecting other traffic on the optical port. Cross-connect loopbacks are less invasive than terminal or facility loopbacks. Facility and terminal loopback testing and circuit verification often involve taking down the whole line; however, a cross-connect loopback allows you to create a loopback on any embedded channel at supported payloads of STS-1 granularity and higher. For example, you can loop back a single STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, etc. on an optical facility
(line) without interrupting the other STS circuits.
This test can be conducted locally or remotely through the CTC interface without on-site personnel. It takes place only on an OC-N card and tests the traffic path on that STS (or higher) circuit through the port and cross-connect card. The signal path is similar to a facility loopback.
The XC loopback breaks down the existing path and creates a new cross-connect—a hairpin—while the source of the original path is set to inject a line-side AIS-P. The loopback signal path and AIS injection are shown in
1-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
Figure 1-10 Network Element with SONET Cross-Connect Loopback Function
Equipment to perform framing, scrambling, etc.
(such as signal terminating equipment)
External signals from and to other equipment
OOS
O/E
E/O
R
T
AIS
Internal signals to and from other equipment in the NE
When creating cross-connect loopbacks, consult the following rules:
•
•
You can create a cross-connect loopback on all working or protect optical ports unless the protect port is used in a 1+1 protection group and is in working mode.
If a terminal or facility loopback exists on a port, you cannot use the cross-connect loopback.
1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
Facility (line) loopbacks, terminal (inward) loopbacks, and hairpin circuits are often used to test a circuit path through the network or to logically isolate a fault. Performing a loopback test at each point along the circuit path systematically isolates possible points of failure.
The example in this section tests an electrical circuit on a two-node bidirectional line-switched ring
(BLSR). Using a series of facility loopbacks, terminal loopbacks, hairpins, and, where appropriate, cross-connect loopbacks (on optical paths carrying electrical circuits), the path of the circuit is traced and the possible points of failure are tested and eliminated. A logical progression of eight network test procedures apply to this sample scenario:
Note These procedures apply to DS-1, DS-3, and EC-1 cards. The test sequence for your circuits will differ according to the type of circuit and network topology.
West-to-east direction (left to right):
1.
2.
3.
A facility (line) loopback on the source-node electrical port (DS-N or EC-N)
A hairpin on the source-node electrical port
An XC loopback on the destination-node OC-N STS (carrying the electrical circuit)
4.
A terminal (inward) loopback on the destination-node electrical port
East-to-west direction (right to left):
1.
2.
3.
4.
A facility (line) loopback on the destination-node electrical port
A hairpin on the destination-node electrical port
An XC loopback on the source-node OC-N STS (carrying the electrical circuit)
A terminal (inward) loopback on the source-node electrical port
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-9
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
Note Facility, hairpin, and terminal loopback tests require on-site personnel.
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port
(West to East)
The facility (line) loopback test is performed on the node source electrical port in the network circuit; in this example, the DS-N port in the source node. Completing a successful facility (line) loopback on this port isolates the cabling, the electrical card, and the EIA as possible failure points.
shows an example of a facility loopback on a source DS-N port.
Figure 1-11 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source DS-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting. To protect traffic, apply a lockout or
Force switch to the target loopback port. For more information about these operations, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Note DS-3 facility (line) loopbacks do not transmit an AIS condition in the direction away from the loopback.
Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Depending upon your card type, complete the
“Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS-1,
DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port” procedure on page 1-10 or the
Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port” procedure on page 1-11 , then test and clear the
loopbacks as instructed.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing.
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the EIA connectors or DSx panel for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
1-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-168
to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 9 Complete the
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Facility Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Depending upon the card type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the Electrical Cabling” procedure on page 1-13 .
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
This procedure applies to DS3E, DS3XM-6, and DS3XM-12 cards. It does not utilize the DS3XM card
FEAC loopback functions. For this information, refer to the
“1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or
DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks” section on page 1-45
.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing.
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the EIA connectors or DSx panel for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
For any of these cards, click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005 1-11
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
For the DS3 tab, choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested. For the DS1 tab, no state selection is necessary unless the DS-1 has been placed in service. The loopback/send code cannot be selected for a
DS-1 if the derived state is OOS,DSBLD.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-168
to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 9
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Facility Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
For any of these cards, click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the Electrical Cabling” procedure on page 1-13
.
1-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
Test the Electrical Cabling
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Replace the suspected bad cabling (the cables from the test set to the DSx panel or the EIA ports) with a known-good cable. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install
Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If a known-good cable is not available, test the suspected bad cable with a test set. Remove the suspected bad cable from the DSx panel or the EIA and connect the cable to the Tx and Rx terminals of the test set. Run traffic to determine whether the cable is good or defective.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good cable installed. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective cable.
Replace the defective cable.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-13 .
Test the Electrical Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the Return Materials Authorization (RMA) process. Contact Cisco Technical
Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-13
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port (West to East)
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the EIA” procedure on page 1-14
.
Test the EIA
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Remove and reinstall the EIA to ensure a proper seating: a.
Remove the lower backplane cover. Loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it away from the shelf assembly.
b.
c.
Loosen the nine perimeter screws that hold the EIA panel in place.
Lift the EIA panel by the bottom to remove it from the shelf assembly.
d.
Follow the installation procedure for the appropriate EIA. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 1, “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable,” for instructions.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with known-good cabling, a known-good card, and the reinstalled EIA. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably an improperly seated
EIA, and you can proceed to
. If the problem persists and the EIA is not shown to be improperly seated, proceed to
.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. Proceed to
.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably a defective EIA. Return the defective EIA to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Replace the faulty EIA by completing the
“Replace the Electrical Interface Assembly” procedure on page 2-278
.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with known-good cabling, a known-good card, and the replacement EIA. If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, repeat all of the facility loopback procedures.
1-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to East)
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Step 14
Step 15
Step 16
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective EIA. Clear the facility
(line) loopback by clicking the Maintenance > Loopback tab, Maintenance > DS1 tab, or
Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to East)
The hairpin test is performed on the cross-connect card in the network circuit. A hairpin circuit uses the same port for both source and destination. Completing a successful hairpin through the port isolates the possibility that the cross-connect card is the cause of the faulty circuit.
shows an example of a hairpin loopback on a source-node port.
Figure 1-12 Hairpin on a Source-Node Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
Note The ONS 15454 does not support simplex operation on the XC10G cross-connect card. Two cross-connect cards of the same type must be installed for each node.
Complete the
“Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Source-Node Electrical Port” procedure on page 1-15 .
Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Source-Node Electrical Port
Step 1 Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
If you just completed the “1.2.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source Electrical Port
(West to East)” procedure on page 1-10
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the electrical port in the source node.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the DS-N port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-15
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to East)
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the hairpin circuit on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
e.
f.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as Hairpin1.
Choose the Size, such as STS-1.
g.
h.
Uncheck the Bidirectional check box. Leave the default values for State, SD Threshold, and
SF Threshold.
Click Next .
i.
j.
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected. Leave Use Secondary Source unchecked.
Click Next .
k.
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box. Leave Use Secondary Destination unchecked.
Click Next .
l.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab and that the Dir column describes it as a one-way circuit.
Complete the “Test and Delete the Electrical Port Hairpin Circuit” procedure on page 1-16
.
Test and Delete the Electrical Port Hairpin Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the hairpin circuit. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
Complete the “Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-17 .
1-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to East)
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Note Two XC10G cross-connect cards (active and standby) must be in use on a node to use this procedure.
Step 1
Step 2
Perform a reset on the standby XC10G cross-connect card to make it the active card: a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
Position the cursor over the standby cross-connect card.
Right-click and choose RESET CARD .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards before you retest the loopback circuit:
Caution Cross-connect side switches are service-affecting. Any live traffic on any card in the node endures a hit of up to 50 ms. b.
c.
d.
a.
Determine the standby XC10G cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY
LED is green.
In the node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active XC10G cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
The test traffic now travels through the alternate cross-connect card.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, assume the cross-connect card is not causing the problem. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
To confirm a defective original cross-connect card, complete the
Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-18 .
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-17
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East) Carrying an Electrical Signal
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Step 1 Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the XC10G cross-connect cards: a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
In node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
From the Cross-Connect Cards menu, choose Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) and proceed to
. If the test does not indicate a faulty circuit, proceed to
.
Complete the
“Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the
defective card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the cross-connect card might have had a temporary problem that was cleared by the side switch. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
Complete the “1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East)
Carrying an Electrical Signal” procedure on page 1-18
.
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East)
Carrying an Electrical Signal
The XC loopback tests whether any problem exists on the circuit’s OC-N span, isolating this span from others present on the card. The loopback occurs on the XC10G cross-connect card in a network circuit.
shows an example of an XC loopback on a destination OC-N port. The traffic pattern looks similar to a terminal loopback but traffic is only carried on one STS instead of affecting the entire port.
Note The XC loopback on an OC-N card does not affect traffic on other circuits.
1-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East) Carrying an Electrical Signal
Note You can perform an XC loopback on either the circuit source working or the protect port of a 1+1 protection group.
Figure 1-13 XC Loopback on a Destination OC-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
Create the XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OCN STS
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4 a.
If you just completed the “1.2.2 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Source-Node Electrical Port (West to
East)” procedure on page 1-15 , leave the optical test set hooked up to the destination-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the destination port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to put the circuit being tested out of service: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Click the circuit and then click
In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Choose OOS,MT
Click Apply .
Edit .
from the Target Circuit Admin State drop-down list.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Use CTC to set up the XC loopback on the circuit being tested:
In node view, double-click the OC-N card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
d.
e.
a.
b.
c.
Click the check box in the
Check Apply .
Click Yes
XC Loopback
in the confirmation dialog box.
column for the port being tested.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-19
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East) Carrying an Electrical Signal
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Step 5
Complete the “Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-20
.
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the cross-connect. Clear the
XC loopback: a.
b.
c.
d.
In card view, click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
Uncheck the check box in the
Click Apply .
Click Yes
XC Loopback
in the confirmation dialog box.
column for the circuit being tested.
Complete the “Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-20 .
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Step 1
Step 2
Perform a reset on the standby cross-connect card: a.
b.
c.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
Position the cursor over the standby cross-connect card.
Right-click and choose RESET CARD . d.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards before you retest the loopback circuit:
Caution Cross-connect side switches are service-affecting. Any live traffic on any card in the node endures a hit of up to 50 ms. b.
c.
d.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
In the node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Card tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
1-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.3 Perform an XC Loopback on a Destination-Node OC-N STS (West to East) Carrying an Electrical Signal
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
The test traffic now travels through the alternate cross-connect card.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, assume the cross-connect card is not causing the problem. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
e.
Confirm that the XC loopback circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem might be a defective cross-connect card.
To confirm a defective original cross-connect card, complete the
Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-21 .
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
July 2005
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N and XC10G cards.
Step 1 Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green. b.
c.
d.
In node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Card tabs.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) and proceed to
Step 4 . If the circuit is not shown to be faulty and the card is not shown to be defective, you are
finished with testing.
Complete the “Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the defective cross-connect card and perform
.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-21
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
Step 5
Step 6
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the cross-connect card might have had a temporary problem that was cleared by the side switch. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
Click
Circuits
Delete .
tab.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
If the tests indicate further problems, go to the
“1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a
Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)” procedure on page 1-22
.
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port
Port (West to East)
The terminal (inward) loopback test is performed on the destination-node electrical port in the circuit, such as a destination-node DS-N port or EC-1 port. You create a bidirectional circuit that starts on the source-node electrical port and loops back on the destination-node electrical port. Then you proceed with the terminal loopback test. Completing a successful terminal loopback to a destination-node
a terminal loopback on a destination DS-N port.
Figure 1-14 Terminal (Inward) Loopback to a Destination DS-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting. To protect traffic, apply a lockout or
Force switch to the target loopback port. For more information about these operations, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit an AIS condition in the direction away from the loopback.
Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Depending upon your card type, complete the
“Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination
DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port” procedure on page 1-23 or the
Loopback on a Destination DS-3E or DS3XM Port” procedure on page 1-24 . Then test and clear the
loopback as instructed.
1-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 1
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
b.
If you just completed the
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the electrical port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as DS1toDS2.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
c.
d.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Note
It is normal for the “LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-172 to appear during
a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
July 2005
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit a DS-3 AIS (see the
“AIS” condition on page 2-30 ) in
the direction away from the loopback. Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Step 13 Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
• Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
b.
c.
d.
• Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as a DS-N card in the destination node.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-23
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
Step 14 e.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Destination Port Terminal
Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-24
.
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Destination Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Destination Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-26 .
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination DS-3E or DS3XM Port
Step 1
Step 2
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
If you just completed the
up to the electrical port in the source node. b.
c.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the electrical port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
1-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as DS1toDS3.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
d.
Click Next .
e.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Note
It is normal for the “LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-172 to appear during
a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit a DS-3 AIS (see the
“AIS” condition on page 2-30 ) in
the direction away from the loopback. Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Step 12 Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
• Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
b.
c.
• Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the DS-N card in the destination node.
Click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
d.
e.
f.
g.
For the DS3 tab, choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested. For the DS1 tab, no state selection is necessary unless the DS-1 has been placed in service. The loopback/send code cannot be selected for a DS-1 if the derived state is OOS,DSBLD.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-25
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical Port Port (West to East)
Step 13
Test and Clear the DS-3E or DS3XM Destination Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Destination Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-26 .
Test the Destination Electrical Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
1-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 4
Step 5
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the defective electrical card.
Clear the terminal (inward) loopback state on the port: a.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
b.
Depending upon the card type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab, Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 6
Step 7 c.
d.
e.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Delete the terminal (inward) loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to
West)” procedure on page 1-27 .
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port
(East to West)
The facility (line) loopback test is performed on the destination-node electrical port in the network circuit. Completing a successful facility (line) loopback on this port isolates the cabling, the electrical card, and the EIA as possible failure points.
Figure 1-15 shows an example of a facility loopback on a
destination DS-N port.
Figure 1-15 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Destination DS-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N DS-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N DS-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-27
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting. To protect traffic, apply a lockout or
Force switch to the target loopback port. For basic instructions, refer to the
Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information about these operations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Note DS-3 facility (line) loopbacks do not transmit an AIS condition in the direction away from the loopback.
Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Depending upon your card type, complete the
“Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Destination
DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port” procedure on page 1-28 or the
(Line) Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port” procedure on page 1-29
. Then test and clear the loopback as instructed.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Destination DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
If you just completed the
“1.2.4 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Destination Electrical
Port Port (West to East)” procedure on page 1-22
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the destination-node port. b.
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the EIA connectors or DSx panel for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for a
“LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-168
to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 9 Complete the
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Facility Loopback Circuit
Step 1 If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-28 July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the Electrical Cabling” procedure on page 1-30 .
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
This procedure applies to DS3E, DS3XM-6, and DS3XM-12 cards. It does not utilize the DS3XM card
FEAC loopback functions. For this information, refer to the
“1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or
DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks” section on page 1-45
.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing.
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the EIA connectors or DSx panel for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port. Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
For any of these cards, click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
For the DS3 tab, choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested. For the DS1 tab, no state selection is necessary unless the DS-1 has been placed in service. The loopback/send code cannot be selected for a
DS-1 if the derived state is OOS,DSBLD.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-168
to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 8 Complete the
“Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Facility Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-30
.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-29
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Facility Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
For any of these cards, click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the Electrical Cabling” procedure on page 1-30
.
Test the Electrical Cabling
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Replace the suspected bad cabling (the cables from the test set to the DSx panel or the EIA ports) with a known-good cable. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install
Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If a known-good cable is not available, test the suspected bad cable with a test set. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.) Remove the suspected bad cable from the DSx panel or the EIA and connect the cable to the Tx and Rx terminals of the test set. Run traffic to determine whether the cable is good or defective.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good cable installed. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective cable.
Replace the defective cable.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 9 Complete the
“Test the Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-31 .
Test the Electrical Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for basic procedures. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the EIA” procedure on page 1-31 .
Test the EIA
Step 1 Remove and reinstall the EIA to ensure a proper seating: a.
Remove the lower backplane cover. Loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it away from the shelf assembly.
b.
c.
d.
Loosen the nine perimeter screws that hold the EIA panel in place.
Lift the EIA panel by the bottom to remove it from the shelf assembly.
Follow the installation procedure for the appropriate EIA. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 1, “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable,” for instructions.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-31
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 2
Step 3
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with known-good cabling, a known-good card, and the reinstalled EIA. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably an improperly seated
EIA, and you can proceed to
. If the problem persists and the EIA is not shown to be improperly seated, proceed to
.
In card view for the electrical card, depending upon the type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab,
Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Step 14
Step 15
Step 16
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably a defective EIA. Return the defective EIA to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Replace the faulty EIA. Complete the
“Replace the Electrical Interface Assembly” procedure on page 2-278
.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with known-good cabling, a known-good card, and the replacement EIA. If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, repeat all of the facility loopback procedures.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective EIA. Clear the facility
(line) loopback by clicking the Maintenance > Loopback tab, Maintenance > DS1 tab, or
Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to
West)
The hairpin test is performed on the cross-connect card in the network circuit. A hairpin circuit uses the same port for both source and destination. Completing a successful hairpin through the card isolates the possibility that the cross-connect card is the cause of the faulty circuit.
of a hairpin loopback on a destination-node port.
1-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Figure 1-16 Hairpin on a Destination-Node DS-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N DS-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
DS-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Note The ONS 15454 does not support simplex operation on the XC10G cross-connect card. Two cross-connect cards of the same type must be installed for each node.
Complete the
“Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Destination-Node Port” procedure on page 1-33
.
Create the Hairpin Circuit on the Destination-Node Port
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
If you just completed the “1.2.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node
Electrical Port (East to West)” procedure on page 1-27
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the electrical port in the destination node.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the electrical port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the hairpin circuit on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
e.
f.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as Hairpin1.
Choose the Size, such as STS-1.
g.
h.
Uncheck the Bidirectional check box. Leave the default values for State, SD Threshold, and
SF Threshold.
Click Next .
i.
j.
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected. Leave Use Secondary Source unchecked.
Click Next .
k.
l.
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box. Leave Use Secondary Destination unchecked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-33
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 4
Step 5
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab and that the Dir column describes it as a one-way circuit.
Complete the “Test and Delete the Electrical Hairpin Circuit” procedure on page 1-34 .
Test and Delete the Electrical Hairpin Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the hairpin circuit. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
Complete the “Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-34 .
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Note Two XC10G cross-connect cards (active and standby) must be in use on a node to use this procedure.
Step 1
Step 2
Perform a reset on the standby XC10G cross-connect card to make it the active card: a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green. b.
c.
d.
Position the cursor over the standby cross-connect card.
Right-click and choose RESET CARD .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards before you retest the loopback circuit:
Caution Cross-connect side switches are service-affecting. Any live traffic on any card in the node endures a hit of up to 50 ms. a.
Determine the standby XC10G cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY
LED is green.
1-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.6 Perform a Hairpin Test on a Destination-Node Electrical Port (East to West) b.
c.
d.
In the node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active XC10G cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
The test traffic now travels through the alternate cross-connect card.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, assume the cross-connect card is not causing the problem. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
d.
e.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
To confirm a defective original cross-connect card, complete the
Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-35 .
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Step 1 Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the XC10G cross-connect cards: a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
In node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
From the Cross-Connect Cards menu, choose
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Switch .
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) and proceed to
Step 4 . If the test does not indicate a faulty circuit, proceed to Step 5 .
Complete the “Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the defective cross-connect card.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-35
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit
Step 5
Step 6
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the cross-connect card might have had a temporary problem that was cleared by the side switch. Clear the hairpin circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the
Choose the hairpin circuit being tested.
Click
Circuits
Delete .
tab.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
e.
Confirm that the hairpin circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list.
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West)
Carrying an Electrical Circuit
The XC loopback tests whether any problem exists on the circuit’s OC-N span, isolating this span from others present on the card. It also eliminates the cross-connect card as the source of trouble for a faulty circuit. The loopback occurs on the XC10G cross-connect card in a network circuit.
shows an example of an XC loopback on a source OC-N port.
Note The XC loopback on an OC-N card does not affect traffic on other circuits.
Note You can perform an XC loopback on either the circuit source working or the protect port of a 1+1 protection group.
Figure 1-17
Test Set
XC Loopback on a Source OC-N Port
OC-Nx XC OC-Ny
1-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit
Create the XC Loopback on the Source OC-N Port Carrying an Electrical Circuit
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5 a.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to put the circuit being tested out of service: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Click the circuit and then click
In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Choose OOS,MT
Click Apply .
Edit .
from the Target Circuit Admin State drop-down list.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Use CTC to set up the XC loopback on the circuit being tested: a.
b.
c.
d.
In node view, double-click the OC-N card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
Check the XC Loopback
Click Apply .
column check box for the port being tested.
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-37
.
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the cross-connect. Clear the
XC loopback: a.
In card view, click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-37
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit
Step 4 b.
c.
d.
Uncheck the check box in the
Click Apply .
Click Yes
XC Loopback
in the confirmation dialog box.
column for the circuit being tested.
Complete the “Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-38 .
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Step 1
Step 2
Perform a reset on the standby cross-connect card: a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green. b.
c.
Position the cursor over the standby cross-connect card.
Right-click and choose RESET CARD . d.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards before you retest the loopback circuit:
Caution Cross-connect side switches are service-affecting. Any live traffic on any card in the node endures a hit of up to 50 ms. b.
c.
d.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
In the node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 3
Step 4
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
The test traffic now travels through the alternate cross-connect card.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, assume the cross-connect card is not causing the problem. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
1-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit
Step 5 e.
Confirm that the XC loopback circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem might be a defective cross-connect card.
To confirm a defective original cross-connect card, complete the
Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-39 .
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N and XC10G cards.
Step 1 Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green. b.
c.
d.
In node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) and proceed to
Step 4 . If the circuit is not shown to be faulty and the card is not shown to be defective, you are
finished with testing.
Complete the “Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the defective cross-connect card. Perform
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the cross-connect card might have had a temporary problem that was cleared by the side switch. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
d.
e.
b.
c.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
If the problem is not resolved, go to the
“1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a
Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)” section on page 1-40
.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-39
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port
(East to West)
The terminal (inward) loopback test is performed on the source-node electrical port in the circuit, such as a source-node DS-N port or EC-1 port. You first create a bidirectional circuit that starts on the destination-node electrical port and loops back on the source-node electrical port. Then you proceed with the terminal loopback test. Completing a successful terminal loopback to a source-node electrical port verifies that the circuit is good to the source electrical port.
Figure 1-18 shows an example of a
terminal loopback on a source DS-N port.
Figure 1-18 Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS-N Port
DS-N
Source
ONS Node
XC DS-N DS-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC DS-N DS-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC DS-N
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting. To protect traffic, apply a lockout or
Force switch to the target loopback port. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and
Clearing” section on page 2-260 for basic instructions. For more information about these operations,
refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit an AIS condition in the direction away from the loopback.
Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Depending upon your card type, complete the
“Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source
DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port” procedure on page 1-40 or the
(Inward) Loopback on a Source DS3E or DS3XM Port” procedure on page 1-42
. Then test and clear the loopback as instructed.
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS-1, DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
If you just completed the
“1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to
West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit” procedure on page 1-36
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the DS-N port in the source node. b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the DS-N port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
1-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as DS1toDS4.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
c.
Click Next .
d.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Note
It is normal for the “LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-172 to appear during
a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit a DS-3 AIS (see the
“AIS” condition on page 2-30 ) in
the direction away from the loopback. Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Step 13
Step 14
Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
• Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
b.
c.
d.
• Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the DS-N card in the destination node.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
f.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
g.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-41
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Test and Clear the DS-3, DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port Terminal Loopback
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Source Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-44 .
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source DS3E or DS3XM Port
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 1
Step 9
Connect an electrical test set to the port you are testing: a.
b.
If you just completed the
“1.2.7 Perform an XC Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N STS (East to
West) Carrying an Electrical Circuit” procedure on page 1-36
, leave the electrical test set hooked up to the DS-N port in the source node.
If you are starting the current procedure without the electrical test set hooked up to the DS-N port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the electrical test set to the DSx panel or the EIA connectors for the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
c.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as DS1toDS5.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
1-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 10
Step 11
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
d.
e.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Finish .
Note
It is normal for the “LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-172 to appear during
a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Note DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not transmit a DS-3 AIS (see the
“AIS” condition on page 2-30 ) in
the direction away from the loopback. Instead of a DS-3 AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Step 12 Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the DS-N card in the destination node.
Click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 13
Step 14
For the DS3 tab, choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the port being tested. For the DS1 tab, no state selection is necessary unless the DS-1 has been placed in service. The loopback/send code cannot be selected for a
DS-1 if the derived state is OOS,DSBLD.
d.
e.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-43
.
Test and Clear the DS3E or DS3XM Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-43
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.2.8 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Electrical Port (East to West)
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
Depending upon the card type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab, Maintenance > DS1 tab, or
Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . c.
d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Source Electrical Card” procedure on page 1-44 .
Test the Source Electrical Card
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
card.
Clear the terminal (inward) loopback state on the port: a.
b.
Double-click the electrical card in the destination node with the terminal loopback.
Depending upon the card type, click the Maintenance > Loopback tab, Maintenance > DS1 tab, or Maintenance > DS3 tab.
Note The DS-3 Admin State is the basis of the DS-1 Derived State. c.
d.
e.
f.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks
Step 6 Delete the terminal (inward) loopback circuit: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
c.
Click Delete .
All tests for this circuit are completed.
1.3 Troubleshooting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical
Paths With FEAC Loopbacks
The DS3XM-6 card and DS3XM-12 cards support FEAC functions that are not available on basic DS-3 cards. Click the DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Maintenance > DS1 tab at the card view to reveal the two
additional function columns. Figure 1-19
shows the DS3 subtab and the additional Send Code and
Inhibit FE Lbk function columns.
Figure 1-19 Accessing FEAC Functions on the DS3XM-6 Card
July 2005
The “far end” in FEAC refers to the equipment connected to the DS3XM card and not to the far end of a circuit. In
Figure 1-20 , if a DS3XM-6 (near-end) port is configured to send a line loop code, the code
will be sent to the connected test set, not the DS3XM-6 (far-end) port.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-45
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.3.1 FEAC Send Code
Figure 1-20
Test Set
Diagram of FEAC Circuit
Node A
Tx
Rx
DS3XM
(Near End)
Tx
Rx
OC48
OC48
Ring
Rx
Tx
OC48
Node B
Tx
Rx
DS3XM
(Far End)
CPE
1.3.1 FEAC Send Code
The Send Code column on the DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card Maintenance tab only applies to
OOS-MA,MT ports configured for CBIT framing. The column lets a user select No Code (the default) or line loop code. Selecting Line Loop Code inserts a line loop activate FEAC in the CBIT overhead transmitting to the connected facility (line). This code initiates a loopback from the facility to the
ONS 15454. Selecting No Code sends a line-loop-deactivate FEAC code to the connected equipment, which will remove the loopback. You can also insert a FEAC for the 28 individual DS-1 circuits transmuxed into a DS-3 circuit.
1.3.2 DS-3E and DS3i-N-12 Inhibit Loopback
DS-3E and DS-3i-N-12 cards respond to (but do not send) DS-3-level FEAC codes. You can inhibit
FEAC response on ports for these cards using the Inhibit Lbk check box on their Maintenance windows.
1.3.3 DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12 Inhibit FEAC Loopback
DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12 ports and transmuxed DS-1 circuits initiate loopbacks when they receive
FEAC line loop codes. If the Inhibit FE Lbk check box is checked for a DS-3 port, that port ignores any
FEAC line loop codes it receives and will not loop back (return them). Only DS-3 ports can be configured to inhibit FEAC loopback responses; individual DS-1 ports (accessed on the DS3XM DS1 tab) cannot inhibit their responses. If you inhibit a DS-3 port’s far end loopback response, this DS-3 port and the DS-1 lines it contains are not restricted from terminal (inward) or facility (line) loopbacks.
1.3.4 FEAC Alarms
When an ONS 15454 port receives an activation code for a FEAC loopback, it raises the
“LPBKDS1FEAC” condition on page 2-166
or the
“LPBKDS3FEAC” condition on page 2-166 . The
condition clears when the port receives the command to deactivate the FEAC loopback. If a node sends a FEAC loopback command to the far end, the sending node raises a
“LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD” condition on page 2-166
or the
“LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD” condition on page 2-167 for the near-end port.
1-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
Facility (line) loopbacks, terminal (inward) loopbacks, and cross-connect loopback circuits are often used together to test the circuit path through the network or to logically isolate a fault. Performing a loopback test at each point along the circuit path systematically isolates possible points of failure.
The procedures in this section apply to OC-N cards. (For instructions on G-Series Ethernet cards, go to the
“1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-69 . For
information about troubleshooting MXP and TXP cards, go to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .) The example in this section tests an
OC-N circuit on a three-node BLSR. Using a series of facility, cross-connect, and terminal (inward) loopbacks, the example scenario traces the circuit path, tests the possible failure points, and eliminates them. The logical progression contains seven network test procedures:
Note The test sequence for your circuits will differ according to the type of circuit and network topology.
5.
6.
7.
3.
4.
1.
2.
A facility (line) loopback on the source-node OC-N port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the source-node OC-N port
A cross-connect loopback on the source OC-N port
A facility (line) loopback on the intermediate-node OC-N port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the intermediate-node OC-N port
A facility (line) loopback on the destination-node OC-N port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the destination-node OC-N port
Note Facility and terminal loopback tests require on-site personnel.
1.4.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
The facility (line) loopback test is performed on the node source port in the network circuit. In the testing situation used in this example, the source OC-N port in the source node. Completing a successful facility
(line) loopback on this port isolates the OC-N port as a possible failure point.
example of a facility loopback on a circuit source OC-N port.
Figure 1-21 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
July 2005
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-47
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
Complete the “Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source Optical Port” procedure on page 1-48
.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing.
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port. Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (OCN)” condition on page 2-171
or the
(G1000)” condition on page 2-169 to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when
you remove the loopback.
Step 8
Complete the “Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-48
.
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback: a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1-48
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
Step 4 Complete the
“Test the OC-N Card” procedure on page 1-49
.
Test the OC-N Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback:
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-49 .
1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
The terminal (inward) loopback test is performed on the source-node optical port. For the circuit in this example, it is the source OC-N port in the source node. You first create a bidirectional circuit that starts on the node destination optical port and loops back on the node source optical port. You then proceed with the terminal loopback test. Completing a successful terminal loopback to a node source port verifies
source OC-N port.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-49
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
Figure 1-22 Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
OC-N cards placed in terminal loopback state display an icon in the CTC graphical user interface (GUI), shown in
Figure 1-23 Terminal Loopback Indicator
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2 a.
If you just completed the
“1.4.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the OC-N port in the source node.
b.
c.
d.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.) c.
Use CTC to set up the terminal (inward) loopback on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
e.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
OCN1toOCN2.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
1-50
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port
Step 3 f.
g.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
h.
i.
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
j.
k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)” condition on page 2-175 to appear during a
loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 4
Step 5
Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
b.
c.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the destination OC-N card in the source node.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
d.
e.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-51 .
Test and Clear the Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback state on the port: a.
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
e.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-51
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Step 4
Step 5
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click
Circuits
Delete .
tab.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Optical Card” procedure on page 1-52 .
Test the Optical Card
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port before testing the next segment of the network circuit path: a.
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
e.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit before testing the next segment of the network circuit path: a.
b.
c.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
d.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port” procedure on page 1-52
.
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Note This procedure is only performed on OC-N cards and tests the XC10G circuit connection.
1-52
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Note You can perform an XC loopback on either the circuit source working or the protect port of a 1+1 protection group.
The XC loopback test occurs on the XC10G cross-connect card in a network circuit. Completing a successful XC loopback from an OC-N card through the cross-connect card eliminates the cross-connect card as the source of trouble for a faulty circuit.
shows an example of an XC loopback path on a source OC-N port.
Figure 1-24
Test Set
XC Loopback on a Source OC-N Port
OC-Nx XC OC-Ny
Complete the
“Create the XC Loopback on the Source-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-53
.
Create the XC Loopback on the Source-Node Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4 a.
If you just completed the
“1.4.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical
Port” procedure on page 1-49 , leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to put the circuit being tested out of service: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Click the circuit and then click
In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Choose OOS,MT
Click Apply .
Edit .
from the Target Circuit Admin State drop-down list.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Use CTC to set up the XC loopback on the circuit being tested: a.
b.
In node view, double-click the OC-N card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-53
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Step 5 c.
d.
e.
Click the check box in the
Click Apply .
Click Yes
XC Loopback
in the confirmation dialog box.
column for the port being tested.
Complete the “Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-54
.
Test and Clear the XC Loopback Circuit
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the cross-connect. Clear the
XC loopback: a.
In card view, click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tab.
b.
c.
Uncheck the check box in the XC Loopback column for the circuit being tested.
Click Apply .
d.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-54 .
Test the Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Note This procedure is performed only on cross-connect cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Perform a reset on the standby cross-connect card: a.
b.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
Position the cursor over the standby cross-connect card.
c.
d.
Right-click and choose RESET CARD .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards before you retest the loopback circuit:
1-54
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.3 Perform an XC Loopback on the Source Optical Port
Caution Cross-connect side switches are service-affecting. Any live traffic on any card in the node endures a hit of up to 50 ms. b.
c.
d.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green.
In the node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
The test traffic now travels through the alternate cross-connect card.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, assume the cross-connect card is not causing the problem. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
c.
d.
e.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Confirm that the XC loopback circuit is deleted from the Circuits tab list. If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem might be a defective cross-connect card.
To confirm a defective original cross-connect card, complete the
Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 1-55 .
Retest the Original XC10G Cross-Connect Card
Note This procedure is performed only on OC-N and XC10G cards.
Step 1 Initiate an external switching command (side switch) on the cross-connect cards.
a.
Determine the standby cross-connect card. On both the physical node and the CTC node view window, the standby cross-connect ACT/SBY LED is amber and the active card ACT/SBY LED is green. b.
c.
d.
In node view, select the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tab.
In the Cross-Connect Cards area, click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-55
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Note After the active cross-connect goes into standby mode, the original standby card becomes active and its ACT/SBY LED turns green. The former active card becomes standby and its
ACT/SBY LED turns amber.
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem is probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) and proceed to
. If the circuit is not shown to be faulty and the card is not shown to be defective, you are finished with testing.
Complete the
“Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the
defective card. Perform
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the cross-connect card might have had a temporary problem that was cleared by the side switch. Clear the XC loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the XC loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
Performing the facility (line) loopback test on an intermediate port isolates whether this node is causing
circuit failure. In the situation shown in Figure 1-25
, the test is being performed on an intermediate
OC-N port.
Figure 1-25 Facility (Line) Loopback Path to an Intermediate-Node OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
1-56
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4 a.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the facility (line) loopback on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
e.
f.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
OCN1toOCN3.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
g.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
h.
i.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
j.
k.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Finish .
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (OCN)” condition on page 2-171
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5 Create the facility (line) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the intermediate node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
In node view, double-click the intermediate-node card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-57
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Optical Port
Step 6 e.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-58
.
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility (line) loopback.
Clear the facility loopback from the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
c.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility (line) loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Optical Card” procedure on page 1-58 .
Test the Optical Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-58 July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
c.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical
Ports
In the next troubleshooting test, you perform a terminal loopback on the intermediate-node port to isolate whether the destination port is causing circuit trouble. In the example situation in
terminal loopback is performed on an intermediate optical port in the circuit. You first create a bidirectional circuit that originates on the source-node optical port and loops back on the intermediate-node port. You then proceed with the terminal loopback test. If you successfully complete a terminal loopback on the node, this node is excluded from possible sources of circuit trouble.
Figure 1-26 Terminal Loopback Path to an Intermediate-Node OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
OC-N cards placed in facility loopback state display an icon, shown in
.
Figure 1-27 Facility Loopback Indicator
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-59
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4 a.
If you just completed the
“1.4.4 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node
Optical Port” section on page 1-56
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the terminal (inward) loopback on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
e.
f.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
OCN1toOCN4.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
g.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
h.
i.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
j.
k.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list and that it is described in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)” condition on page 2-175
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
1-60
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Optical Ports
Step 5
Step 6
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the intermediate node:
• Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
b.
c.
d.
• Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
f.
g.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-61
.
Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port: a.
b.
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
c.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“Test the Optical Card” procedure on page 1-62
.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-61
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Test the Optical Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
c.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-62
.
1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
You perform a facility (line) loopback test at the destination port to determine whether this local port is the source of circuit trouble. The example in
shows a facility loopback being performed on a destination-node OC-N port.
1-62
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Figure 1-28 Facility (Line) Loopback Path to a Destination-Node OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
“Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-63
.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
If you just completed the “1.4.5 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node
Optical Ports” section on page 1-59
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the hairpin circuit on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
e.
f.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
OCN1toOCN5.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
g.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
h.
i.
j.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-63
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 4 k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (OCN)” condition on page 2-171 to appear during a
loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the facility (line) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node: b.
c.
d.
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
OK .
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
e.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the Optical Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-64 .
Test and Clear the Optical Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
b.
c.
d.
d.
e.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility (line) loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
1-64
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 5 Complete the
“Test the Optical Card” procedure on page 1-65
.
Test the Optical Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback on the port:
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility loopback circuit: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
c.
d.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-65
.
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
The terminal loopback at the destination-node port is the final local hardware error elimination in the circuit troubleshooting process. If this test is completed successfully, you have verified that the circuit is good up to the destination port. The example in
Figure 1-29 shows a terminal loopback on an
intermediate-node destination OC-N port.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-65
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Figure 1-29 Terminal Loopback Path to a Destination-Node OC-N Port
OC-N
Source
ONS Node
XC OC-N OC-N
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Test Set
OC-N
Destination
ONS Node
XC OC-N
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
If you just completed the
“1.4.6 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the terminal loopback on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
c.
d.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
e.
f.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
OCN1toOCN6.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
g.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
h.
i.
j.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
1-66
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 4 k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)” condition on page 2-175 to appear during a
loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node: b.
c.
d.
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
OK .
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
e.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-67
.
Test and Clear the Optical Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port: a.
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-67
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.4.7 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Optical Port
Step 5
Step 6 c.
d.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
The entire circuit path has now passed its comprehensive series of loopback tests. This circuit qualifies to carry live traffic.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem might be a faulty card.
Complete the “Test the Optical Card” procedure on page 1-68 .
Test the Optical Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port: a.
b.
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tab.
c.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
The entire circuit path has now passed its comprehensive series of loopback tests. This circuit qualifies to carry live traffic.
1-68
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks
Facility (line) loopbacks, terminal (inward) loopbacks, and cross-connect loopback circuits are often used together to test the circuit path through the network or to logically isolate a fault. Performing a loopback test at each point along the circuit path systematically isolates possible points of failure.
You can use these procedures on G-Series Ethernet cards (G1000-2) and CE_100T-8 cards but not on
E-Series or ML-Series Ethernet cards. The example in this section tests a G1000 circuit on a three-node
BLSR. Using a series of facility (line) loopbacks and terminal (inward) loopbacks, the example scenario traces the circuit path, tests the possible failure points, and eliminates them. The logical progression contains six network test procedures:
Note The test sequence for your circuits will differ according to the type of circuit and network topology.
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
6.
A facility (line) loopback on the source-node Ethernet port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the source-node Ethernet port
A facility (line) loopback on the intermediate-node Ethernet port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the intermediate-node Ethernet port
A facility (line) loopback on the destination-node Ethernet port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the destination-node Ethernet port
Note Facility and terminal loopback tests require on-site personnel.
1.5.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
The facility (line) loopback test is performed on the node source port in the network circuit. In the testing situation used in this example, the source G1000 port in the source node. Completing a successful facility (line) loopback on this port isolates the G1000 port as a possible failure point.
shows an example of a facility loopback on a circuit source Ethernet port.
Note Facility (line) loopbacks are not available for Release 4.1 or earlier G-Series cards.
Figure 1-30 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source Ethernet Port
Ethernet
Source
ONS Node
XC
Ethernet Ethernet
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC
Ethernet Ethernet
Destination
ONS Node
XC
Ethernet
Test Set
July 2005
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-69
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source-Node Ethernet Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing.
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (G1000)” condition on page 2-169 to appear during
loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 9
Complete the “Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-70
.
Test and Clear the Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1-70
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4 Complete the
“Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-71
.
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback:
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port” procedure on page 1-71 .
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
The terminal (inward) loopback test is performed on the node source Ethernet port. For the circuit in this example, it is the source G1000 port in the source node. You first create a bidirectional circuit that starts on the node destination G1000 port and loops back on the node source G1000 port.You then proceed with the terminal loopback test. Completing a successful terminal loopback to a node source port verifies
that the circuit is good to the source port. Figure 1-31 shows terminal loopback on a G-Series port.
Note Terminal (inward) loopbacks are not available for R4.0 and earlier G-Series cards.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-71
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Figure 1-31 Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a G-Series Port
4 ports
GigE
Processor Subsystem
GBIC 1
GBIC 2
GBIC 3
GBIC 4
SERDES
SERDES
SERDES
SERDES
GigE
MAC
GigE
MAC
GigE
MAC
GigE
MAC
Terminal
Loopback
FPGA
Block
Facility
Loopback
Path
Termination
Block
BTC
192
Protect
RX BPIA
Protect
TX BPIA
BACKPLANE
Main
RX BPIA
Main
TX BPIA
STS48
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
b.
If you just completed the
“1.5.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet
node.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the terminal (inward) loopback on the test port: a.
b.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-72 July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4 e.
f.
c.
d.
g.
h.
i.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
G1K1toG1K2.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
j.
k.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Finish .
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (G1000)” condition on page 2-174
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the terminal (inward) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
b.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the destination G1000 card in the source node.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
c.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
d.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
e.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-73
.
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback state on the port: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-73
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4
Step 5 d.
e.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
f.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-74 .
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port before testing the next segment of the network circuit path:
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
c.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit before testing the next segment of the network circuit path: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
1-74
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Step 7 Complete the
1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Performing the facility (line) loopback test on an intermediate port isolates whether this node is causing circuit failure. It is shown in
.
Figure 1-32 Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Ethernet
Source
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Intermediate
Ethernet
ONS Node
XC Ethernet Ethernet
Destination
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
“Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port” procedure on page 1-75
.
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
b.
If you just completed the
“1.5.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node Ethernet
Port” procedure on page 1-71 , leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the facility (line) loopback on the test port: a.
b.
c.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
d.
Click Next .
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
G1KtoG1K3.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005 1-75
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4 e.
f.
g.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
h.
i.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
j.
k.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Finish .
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (G1000)” condition on page 2-169 , or the
“LPBKFACILITY (OCN)” condition on page 2-171
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the facility (line) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the intermediate node: b.
c.
d.
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click
In node view, double-click the intermediate-node card that requires the loopback.
OK .
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
e.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-76 .
Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility (line) loopback.
Clear the facility loopback from the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-76 July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4
Step 5 d.
Click Apply .
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility (line) loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-77
.
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-77
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet
Ports
In the next troubleshooting test, you perform a terminal loopback on the intermediate-node port to isolate
terminal loopback is performed on an intermediate Ethernet port in the circuit. You first create a bidirectional circuit that originates on the source-node Ethernet port and loops back on the intermediate-node port. You then proceed with the terminal loopback test. If you successfully complete a terminal loopback on the node, this node is excluded from possible sources of circuit trouble.
Figure 1-33 Terminal Loopback on an Intermediate-Node Ethernet Port
Ethernet
Source
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Intermediate
Ethernet
ONS Node
XC Ethernet Ethernet
Destination
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
If you just completed the
“1.5.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node
Ethernet Port” procedure on page 1-75
for the Ethernet circuit, leave the optical test set hooked up to the intermediate-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the terminal (inward) loopback on the test port: a.
In node view, click the Circuits tab and click Create .
b.
c.
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
Click Next .
1-78
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
Step 4 d.
e.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
G1K1toG1K4.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
h.
i.
f.
g.
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
j.
k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list and that it is described in the Dir column as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (G1000)” condition on page 2-174
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the intermediate node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
f.
g.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-79
.
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port: a.
b.
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005 1-79
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node Ethernet Ports
Step 4
Step 5 c.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the “Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-80 .
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port: a.
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
c.
d.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
1-80
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 7 Complete the
1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
You perform a facility (line) loopback test at the destination port to determine whether this local port is the source of circuit trouble. The example in
Figure 1-34 shows a facility loopback being performed on
an Ethernet port.
Figure 1-34 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Ethenet
Source
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Intermediate
Ethernet
ONS Node
XC Ethernet Ethernet
Destination
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
b.
If you just completed the “1.5.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node
Ethernet Ports” section on page 1-78
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the hairpin circuit on the test port: a.
b.
c.
In node view, click the
Click Next .
Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-81
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4 d.
e.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
G1K1toG1K5.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
f.
g.
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
h.
i.
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
j.
k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (G1000)” condition on page 2-169 to appear during a
loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the facility (line) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
f.
g.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-82 .
Test and Clear the Ethernet Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
1-82
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4
Step 5 c.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
e.
Clear the facility (line) loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
c.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete . d.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
Complete the
“Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-83
.
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback on the port:
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
a.
b.
c.
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the facility loopback circuit:
Click the Circuits tab.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
d.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-83
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 7
1.5.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
The terminal loopback at the destination-node port is the final local hardware error elimination in the circuit troubleshooting process. If this test is completed successfully, you have verified that the circuit
is good up to the destination port. The example in Figure 1-29
shows a terminal loopback on an intermediate-node destination Ethernet port.
Figure 1-35 Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Ethernet
Source
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Intermediate
Ethernet
ONS Node
XC Ethernet Ethernet
Destination
ONS Node
XC Ethernet
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
b.
If you just completed the
“1.5.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node
Ethernet Port” procedure on page 1-81
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source port.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Use CTC to set up the terminal loopback on the test port: a.
b.
c.
In node view, click the
Click Next .
Circuits tab and click Create .
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose the type, such as STS, and number, such as 1.
1-84
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4 d.
e.
In the next Circuit Creation dialog box, give the circuit an easily identifiable name such as
G1K1toG1K6.
Leave the Bidirectional check box checked.
Click Next .
f.
g.
In the Circuit Creation source dialog box, select the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) where the test set is connected.
Click Next .
h.
i.
In the Circuit Creation destination dialog box, use the same Node, card Slot, Port, and STS (or VT) used for the source dialog box.
Click Next .
j.
k.
In the Circuit Creation circuit routing preferences dialog box, leave all defaults. Click Finish .
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (G1000)” condition on page 2-174
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 5
Step 6
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
f.
g.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-85
.
Test and Clear the Ethernet Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port: a.
b.
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-85
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.5.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node Ethernet Port
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6 c.
d.
e.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
Click the
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click
Circuits
Delete .
tab.
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
The entire circuit path has now passed its comprehensive series of loopback tests. This circuit qualifies to carry live traffic.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem might be a faulty card.
Complete the “Test the Ethernet Card” procedure on page 1-86 .
Test the Ethernet Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port: a.
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Clear the terminal loopback circuit: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
1-86
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks b.
c.
d.
Choose the loopback circuit being tested.
Click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box. Do not check any check boxes.
The entire circuit path has now passed its comprehensive series of loopback tests. This circuit qualifies to carry live traffic.
1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With
Loopbacks
Facility (line) loopbacks, terminal (inward) loopbacks, and cross-connect loopback circuits are often used together to test the circuit path through the network or to logically isolate a fault. Performing a loopback test at each point along the circuit path systematically isolates possible points of failure.
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 loopback tests differ from electrical, optical, and Ethernet testing in that loopback testing does not require circuit creation. MXP, TXP, and FC_MR-4 client ports are statically mapped to the trunk ports so no signal needs to traverse the cross-connect card (in a circuit) to test the loopback.
You can use these procedures on transponder cards (TXP, TXPP), muxponder cards (MXP, MXPP), and fibre channel data storage (FC_MR-4) cards. The example in this section tests an MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 circuit on a three-node BLSR. Using a series of facility (line) loopbacks and terminal (inward) loopbacks, the example scenario traces the circuit path, tests the possible failure points, and eliminates them. The logical progression contains seven network test procedures:
Note MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 card client ports do not appear in the Maintenance > Loopback tab unless they have been provisioned. Do this in the card view Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tab. For information about provisioning client ports, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
Note The test sequence for your circuits will differ according to the type of circuit and network topology.
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
6.
A facility (line) loopback on the source-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the source-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
A facility (line) loopback on the intermediate-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the intermediate-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
A facility (line) loopback on the destination-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
A terminal (inward) loopback on the destination-node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port
Note Facility, hairpin, and terminal loopback tests require on-site personnel.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-87
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
Port
The facility (line) loopback test is performed on the node source port in the network circuit. In the testing situation used in this example, the source muxponder or transponder port in the source node. Completing a successful facility (line) loopback on this port isolates the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port as a possible failure point.
Figure 1-36 shows an example of a facility loopback on a circuit source
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port.
Figure 1-36 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Circuit Source MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
XC TXP
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on the Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing.
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. The Tx and Rx terminals connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In CTC node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose OOS,MT from the Admin State column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Choose Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested. If this is a multiport card, select the appropriate row for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
1-88
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 9
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKFACILITY (OCN)” condition on page 2-171 or the
(G1000)” condition on page 2-169
to appear during loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-89
.
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-89 .
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005 1-89
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 6 c.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
.
1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
The terminal (inward) loopback test is performed on the node source MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 muxponder or transponder port. For the circuit in this example, it is the source MXP port in the source node.
Completing a successful terminal loopback to a node source port verifies that the circuit is good to the source port.
Figure 1-37 shows an example of a terminal loopback on a source MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
port.
Figure 1-37 Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
XC TXP
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Create the Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
a.
If you just completed the
“1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” procedure on page 1-88 , leave the optical test set hooked up to the MXP
or TXP port in the source node.
1-90
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9 b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback, such as the destination OC-N card in the source node.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-91
.
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback state on the port: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-91 .
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good one.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-91
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port before testing the next segment of the network circuit path: a.
Double-click the card in the source node with the terminal loopback.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
e.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
.
1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Performing the facility (line) loopback test on an intermediate port isolates whether this node is causing
circuit failure. In the situation shown in Figure 1-38
, the test is being performed on an intermediate
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port.
Figure 1-38 Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
XC TXP
Test Set
1-92
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9 a.
If you just completed the “1.6.2 Perform a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on a Source-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” procedure on page 1-90
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
In node view, double-click the intermediate-node card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-93 .
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility (line) loopback.
Clear the facility loopback from the port: a.
b.
c.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
d.
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-94 .
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-93
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
b.
c.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
d.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
.
1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
In the next troubleshooting test, you perform a terminal loopback on the intermediate-node port to isolate
terminal loopback is performed on an intermediate MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port in the circuit. If you successfully complete a terminal loopback on the node, this node is excluded from possible sources of circuit trouble.
1-94
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
Figure 1-39 Terminal Loopback on an Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Intermediate
ONS Node
XC TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
XC TXP
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
“Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports” procedure on page 1-95 .
Create a Terminal Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
If you just completed the “1.6.3 Create a Facility (Line) Loopback on an Intermediate-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” section on page 1-92 , leave the optical test set hooked up to the
source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the intermediate node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-95
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports
Step 4
Complete the “Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-96 .
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4 a.
b.
c.
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port:
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-96 .
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
1-96
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 6 e.
Click Apply .
f.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
“1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
Port” procedure on page 1-97 .
1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
You perform a facility (line) loopback test at the destination port to determine whether this local port is the source of circuit trouble. The example in
Figure 1-40 shows a facility loopback being performed on
an MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port.
Figure 1-40 Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
TXP MXP
Intermediate
ONS Node
TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
TXP
Test Set
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
Create the Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2 a.
If you just completed the “1.6.4 Create a Terminal (Inward) Loopback on Intermediate-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Ports” procedure on page 1-94
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source-node port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-97
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 3
Step 4
Create the facility (line) loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
• Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
b.
c.
d.
• Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
e.
f.
Select Facility (Line) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Click Apply .
g.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Facility (Line) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the traffic received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary with the facility loopback. Clear the facility (line) loopback from the port: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
c.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
Click Apply .
d.
e.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-98 .
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the suspected bad card
and replace it with a known-good one.
1-98
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card installed.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the faulty card.
Clear the facility (line) loopback on the port: a.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
b.
c.
Choose None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Choose the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) from the Admin State column for the port being tested.
d.
e.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the
1.6.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4
Port
The terminal loopback at the destination-node port is the final local hardware error elimination in the circuit troubleshooting process. If this test is completed successfully, you have verified that the circuit is good up to the destination port. The example in
Figure 1-29 shows a terminal loopback on an
intermediate-node destination MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 port.
Figure 1-41 Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
MXP
Source
ONS Node
TXP MXP
Intermediate
ONS Node
TXP MXP
Destination
ONS Node
TXP
Test Set
July 2005
Caution Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting.
Complete the
“Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” procedure on page 1-100
.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-99
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Create the Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 1 Connect an optical test set to the port you are testing:
Note Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for detailed information about connection and setup of the optical test set.
Step 2
Step 3 a.
If you just completed the
“1.6.5 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Destination-Node
MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” procedure on page 1-97
, leave the optical test set hooked up to the source port.
b.
If you are starting the current procedure without the optical test set hooked up to the source port, use appropriate cabling to attach the Tx and Rx terminals of the optical test set to the port you are testing. Both Tx and Rx connect to the same port.
Adjust the test set accordingly. (Refer to manufacturer instructions for test-set use.)
Confirm that the newly created circuit appears on the Circuits tab list as a two-way circuit.
Note It is normal for the
“LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)” condition on page 2-175
to appear during a loopback setup. The condition clears when you remove the loopback.
Step 4
Step 5
Create the terminal loopback on the destination port being tested: a.
Go to the node view of the destination node:
•
•
Choose View > Go To Other Node from the menu bar.
Choose the node from the drop-down list in the Select Node dialog box and click OK .
b.
c.
d.
e.
In node view, double-click the card that requires the loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
Select OOS,MT from the Admin State column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
Select Terminal (Inward) from the Loopback Type column. If this is a multiport card, select the row appropriate for the desired port.
f.
g.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Complete the “Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 1-100
.
Test and Clear the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
If the test set is not already sending traffic, send test traffic on the loopback circuit.
Examine the test traffic being received by the test set. Look for errors or any other signal information that the test set is capable of indicating.
1-100
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.6.6 Perform a Terminal Loopback on a Destination-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the test set indicates a good circuit, no further testing is necessary on the loopback circuit. Clear the terminal loopback from the port: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the intermediate-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
If the test set indicates a faulty circuit, the problem might be a faulty card.
Complete the
“Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card” procedure on page 1-101
.
Test the MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Card
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the suspected bad card and replace it with a known-good card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Resend test traffic on the loopback circuit with a known-good card.
If the test set indicates a good circuit, the problem was probably the defective card. Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
a.
b.
c.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the defective card.
Clear the terminal loopback on the port:
Double-click the source-node card with the terminal loopback.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tab.
d.
Select None from the Loopback Type column for the port being tested.
Select the appropriate state (IS; OOS,DSBLD; OOS,MT; IS,AINS) in the Admin State column for the port being tested.
e.
f.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The entire circuit path has now passed its comprehensive series of loopback tests. This circuit qualifies to carry live traffic.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-101
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7 Troubleshooting DWDM Circuit Paths With ITU-T G.709 Monitoring
1.7 Troubleshooting DWDM Circuit Paths With ITU-T G.709
Monitoring
This section provides an overview of the optical transport network (OTN) specified in ITU-T G.709
Network Node Interface for the Optical Transport Network, and provides troubleshooting procedures for
DWDM circuit paths in the ITU-T G.709 OTN using performance monitoring and threshold crossing alerts (TCAs).
1.7.1 G.709 Monitoring in Optical Transport Networks
Recommendation ITU-T G.709 is part of a suite of recommendations covering the full functionality of an OTN. ITU-T G.709 takes single-wavelength SONET technology a step further by enabling transparent optical wavelength-based networks. It adds extra overhead to existing SONET, Ethernet, or asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) bit streams for performance management and improvement.
ITU-T G.709 adds the operations, administration, maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P) functionality of SONET/SDH to DWDM optical networks.
Like traditional SONET networks, ITU-T G.709 optical networks have a layered design (
This structure enables localized monitoring that helps you isolate and troubleshoot network problems.
Figure 1-42 Optical Transport Network Layers
OCh
OTS
OMS
OTS OTS
OCh Layer
OMS Layer
OTS Layer
1.7.2 Optical Channel Layer
The optical channel (OCh) layer is the outermost part of the OTN and spans from client to client. The optical channel is built as follows:
1.
A client signal such as SONET, Gigabit Ethernet, IP, ATM, fiber channel, or enterprise system connection (ESCON) is mapped to a client payload area and combined with an overhead to create the optical channel payload unit (OPUk).
2.
3.
4.
A second overhead is added to the OPUk unit to create the optical channel data unit (ODUk).
A third overhead including forward error correction (FEC) is added to the ODUk to create the optical channel transport unit (OTUk).
A fourth overhead is added to the OTUk to create the entire OCh layer
1-102
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7.3 Optical Multiplex Section Layer
1.7.3 Optical Multiplex Section Layer
The optical multiplex section (OMS) of the OTN allows carriers to identify errors occurring within
DWDM network sections. The OMS layer consists of a payload and an overhead (OMS-OH). It supports the ability to monitor multiplexed sections of the network, for example the span between an optical multiplexer such as the 3 2MUX-O and a demultiplexer such as the 32 DMX-O.
1.7.4 Optical Transmission Section Layer
The optical transmission section (OTS) layer supports monitoring partial spans of a network’s multiplexed sections. This layer consists of a payload and an overhead (OTS-OH). It is a transmission span between two elements in an optical network, such as between:
•
•
•
A multiplexer such as the 32 MUX-O and an amplifier such as the OPT-PRE
An amplifier and another amplifier, such as the OPT-BST and the OPT-PRE
An amplifier such as the OPT-BST and a demultiplexer such as the 32-DMX
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
Performance monitoring (PM) counters and TCAs can be used for identifying trouble and troubleshooting problems in ITU-T G.709 optical transport networks. ITU-T Recommendation M.2401 recommends that the following PM parameters be monitored at the ODUk Layer:
•
•
SES (severely errored seconds)—A one-second period which contains greater than or equal to 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of the errored second (ES) parameter, which is a on- second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect.
BBE (background block error counter)—An errored block not occurring as part of an SES. BBE is a subset of the errored block (EB) parameter, which is a block in which one or more bits are in error.
Different performance monitoring count parameters are associated with different read points in a network.
Figure 1-43 illustrates the performance monitoring read points that are useful in identifying
DWDM circuit points of failure.
Chapter 4, “Performance Monitoring,” lists all PM parameters and
provides block diagrams of signal entry points, exit points and interconnections between the individual circuit cards. Consult these specifications to determine which performance monitoring parameters are associated with the system points you want to monitor or provision with CTC or TL1. The monitoring points can vary according to your configuration.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-103
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
Figure 1-43
Client dependent PM
Performance Monitoring Points on ONS DWDM
Optical PM at
OCH network connection
Optical PM at
OMS network connection
Trunk
Transponder
AD-xC/
4MD/
32MUX/
32DMX
OPT-BST/
OSC-CSM
OPT-BST/
OSC-CSM
AD-xC/
4MD/
32MUX/
32DMX
Transponder
ITU-TFEC based PM
Optical PM at
OTS connection
TCAs are used to monitor performance through the management interface by indicating whether preset thresholds have been crossed, or whether a transmission (such as a laser transmission) is degraded. TCAs are not associated with severity levels. They are usually associated with rate, counter, and percentage
parameters that are available at transponder monitoring points. Chapter 4, “Performance Monitoring,”
contains more information about these alerts.
Select and complete the provisioning procedure below according to your network parameters.
Complete the following procedure to provision default node ODUk BBE and SES PM thresholds for
TXP cards.
Set Node Default BBE or SES Card Thresholds
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Defaults
1-104
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
Figure 1-44 Set Default BBE/SES Card Thresholds
05.00-00
Step 2 In the Defaults Selector field, select Txp_mr_2_5g > otnthresholds > Trunk > pm > 15min .
Complete the following procedure to provision BBE or SES PM thresholds in CTC for an individual
TXP card.
Provision Individual Card BBE or SES Thresholds in CTC
Step 1
Step 2
In node view, double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G card.
(In this example, other transponder and muxponder cards are also applicable, such as TXP_MR_10G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, and MXP_2.5G_10G.)
Click the Provisionin g > OTN > G.709 Thresholds
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-105
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
Figure 1-45 Provision Card BBE/SES Thresholds
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In the Directions area, click Near End .
In the Intervals area, click 15 Min .
In the Types area, click PM (ODUk) .
In the SES and BBE fields, enter threshold numbers, for example 500 and 10000.
Complete the following procedure if you wish to provision PM thresholds in TL1 rather than in CTC.
Provision Card PM Thresholds Using TL1
Step 1
Step 2
Open a TL1 command line.
On the TL1 command line, use the following syntax: set-th-{och,clnt}::aid:ctag::montype,thlev,,,[tmper];
Where:
•
•
The modifier is och, as applicable to the trunk port.
Montype can be:
–
–
BBE-PM
SES-PM
– LBCL-MAX
1-106
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7.5 Performance Monitoring Counters and Threshold Crossing Alerts
•
•
The parameter thlev is optional and indicates a threshold count value (the number of errors which must be exceeded before the threshold is crossed).
The parameter tmper is optional and is an accumulation time period for performance counters, with possible values of 1-DAY, 1-HR, 1-MIN, 15-MIN, and RAW-DATA.
Note For a list of TL1 commands, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and SDH TL1 Quick
Reference Guide, Release 4.7
.
Complete the following procedure to provision TCA thresholds in CTC.
Provision Optical TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs (
Figure 1-46 Provision Optical TCA Thresholds
July 2005
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In the Types area, click TCA .
In the Intervals area, click 15 Min .
In the Laser Bias High (%) field, enter the threshold value, for example, 81.0 percent.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-107
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.7.6 Forward Error Correction
1.7.6 Forward Error Correction
In DWDM spans, FEC reduces the quantities of retiming, reshaping, and regenerating (3R regeneration) needed to maintain signal quality. The following two PM parameters are associated with FEC:
• BIEC—Bit errors corrected (BIEC) indicates the number of bit errors corrected in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval.
• UNC-WORDS—The number of uncorrectable words detected in the DWDM trunk line during the
PM time interval.
Complete the following procedure to provision BIEC and UNC-WORDS PM parameters for FEC.
Provision Card FEC Thresholds
Step 1
Step 2
In node view, double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G card to open the card view.
(In this example, other transponder and muxponder cards are also applicable, such as TXP_MR_10G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, and MXP_2.5G_10G.)
Click the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tabs (
Figure 1-47 Provision Card FEC Thresholds
Step 3
Step 4
In the Bit Errors Corrected field, enter a threshold number, for example 225837.
In the Intervals area, click 15 Min .
1-108
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
July 2005
1.7.7 Sample Trouble Resolutions
1.7.7 Sample Trouble Resolutions
Some sample trouble resolutions using performance monitoring and TCAs for isolating points of degrade are provided below.
Symptom There is a BBE TCA on a single transponder pair.
Possible Cause The transponder input power is out of range.
Recommended Action Check the input power on the transponder. It should be within the specified/supported range.
Possible Cause There are dirty trunk connectors on the transponder.
Recommended Action Check the connector on the trunk port.
Possible Cause There is a degraded trunk patch-cord between the transponder and the DWDM port.
Recommended Action Check the patch-cord on the transponder DWDM port.
Possible Cause There are dirty client connectors on the channel add-drop (ADxC) transmit port or the demultiplexer (DMX) has crossed the near-end TCA.
Recommended Action Check the connector on the OCH port of the ADxC.
Possible Cause There are dirty client connectors on the ADxC receive port or the multiplexer (MUX) has crossed the far-end TCA point.
Recommended Action If an optical channel bypass exists along the line, check the connectors.
Symptom There is a BBE TCA on all transponders connected to a band add-drop card (ADxB).
Possible Cause The transponder input power is out of range.
Recommended Action Check the input power on the transponder. It should be within the specified/supported range.
Possible Cause There is a dirty connector on the 4MD port.
Recommended Action Check the connector on the drop port of the ADxB.
Possible Cause
TCA point.
There is a dirty connector on the ADxB drop port, and it has crossed the near-end
Recommended Action Check the connector on the drop port of the 4MD.
Possible Cause There is a dirty connector on the ADxB add port and it has crossed the far-end TCA.
Recommended Action Check the patch-cord on the 4MD or AD1Bx.
Possible Cause There is a degraded patch-cord between the ADxB and the 4MD.
Recommended Action If an optical band bypass exists along the line, check the band connectors.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-109
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.8 Using CTC Diagnostics
Symptom There is a BBE TCA on all transponders which the OCH passes through a single OTS section.
Possible Cause This is not a transponder or channel-related issue.
Recommended Action The problem is in the intercabinet signal path preceding the transponder. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide for more information about configurations and acceptance tests for this area
Symptom You have an LBC TCA on a single transponder.
Possible Cause The laser of the transponder is degrading.
Recommended Action The problem is within the laser circuitry. Check the OPT-PRE or OPT-BST optical amplifier cards. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide for more information about setting up these cards.
1.8 Using CTC Diagnostics
In Release 5.0, CTC provides diagnostics for the following functions:
• Verifying proper card ASICS function
•
•
•
•
Verifying standby card operation
Verifying proper card LED operation
Diagnostic circuit creation
Customer problem notifications detected via alarms
• Provision of a downloadable, machine-readable diagnostic information file to be used by Cisco
Technical Support.
Some of these functions, such as ASIC verification and standby card operation, are invisibly monitored in background functions. Change or problem notifications are provided in the Alarms and Conditions window. Other diagnostic functions—verifying card LED function, creating bidirectional diagnostic circuits, and also downloading diagnostic files for technical support—are available to the user in the node view Maintenance > Diagnostic tab. The user-operated diagnostic features are described in the following paragraphs.
1.8.1 Card LED Lamp Tests
A card LED lamp test determines whether card-level indication LEDs are operational. This diagnostic test is run as part of the initial ONS 15454 turn-up, during maintenance routines, or any time you question whether an LED is in working order. Maintenance or higher-level users can complete the following tasks to verify LED operation.
Verify General Card LED Operation
Step 1 In node view, click the Maintenance > Diagnostic tab (
).
1-110
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Figure 1-48 CTC Node View Diagnostic Window
1.8.1 Card LED Lamp Tests
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Click Lamp Test .
Watch to make sure all the port LEDs illuminate simultaneously for several seconds, with the following durations:
•
•
For tri-color LEDs: three 5-second cycles
For dual-color LEDs: one 5-second cycle and one 10-second cycle
• For the AIC or AIC-I: one 15-second cycle
Click OK in the Lamp Test Run dialog box.
With the exceptions previously described, if an OC-N or DS-N LED does not light up, the LED is faulty.
Return the defective card to Cisco through the RMA process. Contact Cisco Technical Support
(1 800 553-2447).
Verify G-Series Ethernet or FC_MR-4 Card Port-Level LED Operation
Note G-Series and FC_MR-4 card-level LEDs illuminate during a lamp test, but the port-level LEDs do not.
Step 1 Complete the
“Verify General Card LED Operation” procedure on page 1-110
to verify that card-level
LEDs are operational.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-111
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.8.2 Retrieve Diagnostics File Button
Step 2
Step 3
Use the following list of guidelines to physically test whether the G-Series Ethernet port LEDs are operating correctly. If the LED appears as described when the listed state is occurring for the port, the
LED is considered to be functioning correctly.
•
•
Clear port LED: Should only occur if there is a loss of receive link (such as a disconnected link or unplugged Gigabit Interface Converter, [GBIC]). An LOS alarm could be present on the port.
Amber port LED: Should only occur if a port is disabled but the link is connected, or if the port is enabled and the link is connected but a transport failure is present. A TPTFAIL alarm can be present on the port.
• Green port LED: Should occur if the port is enabled and has no errors against it or traffic in it. Can also occur if the port is enabled, has no errors, and is running traffic proportionate to the blink rate.
No traffic-affecting port alarms should be present.
If you are unable to determine the port state, contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
Verify E-Series and ML-Series Ethernet Card Port-Level LED Operation
Note E-Series and ML-Series card-level LEDs illuminate during a lamp test, but the port-level LEDs do not.
Note For information about the ML-Series card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET/SDH ML-Series
Multilayer Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide .
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the “Verify General Card LED Operation” procedure on page 1-110 to verify that card-level
LEDs are operational.
Use the following list of guidelines to physically test whether the single E-Series or ML-Series Ethernet port LED is operating correctly. If the LED appears as described when the listed state is occurring for the port, the LED is considered to be functioning correctly.
•
•
Clear port LED: Should only occur if there is a loss of receive link (such as a disconnected link or unplugged GBIC), or if traffic is flowing in one direction (either transmit or receive). A CARLOSS alarm could be present on the port.
Amber port LED: Should only occur if the link is connected and the physical port is transmitting and receiving traffic.
• Green port LED: Should occur if the link is up and no traffic is flowing on the port.
If you are unable to determine the port state, contact Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447).
1.8.2 Retrieve Diagnostics File Button
When you click the Retrieve Diagnostics File button in the Maintenance window, CTC retrieves system data that can be off-loaded by a Maintenance or higher-level user to a local directory and sent to
Technical Support for troubleshooting purposes. The diagnostics file is in machine language and is not human-readable, but can be used by Cisco Technical Support for problem analysis. Complete the following task to off-load the diagnostics file.
1-112
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.8.3 Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
Note In addition to the machine-readable diagnostics file, the ONS 15454 also stores an audit trail of all system events such as user logins, remote logins, configuration, and changes. This audit trail is considered a record-keeping feature rather than a troubleshooting feature. Information about the feature is located in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Off-Load the Diagnostics File
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In the node view, click the Maintenance > Diagnostic
).
Click Retrieve Tech Support Log .
In the Saving Diagnostic File dialog box, navigate to the directory (local or network) where you want to save the file.
Enter a name in the File Name field.
You do not have to give the archive file a particular extension. It is readable in any application that supports text files, such as WordPad, Microsoft Word (imported), etc.
Click Save .
The Get Diagnostics status window shows a progress bar indicating the percentage of the file being saved, then shows “Get Diagnostics Complete.”
Click OK .
1.8.3 Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
In Release 5.0, CTC provides a diagnostic bidirectional loopback circuit feature that uses pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS) error detection to monitor standby path protection, BLSR, 1+1, or unprotected circuit path readiness.
The diagnostic circuit is bidirectional and uses a single VT 1.5 in an STS. The circuit can traverse multiple nodes, but it must be carried by the same STS for the entire path. The circuit originates and ultimately destinates on the same node, but can be looped (by a hairpin circuit) through other nodes.
Once the circuit returns to the originating node, the signal result is detected and analyzed for errors by
PRBS.
This type of circuit is created much the same way as a normal standby protection channel access (PCA) circuit, but is designated by checking the Diagnostic check box during circuit creation. A normal circuit uses line cards as the endpoints, but if a circuit is configured as a diagnostic, the endpoints are cross-connect cards.
Each card type utilizes the diagnostic feature differently. Standby electrical cards run PRBS tests to ensure signal path integrity. Optical cards do not run PRBS tests, but instead run ASIC tests to test card operability. Cross-connect cards verify the standby paths.
The diagnostic circuit can be configured for an end-to-end or multiple-node path layout, traversing the transmit and receive standby paths as shown in
.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-113
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.8.3 Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
Figure 1-49 CTC Node View Diagnostic Window
Node C
Node B
PRBS
Detector
PRBS
Generator
Node A
Node D
Node E
Node H Node F
Node G
VT PRBS signal that tests all spans on the BLSR ring.
VT PRBS signal that tests only one span on the BLSR ring.
NOTE: The end without the arrow is where the PRBS pattern is generated.
The end with the arrow is the end where the PRBS pattern is detected.
In Release 5.0, the maximum diagnostic circuit size is VT1.5, and the maximum quantity of available diagnostic circuits is one per node. (In other words, if you create a diagnostic VT within an STS, the remaining 27 VTs can still be provisioned, and they may also contain diagnostic circuits originating on other nodes.)
As with all bidirectional circuits, a diagnostic circuit can only be created if the same STS is available on each span the circuit traverses. When you use a bidirectional diagnostic that traverses one or more intermediate nodes, create or utilize an existing bidirectional circuit on each intermediate node. At the terminating node, you will need to create a hairpin loopback at the end of the PRBS source span to return the signal.
Note The diagnostic VT circuit does not raise a failure alarm if AIS-P or UNEQ-P is returned to the PRBS detector. In order to see an alarm indicating a failed diagnostic circuit, the circuit must be returned to the
PRBS detector with a different payload than the generator sources and without the AIS-P or UNEQ-P conditions.
Create a Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into the node where you will create the diagnostic circuit. (For login instructions, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 3, “Connect the PC and Log into the GUI.”)
If you want to assign a name to the circuit source and destination ports before you create the circuit, refer to the task for assigning a name to a port in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 6, “Create
Circuits and VT Tunnels.” If not, continue with
From the View menu, choose Go to Network View .
Click the Circuits tab, then click Create .
1-114
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.8.3 Bidirectional Diagnostic Circuit
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
In the Circuit Creation dialog box, complete the following fields:
•
•
Circuit Type—Choose VT .
Number of Circuits—Enter 1 (the maximum diagnostic circuit quantity available per STS).
• Auto-ranged—Uncheck the box. (This option is not applicable to diagnostic circuits.)
Click Next .
Define the circuit attributes in the Circuit Creation Dialog Box (
Figure 1-50 ) using the following
parameters:
Figure 1-50 Network View Circuit Creation Dialog Box
July 2005
Step 8
Step 9
•
•
•
•
Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters,
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
Size—VT1.5 is the default. You cannot change it.
Bidirectional—This is the default value. Leave it checked for this circuit.
State—This option is not available when you check the Diagnostic option.
Diagnostic—Check this box to create a diagnostic circuit.
Apply to drop ports—Leave this box unchecked.
•
•
•
•
Create cross-connects only (TL1-like)—Not applicable to diagnostic circuits.
Inter-domain (UCP) SLA—Not applicable to diagnostic circuits.
• Protected Drops—Not applicable to diagnostic circuits.
Click Next .
In the Source area of the Circuit Creation pane, complete the following: a.
From the Node drop-down list, choose the node.
b.
c.
From the Slot drop-down list, choose PRBS Generator .
Click Next .
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-115
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9 Restoring the Database and Default Settings
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
In the Destination area of the Circuit Creation pane, complete the following: a.
b.
c.
d.
From the Node drop-down list, choose the node. The only selectable item in the list is the node chosen as the source node.
From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot where the span originates.
From the STS drop-down list, choose the STS.
From the VT drop-down list, choose the VT. e.
Click Next .
Click Finish .
In the Circuits window, verify that the new circuit(s) appear in the circuits list.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
1.9 Restoring the Database and Default Settings
This section contains troubleshooting for node operation errors that require restoration of software data or the default node setup.
1.9.1 Restore the Node Database
Symptom One or more nodes are not functioning properly or have incorrect data.
Possible Cause There is an incorrect or corrupted node database.
Recommended Action Perform a Restore the Database procedure. Refer to the
“Restore the Database” procedure on page 1-116 .
Restore the Database
Caution E1000-2 cards lose traffic for approximately 90 seconds when an ONS 15454 database is restored.
Traffic is lost during the period of spanning tree reconvergence. The
“CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F)” alarm on page 2-54 appears and clears during this period.
Caution If you are restoring the database on multiple nodes, wait approximately one minute after the
TCC2/TCC2P reboot has completed on each node before proceeding to the next node.
Caution TCC2P cards (but not TCC2 cards) can be used in single IP address (repeater) and dual IP address
(secured) mode. The secured mode has advanced features that affect database restore: A database from a secured node cannot be loaded on an unsecured repeater node. An unsecured database can be loaded
1-116
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9.1 Restore the Node Database onto a secured node but the database will follow the node characteristics (that is, become secured). A secured database cannot be loaded onto a TCC2P. For more information about the dual IP secured mode, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapter 12, “CTC Connectivity.”
Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored: node name, IP address, subnet mask and gateway, and Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) port. If you change the node name and then restore a backed up database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new renamed node. Cisco recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names.
July 2005
Note To avoid a node IP and secure IP ending up in the same domain after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP stored in the database differs in domain from that of the node in repeater mode. Also, after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP and secure IP differ in domain.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In CTC, log into the node where you will restore the database: a.
On the PC connected to the ONS 15454, start Netscape or Internet Explorer.
b.
In the Netscape or Internet Explorer Web address (URL) field, enter the ONS 15454 IP address.
A Java Console window displays the CTC file download status. The web browser displays information about your Java and system environments. If this is the first login from this computer,
CTC caching messages appear while CTC files are downloaded to your computer. The first time you connect to an ONS 15454, this process can take several minutes. After the download, the CTC Login dialog box appears.
c.
In the Login dialog box, type a user name and password (both are case sensitive) and click Login .
The CTC node view window appears.
Ensure that no ring or span (four-fiber only) switch events are present; for example, ring-switch east or west and span-switch east or west. In network view, click the Conditions tab and click Retrieve to view a list of conditions.
If switch events need to be cleared, in node view click the Maintenance > BLSR tab and view the West
Switch and East Switch columns. a.
If a switch event (not caused by a line failure) is present, choose CLEAR from the drop-down list and click Apply . b.
If a switch event caused by the Wait to Restore (WTR) condition is present, choose
LOCKOUT SPAN from the drop-down list and click Apply . When the LOCKOUT SPAN is applied, choose CLEAR from the drop-down list and click Apply .
In node view, click the Maintenance > Database tab.
Click Restore .
Locate the database file stored on the workstation hard drive or on network storage.
Note To clear all existing provisioning, locate and upload the database found on the latest ONS 15454 software CD.
Step 7
Step 8
Click the database file to highlight it.
Click Open . The DB Restore dialog box appears. Opening a restore file from another node or from an earlier backup might affect traffic on the login node.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-117
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Click Yes .
The Restore Database dialog box monitors the file transfer.
Wait for the file to complete the transfer to the TCC2/TCC2P.
Click OK when the “Lost connection to node, changing to Network View” dialog box appears. Wait for the node to reconnect.
If you cleared a switch in
Step 3 , reapply the switch as needed.
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Symptom A node has both TCC2/TCC2P cards in standby state, and you are unable reset the
TCC2/TCC2P cards to make the node functional.
Possible Cause Both TCC2/TCC2P cards are failing in the node.
Possible Cause You are replacing both TCC2/TCC2P cards at the same time.
Recommended Action Restore the node to factory configuration. Refer to the
Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows)” procedure on page 1-119
as required.
Caution Cisco strongly recommends that you keep different node databases in separate folders. This is because the reinitialization tool chooses the first product-specific software package in the specified directory if you use the Search Path field instead of the Package and Database fields. You might accidentally copy an incorrect database if multiple databases are kept in the specified directory.
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Caution If you are restoring the database on multiple nodes, wait until the TCC2/TCC2P cards have rebooted on each node before proceeding to the next node.
Caution Restoring a node to factory configuration on a Windows or UNIX workstation should only be carried out on a standby TCC2/TCC2P card.
Caution Cisco recommends that you take care to save the node database to a safe location if you will not be restoring the node using the database provided on the software CD.
1-118
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored when you delete the database and restore the factory settings: node name, IP address, subnet mask and gateway, and IIOP port. If you change the node name and then restore a backed up database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new renamed node. Cisco recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names.
Note If the software package files and database backup files are located in different directories, complete the
Package and Database fields (
).
Note If you need to install or replace one or more TCC2/TCC2P cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable,” for installation instructions.
Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows)
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Caution Restoring a node to factory configuration on a Windows workstation should only be carried out on a standby TCC2/TCC2P card.
Note The TCC2/TCC2P cards reboot several times during this procedure. Wait until they are completely rebooted before continuing.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Insert the system software CD containing the reinitialization tool, software, and defaults database into the computer CD-ROM drive. If the CTC Installation Wizard appears, click Cancel .
To find the recovery tool file, go to Start > Run > Browse and select the CD drive.
On the CD drive, go to the CISCO15454 folder and choose All Files from the Files of Type drop-down list.
Select the RE-INIT.jar file and click Open to open the reinitialization tool (
Figure 1-51 Reinitialization Tool in Windows
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-119
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the node you are reinitializing is an end network element (ENE) in a proxy server network, enter the
IP address of the gateway network element (GNE) in the GNE IP field. If not, leave it blank.
Enter the node name or IP address of the node you are reinitializing in the Node IP field (
).
If the User ID field does not contain your user ID, enter the ID. Enter your password in the Password field.
Verify that the Re-Init Database, Upload Package, and Confirm check boxes are checked. If one is not checked, check the check box.
If you are uploading the same version of software that is already active (for example, you are trying to upload version 5.0 when version 5.0 is already active), check the Force Upload check box. This option forces the NE to have the same software version on the working and protect flash memory.
Note The Force Upload box is only applicable when the Upload Package check box is checked.
Step 10 In the Search Path field, verify that the path to the CISCO15454 folder on the CD drive is listed.
Caution Before you perform the next step, be sure you are uploading the correct database. You cannot reverse the upload process after you click Yes.
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Click Go . A confirmation dialog box appears.
Click Yes .
The status bar at the bottom of the screen displays Complete when the node has activated the software and uploaded the database.
Note The Complete message only indicates that the TCC2/TCC2P successfully uploaded the database, not that the database restore was successful. The TCC2/TCC2P then tries to restore the database after it reboots.
Step 14
Step 15
If you are logged into CTC, close the browser window and disconnect the straight-through LAN cable from the RJ-45 (LAN) port on the TCC2/TCC2P card or on the hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is physically connected. Reconnect your straight-through LAN cable to the LAN port and log back into
CTC.
Manually set the node name and network configuration to site-specific values. See the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 10, “Change Node Settings,” for information about setting the node name, IP address, mask and gateway, and IIOP port.
Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX)
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Caution Restoring a node to factory configuration on a UNIX workstation should only be carried out on a standby
TCC2/TCC2P card.
1-120
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.9.2 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Note The TCC2/TCC2P cards reboot several times during this procedure. Wait until they are completely rebooted before continuing.
Note Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.4.2 must also be installed on the computer you use to perform this procedure.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Insert the system software CD containing the reinitialization tool, software, and defaults database into the computer CD-ROM drive. If the CTC Installation Wizard appears, click Cancel .
To find the recovery tool file, go to the CISCO15454 directory on the CD (usually
/cdrom/cdrom0/CISCO15454).
If you are using a file explorer, double-click the RE-INIT.jar
file to open the reinitialization tool
(
Figure 1-52 ). If you are working with a command line interface, run
java -jar RE-INIT.jar
.
Figure 1-52 Reinitialization Tool in UNIX
July 2005
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the node you are reinitializing is an ENE in a proxy server network, enter the IP address of the GNE in the GNE IP field. If not, leave it blank.
Enter the node name or IP address of the node you are reinitializing in the Node IP field (
If the User ID field does not contain your user ID, enter the ID. Enter your password in the Password field.
Verify that the Re-Init Database, Upload Package, and Confirm check boxes are checked. If one is not checked, check the check box.
If you are uploading the same version of software that is already active (for example, you are trying to upload version 5.0 when version 5.0 is already active), check the Force Upload check box. This option forces the NE to have the same software version on the working and protect flash memory.
In the Search Path field, verify that the path to the CISCO15454 folder on the CD-ROM drive is listed.
Caution Before you perform the next step, be sure you are uploading the correct database. You cannot reverse the upload process after you click Yes.
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Click Go . A confirmation dialog box appears.
Click Yes .
The status bar at the bottom of the screen displays Complete when the node has activated the software and uploaded the database.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-121
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting
Note The Complete message only indicates that the TCC2/TCC2P successfully uploaded the database; not that the database restore was successful. The TCC2/TCC2P then tries to restore the database after it reboots.
Step 13
Step 14
If you are logged into CTC, close the browser window and disconnect the straight-through LAN cable from the RJ-45 (LAN) port on the TCC2/TCC2P card or on the hub or switch where the ONS 15454 is physically connected. Reconnect your straight-through LAN cable to the LAN port and log back into
CTC.
Set the node name and network configuration to site-specific values. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 10, “Change Node Settings” for information about provisioning the node name, IP address, subnet mask and gateway, and IIOP port.
1.10 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting
This section contains information about system minimum requirements, supported platforms, browsers, and JREs for R5.0, and troubleshooting procedures for PC and network connectivity to the ONS 15454.
1.10.1 PC System Minimum Requirements
Workstations running CTC R5.0 for the ONS products on Windows platforms need to have the following minimum requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
Pentium III or higher processor
Processor speed of at least 700 MHz
256 Mb or more of RAM
50 Mb or more of available hard disk space
20 GB or larger hard drive
1.10.2 Sun System Minimum Requirements
Workstations running CTC R5.0 for the ONS products on Sun workstations need to have the following minimum requirements:
• UltraSPARC or faster processor
•
•
256 Mb or more of RAM
50 Mb or more of available hard disk space
1.10.3 Supported Platforms, Browsers, and JREs
Software R5.0 CTC supports the following platforms:
• Windows NT
• Windows 98
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-122 July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10.4 Unsupported Platforms and Browsers
•
•
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Solaris 8 •
• Solaris 9
Software R5.0 CTC supports the following browsers and JREs:
•
•
•
Netscape 7 (on Solaris 8 or 9 with Java plug-in 1.4.2)
PC platforms with Java plug-in 1.4.2
Internet Explorer 6.0 (on PC platforms with Java plug-in 1.4.2)
Note You can obtain browsers at the following URLs:
Netscape: http://channels.netscape.com/ns/browsers/default.jsp
Internet Explorer: http://www.microsoft.com
Note The required JRE version is JRE 1.4.2.
Note JRE 1.4.2 for Windows and Solaris is available on R5.0 product CDs.
1.10.4 Unsupported Platforms and Browsers
Software R5.0 does not support the following platforms:
• Windows 95
•
•
Solaris 2.5
Solaris 2.6
Software R5.0 does not support the following browsers and JREs:
• Netscape 4.73 for Windows.
•
•
Netscape 4.76 on Solaris is not supported.
JRE 1.4.2 is not supported except with Netscape 7 on Solaris 8 or 9.
1.10.5 Unable to Verify the IP Configuration of Your PC
Symptom When connecting your PC to the ONS 15454, you are unable to successfully ping the IP address of your PC to verify the IP configuration.
Possible Cause The IP address was entered incorrectly.
Recommended Action Verify that the IP address used to ping the PC matches the IP address displayed when in the Windows IP Configuration information retrieved from the system. See the
IP Configuration of Your PC” procedure on page 1-124 .
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-123
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10.6 Browser Login Does Not Launch Java
Possible Cause The IP configuration of your PC is not properly set.
Recommended Action Verify the IP configuration of your PC. Complete the
Configuration of Your PC” procedure on page 1-124 . If this procedure is unsuccessful, contact your
Network Administrator for instructions to correct the IP configuration of your PC.
Verify the IP Configuration of Your PC
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open a DOS command window by selecting Start > Run from the Start menu.
In the Open field, type command and then click OK . The DOS command window appears.
At the prompt in the DOS window, type one of the following commands:
• For Windows 98, NT, and 2000, type ipconfig and press the Enter key.
The Windows IP configuration information appears, including the IP address, subnet mask, and the default gateway.
Note The winipcfg command only returns the information above if you are on a network.
Step 4
Step 5
At the prompt in the DOS window, type ping followed by the IP address shown in the Windows IP configuration information previously displayed.
Press the Enter key to execute the command.
If the DOS window returns multiple (usually four) replies, the IP configuration is working properly.
If you do not receive a reply, your IP configuration might not be properly set. Contact your Network
Administrator for instructions to correct the IP configuration of your PC.
1.10.6 Browser Login Does Not Launch Java
Symptom The message “Loading Java Applet” does not appear and the JRE does not launch during the initial login.
Possible Cause The PC operating system and browser are not properly configured.
Recommended Action Reconfigure the PC operating system java plug-in control panel and the browser settings. Complete the
“Reconfigure the PC Operating System Java Plug-in Control Panel” procedure on page 1-124 and the
“Reconfigure the Browser” procedure on page 1-125 .
Reconfigure the PC Operating System Java Plug-in Control Panel
Step 1
Step 2
From the Windows start menu, click Settings > Control Panel .
If Java Plug-in does not appear, the JRE might not be installed on your PC: a.
Run the Cisco ONS 15454 software CD.
b.
Open the CD-drive : \ Windows\JRE folder.
1-124
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10.6 Browser Login Does Not Launch Java
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9 c.
Double-click the j2re-1_4_2-win icon to run the JRE installation wizard.
d.
Follow the JRE installation wizard steps.
From the Windows start menu, click Settings > Control Panel .
In the Java Plug-in Control Panel window, double-click the Java Plug-in 1.4.2
icon.
Click the Advanced tab on the Java Plug-in Control Panel.
Navigate to C:\ProgramFiles\JavaSoft\JRE\1.4.2
.
Select JRE 1.4
.
Click Apply .
Close the Java Plug-in Control Panel window.
Reconfigure the Browser
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
From the Start Menu, launch your browser application.
If you are using Netscape Navigator: a.
On the Netscape Navigator menu bar, click the Edit > Preferences menus.
b.
c.
d.
e.
In the Preferences window, click the Advanced > Proxies
In the Proxies window, click the Direct connection to the Internet check box and click OK .
On the Netscape Navigator menu bar, click the
categories.
Edit > Preferences menus.
In the Preferences window, click the Advanced > Cache categories.
f.
Confirm that the Disk Cache Folder field shows one of the following paths:
• For Windows 98/ME, C:\ProgramFiles\Netscape\Communicator\cache
• For Windows NT/2000, C:\ProgramFiles\Netscape\ username \Communicator\cache .
If the Disk Cache Folder field is not correct, click Choose Folder .
g.
h.
i.
Navigate to the file listed in Step
OK .
Click OK on the Preferences window and exit the browser.
If you are using Internet Explorer: a.
On the Internet Explorer menu bar, click the Tools > Internet Options menus.
b.
c.
In the Internet Options window, click the Advanced tab.
In the Settings menu, scroll down to Java (Sun) and click the Use Java 2 v1.4.2 for applet (requires restart) check box.
d.
Click OK in the Internet Options window and exit the browser.
Temporarily disable any virus-scanning software on the computer. See the
Downloading CTC JAR Files From TCC2/TCC2P” section on page 1-130 .
Verify that the computer does not have two network interface cards (NICs) installed. If the computer does have two NICs, remove one.
Restart the browser and log on to the ONS 15454.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-125
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10.7 Unable to Verify the NIC Connection on Your PC
1.10.7 Unable to Verify the NIC Connection on Your PC
Symptom When connecting your PC to the ONS 15454, you are unable to verify that the network interface card (NIC) connection is working properly because the link LED is not illuminated or flashing.
Possible Cause The Category-5 cable is not plugged in properly.
Recommended Action Confirm that both ends of the cable are properly inserted. If the cable is not fully inserted due to a broken locking clip, the cable should be replaced.
Possible Cause The Category-5 cable is damaged.
Recommended Action Ensure that the cable is in good condition. If in doubt, use a known-good cable.
Often, cabling is damaged due to pulling or bending. (For information about installing cable, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”)
Possible Cause Incorrect type of Category-5 cable is being used.
Recommended Action If connecting an ONS 15454 directly to your laptop, a PC, or a router, use a straight-through Category-5 cable. When connecting the ONS 15454 to a hub or a LAN switch, use a crossover Category-5 cable. For details on the types of Category-5 cables, see the
Replacement LAN Cables” section on page 1-149 .
Possible Cause The NIC is improperly inserted or installed.
Recommended Action If you are using a Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
(PCMCIA)-based NIC, remove and reinsert the NIC to make sure the NIC is fully inserted. (If the
NIC is built into the laptop or PC, verify that the NIC is not faulty.)
Possible Cause The NIC is faulty.
Recommended Action Confirm that the NIC is working properly. If you have no issues connecting to the network (or any other node), then the NIC should be working correctly. If you have difficulty connecting a to the network (or any other node), then the NIC might be faulty and needs to be replaced.
1.10.8 Verify PC Connection to the ONS 15454 (ping)
Symptom The TCP/IP connection was established and then lost.
Possible Cause A lost connection between the PC and the ONS 15454.
Recommended Action Use a standard ping command to verify the TCP/IP connection between the PC and the ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P card. A ping command should work if the PC connects directly
to the TCC2/TCC2P card or uses a LAN to access the TCC2/TCC2P card. Complete the “Ping the
ONS 15454” procedure on page 1-127 .
1-126
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.10.9 The IP Address of the Node is Unknown
Ping the ONS 15454
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Display the command prompt: a.
b.
If you are using a Microsoft Windows operating system, from the Start Menu choose Run , enter command in the Open field of the Run dialog box, and click OK .
If you are using a Sun Solaris operating system, from the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) click the Personal Application tab and click Terminal.
For both the Sun and Microsoft operating systems, at the prompt enter: ping ONS-15454-IP-address
For example: ping 198.168.10.10
If the workstation has connectivity to the ONS 15454, the ping is successful and displays a reply from the IP address. If the workstation does not have connectivity, a “Request timed out” message appears.
If the ping is successful, an active TCP/IP connection exists. Restart CTC.
If the ping is not successful, and the workstation connects to the ONS 15454 through a LAN, check that the workstation’s IP address is on the same subnet as the ONS node.
If the ping is not successful and the workstation connects directly to the ONS 15454, check that the link light on the workstation’s NIC is illuminated.
1.10.9 The IP Address of the Node is Unknown
Symptom The IP address of the node is unknown and you are unable to login.
Possible Cause The node is not set to the default IP address.
Recommended Action Leave one TCC2/TCC2P card in the shelf. Connect a PC directly to the remaining TCC2/TCC2P card and perform a hardware reset of the card. The TCC2/TCC2P card transmits the IP address after the reset to enable you to capture the IP address for login. Complete the
“Retrieve Unknown Node IP Address” procedure on page 1-127
.
Retrieve Unknown Node IP Address
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Connect your PC directly to the active TCC2/TCC2P card Ethernet port on the faceplate.
Start the Sniffer application on your PC.
Perform a hardware reset by pulling and reseating the active TCC2/TCC2P card.
After the TCC2/TCC2P card completes resetting, it broadcasts its IP address. The Sniffer software on your PC will capture the IP address being broadcast.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-127
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11 CTC Operation Troubleshooting
1.11 CTC Operation Troubleshooting
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for CTC login or operation problems.
1.11.1 CTC Colors Do Not Appear Correctly on a UNIX Workstation
Symptom When running CTC on a UNIX workstation, the colors do not appear correctly. For example, both major and minor alarms appear in the same color.
Possible Cause When running in 256-color mode on a UNIX workstation, color-intensive applications such as Netscape might use all of the colors.
Recommended Action CTC requires a full 24-color palette to run properly. When logging into CTC on a UNIX workstation, run as many colors as your adapter will support. In addition, you can use the -install or the -ncols 32 command line options to limit the number of colors that Netscape uses.
Complete the “Limit Netscape Colors” procedure on page 1-128 . If the problem persists after
limiting Netscape colors, exit any other color-intensive applications in use.
Limit Netscape Colors
Step 1
Step 2
Close the current session of Netscape.
Launch Netscape from the command line by typing: netscape -install
(installs Netscape colors for Netscape use) or netscape -ncols 32
(limits Netscape to 32 colors so that if the requested color is not available, Netscape chooses the closest color option)
1.11.2 Unable to Launch CTC Help After Removing Netscape
Symptom After removing Netscape and running CTC using Internet Explorer, you are unable to launch
CTC Help and receive an “MSIE is not the default browser” error message.
Possible Cause Loss of association between browser and Help files.
Recommended Action When the CTC software and Netscape are installed, the Help files are associated with Netscape by default. When you remove Netscape, the Help files are not automatically associated with Internet Explorer as the default browser. Reset Internet Explorer as the default browser so that CTC associates the Help files to the correct browser. Complete the
Internet Explorer as the Default Browser for CTC” procedure on page 1-129
to associate the CTC
Help files to the correct browser.
1-128
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.3 Unable to Change Node View to Network View
Reset Internet Explorer as the Default Browser for CTC
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Open the Internet Explorer browser.
From the menu bar, click Tools > Internet Options . The Internet Options window appears.
In the Internet Options window, click the Programs tab.
Click the Internet Explorer should check to see whether it is the default browser check box.
Click OK .
Exit any and all open and running CTC and Internet Explorer applications.
Launch Internet Explorer and open a new CTC session. You should now be able to access the CTC Help.
1.11.3 Unable to Change Node View to Network View
Symptom When activating a large, multinode BLSR from Software R3.2 to Software R3.3, some of the nodes appear grayed out. Logging into the new CTC, the user is unable to change node view to network view on any and all nodes, from any workstation. This is accompanied by an “Exception occurred during event dispatching: java.lang.OutOfMemoryError” in the java window.
Possible Cause The large, multinode BLSR requires more memory for the graphical user interface
(GUI) environment variables.
Recommended Action Reset the system or user CTC_HEAP environment variable to increase the memory limits. Complete the
“Set the CTC_HEAP and CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP
Environment Variables for Windows” procedure on page 1-129
CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Solaris” procedure on page 1-130 to
enable the CTC_HEAP variable change.
Note This problem typically affects large networks where additional memory is required to manage large numbers of nodes and circuits.
Set the CTC_HEAP and CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Windows
Note Before proceeding with the following steps, ensure that your system has a minimum of 1 GB of RAM.
If your system does not have a minimum of 1 GB of RAM, contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center
(TAC).
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Close all open CTC sessions and browser windows.
From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > System .
In the System Properties window, click the Advanced tab.
Click the Environment Variables button to open the Environment Variables window.
Click the New button under the System variables field.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-129
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.4 Browser Stalls When Downloading CTC JAR Files From TCC2/TCC2P
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Type
CTC_HEAP
in the Variable Name field.
Type 512 in the Variable Value field, and then click the OK button to create the variable.
Again, click the New button under the System variables field.
Type CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP in the Variable Name field.
Type
128 in the Variable Value field, and then click the OK button to create the variable.
Click the OK button in the Environment Variables window to accept the changes.
Click the OK button in the System Properties window to accept the changes.
Set the CTC_HEAP and CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Solaris
Step 1
Step 2
From the user shell window, kill any CTC sessions and broswer applications.
In the user shell window, set the environment variables to increase the heap size.
Example
The following example shows how to set the environment variables in the C shell:
% setenv CTC_HEAP 512
% setenv CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP 128
1.11.4 Browser Stalls When Downloading CTC JAR Files From TCC2/TCC2P
Symptom The browser stalls or hangs when downloading a CTC Java archive (JAR) file from the
TCC2/TCC2P card.
Possible Cause McAfee VirusScan software might be interfering with the operation. The problem occurs when the VirusScan Download Scan is enabled on McAfee VirusScan 4.5 or later.
Recommended Action
Disable the VirusScan Download Scan feature. Complete the “Disable the
VirusScan Download Scan” procedure on page 1-130 .
Disable the VirusScan Download Scan
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs > Network Associates > VirusScan Console .
Double-click the VShield icon listed in the VirusScan Console dialog box.
Click Configure on the lower part of the Task Properties window.
Click the Download Scan icon on the left of the System Scan Properties dialog box.
Uncheck the Enable Internet download scanning check box.
Click Yes when the warning message appears.
Click OK in the System Scan Properties dialog box.
1-130
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.5 CTC Does Not Launch
Step 8
Step 9
Click OK in the Task Properties window.
Close the McAfee VirusScan window.
1.11.5 CTC Does Not Launch
Symptom CTC does not launch; usually an error message appears before the login window appears.
Possible Cause The Netscape browser cache might point to an invalid directory.
Recommended Action Redirect the Netscape cache to a valid directory. Complete the
Netscape Cache to a Valid Directory” procedure on page 1-131
.
Redirect the Netscape Cache to a Valid Directory
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Launch Netscape. open the Edit menu.
Choose Preferences .
Under the Category column on the left side, expand the Advanced category and choose the Cache tab.
Change your disk cache folder to point to the cache file location.
The cache file location is usually C:\ProgramFiles\Netscape\Users\ yourname \cache. The yourname segment of the file location is often the same as the user name.
1.11.6 Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
Symptom You experience slow CTC operation or have problems logging into CTC.
describes the potential cause of the symptom and the solution.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-131
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.6 Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
Table 1-3 Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
Possible Problem
The CTC cache file might be corrupted or might need to be replaced.
Insufficient heap memory allocation.
Solution
Search for and delete cache files. This operation forces the
Cisco ONS 15454 to download a new set of Java archive (JAR) files to your computer hard drive. Complete the
Automatically” procedure on page 1-132 or the
Manually” procedure on page 1-133 .
Increase the heap size if you are using CTC to manage more than 50 nodes concurrently. See the
CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Windows” procedure on page 1-129 or the
CTC_MAX_PERM_SIZE_HEAP Environment Variables for Solaris” procedure on page 1-130 .
Note To avoid network performance issues, Cisco recommends managing a maximum of 50 nodes concurrently with CTC. To manage more than 50 nodes, Cisco recommends using Cisco Transport Manager
(CTM). Cisco does not recommend running multiple CTC sessions when managing two or more large networks.
Delete the CTC Cache File Automatically
Caution All running sessions of CTC must be halted before deleting the CTC cache. Deleting CTC cache might cause any CTC running on this system to behave in an unexpected manner.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Enter an ONS 15454 IP address into the browser URL field. The initial browser window shows a
Delete CTC Cache button.
Close all open CTC sessions and browser windows. The PC operating system does not allow you to delete files that are in use.
Click Delete CTC Cache on the initial browser window to clear the CTC cache.
shows the
Delete CTC Cache window.
1-132
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Figure 1-53 Deleting the CTC Cache
1.11.6 Slow CTC Operation or Login Problems
Delete the CTC Cache File Manually
Caution All running sessions of CTC must be halted before deleting the CTC cache. Deleting the CTC cache might cause any CTC running on this system to behave in an unexpected manner.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
To delete the JAR files manually, from the Windows Start menu choose Search > For Files or Folders .
Enter ctc*.jar
or cms*.jar in the Search for files or folders named field in the Search Results dialog box and click Search Now .
Click the Modified column in the Search Results dialog box to find the JAR files that match the date when you downloaded the files from the TCC2/TCC2P.
Highlight the files and press the keyboard Delete key.
Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-133
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.7 Node Icon is Gray on CTC Network View
1.11.7 Node Icon is Gray on CTC Network View
Symptom name.
The CTC network view shows one or more node icons as gray in color and without a node
Possible Cause Different CTC releases do not recognize each other.
Recommended Action Correct the core version build as described in the
Releases Do Not Recognize Each Other” section on page 1-136 .
Possible Cause Username and password do not match.
Recommended Action Correct the username and password as described in the
Password Do Not Match” section on page 1-137
.
Possible Cause No IP connectivity between nodes.
Recommended Action Usually accompanied by Ethernet-specific alarms. Verify the Ethernet connections as described in the
“1.11.16 Ethernet Connections” section on page 1-139
.
Possible Cause A lost DCC connection.
Recommended Action Usually accompanied by an embedded operations channel (EOC) alarm. Clear the EOC alarm and verify the DCC connection as described in the
1.11.8 CTC Cannot Launch Due to Applet Security Restrictions
Symptom The error message “Unable to launch CTC due to applet security restrictions” appears after you enter the IP address in the browser window.
Possible Cause You are logging into a node running CTC Software R4.0 or earlier. Releases earlier than R4.1 require a modification to the java.policy file so that CTC JAR files can be downloaded to the computer. The modified java.policy file might not exist on the computer.
Recommended Action Install the software CD for the release of the node you are logging into. Run the CTC Setup Wizard (double-click Setup.exe
). Choose Custom installation , then choose the Java
Policy option. For additional information, refer to the CTC installation information in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 3, “Connect the PC and Log into the GUI.” If the software CD is not available, you must manually edit the java.policy file on your computer.
Complete the “Manually Edit the java.policy File” procedure on page 1-134
.
Manually Edit the java.policy File
Step 1
Step 2
Search your computer for java.policy file and open it with a text editor (Notepad or Wordpad).
Verify that the end of this file has the following lines:
// Insert this into the system-wide or a per-user java.policy file.
// DO NOT OVERWRITE THE SYSTEM-WIDE POLICY FILE--ADD THESE LINES!
grant codeBase “http://*/fs/LAUNCHER.jar {
1-134
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.9 Java Runtime Environment Incompatible
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5 permission java.security.AllPermission;
};
If these five lines are not in the file, enter them manually.
Save the file and restart Netscape.
CTC should now start correctly.
If the error message is still reported, save the java.policy file as .java.policy
. On Win98/2000 PCs, save the file to the C:\Windows folder. On Windows NT 4.0 or later PCs, save the file to all of the user folders on that PC, for example, C:\Winnt\profiles\joeuser.
1.11.9 Java Runtime Environment Incompatible
Symptom The CTC application does not run properly.
Possible Cause The compatible Java 2 JRE is not installed.
Recommended Action The JRE contains the Java virtual machine, runtime class libraries, and Java application launcher that are necessary to run programs written in the Java programming language.
The ONS 15454 CTC is a Java application. A Java application, unlike an applet, cannot rely completely on a web browser for installation and runtime services. When you run an application written in the Java programming language, you need the correct JRE installed. The correct JRE for each CTC software release is included on the Cisco ONS 15454 software CD and on the
Cisco ONS 15454 documentation CD. Complete the “Launch CTC to Correct the Core Version
Build” procedure on page 1-136
. If you are running multiple CTC software releases on a network, the JRE installed on the computer must be compatible with the different software releases.
shows JRE compatibility with ONS 15454 software releases.
Table 1-4 JRE Compatibility
Software Release JRE 1.2.2 Compatible JRE 1.3 Compatible JRE 1.4 Compatible
ONS 15454 R2.2.1 and earlier Yes No No
ONS 15454 R2.2.2
ONS 15454 R3.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
ONS 15454 R3.1
ONS 15454 R3.2
ONS 15454 R3.3
ONS 15454 R3.4
ONS 15454
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Note R4.0 Software R4.0 notifies you if an earlier
JRE version is running on your PC or UNIX workstation.
ONS 15454 R4.1
No Yes No
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-135
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.10 Different CTC Releases Do Not Recognize Each Other
Table 1-4 JRE Compatibility (continued)
Software Release
ONS 15454 R4.5
ONS 15454 R4.6
ONS 15454 R4.7
ONS 15454 R5.0
JRE 1.2.2 Compatible
No
No
No
No
JRE 1.3 Compatible
Yes
Yes
No
No
JRE 1.4 Compatible
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Launch CTC to Correct the Core Version Build
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Exit the current CTC session and completely close the browser.
Start the browser.
Enter the ONS 15454 IP address of the node that reported the alarm. This can be the original IP address you logged in with or an IP address other than the original.
Log into CTC. The browser downloads the JAR file from CTC.
Note After R2.2.2, the single CMS.jar file evolved into core and element files. Core files are common to the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, and ONS 15327, while the element files are unique to the particular product. For example, the ONS 15327 R1.0 uses a 2.3 core build and a 1.0 element build. To display the CTC Core Version number, from the CTC menu bar click
Help > About CTC . This lists the core and element builds discovered on the network.
1.11.10 Different CTC Releases Do Not Recognize Each Other
Symptom Different CTC releases do not recognize each other. This situation is often accompanied by the
INCOMPATIBLE-SW alarm.
Possible Cause The software loaded on the connecting workstation and the software on the
TCC2/TCC2P card are incompatible.
Recommended Action This occurs when the TCC2/TCC2P software is upgraded but the PC has not yet upgraded the compatible CTC JAR file. It also occurs on login nodes with compatible software that encounter other nodes in the network that have a newer software version. Complete the
CTC to Correct the Core Version Build” procedure on page 1-137 .
Note Remember to always log into the ONS node with the latest CTC core version first. If you initially log into an ONS node running a CTC core version of 2.2 or lower and then attempt to log into another ONS node in the network running a higher CTC core version, the lower version node does not recognize the new node.
1-136
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.11 Username or Password Do Not Match
Launch CTC to Correct the Core Version Build
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Exit the current CTC session and completely close the browser.
Start the browser.
Enter the ONS 15454 IP address of the node that reported the alarm. This can be the original IP address you logged on with or an IP address other than the original.
Log into CTC. The browser downloads the JAR file from CTC.
Note After R2.2.2, the single CMS.jar file evolved into core and element files. Core files are common to the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, and ONS 15327, while the element files are unique to the particular product. For example, the ONS 15327 R1.0 uses a 2.3 core build and a 1.0 element build. To display the CTC Core Version number, from the CTC menu bar click
Help > About CTC . This lists the core and element builds discovered on the network.
1.11.11 Username or Password Do Not Match
Symptom alarm .
A username/password mismatch often occurs concurrently with a NOT-AUTHENTICATED
Possible Cause
TCC2/TCC2P.
The username or password entered does not match the information stored in the
Recommended Action All ONS nodes must have the same username and password created to display every ONS node in the network. You can also be locked out of certain ONS nodes on a network if your username and password were not created on those specific ONS nodes. For initial login to the
ONS 15454, enter the CISCO15 username in capital letters and type otbu+1 in lower-case letters.
Click Login.
(In Release 5.0, a password is required.) If you are using a CTC Software R2.2.2 or earlier and CISCO15 does not work, enter cerent454 for the user name. Complete the
Correct Username and Password” procedure on page 1-137 .
Verify Correct Username and Password
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Ensure that your keyboard Caps Lock key is not turned on and affecting the case-sensitive entry of the username and password.
Contact your system administrator to verify the username and password.
Call Cisco Technical Support (1 800 553-2447) to have them enter your system and create a new user name and password.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-137
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.12 No IP Connectivity Exists Between Nodes
1.11.12 No IP Connectivity Exists Between Nodes
Symptom No IP connectivity exists between nodes. The nodes have a gray icon. This problem is usually accompanied by alarms.
Possible Cause A lost Ethernet connection.
Recommended Action Usually is accompanied by Ethernet-specific alarms. Verify the Ethernet connections as described in the
“1.11.16 Ethernet Connections” section on page 1-139
.
1.11.13 DCC Connection Lost
Symptom DCC connection is lost. The node usually has alarms and the nodes in the network view have a gray icon. This symptom is usually accompanied by an EOC alarm.
Possible Cause A lost DCC connection.
Recommended Action Usually accompanied by an EOC alarm. Clear the EOC alarm and verify the
DCC connection as described in the
.
1.11.14 “Path in Use” Error When Creating a Circuit
Symptom While creating a circuit, you get a “Path in Use” error that prevents you from completing the circuit creation.
Possible Cause Another user has already selected the same source port to create another circuit.
Recommended Action CTC does not remove a card or port from the available list until a circuit is completely provisioned. If two users simultaneously select the same source port to create a circuit, the first user to complete circuit provisioning gets use of the port. The other user gets the “Path in
Use” error. Cancel the circuit creation and start over, or click Back until you return to the initial circuit creation window. The source port that was previously selected no longer appears in the available list because it is now part of a provisioned circuit. Select a different available port and begin the circuit creation process again.
1.11.15 Calculate and Design IP Subnets
Symptom You cannot calculate or design IP subnets on the ONS 15454.
Possible Cause
IP subnets.
The IP capabilities of the ONS 15454 require specific calculations to properly design
Recommended Action Cisco provides a free online tool to calculate and design IP subnets. Go to http://www.cisco.com/techtools/ip_addr.html
. For information about ONS 15454 IP capability, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapter 12, “IP Networking.”
1-138
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.16 Ethernet Connections
1.11.16 Ethernet Connections
Symptom Ethernet connections appear to be broken or are not working properly.
Possible Cause Improperly seated connections.
Possible Cause Incorrect connections.
Recommended Action You can fix most connectivity problems in an Ethernet network by following a
few guidelines. See Figure 1-54
when using the steps in the
“Verify Ethernet Connections” procedure on page 1-139
.
Figure 1-54
Device "A"
192.168.1.25
255.255.255.0
VLAN #1 Member
Ethernet Connectivity Reference
Device "B"
192.168.1.75
255.255.255.0
VLAN #1 Member
Virtual
LAN # 1
ONS Node #1
Port #1 VLAN #1
Device "C"
192.168.1.50
Port #3 VLAN #1
255.255.255.0
VLAN #1 Member
ONS Node #2
Port #1 VLAN #1
Port #2 VLAN #1
Device "D"
192.168.1.100
255.255.255.0
VLAN #1 Member
Verify Ethernet Connections
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Verify that the alarm filter is turned OFF.
Check for SONET and DWDM alarms on the STS that carries the VLAN Ethernet circuit. Clear any
alarms by looking them up in Chapter 2, “Alarm Troubleshooting.”
Check for Ethernet-specific alarms. Clear any raised alarms by looking up that alarm in
Verify that the ACT LED on the Ethernet card is green.
Verify that Ports 1 and 3 on ONS 15454 #1 and Ports 1 and 2 on ONS 15454 #2 have green link-integrity
LEDs illuminated.
If no green link-integrity LED is illuminated for any of these ports: a.
b.
c.
Verify physical connectivity between the ONS 15454s and the attached device.
Verify that the ports are enabled on the Ethernet cards.
Verify that you are using the proper Ethernet cable and that it is wired correctly, or replace the cable with a known-good Ethernet cable.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-139
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.11.17 VLAN Cannot Connect to Network Device from Untag Port
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9 d.
Check the status LED on the Ethernet card faceplate to ensure the card booted up properly. This LED should be steady green. If necessary, remove and reinsert the card and allow it to reboot.
e.
It is possible that the Ethernet port is functioning properly but the link LED itself is broken.
Complete the “Verify General Card LED Operation” procedure on page 1-110 .
Verify connectivity between device A and device C by pinging between these locally attached devices.
Complete the
“1.10.8 Verify PC Connection to the ONS 15454 (ping)” procedure on page 1-126 . If the
ping is unsuccessful: a.
b.
Verify that device A and device C are on the same IP subnet.
Open the Ethernet card in CTC card view and click the Provisioning > VLAN tab to verify that both
Port 1 and Port 3 on the card are assigned to the same VLAN.
c.
If a port is not assigned to the correct VLAN, click that port column in the VLAN row and set the port to Tagged or Untag. Click Apply .
Repeat
Verify that the Ethernet circuit that carries VLAN #1 is provisioned and that ONS 15454 #1 and
ONS 15454 #2 ports also use VLAN #1.
1.11.17 VLAN Cannot Connect to Network Device from Untag Port
Symptom Networks that have a VLAN with one ONS 15454 Ethernet card port set to Tagged and one
ONS 15454 Ethernet card set to Untag might have difficulty implementing Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) for a network device attached to the Untag port (
Figure 1-55 ). They might also see a higher than
normal runt packets count at the network device attached to the Untag port. This symptom/limitation also exists when ports within the same card or ports within the same chassis are put on the same VLAN, with a mix of tagged and untagged.
Possible Cause The Tagged ONS 15454 adds the IEEE 802.1Q tag and the Untag ONS 15454 removes the Q-tag without replacing the bytes. The NIC of the network device categorizes the packet as a runt and drops the packet.
Possible Cause Dropped packets can also occur when ARP attempts to match the IP address of the network device attached to the Untag port with the physical MAC address required by the network access layer.
Recommended Action The solution is to set both ports in the VLAN to Tagged to stop the stripping of the 4 bytes from the data packet and prevent the NIC card in the network access device from recognizing the packet as a runt and dropping it. Network devices with IEEE 802.1Q-compliant NIC cards accept the tagged packets. Network devices with non IEEE 802.1Q compliant NIC cards still drop these tagged packets. The solution might require upgrading network devices with non-IEEE 802.1Q compliant NIC cards to IEEE 802.1Q compliant NIC cards. You can also set both ports in the VLAN to Untag, but you will lose IEEE 802.1Q compliance.
1-140
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Figure 1-55 VLAN with Ethernet Ports at Tagged and Untag
1.11.17 VLAN Cannot Connect to Network Device from Untag Port
Workstation #1 ONS Node with Ethernet card
VLAN port set to Tagged
ONS Node with Ethernet card
Workstation #2
VLAN port set to Untag
SONET/SDH
Ethernet
Change VLAN Port Tag and Untagged Settings
Step 1
Step 2
Display the CTC card view for the Ethernet card involved in the problem VLAN.
Click the Provisioning > Ether VLAN tab (
).
Figure 1-56 Configuring VLAN Membership for Individual Ethernet Ports
July 2005
Step 3
Step 4
If the port is set to Tagged, continue to look at other cards and their ports in the VLAN until you find the port that is set to Untag .
At the VLAN port set to Untag, click the port and choose Tagged .
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-141
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.12 Circuits and Timing
Step 5
Note The attached external devices must recognize IEEE 802.1Q VLANs.
After each port is in the appropriate VLAN, click Apply .
1.12 Circuits and Timing
This section provides solutions to circuit creation and reporting errors, as well as common timing reference errors and alarms.
1.12.1 OC-N Circuit Transitions to Partial State
Symptom An automatic or manual transition of a circuit from one state to another state results in the
OOS-PARTIAL status, which indicates that not all OC-N connections in the circuit are in the IS-NR service state.
Possible Cause During a manual transition, CTC cannot communicate with one of the nodes or one of the nodes is on a version of software that does not support the new state model.
Recommended Action Repeat the manual transition operation. If the partial state persists, determine which node in the circuit is not changing to the desired state. Complete the
state and determine the version of software. If the software on the node is Software R3.3 or earlier, upgrade the software. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Software Upgrade Guide for software upgrade procedures.
Note If the node software cannot be upgraded to R4.0, the partial state condition can be avoided by using only the circuit state supported in the earlier software version.
Possible Cause on the circuit.
During an automatic transition, some path-level defects and/or alarms were detected
Possible Cause One end of the circuit is not properly terminated.
Recommended Action Determine which node in the circuit is not changing to the desired state.
Complete the “View the State of OC-N Circuit Nodes” procedure on page 1-142 . Log onto the
circuit node that did not change to the desired state and examine the circuit for path-level defects, improper circuit termination, or alarms. Refer to
Chapter 2, “Alarm Troubleshooting,”
for procedures to clear alarms. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 9, “Manage
Circuits,” for instructions to change circuit configuration settings. Resolve and clear the defects and/or alarms on the circuit node and verify that the circuit transitions to the desired state.
View the State of OC-N Circuit Nodes
Step 1 Click the Circuits tab.
1-142
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.12.2 AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
From the Circuits tab list, select the circuit with the * _PARTIAL status condition.
Click Edit . The Edit Circuit window appears.
In the Edit Circuit window, click the State tab (if you are viewing a SONET circuit).
The State tab window lists the Node, End A, End B, CRS Admin State, and CRS Service State for each of the nodes in the circuit.
1.12.2 AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits
Symptom An incomplete circuit path causes an AIS.
Possible Cause The port on the reporting node is in-service but a node upstream on the circuit does not have an OC-N port in service.
Recommended Action An AIS-V indicates that an upstream failure occurred at the virtual tributary
(VT) layer. AIS-V alarms also occur on DS3XM-6 VT circuits that are not carrying traffic and on
.
Clear AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Step 14
Step 15
Step 16
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Determine the affected port.
Record the node ID, slot number, port number, or VT number.
Create a unidirectional VT circuit from the affected port back to itself, such as
Source node/Slot 2/Port 2/VT 13 cross connected to Source node/Slot 2/Port 2/VT 13.
Uncheck the Bidirectional check box in the circuit creation window.
Give the unidirectional VT circuit an easily recognizable name, such as delete me.
Display the DS3XM-6 card in CTC card view. Click the Maintenance > DS1 tab.
Locate the VT that is reporting the alarm (for example, DS3 #2, DS1 #13).
From the Loopback Type list, choose Facility (Line) and click Apply .
Click Circuits .
Find the one-way circuit you created in
Step 3 . Select the circuit and click
Delete . Do not check any check boxes.
Click Yes in the Delete Confirmation dialog box.
Display the DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card in CTC card view. Click Maintenance > DS1 .
Locate the VT in Facility (line) Loopback.
From the Loopback Type list, choose None and then click Apply .
Click the Alarms tab and verify that the AIS-V alarms have cleared.
Repeat this procedure for all the AIS-V alarms on the DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 cards.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-143
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.12.3 Circuit Creation Error with VT1.5 Circuit
1.12.3 Circuit Creation Error with VT1.5 Circuit
Symptom You receive an “Error while finishing circuit creation. Unable to provision circuit. Unable to create connection object at node_name ” message when trying to create a VT1.5 circuit in CTC.
Possible Cause You might have run out of bandwidth on the VT cross-connect matrix at the
ONS 15454 indicated in the error message.
Recommended Action The matrix has a maximum capacity of 336 bidirectional VT1.5 cross-connects. Certain configurations exhaust VT capacity with less than 336 bidirectional VT1.5s in a BLSR or less than 224 bidirectional VT1.5s in a path protection or 1+1 protection group. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for more information.
1.12.4 Unable to Create Circuit From DS-3 Card to DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card
Symptom You cannot create a circuit from a DS-3 card to a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card.
Possible Cause A DS-3 card and a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card have different functions.
Recommended Action A DS3XM-6 card converts each of its six DS-3 interfaces into 28 DS-1s for cross-connection through the network. The DS3XM-12 converts each of its 12 interfaces into up to
48 DS-1s. Thus, you can create a circuit from a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card to a DS-1 card, but not from a DS3XM card to a DS-3 card. These differences are evident in the STS path overhead. The
DS-3 card uses asynchronous mapping for DS-3, which is indicated by the C2 byte in the STS path overhead that has a hex code of 04. A DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 has a VT payload with a C2 hex value of 02.
Note You can find instructions for creating circuits in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter
6, “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels.”
1.12.5 DS-3 Card Does Not Report AIS-P From External Equipment
Symptom A DS3-12, DS3N-12, DS3-12E, or DS3N-12E card does not report STS AIS-P from the external equipment/line side.
Possible Cause The card is functioning as designed.
Recommended Action This card terminates the port signal at the backplane so STS AIS-P is not reported from the external equipment/line side. DS3-12, DS3N-12, DS3-12E, and DS3N-12E cards have DS3 header monitoring functionality, which allows you to view PM on the DS3 path.
Nevertheless, you cannot view AIS-P on the STS path. For more information about the PM
capabilities of the DS3-12, DS3N-12, DS3-12E or DS3N-12E cards, go to Chapter 4, “Performance
1-144
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.12.6 OC-3 and DCC Limitations
1.12.6 OC-3 and DCC Limitations
Symptom Limitations to OC-3 and DCC usage.
Possible Cause OC-3 and DCC have limitations for the ONS 15454.
Recommended Action For an explanation of OC-3 and DCC limitations, refer to the DCC Tunnels section of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 5, “Turn Up Network.”
1.12.7 ONS 15454 Switches Timing Reference
Symptom Timing references switch when one or more problems occur.
Possible Cause The optical or BITS input is receiving loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), or
AIS alarms from its timing source.
Possible Cause The optical or building integrated timing supply (BITS) input is not functioning.
Possible Cause The synchronization status messaging (SSM) message is set to do not use for synchronization (DUS).
Possible Cause SSM indicates a Stratum 3 or lower clock quality.
Possible Cause The input frequency is off by more than 15 ppm.
Possible Cause The input clock wanders and has more than three slips in 30 seconds.
Possible Cause A bad timing reference existed for at least two minutes.
Recommended Action The ONS 15454 internal clock operates at a Stratum 3E level of accuracy. This gives the ONS 15454 a free-running synchronization accuracy of +/– 4.6 ppm and a holdover stability of less than 255 slips in the first 24 hours or 3.7 x 10
–7
/day, including temperature.
ONS 15454 free-running synchronization relies on the Stratum 3 internal clock. Over an extended time period, using a higher quality Stratum 1 or Stratum 2 timing source results in fewer timing slips than a lower quality Stratum 3 timing source.
1.12.8 Holdover Synchronization Alarm
Symptom appears.
The clock is running at a different frequency than normal and the
Possible Cause The last reference input has failed.
Recommended Action The clock is running at the frequency of the last known-good reference input.
This alarm is raised when the last reference input fails. See the
“HLDOVRSYNC” alarm on page 2-125
for a detailed description.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-145
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.12.9 Free-Running Synchronization Mode
Note The ONS 15454 supports holdover timing per Telcordia GR-436 when provisioned for external
(BITS) timing.
1.12.9 Free-Running Synchronization Mode
Symptom appears.
The clock is running at a different frequency than normal and the
Possible Cause No reliable reference input is available.
Recommended Action The clock is using the internal oscillator as its only frequency reference. This occurs when no reliable, prior timing reference is available. See the
“FRNGSYNC” condition on page 2-112
for a detailed description.
1.12.10 Daisy-Chained BITS Not Functioning
Symptom You are unable to daisy chain the BITS sources.
Possible Cause Daisy-chained BITS sources are not supported on the ONS 15454.
Recommended Action Daisy-chained BITS sources cause additional wander buildup in the network and are therefore not supported. Instead, use a timing signal generator to create multiple copies of the BITS clock and separately link them to each ONS 15454.
1.12.11 Blinking STAT LED after Installing a Card
Symptom After installing a card, the STAT LED blinks continuously for more than 60 seconds.
Possible Cause The card cannot boot because it failed the Power On Shelf Test (POST) diagnostics.
Recommended Action The blinking STAT LED indicates that POST diagnostics are being performed.
If the LED continues to blink more than 60 seconds, the card has failed the POST diagnostics test and has failed to boot. If the card has truly failed, an
is raised against the slot number with an “Equipment Failure” description. Check the alarm tab for this alarm to appear for the slot where the card was installed. To attempt recovery, remove and reinstall the card and observe the card boot process. If the card fails to boot, replace the card. Complete the
.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
1-146
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13 Fiber and Cabling
1.13 Fiber and Cabling
This section explains problems typically caused by cabling connectivity errors. It also includes instructions for crimping Category-5 cable and lists the optical fiber connectivity levels.
1.13.1 Bit Errors Appear for a Traffic Card
Symptom A traffic card has multiple bit errors.
Possible Cause Faulty cabling or low optical-line levels.
Recommended Action Bit errors on line (traffic) cards usually originate from cabling problems or low optical-line levels. The errors can be caused by synchronization problems, especially if pointer justification (PJ) errors are reported. Moving cards into different error-free slots will isolate the cause. Use a test set whenever possible because the cause of the errors could be external cabling, fiber, or external equipment connecting to the ONS 15454. Troubleshoot low optical levels using the
“1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections” section on page 1-147 .
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Symptom A line card has multiple SONET/DWDM alarms and/or signal errors.
Possible Cause Faulty fiber-optic connections.
Recommended Action Faulty fiber-optic connections can be the source of SONET/DWDM alarms and signal errors. Complete the
“Verify Fiber-Optic Connections” procedure on page 1-148
.
Possible Cause Faulty Category-5 cables.
Recommended Action Faulty Category-5 cables can be the source of SONET/DWDM alarms and signal errors. Complete the
“1.13.2.1 Crimp Replacement LAN Cables” section on page 1-149 .
Possible Cause Faulty GBICs.
Recommended Action Faulty GBICs can be the source of SONET/DWDM alarms and signal errors.
See the
“1.13.2.2 Replace Faulty GBIC or SFP Connectors” section on page 1-151
.
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or connectors. Do not stare into beams or view directly with optical instruments. Statement 272
Warning Laser radiation presents an invisible hazard, so personnel should avoid exposure to the laser beam.
Personnel must be qualified in laser safety procedures and must use proper eye protection before working on this equipment. Statement 300
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-147
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Verify Fiber-Optic Connections
Step 1 Ensure that a single-mode fiber connects to the ONS 15454 OC-N card.
Note SM or SM Fiber should be printed on the fiber span cable. ONS 15454 OC-N cards do not use multimode fiber.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Ensure that the connector keys on the SC fiber connector are properly aligned and locked.
Check that the single-mode fiber power level is within the specified range: a.
Remove the receive (Rx) end of the suspect fiber.
b.
c.
d.
Connect the Rx end of the suspect fiber to a fiber-optic power meter, such as a GN Nettest LP-5000.
Determine the power level of fiber with the fiber-optic power meter.
e.
Verify that the power meter is set to the appropriate wavelength for the OC-N card being tested
(either 1310 nm or 1550 nm depending on the specific card).
Verify that the power level falls within the range specified for the card if it is an OC-N card; see the
“1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels” section on page 1-154 .
If the power level falls below the specified range for the OC-N card: a.
Clean or replace the fiber patch cords. Clean the fiber according to site practice or, if none exists, follow the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If possible, do this for the OC-N card you are working on and the far-end card.
b.
c.
Clean the optical connectors on the card. Clean the connectors according to site practice or, if none exists, follow the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the
Node.” If possible, do this for the OC-N card you are working on and the far-end card.
Ensure that the far-end transmitting card is not an ONS intermediate-range (IR) card when an ONS long-range (LR) card is appropriate.
d.
IR cards transmit a lower output power than LR cards.
Replace the far-end transmitting OC-N card to eliminate the possibility of a degrading transmitter on this OC-N card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.” e.
If the power level still falls below the specified range with the replacement fibers and replacement card, check for one of these three factors that attenuate the power level and affect link loss (LL):
• Excessive fiber distance; single-mode fiber attenuates at approximately 0.5 dB/km.
•
•
Excessive number or fiber connectors; connectors take approximately 0.5 dB each.
Excessive number of fiber splices; splices take approximately 0.5 dB each.
Note These are typical attenuation values. Refer to the specific product documentation for the actual values or use an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) to establish precise link loss and budget requirements.
1-148
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Step 5 If no power level shows on the fiber, the fiber is bad or the transmitter on the OC-N card failed.
a.
b.
Check that the Tx and Rx fibers are not reversed. LOS and EOC alarms normally accompany reversed Tx and Rx fibers. Switching reversed Tx and Rx fibers clears the alarms and restores the signal.
Clean or replace the fiber patch cords. Clean the fiber according to site practice or, if none exists, follow the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If possible, do this for the OC-N card you are working on and the far-end card. c.
d.
Retest the fiber power level.
If the replacement fiber still shows no power, replace the OC-N card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the procedures in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 6 If the power level on the fiber is above the range specified for the card, ensure that an ONS LR card is not being used when an ONS IR card is appropriate.
LR cards transmit a higher output power than IR cards. When used with short runs of fiber, an LR transmitter is too powerful for the receiver on the receiving OC-N card.
Receiver overloads occur when maximum receiver power is exceeded.
Tip To prevent overloading the receiver, use an attenuator on the fiber between the ONS OC-N card transmitter and the receiver. Place the attenuator on the receive transmitter of the ONS OC-N cards.
Refer to the attenuator documentation for specific instructions.
Tip Most fiber has text printed on only one of the two fiber strands. Use this to identify which fiber is connected to Tx and which fiber is connected to Rx.
1.13.2.1 Crimp Replacement LAN Cables
You can crimp your own LAN cables for use with the ONS 15454. Use a cross-over cable when connecting an ONS 15454 to a hub, LAN modem, or switch, and use a LAN cable when connecting an
ONS 15454 to a router or workstation. Use Category-5 cable RJ-45 T-568B, Color Code (100 Mbps), and a crimping tool.
shows the wiring of an RJ-45 connector.
shows a LAN cable layout, and
Table 1-5 shows the cable pinouts.
Figure 1-59 shows a cross-over cable layout, and
shows the cross-over pinouts.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-149
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Figure 1-57 RJ-45 Pin Numbers
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
End view of RJ-45 plug Looking into an RJ-45 jack
Figure 1-58 LAN Cable Layout
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Table 1-5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
Pin
1
LAN Cable Pinout
Color white/orange orange white/green blue white/blue green white/brown brown
3
4
4
2
3
1
1
Pair
2
Name
Transmit Data +
Transmit Data –
Receive Data +
—
—
Receive Data –
—
—
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
Pin
1
1-150
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Figure 1-59 Cross-Over Cable Layout
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
Table 1-6
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
Pin
1
Cross-Over Cable Pinout
Color white/orange orange white/green blue white/blue green white/brown brown
Pair
2
2
3
1
1
3
4
4
Name
Transmit Data +
Transmit Data –
Receive Data +
—
—
Receive Data –
—
—
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
2
7
8
6
1
4
5
Pin
3
Note Odd-numbered pins always connect to a white wire with a colored stripe.
1.13.2.2 Replace Faulty GBIC or SFP Connectors
GBICs and Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFP) are hot-swappable and can be installed or removed while the card or shelf assembly is powered and running.
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or connectors. Do not stare into beams or view directly with optical instruments. Statement 272
GBICs and SFPs are input/output devices that plug into a Gigabit Ethernet card to link the port with the fiber-optic network. The type of GBIC or SFP determines the maximum distance that the Ethernet traffic can travel from the card to the next network device. For a description of GBICs and SFPs and their capabilities refer to the “Ethernet Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual .
Note GBICs and SFPs must be matched on either end by type: SX to SX, LX to LX, or ZX to ZX.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-151
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
Note DWDM and coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) GBICs do not function with Software
R5.0.
GBICs are available in two different models. One GBIC model has two clips (one on each side of the
GBIC) that secure the GBIC in the slot on the E1000-2-G, G-Series, or G1K-4 card. The other model has a locking handle. Both models are shown in
.
Figure 1-60 GBICs
Receiver
Transmitter
Clip
Receiver
Transmitter
Handle
For a list of available GBICs and SFPs for Ethernet cards and SAN (FC_MR-4) cards, refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapter 5, “Ethernet Cards.” For a list of available SFPs for TXP and
MXP cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
Note GBICs are very similar in appearance. Check the GBIC label carefully before installing it.
Remove GBIC or SFP Connectors
Step 1 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the GBIC SC connector or SFP LC duplex connector.
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or connectors. Do not stare into beams or view directly with optical instruments. Statement 272
Step 2
Step 3
Release the GBIC or SFP from the slot by simultaneously squeezing the two plastic tab on each side.
Slide the GBIC or SFP out of the Gigabit Ethernet module slot. A flap closes over the GBIC or SFP slot to protect the connector on the Gigabit Ethernet card.
Installing a GBIC with Clips
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Remove the GBIC from its protective packaging.
Check the label to verify that the GBIC is the correct type (SX, LX, or ZX) for your network.
Verify that you are installing compatible GBICs; for example, SX to SX, LX to LX, or ZX to ZX.
Grip the sides of the GBIC with your thumb and forefinger and insert the GBIC into the slot on the
E1000-2, E1000-2-G, or G-Series card (
1-152
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
Note GBICs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.
Figure 1-61 GBIC Installation (with Clips)
E1000
2
Plug
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
1
TX
ACT/LINK
1.13.2 Faulty Fiber-Optic Connections
RX
2
TX
ACT/LINK
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Slide the GBIC through the flap that covers the opening until you hear a click. The click indicates the
GBIC is locked into the slot.
When you are ready to attach the network fiber-optic cable, remove the protective plug from the GBIC and save the plug for future use.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Installing a GBIC with a Handle
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Remove the GBIC from its protective packaging.
Check the label to verify that the GBIC is the correct type (SX, LX, or ZX) for your network.
Verify that you are installing compatible GBICs; for example, SX to SX, LX to LX, or ZX to ZX.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005 1-153
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels
Step 4
Step 5
Remove the protective plug from the SC-type connector.
Grip the sides of the GBIC with your thumb and forefinger and insert the GBIC into the slot on the
E1000-2, E1000-2-G, G1K-4, or G-Series card.
Note GBICs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.
Step 6
Step 7
Lock the GBIC into place by closing the handle down. The handle is in the correct closed position when it does not obstruct access to SC-type connector.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels
Each OC-N card has a transmit and receive connector on its faceplate.
lists these levels.
Table 1-7 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels
OC-N Card
OC3 IR4/STM1SH 1310
OC3 IR/STM 1SH 1310-8
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100GHz
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310
OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx
TXP-MR-10G
Trunk side:
Client side:
MXP-2.5G-10G
Trunk side:
Client side:
Receive
–28 to –8 dBm
–30 to –8 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–18 to 0 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–28 to –8 dBm
–11 to –1 dBm
–14 to –1 dBm
–21 to –9 dBm
–22 to –9 dBm
–26 to –8 dBm
–14 to –1 dBm
Transmit
–15 to –8 dBm
–15 to –8 dBm
–15 to –8 dBm
–3 to +2 dBm
–3 to +2 dBm
–3 to +2 dBm
–5 to 0 dBm
–2 to +3 dBm
–2 to 0 dBm
–6 to –1 dBm
–1 to +2 dBm
+7 to +10 dBm
+3 to +6 dBm
–16 to +3 dBm
–6 to –1 dBm
–26 to –8 dBm depends on SFP
–16 to +3 dBm depends on SFP
1-154
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.14 Power Supply Problems
1.14 Power Supply Problems
Symptom Loss of power or low voltage, resulting in a loss of traffic and causing the LCD clock to reset to the default date and time.
Possible Cause Loss of power or low voltage.
Possible Cause Improperly connected power supply.
Recommended Action The ONS 15454 requires a constant source of DC power to properly function.
Input power is –48 VDC. Power requirements range from –42 VDC to –57 VDC. A newly installed
ONS 15454 that is not properly connected to its power supply does not operate. Power problems can be confined to a specific ONS 15454 or affect several pieces of equipment on the site. A loss of power or low voltage can result in a loss of traffic and causes the LCD clock on the ONS 15454 to default to January 1, 1970, 00:04:15. To reset the clock, in node view click the
Provisioning > General > General tab and change the Date and Time fields. Complete the
“Isolate the Cause of Power Supply Problems” procedure on page 1-155 .
Warning When working with live power, always use proper tools and eye protection.
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Operations that interrupt power supply or short the power connections to the ONS 15454 are service-affecting.
Isolate the Cause of Power Supply Problems
Step 1 If a single ONS 15454 show signs of fluctuating power or power loss: a.
Verify that the –48 VDC #8 power terminals are properly connected to a fuse panel. These power terminals are located on the lower section of the backplane EIA under the clear plastic cover.
b.
c.
Verify that the power cable is #12 or #14 AWG and in good condition.
Verify that the power cable connections are properly crimped. Stranded #12 or #14 AWG does not always crimp properly with Staycon type connectors.
d.
g.
h.
e.
f.
Verify that 20-A fuses are used in the fuse panel.
Verify that the fuses are not blown.
Verify that a rack-ground cable attaches to the frame-ground terminal (FGND) on the right side of the ONS 15454 EIA. Connect this cable to the ground terminal according to local site practice.
Verify that the DC power source has enough capacity to carry the power load.
If the DC power source is battery-based:
• Check that the output power is high enough. Power requirements range from –42 VDC to
–57 VDC.
July 2005
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
1-155
Chapter 1 General Troubleshooting
1.14.1 Power Consumption for Node and Cards
Step 2 c.
•
•
Check the age of the batteries. Battery performance decreases with age.
Check for opens and shorts in batteries, which might affect power output.
If brownouts occur, the power load and fuses might be too high for the battery plant.
•
If multiple pieces of site equipment show signs of fluctuating power or power loss: a.
Check the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or rectifiers that supply the equipment. Refer to the
UPS manufacturer’s documentation for specific instructions.
b.
Check for excessive power drains caused by other equipment, such as generators.
Check for excessive power demand on backup power systems or batteries when alternate power sources are used.
1.14.1 Power Consumption for Node and Cards
Symptom You are unable to power up a node or the cards in a node.
Possible Cause Improper power supply.
Recommended Action Refer to power information in the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications.”
1-156
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
July 2005
C H A P T E R
2
Alarm Troubleshooting
Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter gives a description, severity, and troubleshooting procedure for each commonly encountered Cisco ONS 15454 alarm and condition. Tables
provide lists of ONS 15454 alarms organized by severity.
Table 2-6 on page 2-7 provides a list of alarms organized alphabetically.
gives definitions of all ONS 15454 alarm logical objects, which are the basis of the alarm profile list in
. For a comprehensive list of all conditions, refer to the
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide .
An alarm’s troubleshooting procedure applies to both the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) and TL1 version of that alarm. If the troubleshooting procedure does not clear the alarm, log into the Technical
Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call the Cisco Technical
Assistance Center (1 800 553-2447).
More information about alarm profile information modification and downloads are located in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 7, “Manage Alarms.”
2.1 Alarm Indexes by Default Severity
The following tables group alarms and conditions by their default severities in the ONS 15454 system.
These severities are the same whether they are reported in the CTC Alarms window severity (SEV) column or in TL1.
Note The CTC default alarm profile contains some alarms or conditions that are not currently implemented but are reserved for future use.
Note The CTC default alarm profile in some cases contains two severities for one alarm (for example,
MJ/MN). The ONS 15454 platform default severity comes first (in this example, MJ), but the alarm can be demoted to the second severity in the presence of a higher-ranking alarm. This is in accordance with
Telcordia GR-474.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-1
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.1 Critical Alarms (CR)
2.1.1 Critical Alarms (CR)
Table 2-1
Table 2-1 alphabetically lists ONS 15454 Critical alarms.
ONS 15454 Critical Alarm Index
2.8.40 AWG-OVERTEMP, page 2-51
2.8.64 CTNEQPT-PBPROT, page 2-70
2.8.178 LOF (TRUNK), page 2-143
2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK, page 2-71
2.8.75 ENCAP-MISMATCH-P, page 2-77
2.8.262 OPWR-HFAIL, page 2-195
2.8.264 OPWR-LFAIL, page 2-196
2.8.239 MEA (EQPT), page 2-181
2.8.132 GAIN-LFAIL, page 2-115
(for NE)
2.8.188 LOS (EC1, EC1-12), page
2.8.282 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW, page 2-205
2.8.195 LOS (TRUNK), page 2-156
2.8.353 TIM-P, page 2-243 (for
STSTRM)
2.8.197 LOS-P (OCH), page 2-159
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS), page
2.8.151 IMPROPRMVL, page 2-127
—
—
2.1.2 Major Alarms (MJ)
Table 2-2 alphabetically lists ONS 15454 Major alarms.
Table 2-2 ONS 15454 Major Alarm Index
2.8.46 CARLOSS (CE100T), page 2-54
2.8.91 EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT, page 2-91
2.8.97 FC-NO-CREDITS, page 2-98 2.8.286 PTIM, page 2-208
2.8.297 RING-ID-MIS, page 2-215
2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.3 Minor Alarms (MN)
Table 2-2 ONS 15454 Major Alarm Index (continued)
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F), page
2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT), page 2-56
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000), page 2-58
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE), page 2-61
2.8.52 CARLOSS (ISC), page 2-61
2.8.53 CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000), page 2-62
2.8.54 CARLOSS (TRUNK), page 2-63
for double failure
2.8.59 CONTBUS-A-18, page 2-66
2.8.60 CONTBUS-B-18, page 2-66
2.8.61 CONTBUS-IO-A, page 2-67
2.8.62 CONTBUS-IO-B, page 2-68
2.8.69 DSP-COMM-FAIL, page 2-75
2.8.86 E-W-MISMATCH, page 2-87
2.8.355 TPTFAIL (CE100T), page
2.8.356 TPTFAIL (FCMR), page 2-244
2.8.357 TPTFAIL (G1000), page 2-245
2.8.358 TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000), page 2-245
2.8.367 UT-COMM-FAIL, page 2-252
2.8.273 OUT-OF-SYNC, page 2-201
—
2.1.3 Minor Alarms (MN)
alphabetically lists ONS 15454 Minor alarms.
Table 2-3 ONS 15454 Minor Alarm Index
2.8.18 APS-INV-PRIM, page 2-40
2.8.246 NOT-AUTHENTICATED, page 2-186
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-3
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.4 NA Conditions
Table 2-3 ONS 15454 Minor Alarm Index (continued)
2.8.21 APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM, page 2-41
2.8.32 AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON), page
2.8.287 PWR-FAIL-A, page 2-209
2.8.288 PWR-FAIL-B, page 2-210
2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER, page 2-123
2.8.147 HITEMP, page 2-124 (EQPT)
2.8.290 PWR-FAIL-RET-B, page 2-211
2.8.37 AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON), page
2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER, page 2-125
2.8.314 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HI
2.8.55 CASETEMP-DEG, page 2-63
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LO
EXT-SREF
for
2.8.72 DUP-NODENAME, page 2-76
2.8.84 ERROR-CONFIG, page 2-85
2.8.173 LOF (BITS), page 2-139
2.8.183 LO-RXPOWER, page 2-146
2.8.185 LOS (BITS), page 2-147
2.8.353 TIM-P, page 2-243 (STSMON)
2.8.190 LOS (FUDC), page 2-151
2.8.200 LO-TXPOWER, page 2-164
— —
2.1.4 NA Conditions
Table 2-4
Table 2-4 alphabetically lists ONS 15454 Not Alarmed conditions.
ONS 15454 NA Conditions Index
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED, page 2-33
2.8.145 HI-LASERTEMP, page 2-122
for PPM
2.8.144 HI-LASERBIAS, page 2-121 for
PPM
2-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.4 NA Conditions
Table 2-4 ONS 15454 NA Conditions Index (continued)
2.8.19 APS-PRIM-FAC, page 2-40
2.8.149 HLDOVRSYNC, page 2-125
2.8.10 APC-OUT-OF-RANGE, page 2-34
2.8.25 AUD-LOG-LOSS, page 2-44
2.8.31 AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON), page
2.8.34 AUTOSW-SDBER, page 2-49
2.8.35 AUTOSW-SFBER, page 2-49
2.8.157 IOSCFGCOPY, page 2-132
2.8.158 KB-PASSTHR, page 2-132
2.8.160 LAN-POL-REV, page 2-133
2.8.167 LCAS-RX-FAIL, page 2-137
2.8.168 LCAS-TX-ADD, page 2-137
2.8.169 LCAS-TX-DNU, page 2-138
2.8.302 RUNCFG-SAVENEED, page 2-217
2.8.304 SD (TRUNK), page 2-219
2.8.36 AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON), page
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ, page 2-139
2.8.63 CTNEQPT-MISMATCH, page 2-69 2.8.202 LPBKDS1FEAC, page 2-166
2.8.204 LPBKDS3FEAC, page 2-166
2.8.85 ETH-LINKLOSS, page 2-86
2.8.88 EXERCISE-RING-FAIL, page 2-89 2.8.205 LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD, page
2.8.309 SF (TRUNK), page 2-222
2.8.89 EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL, page 2-90 2.8.206 LPBKFACILITY (CE100T), page 2-167
2.8.93 FAILTOSW-PATH, page 2-92
2.8.207 LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3), page 2-168
2.8.208 LPBKFACILITY (EC1), page
2.8.210 LPBKFACILITY (FC), page
2.8.211 LPBKFACILITY (FCMR), page
2.8.212 LPBKFACILITY (G1000), page
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-5
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.4 NA Conditions
Table 2-4 ONS 15454 NA Conditions Index (continued)
2.8.100 FE-DS1-MULTLOS, page 2-100
2.8.213 LPBKFACILITY (GE), page
2.8.101 FE-DS1-NSA, page 2-100
2.8.214 LPBKFACILITY (ISC), page
2.8.103 FE-DS1-SNGLLOS, page 2-101
2.8.216 LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK), page 2-171
2.8.104 FE-DS3-NSA, page 2-102
2.8.215 LPBKFACILITY (OCN), page
2.8.217 LPKTERMINAL (CE100T), page 2-172
2.8.218 LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3), page 2-172
2.8.106 FE-EQPT-NSA, page 2-103
2.8.219 LPBKTERMINAL (EC1), page
2.8.107 FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN, page
2.8.220 LPBKTERMINAL (ESCON), page 2-173
2.8.108 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING, page
2.8.109 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN, page
2.8.221 LPBKTERMINAL (FC), page
2.8.222 LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR), page 2-174
2.8.223 LPBKTERMINAL (G1000), page 2-174
2.8.111 FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN, page
2.8.224 LPBKTERMINAL (GE), page
2.8.225 LPBKTERMINAL (ISC), page
2.8.226 LPBKTERMINAL (OCN), page
2.8.114 FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN, page
2.8.115 FE-MANWKSWPR-RING, page
2.8.227 LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK), page 2-176
2.8.116 FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN, page
2.8.119 FORCED-REQ, page 2-110
2.8.231 MANSWTOINT, page 2-177
2.8.120 FORCED-REQ-RING, page 2-110 2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI, page 2-178
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111 2.8.233 MANSWTOSEC, page 2-178
2.8.122 FRCDSWTOINT, page 2-111
2.8.123 FRCDSWTOPRI, page 2-111
2.8.234 MANSWTOTHIRD, page 2-178 2.8.363 UNC-WORD, page 2-248
2.8.124 FRCDSWTOSEC, page 2-112
2-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.1.5 NR Conditions
Table 2-4 ONS 15454 NA Conditions Index (continued)
2.8.125 FRCDSWTOTHIRD, page 2-112
2.8.256 ODUK-SD-PM, page 2-190
2.8.128 FULLPASSTHR-BI, page 2-113
2.8.257 ODUK-SF-PM, page 2-191
2.1.5 NR Conditions
alphabetically lists ONS 15454 Not Reported conditions.
Table 2-5 ONS 15454 NR Conditions Index
2.8.82 ERFI-P-PAYLD, page 2-84
2.8.248 ODUK-1-AIS-PM, page 2-187
2.8.249 ODUK-2-AIS-PM, page 2-187
2.8.250 ODUK-3-AIS-PM, page 2-188
2.8.251 ODUK-4-AIS-PM, page 2-188
2.8.252 ODUK-AIS-PM, page 2-188
2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM, page 2-189
2.8.254 ODUK-LCK-PM, page 2-189
2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM, page 2-190
—
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
alphabetically lists all ONS 15454 alarms and conditions.
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED, page 2-33
2.8.130 GAIN-HFAIL, page 2-115
2.8.132 GAIN-LFAIL, page 2-115
2.8.10 APC-OUT-OF-RANGE, page 2-34
2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM, page 2-189
2.8.254 ODUK-LCK-PM, page 2-189
2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM, page 2-190
2.8.256 ODUK-SD-PM, page 2-190
2.8.257 ODUK-SF-PM, page 2-191
2.8.258 ODUK-TIM-PM, page 2-191
2.8.262 OPWR-HFAIL, page 2-195
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-7
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index (continued)
2.8.264 OPWR-LFAIL, page 2-196
2.8.18 APS-INV-PRIM, page 2-40
2.8.19 APS-PRIM-FAC, page 2-40
2.8.144 HI-LASERBIAS, page 2-121 2.8.270 OTUK-SD, page 2-199
2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER, page 2-123
2.8.21 APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM, page 2-41
2.8.273 OUT-OF-SYNC, page 2-201
2.8.25 AUD-LOG-LOSS, page 2-44
2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER, page 2-125
2.8.274 PARAM-MISM, page 2-201
2.8.149 HLDOVRSYNC, page 2-125 2.8.275 PDI-P, page 2-201
2.8.151 IMPROPRMVL, page 2-127
2.8.279 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-HI, page 2-205
2.8.280 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-LOW, page 2-205
2.8.281 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-HI, page 2-205
2.8.282 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW, page 2-205
2.8.31 AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON), page
2.8.32 AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON), page
2.8.157 IOSCFGCOPY, page 2-132
2.8.158 KB-PASSTHR, page 2-132
2.8.34 AUTOSW-SDBER, page 2-49
2.8.35 AUTOSW-SFBER, page 2-49
2.8.160 LAN-POL-REV, page 2-133
2.8.287 PWR-FAIL-A, page 2-209
2.8.288 PWR-FAIL-B, page 2-210
2.8.36 AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON), page
2.8.37 AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON), page
2.8.290 PWR-FAIL-RET-B, page 2-211
2-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index (continued)
2.8.40 AWG-OVERTEMP, page 2-51
2.8.46 CARLOSS (CE100T), page 2-54
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE), page 2-61
2.8.52 CARLOSS (ISC), page 2-61
2.8.53 CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000), page 2-62
2.8.54 CARLOSS (TRUNK), page 2-63
2.8.55 CASETEMP-DEG, page 2-63
2.8.59 CONTBUS-A-18, page 2-66
2.8.60 CONTBUS-B-18, page 2-66
2.8.61 CONTBUS-IO-A, page 2-67
2.8.62 CONTBUS-IO-B, page 2-68
2.8.167 LCAS-RX-FAIL, page 2-137 2.8.293 RFI, page 2-212
2.8.168 LCAS-TX-ADD, page 2-137 2.8.294 RFI-L, page 2-213
2.8.169 LCAS-TX-DNU, page 2-138 2.8.295 RFI-P, page 2-213
2.8.297 RING-ID-MIS, page 2-215
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ, page 2-139 2.8.298 RING-MISMATCH, page
2.8.173 LOF (BITS), page 2-139
2.8.299 RING-SW-EAST, page 2-216
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F), page
2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT), page 2-56
2.8.49 CARLOSS (FC), page 2-58
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000), page 2-58
2.8.300 RING-SW-WEST, page 2-216
2.8.303 SD (DS1, DS3), page 2-217
2.8.178 LOF (TRUNK), page 2-143
2.8.304 SD (TRUNK), page 2-219
2.8.308 SF (DS1, DS3), page 2-221
2.8.183 LO-RXPOWER, page 2-146
2.8.309 SF (TRUNK), page 2-222
2.8.185 LOS (BITS), page 2-147
2.8.188 LOS (EC1, EC1-12), page
2.8.314 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HI
2.8.63 CTNEQPT-MISMATCH, page 2-69 2.8.189 LOS (ESCON), page 2-151
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LO
2.8.64 CTNEQPT-PBPROT, page 2-70
2.8.190 LOS (FUDC), page 2-151
2.8.316 SHUTTER-OPEN, page 2-225
2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK, page 2-71
2.8.192 LOS (MSUDC), page 2-153
2.8.319 SPAN-SW-EAST, page 2-227
2.8.320 SPAN-SW-WEST, page 2-227
2.8.69 DSP-COMM-FAIL, page 2-75
2.8.195 LOS (TRUNK), page 2-156
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-9
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index (continued)
2.8.72 DUP-NODENAME, page 2-76
2.8.197 LOS-P (OCH), page 2-159
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS), page
2.8.200 LO-TXPOWER, page 2-164
2.8.75 ENCAP-MISMATCH-P, page 2-77
2.8.202 LPBKDS1FEAC, page 2-166 2.8.328 SSM-PRC, page 2-232
2.8.204 LPBKDS3FEAC, page 2-166 2.8.330 SSM-RES, page 2-233
2.8.331 SSM-SDN-TN, page 2-233
2.8.206 LPBKFACILITY (CE100T), page 2-167
2.8.82 ERFI-P-PAYLD, page 2-84
2.8.84 ERROR-CONFIG, page 2-85
2.8.208 LPBKFACILITY (EC1), page 2-168
2.8.209 LPBKFACILITY (ESCON), page 2-169
2.8.210 LPBKFACILITY (FC), page
2.8.85 ETH-LINKLOSS, page 2-86
2.8.86 E-W-MISMATCH, page 2-87
2.8.211 LPBKFACILITY (FCMR), page 2-169
2.8.212 LPBKFACILITY (G1000), page 2-169
2.8.213 LPBKFACILITY (GE), page
2.8.88 EXERCISE-RING-FAIL, page 2-89 2.8.214 LPBKFACILITY (ISC), page
2.8.89 EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL, page 2-90 2.8.215 LPBKFACILITY (OCN), page 2-171
2.8.216 LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK), page 2-171
2.8.91 EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT, page
2.8.93 FAILTOSW-PATH, page 2-92
2.8.217 LPKTERMINAL (CE100T), page 2-172
2.8.219 LPBKTERMINAL (EC1), page 2-173
2-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.2 Alarms and Conditions Indexed By Alphabetical Entry
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index (continued)
2.8.97 FC-NO-CREDITS, page 2-98
2.8.221 LPBKTERMINAL (FC), page 2-173
2.8.222 LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR), page 2-174
2.8.223 LPBKTERMINAL (G1000), page 2-174
2.8.224 LPBKTERMINAL (GE), page 2-175
2.8.225 LPBKTERMINAL (ISC), page 2-175
2.8.100 FE-DS1-MULTLOS, page 2-100
2.8.226 LPBKTERMINAL (OCN), page 2-175
2.8.101 FE-DS1-NSA, page 2-100
2.8.103 FE-DS1-SNGLLOS, page 2-101
2.8.355 TPTFAIL (CE100T), page
2.8.104 FE-DS3-NSA, page 2-102
2.8.356 TPTFAIL (FCMR), page 2-244
2.8.231 MANSWTOINT, page 2-177 2.8.357 TPTFAIL (G1000), page 2-245
2.8.106 FE-EQPT-NSA, page 2-103
2.8.107 FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN, page
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI, page 2-178 2.8.358 TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000), page 2-245
2.8.233 MANSWTOSEC, page 2-178 2.8.359 TRMT, page 2-246
2.8.108 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING, page
2.8.109 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN, page
2.8.111 FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN, page
2.8.114 FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN, page
2.8.115 FE-MANWKSWPR-RING, page
2.8.239 MEA (EQPT), page 2-181
2.8.367 UT-COMM-FAIL, page 2-252
2.8.116 FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN, page
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-11
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.3 Alarm Logical Objects
Table 2-6 ONS 15454 Alarm and Condition Alphabetical Index (continued)
2.8.118 FIBERTEMP-DEG, page 2-110
2.8.119 FORCED-REQ, page 2-110
2.8.120 FORCED-REQ-RING, page 2-110 2.8.246 NOT-AUTHENTICATED, page 2-186
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111 2.8.247 OCHNC-INC, page 2-187
2.8.122 FRCDSWTOINT, page 2-111
2.8.123 FRCDSWTOPRI, page 2-111
2.8.124 FRCDSWTOSEC, page 2-112
2.8.125 FRCDSWTOTHIRD, page 2-112
2.8.252 ODUK-AIS-PM, page 2-188
2.3 Alarm Logical Objects
The CTC alarm profile list organizes all alarms and conditions according to the logical objects they are raised against. These logical objects represent physical objects such as cards, logical objects such as circuits, or transport and signal monitoring entities such as the SONET or ITU-T G.709 optical overhead bits. One alarm might appear in multiple entries when it can be raised against multiple objects. For example, the loss of signal (LOS) alarm can be raised against the optical signal (OC-N) or the optical transport layer overhead (OTN) as well as other objects. Therefore, both OCN:LOS and OTN:LOS appear in the list (as well as the other objects).
Alarm profile list objects are defined in
Note Alarm logical object names can appear as abbreviated versions of standard terms used in the system and the documentation. For example, the “OCN” logical object refers to the OC-N signal. Logical object names or industry-standard terms are used within the entries as appropriate.
Table 2-7
Logical Object
2R
AICI-AEP
AIP
AOTS
BIC
BITS
Alarm Logical Object Type Definition
Definition
Reshape and retransmit (used for transponder [TXP] cards).
Alarm Interface Controller–International/alarm expansion panel. A combination term that refers to this platform’s AIC card.
Auxiliary interface protection module.
Amplified optical transport section.
Backplane interface connector.
Building integrated timing supply incoming references (BITS-1, BITS-2).
2-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.3 Alarm Logical Objects
September 2007
GFP-FAC
ISC
ML1000
ML100T
MSUDC
NE
NE-SREF
OCH
Table 2-7
Logical Object
BPLANE
CE100T
DS1
DS3
E1000F
E100T
EC1
EC1-12
ENVALRM
EQPT
ESCON
EXT-SREF
FAN
FC
FCMR
FUDC
G1000
GE
OCHNC-CONN
OCN
Alarm Logical Object Type Definition (continued)
Definition
The backplane.
CE-100T-8 card.
A DS-1 line on a DS-1 or DS-3 electrical card (DS1-14, DS1N-14, DS3N-12E,
DS3XM-6, DS3XM-12).
A DS-3 line on a DS-3 electrical card (DS3-12, DS3N-12, DS3-12E, DS3XM-6, and
DS3XM-12).
An E1000 Ethernet card (E1000-2, E1000-2G).
An E100 Ethernet card (E100T-12, E100T-G).
Any EC1 port (including EC1-12 card ports).
An EC1-12 electrical card.
An environmental alarm port.
A card, its physical objects, and its logical objects as they are located in any of the eight non-common card slots. The EQPT object is used for alarms that refer to the card itself and all other objects on the card including ports, lines, synchronous transport signals (STS), and virtual tributaries (VT).
Enterprise System Connection fiber optic technology, referring to the following
TXP cards: TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G.
BITS outgoing references (SYNC-BITS1, SYNC-BITS2).
Fan-tray assembly.
Fibre channel data transfer architecture, referring to the following muxponder
(MXP) or TXP cards: MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E.
An FC_MR-4 Fibre Channel card.
SONET F1 byte user data channel for ONS 15454 ML-Series Ethernet cards.
A G1000 Ethernet card (G1000-4).
Gigabit Ethernet, referring to the following MXP or TXP cards: MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G.
Generic framing procedure facility port, referring to all MXP and TXP cards.
Inter-service channel, referring to MXP and TXP cards.
An ML1000 Ethernet card (ML1000-2).
An ML100 card (ML100T-12).
Multiplex section user data channel.
The entire network element.
The timing status of the NE.
The optical channel, referring to dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) cards.
The optical channel connection, referring to DWDM cards.
An OC-N line on any OC-N card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-13
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-7
Logical Object
OMS
OSC-RING
OTS
PPM
PWR
STSMON
STSTRM
TRUNK
VCG
VT-MON
VT-TERM
Alarm Logical Object Type Definition (continued)
Definition
Optical multiplex section.
Optical service channel ring.
Optical transport section.
Pluggable port module, referring to MXP and TXP cards.
Power equipment.
STS alarm detection at the monitor point (upstream from the cross-connect).
STS alarm detection at termination (downstream from the cross-connect).
The optical or DWDM card carrying the high-speed signal; referring to MXP or
TXP cards.
A virtual concatenation group of VTs.
VT1 alarm detection at the monitor point (upstream from the cross-connect).
VT1 alarm detection at termination (downstream from the cross-connect).
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 lists all ONS 15454 Release 5.0 alarms and logical objects as they are given in the system
alarm profile. The list entries are organized by logical object name and then by alarm or condition name.
Each entry contains a page number that refers to an alarm description in this chapter. Where appropriate, the alarm entries also contain troubleshooting procedures.
Note In a mixed network containing different types of nodes (such as ONS 15310, ONS 15454, and ONS
15600), the initially displayed alarm list in the Provisioning > Alarm Profiles > Alarm Profile Editor tab lists all conditions applicable to all nodes in the network. However, when you load the default severity profile from a node, only applicable alarms will display severity levels. Nonapplicable alarms can display “use default” or “unset.”
Note In some cases this list does not follow alphabetical order, but it does reflect the order shown in CTC.
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object
2R:
2R:
2R:
2R:
OCN:
OCN:
OCN:
OCN:
2-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
2R:
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111
2R:
2R:
2R:
2R:
2R:
OCN:
FC: 2.8.317 SIGLOSS, page 2-225
2R:
FCMR: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
2R:
2R:
2.8.236 MANUAL-REQ-SPAN, page 2-179
2R:
FCMR: 2.8.97 FC-NO-CREDITS, page
OCN:
FCMR: 2.8.135 GFP-CSF, page 2-117
2R:
2R:
OCN:
OCN:
AICI-AEP:
FCMR: 2.8.139 GFP-NO-BUFFERS, page 2-119
OCN: 2.8.344 SYNC-FREQ, page 2-238
AICI-AIE:
OCN:
AICI-AIE:
OCN:
AIP:
AIP: 2.8.237 MEA (AIP), page 2-179 FCMR:
OCN:
OCN:
AIP: 2.8.244 MFGMEM, page 2-185
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED, page 2-33
AOTS:
AOTS: 2.8.6 AMPLI-INIT, page 2-32
OMS:
2.8.10 APC-OUT-OF-RANGE, page 2-34
OMS:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-15
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
AOTS:
AOTS:
FUDC:
FUDC:
OMS: 2.8.196 LOS-O, page 2-157
AOTS: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42 G1000:
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS), page
AOTS: 2.8.23 AS-MT, page 2-43 G1000:
AOTS: 2.8.55 CASETEMP-DEG, page 2-63
AOTS: 2.8.118 FIBERTEMP-DEG, page 2-110
AOTS: 2.8.130 GAIN-HFAIL, page
AOTS: 2.8.132 GAIN-LFAIL, page
AOTS: 2.8.162 LASERBIAS-DEG, page 2-134
AOTS: 2.8.163 LASERBIAS-FAIL, page 2-134
AOTS: 2.8.165 LASERTEMP-DEG, page 2-135
G1000:
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000), page 2-58
G1000:
G1000:
GE:
GE:
GE:
GE:
G1000: 2.8.357 TPTFAIL (G1000), page
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE), page 2-61
AOTS: 2.8.262 OPWR-HFAIL, page
AOTS: 2.8.264 OPWR-LFAIL, page
GE:
GE:
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111
OTS:
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED, page 2-33
GE:
GE:
OTS:
GE: 2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER, page 2-123
GE: 2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER, page 2-125
AOTS: 2.8.265 OSRION, page 2-196
GE:
AOTS: 2.8.274 PARAM-MISM, page 2-201
GE:
OTS:
OTS:
2-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
AOTS:
AOTS:
AOTS:
AOTS:
GE:
GE:
2.8.213 LPBKFACILITY (GE), page 2-170
GE:
GE:
OTS:
OTS:
OTS:
OTS:
BIC:
GE:
OTS:
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS), page
BITS:
BITS:
BITS:
GE:
BITS:
BITS:
GE:
GE:
BITS:
BITS:
GFP-FAC:
OTS:
GFP-FAC:
OTS:
2.8.314 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIG
BITS: 2.8.327 SSM-OFF, page 2-232
OTS:
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LO
OTS:
BITS: 2.8.329 SSM-PRS, page 2-233 GFP-FAC:
BITS: 2.8.330 SSM-RES, page 2-233 GFP-FAC:
BITS:
GFP-FAC:
OTS:
OTS:
BITS: 2.8.334 SSM-ST2, page 2-234
OTS:
BITS: 2.8.335 SSM-ST3, page 2-234
GFP-FAC:
OTS:
BITS:
ISC:
BITS: 2.8.337 SSM-ST4, page 2-234
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-17
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
BITS: 2.8.338 SSM-STU, page 2-235
BITS:
ISC: 2.8.52 CARLOSS (ISC), page 2-61
BITS:
BPLANE:
ISC:
ISC:
PPM:
BPLANE:
ISC:
CE100T: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
ISC:
PPM:
PPM:
CE100T: 2.8.23 AS-MT, page 2-43
ISC:
ISC:
PPM:
ISC:
ISC:
ISC:
PWR: 2.8.73 EHIBATVG, page 2-76
ISC:
CE100T: 2.8.301 RPRW, page 2-216
ISC:
2.8.214 LPBKFACILITY (ISC), page 2-170
ISC:
2.8.225 LPBKTERMINAL (ISC), page 2-175
DS1:
DS1:
PWR: 2.8.375 VOLT-MISM, page 2-255
STSMON:
DS1:
DS1: 2.8.174 LOF (DS1), page 2-140 ISC:
DS1: 2.8.186 LOS (DS1), page 2-148 ISC:
DS1:
ISC:
DS1:
2.8.203 LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD, page 2-166
ISC:
2-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
DS1:
DS1:
DS1:
DS1:
DS1:
DS1:
ML1000:
ML1000:
ML1000:
STSMON:
ML1000: 2.8.135 GFP-CSF, page 2-117
STSMON:
2.8.93 FAILTOSW-PATH, page 2-92
ML1000:
ML1000:
DS1:
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ, page 2-139
DS1:
ML1000:
2.8.139 GFP-NO-BUFFERS, page 2-119
STSMON:
DS1:
2.8.361 TX-AIS, page 2-247 ML1000:
STSMON:
DS1:
ML1000:
DS3:
STSMON:
DS3:
2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42 ML100T:
DS3:
2.8.23 AS-MT, page 2-43 ML100T:
DS3:
ML100T:
STSMON:
DS3:
DS3:
2.8.100 FE-DS1-MULTLOS, page 2-100
ML100T:
STSMON:
DS3:
DS3:
DS3:
2.8.103 FE-DS1-SNGLLOS, page 2-101
DS3:
ML100T:
STSMON: 2.8.364 UNEQ-P, page 2-249
ML100T: 2.8.138 GFP-LFD, page 2-118
STSMON:
ML100T:
2.8.139 GFP-NO-BUFFERS, page 2-119
ML100T:
STSTRM:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-19
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
DS3:
DS3:
ML100T:
ML100T:
STSTRM:
DS3:
DS3:
STSTRM:
DS3:
DS3:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
DS3: 2.8.175 LOF (DS3), page 2-141
DS3: 2.8.187 LOS (DS3), page 2-149 NE-SREF:
DS3:
NE-SREF:
DS3:
NE-SREF:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
2.8.167 LCAS-RX-FAIL, page 2-137
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
DS3:
2.8.205 LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD, page 2-167
DS3:
NE-SREF:
NE-SREF:
2.8.231 MANSWTOINT, page 2-177
DS3:
NE-SREF:
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI, page 2-178
DS3:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
DS3:
DS3:
NE-SREF:
DS3:
DS3:
NE-SREF:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
E1000F: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
E1000F:
NE-SREF:
STSTRM:
STSTRM:
2-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
E100T:
E100T:
NE-SREF: 2.8.337 SSM-ST4, page
EC1-12:
NE-SREF: 2.8.338 SSM-STU, page
EC1-12: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
EC1-12:
EC1-12:
EC1-12:
EC1-12:
NE-SREF: 2.8.343 SWTOTHIRD, page
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
2.8.54 CARLOSS (TRUNK), page 2-63
TRUNK:
2.8.69 DSP-COMM-FAIL, page 2-75
TRUNK:
EC1-12:
NE-SREF: 2.8.347 SYNCSEC, page
EC1-12:
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
EC1-12:
EC1-12:
EC1:
EC1:
EC1:
NE:
NE:
TRUNK:
NE: 2.8.25 AUD-LOG-LOSS, page 2-44
EC1: 2.8.176 LOF (EC1), page 2-142
NE:
EC1:
2.8.188 LOS (EC1, EC1-12), page 2-150
EC1:
NE:
NE:
EC1:
EC1:
EC1:
EC1:
NE:
2.8.85 ETH-LINKLOSS, page 2-86
TRUNK:
NE:
NE:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-21
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
ENVALRM:
EQPT: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
2.8.199 LOS-P (TRUNK), page 2-163
NE:
TRUNK:
EQPT: 2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT), page 2-56
NE:
NE:
TRUNK:
2.8.59 CONTBUS-A-18, page 2-66
EQPT: 2.8.60 CONTBUS-B-18, page
OCH:
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED, page 2-33
OCH:
TRUNK:
2.8.248 ODUK-1-AIS-PM, page 2-187
TRUNK:
2.8.249 ODUK-2-AIS-PM, page 2-187
OCH:
OCH:
2.8.252 ODUK-AIS-PM, page 2-188
EQPT: 2.8.61 CONTBUS-IO-A, page 2-67
EQPT: 2.8.62 CONTBUS-IO-B, page 2-68
EQPT:
2.8.63 CTNEQPT-MISMATCH, page 2-69
OCH:
OCH:
OCH:
TRUNK: 2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM, page
TRUNK:
2.8.254 ODUK-LCK-PM, page 2-189
TRUNK: 2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM, page
EQPT: 2.8.64 CTNEQPT-PBPROT, page 2-70
EQPT: 2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK, page 2-71
EQPT: 2.8.84 ERROR-CONFIG, page 2-85
OCH:
OCH:
OCH:
2.8.279 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-HI, page 2-205
EQPT: 2.8.87 EXCCOL, page 2-89 OCH:
2.8.280 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-LOW, page 2-205
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
TRUNK: 2.8.258 ODUK-TIM-PM, page
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
2-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
EQPT: 2.8.92 FAILTOSW, page 2-91
OCH:
2.8.281 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-HI, page 2-205
EQPT: 2.8.119 FORCED-REQ, page
OCH:
2.8.282 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW, page 2-205
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
EQPT: 2.8.147 HITEMP, page 2-124 OCH:
EQPT:
2.8.151 IMPROPRMVL, page 2-127
TRUNK: 2.8.270 OTUK-SD, page 2-199
OCH:
EQPT:
EQPT:
OCH:
OCH:
EQPT:
OCH:
EQPT:
EQPT:
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ, page 2-139
EQPT:
EQPT:
EQPT:
OCHNC-CONN: 2.8.247 OCHNC-INC, page 2-187
TRUNK:
OCN:
OCN:
TRUNK:
OCN:
OCN:
TRUNK:
EQPT:
EQPT:
OCN:
2.8.21 APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM, page 2-41
TRUNK: 2.8.324 SSM-DUS, page 2-231
OCN:
EQPT:
OCN:
EQPT: 2.8.285 PROTNA, page 2-208
OCN:
EQPT:
EQPT:
OCN:
OCN:
OCN:
EQPT:
2.8.289 PWR-FAIL-RET-A, page 2-210
EQPT:
2.8.290 PWR-FAIL-RET-B, page 2-211
OCN:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-23
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
EQPT:
2.8.302 RUNCFG-SAVENEED, page 2-217
OCN:
OCN:
OCN:
TRUNK:
ESCON:
TRUNK: 2.8.337 SSM-ST4, page 2-234
ESCON: 2.8.22 AS-CMD, page 2-42
ESCON:
ESCON:
ESCON:
ESCON:
2.8.144 HI-LASERBIAS, page 2-121
OCN:
2.8.88 EXERCISE-RING-FAIL, page 2-89
OCN:
2.8.89 EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL, page 2-90
OCN:
2.8.91 EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT, page
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
OCN:
ESCON:
2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER, page 2-123
ESCON:
2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER, page 2-125
ESCON:
2.8.183 LO-RXPOWER, page 2-146
ESCON:
2.8.200 LO-TXPOWER, page 2-164
ESCON:
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ, page 2-139
OCN:
OCN:
OCN:
2.8.107 FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN, page 2-104
OCN:
2.8.108 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING, page 2-104
TRUNK:
TRUNK:
ESCON:
ESCON:
OCN:
2.8.109 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN, page 2-105
OCN:
2.8.111 FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN, page 2-106
ESCON:
OCN:
2.8.114 FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN, page 2-107
TRUNK:
2.8.378 WVL-MISMATCH, page 2-256
VCG:
2-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.4 Alarm Index by Logical Object Type
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
ESCON:
2.8.236 MANUAL-REQ-SPAN, page 2-179
ESCON:
OCN:
2.8.115 FE-MANWKSWPR-RING, page 2-108
OCN:
2.8.116 FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN, page 2-109
VCG:
ESCON:
ESCON:
EXT-SREF:
EXT-SREF:
OCN:
OCN:
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111
VT-MON:
VT-MON:
VT-MON:
EXT-SREF:
OCN:
EXT-SREF:
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI, page 2-178
OCN:
EXT-SREF:
EXT-SREF:
OCN:
OCN:
VT-MON:
VT-MON:
OCN:
VT-MON:
VT-MON:
EXT-SREF:
EXT-SREF:
OCN:
OCN:
2.8.159 KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAIL
VT-MON:
OCN:
EXT-SREF: 2.8.346 SYNCPRI, page
EXT-SREF:
EXT-SREF:
OCN: 2.8.170 LKOUTPR-S, page 2-138
OCN:
FAN:
FAN:
VT-MON:
VT-TERM:
VT-TERM:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-25
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.5 DS3-12 E Line Alarms
Table 2-8 Alarm Index by Logical Object (continued)
FAN:
FAN:
OCN:
OCN:
2.8.168 LCAS-TX-ADD, page 2-137
VT-TERM: 2.8.169 LCAS-TX-DNU, page 2-138
VT-TERM: 2.8.180 LOM, page 2-144
OCN:
2.8.235 MANUAL-REQ-RING, page 2-178
VT-TERM: 2.8.182 LOP-V, page 2-145
VT-TERM: 2.8.259 OOU-TPT, page
OCN: 2.8.284 PRC-DUPID, page 2-207
FC: 2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN, page 2-111
FC: 2.8.144 HI-LASERBIAS, page
OCN:
OCN:
OCN: 2.8.298 RING-MISMATCH, page
VT-TERM: 2.8.306 SD-P, page 2-220
VT-TERM: 2.8.311 SF-P, page 2-223
OCN:
VT-TERM: 2.8.323 SQM, page 2-230
OCN:
VT-TERM: 2.8.354 TIM-V, page 2-244
OCN:
— —
2.5 DS3-12 E Line Alarms
Unlike the standard DS-3 card, which uses the unframed format exclusively, the DS3-12E card provides three choices: unframed, M13, or C Bit. The choice of framing format determines the line alarms that the DS3-12E card reports. The following table lists the line alarms reported under each format.
The choice of framing format does not affect the reporting of STS alarms. Regardless of format, the
DS3-12E card reports the same STS alarms and conditions, listed in
Table 2-9 , as the standard DS-3 card
reports.
2-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.6 Trouble Notifications
Table 2-9 DS3-12E Line Alarms
Alarm
LOS DS1 or DS3)
AIS
LOF (DS1 or DS3)
FE-IDLW
RAI
Terminal Lpbk
(LPBKTERMINAL for DS1 or
DS3)
Facility Lpbk (LPBKFACILITY for DS1 or DS3)
Yes
Yes
LPBKDS1FEAC or
LPBKDS3FEAC
FE Common Equipment
Failure-NSA (FE-DS1-NSA or
FE-DS3-NSA)
No
No
No
No
FE Equipment Failure-SA
(FE-DS3-SA)
FE-LOS
FE-LOF
FE-AIS
FE-IDLE
FE Equipment Failure-NSA
(FE-EQPT-NSA)
UNFRAMED
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
M13
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CBIT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2.6 Trouble Notifications
The ONS 15454 system reports trouble by utilizing standard alarm and condition characteristics, standard severities following the rules in Telcordia GR-253, and graphical user interface (GUI) state indicators.These notifications are described in the following paragraphs.
The ONS 15454 uses standard Telcordia categories to characterize levels of trouble. The system reports trouble notifications as alarms and status or descriptive notifications (if configured to do so) as conditions in the CTC Alarms window. Alarms typically signify a problem that the user needs to remedy, such as a loss of signal. Conditions do not necessarily require troubleshooting.
2.6.1 Alarm Characteristics
The ONS 15454 uses standard alarm entities to identify what is causing trouble. All alarms stem from hardware, software, environment, or operator-originated problems whether or not they affect service.
Current alarms for the network, CTC session, node, or card are listed in the Alarms tab. (In addition, cleared alarms are also found in the History tab.)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-27
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.6.2 Condition Characteristics
2.6.2 Condition Characteristics
Conditions include any problem detected on an ONS 15454 shelf. They can include standing or transient notifications. A snapshot of all current raised, standing conditions on the network, node, or card can be retrieved in the CTC Conditions window or using TL1's set of RTRV-COND commands. (In addition, some but not all cleared conditions are also found in the History tab.)
For a comprehensive list of all conditions, refer to the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide .
2.6.3 Severities
The ONS 15454 uses Telcordia-devised standard severities for alarms and conditions: Critical (CR),
Major (MJ), Minor (MN), Not Alarmed (NA) and Not Reported (NR). These are described below:
• A Critical alarm generally indicates severe, service-affecting trouble that needs immediate correction. Loss of traffic on an STS-1, which can hold 28 DS-1 circuits, would be a Critical (CR),
Service-Affecting (SA) alarm.
•
•
A Major (MJ) alarm is a serious alarm, but the trouble has less impact on the network. For example, loss of traffic on more than five DS-1 circuits is Critical, but loss of traffic on one to five DS-1 circuits is Major (MJ).
Minor (MN) alarms generally are those that do not affect service. For example, the APS byte failure
(APSB) alarm indicates that line terminating equipment detects a byte failure on the signal that could prevent traffic from properly executing a traffic switch.
•
•
Not Alarmed (NA) conditions are information indicators, such as for free-run synchronization state
(FRNGSYNC) or a forced-switch to primary (FRCSWTOPRI) timing event. They might or might not require troubleshooting, as indicated in the entries.
Not Reported (NR) conditions occur as a secondary result of another event. For example, the alarm indication signal (AIS), with severity NR, is inserted by a downstream node when an LOS (CR or
MJ) alarm occurs upstream. These conditions do not in themselves require troubleshooting, but are to be expected in the presence of primary alarms.
All alarm, condition, and unreported event severities listed in this manual are default profile settings.
However in situations when traffic is not lost—such as when the alarm occurs on protected ports or circuits—alarms having Critical (CR) or Major (MJ) default severities can be demoted to lower severities such as Minor (MN) or Non-Service Affecting (NSA) as defined in Telcordia GR-474.
Severities can also be customized for an entire network or for single nodes, from the network level down to the port level by changing or downloading customized alarm profiles. These custom severities are subject to the standard severity-demoting rules given in Telcordia GR-474. Procedures for customizing alarm severities are located in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 7, “Manage Alarms.”
2.6.4 Service Effect
Service-Affecting (SA) alarms—those that interrupt service—might be Critical (CR), Major (MJ), or
Minor (MN) severity alarms. In some cases the severity of an alarm might not correspond to its service effect. For example, the AUTOSW-LOP alarm for the VTMON object is minor but service-affecting because it indicates a traffic switch has occurred directing traffic away from a loss of circuit path.
Non-Service Affecting (NSA) alarms always have a Minor (MN) default severity.
2-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.6.5 States
2.6.5 States
The Alarms or History tab state (ST) column indicate the disposition of the alarm or condition as follows:
• A raised (R) event is one that is active.
•
•
A cleared (C) event is one that is no longer active.
A transient (T) event is one that is automatically raised and cleared in CTC during system changes such as user login, logout, loss of connection to node view, etc. Transient events do not require user action.
Note Transient events are not defined in this documentation release.
2.7 Safety Summary
This section covers safety considerations designed to ensure safe operation of the ONS 15454. Personnel should not perform any procedures in this chapter unless they understand all safety precautions, practices, and warnings for the system equipment. Some troubleshooting procedures require installation or removal of cards; in these instances users should pay close attention to the following caution.
Caution Hazardous voltage or energy could be present on the backplane when the system is operating. Use caution when removing or installing cards.
Some troubleshooting procedures require installation or removal of OC-192 cards; in these instances users should pay close attention to the following warning.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-29
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8 Alarm Procedures
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan. Exposed circuitry could constitute an energy hazard. Statement 206
Warning The power supply circuitry for the equipment can constitute an energy hazard. Before you install or replace the equipment, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). Metal objects can come into contact with exposed power supply wiring or circuitry inside the DSLAM equipment.
This could cause the metal objects to heat up and cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the equipment. Statement 207
2.8 Alarm Procedures
This section list alarms alphabetically and includes some conditions commonly encountered when troubleshooting alarms. The severity, description, and troubleshooting procedure accompany each alarm and condition.
Note When you check the status of alarms for cards, ensure that the alarm filter icon in the lower right corner is not indented. If it is, click it to turn it off. When you are done checking for alarms, you can click the alarm filter icon again to turn filtering back on. For more information about alarm filtering, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 7, “Manage Alarms.”
Note When checking alarms, ensure that alarm suppression is not enabled on the card or port. For more information about alarm suppression, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 7,
“Manage Alarms.”
2.8.1 AIS
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, DS3, FUDC, MSUDC, TRUNK
The Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) condition indicates that this node is detecting AIS in the incoming signal SONET overhead.
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
Note ONS 15454 DS-3 and EC-1 terminal (inward) loopbacks do not transmit an AIS in the direction away from the loopback. Instead of AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted into the loopback is provided.
2-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.2 AIS-L
Clear the AIS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Determine whether there are alarms on the upstream nodes and equipment, especially the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
, or out-of-service (OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD) ports.
Clear the upstream alarms using the applicable procedures in this chapter.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.2 AIS-L
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12, OCN
The AIS Line condition indicates that this node is detecting line-level AIS in the incoming signal. This alarm is secondary to another alarm occurring simultaneously in an upstream node.
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
Clear the AIS-L Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.3 AIS-P
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The AIS Path condition means that this node is detecting AIS in the incoming path. This alarm is secondary to another alarm occurring simultaneously in an upstream node.
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-31
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.4 AIS-V
Clear the AIS-P Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.4 AIS-V
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: VT-MON, VT-TERM
The AIS VT condition means that this node is detecting AIS in the incoming VT-level path.
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
See the
“1.12.2 AIS-V on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Unused VT Circuits” section on page 1-143 for
more information.
Clear the AIS-V Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.5 ALS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, AOTS, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) condition occurs when a DWDM Optical Preamplifier
(OPT-PRE) or Optical Booster (OPT-BST) Amplifier card is switched on. The turn-on process lasts approximately nine seconds, and the condition clears after approximately 10 seconds.
Note ALS is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.6 AMPLI-INIT
•
•
Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Occurs only on DWDM (Software R4.5) nodes
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-32 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED
The Amplifier Initialized condition occurs when an amplifier card (OPT-BST or OPT-PRE) is not able to calculate gain. This condition typically accompanies the
“APC-DISABLED” alarm on page 2-33
.
Clear the AMPLI-INIT Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
on the most recently created circuit.
Recreate this circuit using the procedures in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
If the condition does not clear, log onto http://www.cisco.com/tac for more information or call TAC
(1 800 553-2447).
2.8.7 APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Automatic Power Control (APC) Correction Skipped condition occurs when the actual power level of a DWDM channel exceeds the threshold setting by 3 dBm or more. The APC compares actual power levels with power level thresholds every 10 minutes or after any channel allocation is performed. If the actual power level is above or below the setting within 3 dBm, APC corrects the level. If the actual power level exceeds the threshold by +3 dBm or –3 dBm, APC cannot correct the level and the
APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED condition is raised.
There is no operator action to resolve this condition. It stays raised until the power level problem is resolved and APC takes a normal reading. For more information about APC, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.
Note APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.8 APC-DISABLED
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The APC Disabled alarm occurs when the information related to the number of DWDM channels is not reliable. The alarm can occur when the any related alarms also occur: the
“AMPLI-INIT” condition on page 2-32
, the
“EQPT” alarm on page 2-82 , the
“IMPROPRMVL” alarm on page 2-127 , or the
(EQPT)” alarm on page 2-181 . If the alarm occurs with the creation of the first circuit, delete and
recreate the circuit. For more information about APC, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.
Clear the APC-DISABLED Condition
Step 1 Complete the appropriate procedure to clear the main alarm:
•
Clear the EQPT Alarm, page 2-82
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-33
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.9 APC-END
Step 2
Step 3
•
Clear the IMPROPRMVL Alarm, page 2-127
•
Clear the MEA (EQPT) Alarm, page 2-181
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 and then recreate
it using procedures in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.9 APC-END
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: NE
The APC Terminated on Manual Request condition is raised when the APC application terminates after being manually launched from CTC or TL1. It is an informational condition. For more information about
APC, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.
Note APC-END is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.10 APC-OUT-OF-RANGE
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The APC Out of Range condition is raised on DWDM amplifier cards (OPT-PRE and OPT-BST); optical service channel cards (OSCM and OSC-CSM); multiplexer cards (32MUX-O); demultiplexer cards
(32DMX, 32DMX-O), and optical add/drop multiplexer cards (AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x,
AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x) when the requested gain or attenuation setpoint cannot be set because it exceeds the port parameter range. For example, this condition is raised when APC attempts to set the
OPT-BST gain higher than 20 dBm (the maximum set-point) or set the attenuation on the express variable optical attenuation (VOA) lower than 0dBm (the minimum set-point).
Clear the APC-OUT-OF-RANGE Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Provision the correct setpoint. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide . The condition clears when the APC setting is corrected and after APC does not detect any errors in its next cycle.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.11 APSB
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
2-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.12 APSCDFLTK
• Logical Object: OCN
The Automatic Protection Switching (APS) Channel Byte Failure alarm occurs when line terminating equipment detects protection switching byte failure or an invalid switching code in the incoming APS signal. Some older non-Cisco SONET nodes send invalid APS codes if they are configured in a 1+1 protection scheme with newer SONET nodes, such as the ONS 15454. These invalid codes cause an
APSB on an ONS 15454.
Step 1
Step 2
Use an optical test set to examine the incoming SONET overhead to confirm inconsistent or invalid
K bytes. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. If corrupted
K bytes are confirmed and the upstream equipment is functioning properly, the upstream equipment might not interoperate effectively with the ONS 15454.
If the alarm does not clear and the overhead shows inconsistent or invalid K bytes, you might need to replace the upstream cards for protection switching to operate properly. Complete the
Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
Caution For the ONS 15454, removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.12 APSCDFLTK
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The APS Default K Byte Received alarm occurs during bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR) provisioning or when a BLSR is not properly configured, for example, when a four-node BLSR has one node configured as a path protection. When this misconfiguration occurs, a node in a path protection or
1+1 configuration does not send the two valid K1/K2 APS bytes anticipated by a system configured for
BLSR. One of the bytes sent is considered invalid by the BLSR configuration. The K1/K2 byte is monitored by receiving equipment for link-recovery information.
Troubleshooting for APSCDFLTK is often similar to troubleshooting for the
“BLSROSYNC” alarm on page 2-53
.
Clear the APSCDFLTK Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259 to verify that
each node has a unique node ID number.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-35
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.13 APSC-IMP
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Repeat
Step 1 for all nodes in the ring.
If two nodes have the same node ID number, complete the
“Change a BLSR Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259
to change one node ID number so that each node ID is unique.
If the alarm does not clear, verify correct configuration of east port and west port optical fibers. (See the
“E-W-MISMATCH” alarm on page 2-87 .) West port fibers must connect to east port fibers and vice
versa. The Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable,” provides a procedure for fibering BLSRs.
If the alarm does not clear and the network is a four-fiber BLSR, ensure that each protect fiber is connected to another protect fiber and each working fiber is connected to another working fiber. The software does not report any alarm if a working fiber is incorrectly attached to a protect fiber.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Verify Node Visibility for Other Nodes” procedure on page 2-260
.
If nodes are not visible, complete the
“Verify or Create Node Section DCC Terminations” procedure on page 2-272
to ensure that SONET data communications channel (SDCC) terminations exist on each node.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.13 APSC-IMP
•
•
An Improper SONET APS Code alarm indicates three consecutive, identical frames containing:
• Unused code in bits 6 through 8 of byte K2.
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
•
Codes that are irrelevant to the specific protection switching operation being requested.
Requests that are irrelevant to the ring state of the ring (such as a span protection switch request in a two-fiber ring NE).
• ET code in K2 bits 6 through 8 received on the incoming span, but not sourced from the outgoing span.
Note This alarm can occur on a VT tunnel when it does not have VT circuits provisioned. It can also occur when the exercise command or a lockout is applied to a span. An externally switched span does not raise this alarm because traffic is preempted.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
2-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.14 APSCINCON
Clear the APSC-IMP Alarm
Step 1 Use an optical test set to determine the validity of the K byte signal by examining the received signal.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the K byte is invalid, the problem is with upstream equipment and not in the reporting ONS 15454.
Troubleshoot the upstream equipment using the procedures in this chapter, as applicable. If the upstream nodes are not ONS 15454s, consult the appropriate user documentation.
If the K byte is valid, verify that each node has a ring name that matches the other node ring names.
Complete the
“Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259 .
for all nodes in the ring.
If a node has a ring name that does not match the other nodes, make that node’s ring name identical to the other nodes. Complete the
“Change a BLSR Ring Name” procedure on page 2-259
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.14 APSCINCON
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
An APS Inconsistent alarm means that an inconsistent APS byte is present. The SONET overhead contains K1/K2 APS bytes that notify receiving equipment, such as the ONS 15454, to switch the
SONET signal from a working to a protect path. An inconsistent APS code occurs when three consecutive frames do not contain identical APS bytes. Inconsistent APS bytes give the receiving equipment conflicting commands about switching.
Clear the APSCINCON Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Look for other alarms, especially the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , the
“LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143
, or the
“AIS” condition on page 2-30 . Clearing these alarms clears the APSCINCON alarm.
If an APSINCON alarm occurs with no other alarms, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.15 APSCM
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-37
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.16 APSCNMIS
The APS Channel Mismatch alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 expects a working channel but receives a protect channel. In many cases, the working and protect channels are crossed and the protect channel is active. If the fibers are crossed and the working line is active, the alarm does not occur. The APSCM alarm occurs only on the ONS 15454 when bidirectional protection is used on OC-N cards in a 1+1 configuration.
Warning On the ONS 15454 OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the APSCM Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the working-card channel fibers are physically connected directly to the adjoining node working-card channel fibers.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
If the fibers are correctly connected, verify that the protection-card channel fibers are physically connected directly to the adjoining node protection-card channel fibers.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.16 APSCNMIS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
The APS Node ID Mismatch alarm occurs when the source node ID contained in the incoming APS channel K2 byte is not present in the ring map. The APSCNMIS alarm could occur and clear when a
BLSR is being provisioned. If so, you can disregard the temporary occurrence. If the APSCNMIS remains, the alarm clears when a K byte with a valid source node ID is received.
2-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.17 APSIMP
Clear the APSCNMIS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Complete the “Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259 to verify that
each node has a unique node ID number.
If the Node ID column contains any two nodes with the same node ID listed, record the repeated node ID.
Click Close in the Ring Map dialog box.
If two nodes have the same node ID number, complete the
Note If the node names shown in the network view do not correlate with the node IDs, log into each node and click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs. The BLSR window shows the node ID of the login node.
Note Applying and removing a lockout on a span causes the ONS node to generate a new K byte. The
APSCNMIS alarm clears when the node receives a K byte containing the correct node ID.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
If the alarm does not clear, use the
“Initiate a Lock Out on a BLSR Protect Span” procedure on page 2-266
to lockout the span.
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
to clear the lockout.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.17 APSIMP
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The APS Invalid Mode condition occurs if a 1+1 protection group is not properly configured at both nodes to send or receive the correct APS byte. A node that is either configured for no protection or is configured for path protection or BLSR protection does not send the right K2 APS byte anticipated by a system configured for 1+1 protection. The 1+1 protect port monitors the incoming K2 APS byte and raises this alarm if it does not receive the byte.
The condition is superseded by an APS, APSCM, or APSMM. It is not superseded by AIS or remote defect indication (RDI) line alarms. It clears when the port receives a valid code for 10 ms.
Clear the APSIMP Condition
Step 1 Check the configuration of the other node in the 1+1 protection group. If the remote node is not configured for 1+1 protection, create the group. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 4, “Turn Up Node.”
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-39
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.18 APS-INV-PRIM
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the other end of the group is properly configured or the alarm does not clear after you have provisioned the group correctly, verify that the working ports and protect ports are cabled correctly.
Ensure that both protect ports are configured for SONET.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.18 APS-INV-PRIM
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Optimized 1+1 APS Primary Facility condition occurs on OC-N cards in an optimized 1+1 protection system if the incoming primary section header does not indicate whether it is primary or secondary.
Note APS-INV-PRIM is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting. If the APS switch is related to other alarms, troubleshoot these alarms as necessary using the procedures in this chapter.
2.8.19 APS-PRIM-FAC
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Optimized 1+1 APS Invalid Primary Section condition occurs on OC-N cards in an optimized 1+1 protection system if there is an APS status switch between the primary and secondary facilities to identify which port is primary.
Note APS-INV-PRIM is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting. If the APS switch is related to other alarms, troubleshoot these alarms as necessary using the procedures in this chapter.
Clear the APS-PRIM-FAC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
This condition clears when the card receives a valid primary section indication (1 or 2).
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.20 APSMM
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
2-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.21 APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM
An APS Mode Mismatch failure alarm occurs on OC-N cards when there is a mismatch of the protection switching schemes at the two ends of the span, such as being bidirectional and unidirectional at each end.
Each end of a span must be provisioned the same way: bidirectional and bidirectional, or unidirectional and unidirectional. APSMM can also occur if a non-Cisco vendor’s equipment is provisioned as 1:N and the ONS 15454 is provisioned as 1+1.
If one end is provisioned for 1+1 protection switching and the other is provisioned for path protection protection switching, an APSMM alarm occurs in the ONS 15454 that is provisioned for 1+1 protection switching.
Clear the APSMM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
For the reporting ONS 15454, display node view and verify the protection scheme provisioning: a.
Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
b.
Click the 1+1 protection group configured for the OC-N cards.
The chosen protection group is the protection group optically connected (with data communications channel, or DCC, connectivity) to the remote node.
c.
d.
Click Edit .
Record whether the Bidirectional Switching check box is checked.
Click OK in the Edit Protection Group dialog box.
Log into the remote-node node and verify that the OC-N 1+1 protection group is provisioned.
Verify that the Bidirectional Switching check box matches the checked or unchecked condition of the box recorded in
. If not, change it to match.
Click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.21 APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Optimized 1+1 APS Primary Section Mismatch condition occurs on OC-N cards in an optimized
1+1 protection system if there is a mismatch between the primary section of the local node facility and the primary section of the remote-node facility.
Clear the APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM Alarm
Step 1 Ensure that the local node and remote-node ports are correctly provisioned with the same way. For more information about optimized 1+1 configurations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 4, “Turn Up Node.”
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-41
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.22 AS-CMD
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.22 AS-CMD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, AOTS, BPLANE, CE100T, DS1, DS3, E100T, E1000F, EC1, EC1-12, EQPT,
ESCON, FC, FCMR, G1000, GE, GFP-FAC, ISC, ML100T, ML1000, NE, OCH, OCN, OMS, OTS,
PPM, PWR, TRUNK
The Alarms Suppressed by User Command condition applies to the network element (NE object), backplane, a single card, or a port on a card. It occurs when alarms are suppressed for that object and its subordinate objects. For example, suppressing alarms on a card also suppresses alarms on its ports.
Clear the AS-CMD Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
For all nodes, in node view, click the Conditions tab.
Click Retrieve . If you have already retrieved conditions, look under the Object column and Eqpt Type column and note what entity the condition is reported against, such as a port, slot, or shelf.
• If the condition is reported against a slot and card, alarms were either suppressed for the entire card or for one of the ports. Note the slot number and continue with
.
If the condition is reported against the backplane, go to
•
• If the condition is reported against the NE object, go to
.
Determine whether alarms are suppressed for a port and if so, raise the suppressed alarms: a.
b.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Alarm Profiles > Alarm Behavior tabs.
•
•
If the Suppress Alarms column check box is checked for a port row, deselect it and click Apply .
If the Suppress Alarms column check box is not checked for a port row, click
View > Go to Previous View .
If the AS-CMD condition is reported for a card and not an individual port, in node view click the
Provisioning > Alarm Profiles > Alarm Behavior tabs.
Locate the row number for the reported card slot.
Click the Suppress Alarms column check box to deselect the option for the card row.
If the condition is reported for the backplane, the alarms are suppressed for cards such as the ONS 15454
AIP that are not in the optical or electrical slots. To clear the alarm: a.
b.
a.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Alarm Profiles > Alarm Behavior tabs.
In the backplane row, uncheck the Suppress Alarms column check box.
c.
Click Apply .
If the condition is reported for the shelf, cards and other equipment are affected. To clear the alarm:
In node view, click the Provisioning > Alarm Profiles > Alarm Behavior tabs if you have not already done so.
2-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.23 AS-MT
Step 9 b.
Click the Suppress Alarms check box located at the bottom of the window to deselect the option.
c.
Click Apply .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.23 AS-MT
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, AOTS, BPLANE, CE100T, DS1, DS3, E100T, E1000F, EC1, EC1-12, EQPT,
ESCON, FC, FCMR, GE, GFP-FAC, G1000, ISC, ML100T, ML1000, NE, OCH, OCN, OMS, OTS,
PPM, PWR, TRUNK
The Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance Command condition applies to OC-N and electrical cards and occurs when a port is placed in the Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance (OOS-MA,MT) service state for loopback testing operations.
Clear the AS-MT Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.24 AS-MT-OOG
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The Alarms Suppressed on an Out-Of-Group VCAT Member condition is raised on an STS or VT member of a VCAT group whenever the member is in the IDLE (AS-MT-OOG) admin state. This condition can be raised when a member is initially added to a group. In IDLE (AS-MT-OOG) state, all other alarms for the STS or VT are suppressed.
Clear the AS-MT-OOG Condition
Step 1
Step 2
The AS-MT-OOG condition clears when an STS or VT member transitions to a different state from IDLE
(AS-MT-OOG) or when it is removed completely from the VCAT group. It does not require troubleshooting unless it does not clear.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-43
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.25 AUD-LOG-LOSS
2.8.25 AUD-LOG-LOSS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The Audit Trail Log Loss condition occurs when the log is 100 percent full and that the oldest entries are being replaced as new entries are generated. The log capacity is 640 entries. The log must be off-loaded using the following procedure to make room for more entries.
Clear the AUD-LOG-LOSS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
In node view, click the Maintenance > Audit tabs.
Click Retrieve .
Click Archive .
In the Archive Audit Trail dialog box, navigate to the directory (local or network) where you want to save the file.
Enter a name in the File Name field.
You do not have to assign an extension to the file. It is readable in any application that supports text files, such as WordPad, Microsoft Word (imported), etc.
Click Save .
The 640 entries are saved in this file. New entries continue with the next number in the sequence, rather than starting over.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.26 AUD-LOG-LOW
2.8.26 AUD-LOG-LOW
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The Audit Trail Log Low condition occurs when the audit trail log is 80 percent full.
Note AUD-LOG-LOW is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.27 AU-LOF
The Administrative Unit Loss of Multiframe alarm is not supported in this platform release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.28 AUTOLSROFF
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Auto Laser Shutdown alarm occurs when the OC-192 card temperature exceeds 194 degrees F
(90 degrees C). The internal equipment automatically shuts down the OC-192 laser when the card temperature rises to prevent the card from self-destructing.
Warning On the ONS 15454 OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the AUTOLSROFF Alarm
Step 1 View the temperature displayed on the ONS 15454 LCD front panel (
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-45
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.29 AUTORESET
Figure 2-1
Slot
Shelf LCD Panel
Status Port
8/18/03
04.06-002L-10
24˚C
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
Step 2
Step 3
If the temperature of the shelf exceeds 194 degrees F (90 degrees C), the alarm should clear if you solve the ONS 15454 temperature problem. Complete the
“Clear the HITEMP Alarm” procedure on page 2-124
.
If the temperature of the shelf is under 194 degrees F (90 degrees C), the HITEMP alarm is not the cause of the AUTOLSROFF alarm. Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the OC-192 card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 4 If card replacement does not clear the alarm, call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to discuss the case and if necessary open a returned materials authorization (RMA) on the original OC-192 card.
2.8.29 AUTORESET
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Automatic System Reset alarm occurs when you change an IP address or perform any other operation that causes an automatic card-level reboot.
AUTORESET typically clears after a card reboots (up to ten minutes). If the alarm does not clear, complete the following procedure.
Clear the AUTORESET Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Determine whether there are additional alarms that could have triggered an automatic reset. If there are, troubleshoot these alarms using the applicable section of this chapter.
If the card automatically resets more than once a month with no apparent cause, complete the
Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
2-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.30 AUTOSW-AIS
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Caution For the ONS 15454, removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.30 AUTOSW-AIS
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: STSMON, VT-MON
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by AIS condition indicates that automatic path protection switching occurred because of an AIS condition. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears. The AIS also clears when the upstream trouble is cleared.
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
Clear the AUTOSW-AIS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.31 AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: STSMON
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-47
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.32 AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON)
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by LOP condition for the STS monitor (STSMON) indicates that automatic path protection switching occurred because of the
. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears.
Clear the AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the LOP-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-145 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.32 AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: VT-MON
The AUTOSW-LOP alarm for the virtual tributary monitor (VT-MON) indicates that automatic path protection switching occurred because of the
. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears.
Clear the AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the LOP-V Alarm” procedure on page 2-146 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.33 AUTOSW-PDI
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: STSMON
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by Payload Defect Indication (PDI) condition indicates
protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears.
Clear the AUTOSW-PDI Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the PDI-P Condition” procedure on page 2-202 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-48
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.34 AUTOSW-SDBER
2.8.34 AUTOSW-SDBER
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: STSMON
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate (SDBER) condition indicates that a signal degrade (SD) caused automatic path protection switching to occur. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path when the SD is resolved.
Clear the AUTOSW-SDBER Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.35 AUTOSW-SFBER
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: STSMON
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by Signal Fail Bit Error Rate (SFBER) condition indicates that a signal failure (SF) caused automatic path protection switching to occur. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path when the SF is resolved.
Clear the AUTOSW-SFBER Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SF (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-222
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.36 AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: STSMON
The Automatic Path Protection Switch Caused by Unequipped condition indicates that an UNEQ alarm caused automatic path protection switching to occur. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears.
Clear the AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON) Condition
Step 1 Complete the
“Clear the UNEQ-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-249
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-49
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.37 AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON)
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.37 AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: VT-MON
AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON) indicates that the “UNEQ-V” alarm on page 2-251
alarm caused automatic path protection switching to occur. The path protection is configured for revertive switching and reverts to the working path after the fault clears.
Clear the AUTOSW-UNEQ (VT-MON) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the UNEQ-V Alarm” procedure on page 2-251
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.38 AWG-DEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OTS
The Arrayed Waveguide Gratings (AWG) Degrade alarm occurs when a DWDM card heater-control circuit degrades. The heat variance can cause slight wavelength drift. The card does not need to be replaced immediately, but it should be at the next opportunity.
Clear the AWG-DEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed DWDM card, complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
at the next opportunity.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.39 AWG-FAIL
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: OTS
The AWG Failure alarm occurs when a DWDM card heater-control circuit completely fails. The circuit failure disables wavelength transmission. The card must be replaced to restore traffic.
2-50
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.40 AWG-OVERTEMP
Clear the AWG-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed DWDM card, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.40 AWG-OVERTEMP
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: OTS
The AWG Over Temperature alarm is raised if a card having an AWG-FAIL alarm is not replaced and its heater-control circuit temperature exceeds 212 degrees F (100 degrees C). The card goes into protect mode and the heater is disabled.
Clear the AWG-OVERTEMP Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AWG-FAIL Alarm” procedure on page 2-51 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.41 AWG-WARM-UP
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OTS
The AWG Warm-Up condition occurs when a DWDM card heater-control circuit is attaining its operating temperature during startup. The condition lasts approximately 10 minutes but can vary somewhat from this period due to environmental temperature.
Note AWG-WARM-UP is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.42 BAT-FAIL
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: PWR
The Battery Fail alarm occurs when one of the two power supplies (A or B) is not detected. This could be because the supply is removed or is not operational. The alarm does not distinguish between the individual power supplies, so on-site information about the conditions is necessary for troubleshooting.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-51
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.43 BKUPMEMP
Clear the BAT-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
At the site, determine which battery is not present or operational.
Remove the power cable from the faulty supply. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 1, “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable,” and reverse the power cable installation procedure.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.43 BKUPMEMP
•
•
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Primary Nonvolatile Backup Memory Failure alarm refers to a problem with the TCC2/TCC2P card flash memory. The alarm occurs when the TCC2/TCC2P is in use and has one of four problems:
• The flash manager fails to format a flash partition.
The flash manager fails to write a file to a flash partition.
There is a problem at the driver level.
• The code volume fails cyclic redundancy checking (CRC). CRC is a method to verify for errors in data transmitted to the TCC2/TCC2P.
The BKUPMEMP alarm can also cause the
. If the EQPT alarm is caused by BKUPMEMP, complete the following procedure to clear the BKUPMEMP and the EQPT alarm.
Caution Software updating on a standby TCC2/TCC2P can take up to 30 minutes.
Clear the BKUPMEMP Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Verify that both TCC2/TCC2P cards are powered and enabled by confirming lighted ACT/SBY LEDs on the TCC2/TCC2P cards.
Determine whether the active or standby TCC2/TCCP card has the alarm.
If both TCC2/TCCP cards are powered and enabled, reset the TCC2/TCCP card against which the alarm is raised. If the card is the active TCC2/TCCP card, complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and
Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 . If the card is the standby TCC2/TCCP, use the
substeps below.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Right-click the standby TCC2/TCCP card in CTC.
Choose Reset Card from the shortcut menu.
Click Yes in the Are You Sure dialog box. The card resets, the FAIL LED blinks on the physical card.
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots.
2-52
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.44 BLSROSYNC
Step 4 If the TCC2/TCC2P card you reset does not reboot successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call
Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 . If the
Cisco TAC technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2.8.44 BLSROSYNC
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
The BLSR Out Of Synchronization alarm occurs during BLSR setup when you attempt to add or delete a circuit, and a working ring node loses its DCC connection because all transmit and receive fiber has been removed. CTC cannot generate the ring table and causes the BLSROSYNC alarm.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Note This alarm can also be expected when upgrading to Release 5.0 when the ring identifier is updated.
Clear the BLSROSYNC Alarm
Step 1 Reestablish cabling continuity to the node reporting the alarm. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable,” for cabling information to reestablish the DCC.
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
When the DCC is established between the node and the rest of the BLSR, it becomes visible to the BLSR and should be able to function on the circuits.
If alarms occur when you have provisioned the DCCs, see the
“2.8.76 EOC” section on page 2-79 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-53
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.45 BPV
2.8.45 BPV
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: BITS
The 64K Clock Bipolar Density Violation alarm is raised on the TCC2P card if there is a frequency variation in the 8K BITS clock. The TCC2P card contains an 8K clock and a 64K clock. Each has some bipolar variation, which is normal. This alarm is raised on the 8K clock if that variation discontinues.
The BPV alarm is demoted by an LOF or LOS against the BITS clock.
Note This alarm is not raised on the TCC2 card.
Clear the BPV Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Reestablishing a normal BITS input signal clears the alarm. Clear any alarms on the incoming signal or against the BITS timing sources.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.46 CARLOSS (CE100T)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: CE100T
The Carrier Loss alarm is raised on CE-100T-8 cards in Mapper mode when there is a circuit failure due to link integrity. It does not get raised when a user simply puts the port In-Service. It has to be IS with circuit or loopback.
Clear the CARLOSS (CE100T) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the CARLOSS (G1000) Alarm” procedure on page 2-59 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: E100T, E1000F
A Carrier Loss alarm on the LAN E-Series Ethernet card is the data equivalent of the
common causes of the CARLOSS alarm are a disconnected cable, an Ethernet Gigabit Interface
2-54
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F)
Converter (GBIC) fiber connected to an optical card rather than an Ethernet device, or an improperly installed Ethernet card. Ethernet card ports must be enabled for CARLOSS to occur. CARLOSS is declared after no signal is received for approximately 2.5 seconds.
The CARLOSS alarm also occurs after a node database is restored. After restoration, the alarm clears in approximately 30 seconds after the node reestablishes Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
Clear the CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F) Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the fiber cable is properly connected and attached to the correct port. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2,
“Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
If the fiber cable is properly connected and attached to the port, verify that the cable connects the card to another Ethernet device and is not misconnected to an OC-N card. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If no misconnection to an OC-N card exists, verify that the transmitting device is operational. If not, troubleshoot the device.
If the alarm does not clear, use an Ethernet test set to determine whether a valid signal is coming into the Ethernet port.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If a valid Ethernet signal is not present and the transmitting device is operational, replace the fiber cable connecting the transmitting device to the Ethernet port. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If a valid Ethernet signal is present, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270 for the Ethernet card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the Ethernet card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 8 If a CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears, use the following steps to examine the layout of your network to determine whether the Ethernet circuit is part of an Ethernet manual cross-connect.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-55
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT)
Step 9
Step 10
An Ethernet manual cross-connect is used when another vendors’ equipment sits between ONS 15454s, and the OSI/TARP-based equipment does not allow tunneling of the ONS 15454 TCP/IP-based DCC. To circumvent a lack of continuous DCC, the Ethernet circuit is manually cross connected to an STS channel riding through the non-ONS network.
If the reporting Ethernet circuit is part of an Ethernet manual cross-connect, then the reappearing alarm may be a result of mismatched STS circuit sizes in the set up of the manual cross-connect. If the Ethernet circuit is not part of a manual cross-connect, the following steps do not apply. a.
Right-click anywhere in the row of the CARLOSS alarm.
b.
c.
d.
Click Select Affected Circuits in the shortcut menu that appears.
Record the information in the type and size columns of the highlighted circuit.
From the examination of the layout of your network, determine which ONS 15454 and card host the
Ethernet circuit at the other end of the Ethernet manual cross-connect by completing the following substeps:
• Log into the ONS 15454 at the other end of the Ethernet manual cross-connect.
e.
•
•
Double-click the Ethernet card that is part of the Ethernet manual cross-connect.
Click the Circuits tab.
• Record the information in the type and size columns of the circuit that is part of the Ethernet manual cross-connect. The Ethernet manual cross-connect circuit connects the Ethernet card to an OC-N card at the same node.
Use the information you recorded to determine whether the two Ethernet circuits on each side of the
Ethernet manual cross-connect have the same circuit size.
If one of the circuit sizes is incorrect, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 and
reconfigure the circuit with the correct circuit size. For more information, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels.”
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: EQPT
A Carrier Loss on the LAN Equipment alarm generally occurs on OC-N cards when the ONS 15454 and the workstation hosting CTC do not have a TCP/IP connection. The problem involves the LAN or data circuit used by the RJ-45 (LAN) connector on the TCC2/TCC2P, or for the ONS 15454, the LAN backplane pin connection. The CARLOSS alarm does not involve an Ethernet circuit connected to an
Ethernet port. The problem is in the connection and not CTC or the node.
On TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXP_2.5G_10G cards, CARLOSS is also raised against trunk ports when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is turned off.
A TXP_MR_2.5G card can raise a CARLOSS alarm when the payload is incorrectly configured for the
10 Gigabit Ethernet or 1 Gigabit Ethernet payload data type.
2-56
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.48 CARLOSS (EQPT)
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the CARLOSS (EQPT) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the reporting card is an MXP or TXP card in an ONS 15454 node, verify the data rate configured on the pluggable port module (PPM): a.
b.
Double-click the reporting MXP or TXP card.
Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
c.
d.
If the reporting card is an OC-N card, verify connectivity by pinging the ONS 15454 that is reporting the alarm: a.
If you are using a Microsoft Windows operating system, from the Start Menu choose
Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt .
b.
View the Pluggable Port Modules area port listing in the Actual Equipment column and compare this with the contents of the Selected PPM area Rate column for the MXP or TXP multirate port.
If the rate does not match the actual equipment, you must delete and recreate the selected PPM.
Select the PPM, click Delete , then click Create and choose the correct rate for the port rate. c.
If you are using a Sun Solaris operating system, from the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) click the Personal Application tab and click Terminal .
For both the Sun and Microsoft operating systems, at the prompt type: ping ONS-15454-IP-address
For example: ping 198.168.10.10
If the workstation has connectivity to the ONS 15454, it shows a “reply from IP-Address ” after the ping. If the workstation does not have connectivity, a “Request timed out” message appears.
If the ping is successful, an active TCP/IP connection exists. Restart CTC: a.
Exit from CTC.
b.
c.
Reopen the browser.
Log into CTC.
Using optical test equipment, verify that proper receive levels are achieved. (For instructions to use optical test equipment, refer to the manufacturer documentation.)
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-57
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.49 CARLOSS (FC)
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Verify that the optical LAN cable is properly connected and attached to the correct port. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If the fiber cable is properly connected and attached to the port, verify that the cable connects the card to another Ethernet device and is not misconnected to an OC-N card. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If you are unable to establish connectivity, replace the fiber cable with a new known-good cable. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If you are unable to establish connectivity, perform standard network or LAN diagnostics. For example, trace the IP route, verify cable continuity, and troubleshoot any routers between the node and CTC.
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Step 9 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.49 CARLOSS (FC)
The Carrier Loss alarm for Fibre Channel is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: G1000
A Carrier Loss alarm on the LAN G-Series Ethernet card is the data equivalent of the
CARLOSS on the G1000-4 card is caused by one of two situations:
• The G1000-4 port reporting the alarm is not receiving a valid signal from the attached Ethernet device. The CARLOSS can be caused by an improperly connected Ethernet cable or a problem with the signal between the Ethernet device and the G1000-4 port.
• If a problem exists in the end-to-end path (including possibly the remote-node G1000-4 card), it causes the reporting card to turn off the Gigabit Ethernet transmitter. Turning off the transmitter typically causes the attached device to turn off its link laser, which results in a CARLOSS on the reporting G1000-4 card. The root cause is the problem in the end-to-end path. When the root cause is cleared, the remote-node G1000-4 port turns the transmitter laser back on and clears the
CARLOSS on the reporting card. If a turned-off transmitter causes the CARLOSS alarm, other alarms such as the
“TPTFAIL (G1000)” alarm on page 2-245 or OC-N alarms or conditions on the
end-to-end path normally accompany the CARLOSS (G1000s) alarm.
Refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for a description of the G1000-4 card’s end-to-end Ethernet link integrity capability. Also see the
“TRMT” alarm on page 2-246 for more
information about alarms that occur when a point-to-point circuit exists between two cards.
2-58
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000)
Ethernet card ports must be enabled for CARLOSS to occur. CARLOSS is declared after no signal is received for approximately 2.5 seconds.
Clear the CARLOSS (G1000) Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the fiber cable is properly connected and attached to the correct port. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2,
“Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the fiber cable is correctly connected and attached, verify that the cable connects the card to another
Ethernet device and is not misconnected to an OC-N card.
If no misconnection to the OC-N card exists, verify that the attached transmitting Ethernet device is operational. If not, troubleshoot the device.
Verify that optical receive levels are within the normal range. The correct specifications are listed in the
“1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels” section on page 1-154 .
If the alarm does not clear, use an Ethernet test set to determine whether a valid signal is coming into the Ethernet port. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If a valid Ethernet signal is not present and the transmitting device is operational, replace the fiber cable connecting the transmitting device to the Ethernet port. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If the alarm does not clear and link autonegotiation is enabled on the G1000-4 port, but the autonegotiation process fails, the card turns off its transmitter laser and reports a CARLOSS alarm. If link autonegotiation has been enabled for the port, determine whether there are conditions that could cause autonegotiation to fail: a.
b.
Confirm that the attached Ethernet device has autonegotiation enabled and is configured for compatibility with the asymmetric flow control on the card.
Confirm that the attached Ethernet device configuration allows reception of flow control frames.
If the alarm does not clear, disable and reenable the Ethernet port to attempt to remove the CARLOSS condition. (The autonegotiation process restarts.)
If the alarm does not clear and the
“TPTFAIL (G1000)” alarm on page 2-245 is also reported, complete
the
“Clear the TPTFAIL (G1000) Alarm” procedure on page 2-245 . If the TPTFAIL alarm is not
reported, continue to the next step.
Note When the CARLOSS and the TPTFAIL alarms are reported, the reason for the condition could be the G1000-4 card's end-to-end link integrity feature taking action on a remote failure indicated by the TPTFAIL alarm.
Step 10 If the TPTFAIL alarm was not reported, determine whether a terminal (inward) loopback has been provisioned on the port: a.
b.
In node view, click the card to go to card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tabs .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-59
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000)
Step 11
Step 12 c.
If the service state is listed as OOS-MA, LPBK&MT, a loopback is provisioned. Go to
.
On the G1000-4, provisioning a terminal (inward) loopback causes the transmit laser to turn off. If an attached Ethernet device detects the loopback as a loss of carrier, the attached Ethernet device shuts off the transmit laser to the G1000-4 card. Terminating the transmit laser could raise the CARLOSS alarm because the loopbacked G1000-4 port detects the termination.
If the does not have a loopback condition, continue to
If a CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears, the reappearing alarm could be a result of mismatched STS circuit sizes in the setup of the manual cross-connect. Perform the following steps if the Ethernet circuit is part of a manual cross-connect:
Note An ONS 15454 Ethernet manual cross-connect is used when another vendors’ equipment sits between ONS nodes, and the Open System Interconnection/Target Identifier Address Resolution
Protocol (OSI/TARP)-based equipment does not allow tunneling of the ONS 15454
TCP/IP-based DCC. To circumvent a lack of continuous DCC, the Ethernet circuit is manually cross connected to an STS channel riding through the non-ONS network.
Step 13
Step 14 c.
d.
a.
b.
Right-click anywhere in the row of the CARLOSS alarm.
Right-click or left-click Select Affected Circuits in the shortcut menu that appears.
Record the information in the type and size columns of the highlighted circuit.
Examine the layout of your network and determine which ONS 15454 and card host the Ethernet circuit at the other end of the Ethernet manual cross-connect by completing the following substeps:
• Log into the node at the other end of the Ethernet manual cross-connect.
•
•
•
Double-click the Ethernet card that is part of the Ethernet manual cross-connect.
Click the Circuits tab.
Record the information in the type and size columns of the circuit that is part of the Ethernet manual cross-connect. The cross-connect circuit connects the Ethernet card to an OC-N card at the same node.
e.
Determine whether the two Ethernet circuits on each side of the Ethernet manual cross-connect have the same circuit size from the circuit size information you recorded.
f.
If one of the circuit sizes is incorrect, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 and
reconfigure the circuit with the correct circuit size. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels,” for detailed procedures to create circuits.
.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the Ethernet card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
2-60
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE)
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 15 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: GE
The Carrier Loss for Gigabit Ethernet (GE) alarm occurs on MXP and TXP card PPM clients supporting
1-Gbps or 10-Gbps traffic. The loss can be due to a misconfiguration, fiber cut, or client equipment problem.
Clear the CARLOSS (GE) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Ensure that the GE client is correctly configured: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
d.
View the Pluggable Port Modules area port listing in the Actual Equipment column and compare this with the client equipment. If no PPM is provisioned, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable,” for provisioning instructions.
If a PPM has been created, view the contents of the Selected PPM area Rate column for the MXP or TXP MR card and compare this rate with the client equipment data rate. If the PPM rate is differently provisioned, select the PPM, click Delete , then click Create and choose the correct rate for the equipment type.
If there is no PPM misprovisioning, check for a fiber cut. An LOS alarm is also present. If there is an
alarm, complete the “Clear the LOS (OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-153
.
If there is no fiber cut or provisioning error, check the client-side equipment for any transmission errors on the line.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.52 CARLOSS (ISC)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: ISC
The Carrier Loss for Inter-Service Channel (ISC) alarm occurs on TXP card PPM clients supporting ISC client traffic. The loss can be due to a misconfiguration, fiber cut, or client equipment problem.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-61
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.53 CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000)
Clear the CARLOSS (ISC) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the CARLOSS (GE) Alarm” procedure on page 2-61 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.53 CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: ML100T, ML1000
A Carrier Loss alarm on an ML-Series Ethernet card is the data equivalent of the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
. The Ethernet port has lost its link and is not receiving a valid signal.
A CARLOSS alarm occurs when the Ethernet port has been configured from the Cisco IOS command line interface (CLI) as a no-shutdown port and one of the following problems also occurs:
• The cable is not properly connected to the near or far port.
•
•
Auto-negotiation is failing.
The speed (10/100 ports only) is set incorrectly.
For information about provisioning ML-Series Ethernet cards from the Cisco IOS interface, refer to the
<I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 .
Clear the CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Verify that the LAN cable is properly connected and attached to the correct port on the ML-Series card and on the peer Ethernet port. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If the alarm does not clear, verify that autonegotiation is set properly on the ML-Series card port and the peer Ethernet port.
If the alarm does not clear, verify that the speed is set properly on the ML-Series card port and the peer
Ethernet port if you are using 10/100 ports.
If the alarm does not clear, the Ethernet signal is not valid, but the transmitting device is operational, replace the LAN cable connecting the transmitting device to the Ethernet port.
If the alarm does not clear, disable and reenable the Ethernet port by performing a “shutdown” and then a “no shutdown” on the Cisco IOS CLI. Autonegotiation restarts.
DS3N-12, DS3i-N-12, or EC1 Port, page 1-10 and test the loopback.
If the problem persists with the loopback installed, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any
.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2-62
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.54 CARLOSS (TRUNK)
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 9 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.54 CARLOSS (TRUNK)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
A Carrier Loss alarm on the optical trunk connecting to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E cards is raised when ITU-T
G.709 monitoring is disabled.
Clear the CARLOSS (TRUNK) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the LOS (2R) Alarm” procedure on page 2-147
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.55 CASETEMP-DEG
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: AOTS
The Case Temperature Degrade alarm is raised when a DWDM card temperature sensor detects an out-of-range external temperature at the shelf level. The working range for DWDM cards is from
23 degrees F (–5 degrees C) to 149 degrees F (65 degrees C).
Clear the CASETEMP-DEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Check for and resolve the
“FAN” alarm on page 2-97 if it is raised against the shelf.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter” procedure on page 2-275 .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-63
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.56 CLDRESTART
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.56 CLDRESTART
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Cold Restart condition occurs when a card is physically removed and inserted, replaced, or when the ONS 15454 power is initialized.
Clear the CLDRESTART Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
If the condition fails to clear after the card reboots, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any
.
If the condition does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 4 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.57 COMIOXC
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Input/Output Slot To Cross-Connect Communication Failure alarm is caused by the XC10G cross-connect card. It occurs when there is a communication failure for a traffic slot.
2-64
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.58 COMM-FAIL
Clear the COMIOXC Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 on the reporting XC10G
cross-connect card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the CTC reset does not clear the alarm, move traffic off the reporting cross-connect card. Complete the
“Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Cards” procedure on page 2-269 .
Complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270 for the reporting
cross-connect card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting cross-connect card.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 6 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.58 COMM-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Plug-In Module (card) Communication Failure indicates that there is a communication failure between the TCC2/TCC2P and the card. The failure could indicate a broken card interface.
Clear the COMM-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the reporting card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.3 CTC Card Resetting and Switching” section on page 2-267
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-65
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.59 CONTBUS-A-18
Step 3 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.59 CONTBUS-A-18
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
A Communication Failure from Controller Slot to Controller Slot alarm for the TCC2/TCC2P slot to
TCC2/TCC2P slot occurs when the main processor on the TCC2/TCC2P in the first slot (TCC A) loses communication with the coprocessor on the same card. This applies to the Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P.
Clear the CONTBUS-A-18 Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
to make the Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P active.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Wait approximately 10 minutes for the Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P to reset as the standby TCC2/TCC2P. Verify that the ACT/SBY LED is correctly illuminated before proceeding to the next step. A green ACT/SBY
LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Position the cursor over the Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P and complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and
Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 to return the card to the active state.
If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1-800-553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268
. If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2.8.60 CONTBUS-B-18
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
A Communication Failure from Controller Slot to Controller Slot alarm for the TCC2/TCC2P slot to
TCC2/TCC2P slot occurs when the main processor on the TCC2/TCC2P in the second slot (TCC B) loses communication with the coprocessor on the same card. This applies to the Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P.
2-66
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.61 CONTBUS-IO-A
Clear the CONTBUS-B-18 Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268
to make the Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P active.
Wait approximately 10 minutes for the Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P to reset as the standby TCC2/TCC2P.
Verify that the ACT/SBY LED is correctly illuminated before proceeding to the next step. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Position the cursor over the Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P and complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and
Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 to return the Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P card to the
active state.
If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1-800-553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 . If the Cisco TAC
technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
2.8.61 CONTBUS-IO-A
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
A TCCA to Shelf A Slot Communication Failure alarm occurs when the active Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P
(TCC A) has lost communication with another card in the shelf. The other card is identified by the Object column in the CTC alarm window.
The CONTBUS-IO-A alarm can appear briefly when the ONS 15454 switches to the protect
TCC2/TCC2P. In the case of a TCC2/TCC2P protection switch, the alarm clears after the other cards establish communication with the newly active TCC2/TCC2P. If the alarm persists, the problem is with the physical path of communication from the TCC2/TCC2P card to the reporting card. The physical path of communication includes the TCC2/TCC2P, the other card , and the backplane.
Clear the CONTBUS-IO-A Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Ensure that the reporting card is physically present in the shelf. Record the card type. Click the
Inventory tab and view the Eqpt Type column to reveal the provisioned type.
If the actual card type and the provisioned card type do not match, see the
“MEA (EQPT)” alarm on page 2-181
for the reporting card.
If the alarm object is any single card slot other than the standby Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P, perform a CTC reset of the object card. Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
. For the
LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
If the alarm object is the standby Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P, complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for it. The procedure is similar.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-67
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.62 CONTBUS-IO-B
Step 4
Step 5
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card. (A reset standby card remains standby.)
If CONTBUS-IO-A is raised on several cards at the same time, complete the
TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268
.
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 6 If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
. If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
.
2.8.62 CONTBUS-IO-B
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
A TCC B to Shelf Communication Failure alarm occurs when the active Slot 11 TCC2/TCC2P (TCC B) has lost communication with another card in the shelf. The other card is identified by the Object column in the CTC alarm window.
The CONTBUS-IO-B alarm might appear briefly when the ONS 15454 switches to the protect
TCC2/TCC2P. In the case of a TCC2/TCC2P protection switch, the alarm clears after the other cards establish communication with the newly active TCC2/TCC2P. If the alarm persists, the problem is with the physical path of communication from the TCC2/TCC2P card to the reporting card. The physical path of communication includes the TCC2/TCC2P, the other card , and the backplane.
Clear the CONTBUS-IO-B Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Ensure that the reporting card is physically present in the shelf. Record the card type. Click the
Inventory tab and view the Eqpt Type column to reveal the provisioned type.
If the actual card type and the provisioned card type do not match, see the
“MEA (EQPT)” alarm on page 2-181
for the reporting card.
If the alarm object is any single card slot other than the standby Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P, perform a CTC reset of the object card. Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 . For the
LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
If the alarm object is the standby Slot 7 TCC2/TCC2P, complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for it. The procedure is similar.
2-68
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.63 CTNEQPT-MISMATCH
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card. (A reset standby card remains standby.)
If CONTBUS-IO-B is raised on several cards at the same time, complete the “Reset an Active
TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 .
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the CTC reset does not clear the alarm, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the reporting card.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 7 If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 . If the Cisco TAC
technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2.8.63 CTNEQPT-MISMATCH
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Connection Equipment Mismatch (CTNEQPT-MISMATCH) condition is raised when there is a mismatch between the cross-connect card preprovisioned in the slot and the card actually present in the shelf. For example, one type of cross-connect card might be preprovisioned in Slot 10, but another might be physically installed. Or a card that is mismatched with the card. For example,
CTNEQPT-MISMATCH is raised in when an XCVT card is replaced with an XC10G card.
Note Cisco does not support configurations of unmatched cross-connect cards in Slot 8 and Slot
10, although this situation may briefly occur during the upgrade process.
Note The cross-connect card you are replacing should not be the active card. (It can be in SBY state or otherwise not in use.)
If you upgrade a node to R5.0 and replace an XC with XCVT or XC10G, or an XCVT with an XC10G, the CTNEQPT-MISMATCH condition is raised but it is cleared when the upgrade process ends.
Note During an upgrade, this condition occurs and is raised as its default severity, Not Alarmed (NA).
However, after the upgrade has occurred, if you wish to change the condition’s severity so that it is
Not Reported (NR), you can do this by modifying the alarm profile used at the node. For more information about modifying alarm severities, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-69
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.64 CTNEQPT-PBPROT
Clear the CTNEQPT-MISMATCH Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Verify what kind of card is preprovisioned in the slot: a.
b.
In node view, click the Inventory tab.
View the slot’s row contents in the Eqpt Type and Actual Eqpt Type columns.
The Eqpt Type column contains the equipment that is provisioned in the slot. The Actual Eqpt Type contains the equipment that is physically present in the slot. For example, Slot 8 might be provisioned for an XCVT card, which is shown in the Eqpt Type column, but an XC10G card could be physically present in the slot. The XC10G would be shown in the Actual Eqpt Type column.
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the mismatched card.
If the condition does not clear, log onto http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call
Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.64 CTNEQPT-PBPROT
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Interconnection Equipment Failure Protect Cross-Connect Card Payload Bus Alarm indicates a failure of the main payload between the protect ONS 15454 Slot 10 XC10G cross-connect card and the reporting traffic card. The cross-connect card and the reporting card are no longer communicating through the backplane. The problem exists in the cross-connect card and the reporting traffic card, or the
TCC2/TCC2P and the backplane.
Note This alarm automatically raises and clears when the Slot 8 XC10G cross-connect card is reseated.
Caution Software update on a standby TCC2/TCC2P can take up to 30 minutes.
Clear the CTNEQPT-PBPROT Alarm
Step 1 If all traffic cards show CTNEQPT-PBPROT alarm: a.
Complete the “Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the standby TCC2/TCC2P card.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
b.
for the standby TCC2/TCC2P.
2-70
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK
Caution Do not physically reseat an active TCC2/TCC2P. Doing so disrupts traffic.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
. For the LED behavior, see the
Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the cross-connect reset is not complete and error-free or if the TCC2/TCC2P reboots automatically, call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the standby XC10G card.
Determine whether the card is an active card or standby card in a protection group. Click the node view
Maintenance > Protection tabs, then click the protection group. The cards and their statuses are displayed in the list.
Switch Command” procedure on page 2-263
. After you move traffic off the active card, or if the reporting card is standby, continue with the following steps.
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
on the reporting card. For the LED
behavior, see the “2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the reporting card.
Complete the
“Initiate a 1:1 Card Switch Command” procedure on page 2-263 to switch traffic back.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting traffic card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” procedure on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 12 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-71
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.65 CTNEQPT-PBWORK
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Interconnection Equipment Failure Working Cross-Connect Card Payload Bus alarm indicates a failure in the main payload bus between the ONS 15454 Slot 8 XC10G cross-connect card and the reporting traffic card. The cross-connect card and the reporting card are no longer communicating through the backplane. The problem exists in the cross-connect card and the reporting traffic card, or the
TCC2/TCC2P and the backplane.
Note This alarm automatically raises and clears when the ONS 15454 Slot 10 XC10G cross-connect card is reseated.
Clear the CTNEQPT-PBWORK Alarm
Step 1 If all traffic cards show CTNEQPT-PBWORK alarm: a.
Complete the “Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268
for the active TCC2/TCC2P and then complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the
Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 .
b.
for the TCC2/TCC2P card.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Caution Do not physically reseat an active TCC2/TCC2P card; it disrupts traffic.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If not all traffic cards show the alarm, complete the
“Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G
Cross-Connect Cards” procedure on page 2-269
for the active XC10G cross-connect card.
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the standby cross-connect card.
If the alarm does not clear and the reporting traffic card is the active card in the protection group,
complete the “Initiate a 1:1 Card Switch Command” procedure on page 2-263
. If the card is standby, or if you have moved traffic off the active card, proceed with the following steps.
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If you switched traffic, complete the “Initiate a 1:1 Card Switch Command” procedure on page 2-263
to switch it back.
2-72
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.66 DATAFLT
Step 11 If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the XC10G card.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 12
Step 13
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting traffic card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.66 DATAFLT
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: NE
The Software Data Integrity Fault alarm occurs when the TCC2/TCC2P exceeds its flash memory capacity.
Caution When the system reboots, the last configuration entered is not saved.
Clear the DATAFLT Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.67 DBOSYNC
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: NE
The standby Database Out Of Synchronization alarm occurs when the standby TCC2/TCC2P “To be
Active” database does not synchronize with the active database on the active TCC2/TCC2P.
Caution If you reset the active TCC2/TCC2P card while this alarm is raised, you lose current provisioning.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-73
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.68 DS3-MISM
Clear the DBOSYNC Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Save a backup copy of the active TCC2/TCC2P database. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node,” for instructions.
Make a minor provisioning change to the active database to see if applying a provisioning change clears the alarm: a.
In node view, click the Provisioning > General > General tabs.
b.
In the Description field, make a small change such as adding a period to the existing entry.
The change causes a database write but does not affect the node state. The write could take up to a minute.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.68 DS3-MISM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The DS-3 Frame Format Mismatch condition indicates a frame format mismatch on a signal transiting the ONS 15454 DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card. The condition occurs when the provisioned line type and incoming signal frame format type do no match. For example, if the line type for a DS3XM-6 card is set to C Bit and the incoming signal frame format is detected as M13, then the ONS 15454 reports a
DS3-MISM condition.
Clear the DS3-MISM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Display the CTC card view for the reporting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
For the row on the appropriate port, verify that the Line Type column is set to match the expected incoming signal (C Bit or M13).
If the Line Type field does not match the expected incoming signal, select the correct Line Type in the drop-down list.
Click Apply .
If the condition does not clear after the user verifies that the provisioned line type matches the expected incoming signal, use an optical test set to verify that the actual signal coming into the ONS 15454 matches the expected incoming signal.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-74
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.69 DSP-COMM-FAIL
2.8.69 DSP-COMM-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Communication Failure alarm indicates that there is a communications failure between an MXP or TXP card microprocessor and the on-board DSP chip that controls the trunk (or DWDM) port. This alarm typically occurs after a DSP code upgrade.
The alarm is temporary and does not require user action. The MXP or TXP card microprocessor attempts to restore communication with the DSP chip until the alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is raised for an extended period, the MXP or TXP card raises the
, and could affect traffic.
Note DSP-COMM-FAIL is an informational alarm and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.70 DSP-FAIL
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The DSP Failure alarm indicates that a
“DSP-COMM-FAIL” alarm on page 2-75
has persisted for an extended period on an MXP or TXP card. It indicates that the card is faulty.
Clear the DSP-FAIL Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting MXP or
TXP card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.71 DUP-IPADDR
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-75
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.72 DUP-NODENAME
The Duplicate IP Address alarm indicates that the alarmed node IP address is already in use within the same DCC area. When this happens, TC no longer reliably connects to either node. Depending on how the packets are routed, CTC may connect to either node (having the same IP address). If CTC has connected to both nodes before they shared the same address, it has two distinct NodeModel instances
(keyed by the node ID portion of the MAC address).
Clear the DUP-IPADDR Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Isolate the alarmed node from the other node having the same address: a.
b.
Connect to the alarmed node using the Craft port on the ONS 15454 chassis.
Begin a CTC session.
c.
On the login dialog window, uncheck the Network Discovery check box.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Network > General tabs.
In the IP Address field, change the IP address to a unique number.
Click Apply .
Restart any CTC sessions that are logged into either of the formerly duplicated node IDs. (For instructions to log in or log out, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 3, “Set Up PC and Log Into the GUI.”)
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.72 DUP-NODENAME
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The Duplicate Node Name alarm indicates that the alarmed node alphanumeric name is already being used within the same DCC area.
Clear the DUP-NODENAME Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, click the Provisioning > General > General tabs.
In the Node Name field, enter a unique name for the node.
Click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.73 EHIBATVG
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
2-76
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.74 ELWBATVG
• Logical Object: PWR
The Extreme High Voltage Battery alarm occurs in a –48 VDC environment when a battery lead input voltage exceeds the extreme high power threshold. This threshold, with a default value of –56.5 VDC, is user-provisionable. The alarm remains raised until the voltage remains under the threshold for
120 seconds. (For information about changing this threshold, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 4, “Turn Up Node.”)
Clear the EHIBATVG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
The problem is external to the ONS 15454. Troubleshoot the power source supplying the battery leads.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.74 ELWBATVG
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: PWR
The Extreme Low Voltage Battery alarm occurs in a –48 VDC environment when a battery lead input voltage falls below the extreme low power threshold. This threshold, with a default value of –40.5 VDC, is user-provisionable. The alarm remains raised until the voltage remains over the threshold for
120 seconds. (For information about changing this threshold, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 4, “Turn Up Node.”)
Clear the ELWBATVG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
The problem is external to the ONS 15454. Troubleshoot the power source supplying the battery leads.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.75 ENCAP-MISMATCH-P
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting
• Logical Object: STS-TRM
The Encapsulation C2 Byte Mismatch Path alarm applies to ML-Series Ethernet cards. It occurs when the first three following conditions are met and one of the last two is false:
•
•
•
•
•
The received C2 byte is not 0x00 (unequipped).
The received C2 byte is not a PDI value.
The received C2 does not match the expected C2.
The expected C2 byte is not 0x01 (equipped unspecified).
The received C2 byte is not 0x01 (equipped unspecified).
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-77
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.75 ENCAP-MISMATCH-P
(This is in contrast to PLM-P, which must meet all five criteria.) For an ENCAP-MISMATCH-P to be raised, there is a mismatch between the received and expected C2 byte, with either the expected byte or received byte value being 0x01.
An example of a situation that would raise ENCAP-MISMATCH-P is if a circuit created between two
ML-Series cards has generic framing procedure (GFP) framing provisioned on one end and high-level data link control (HDLC) framing with LEX encapsulation provisioned on the other. The GFP framing card transmits and expects a C2 byte of 0x1B, while the HDLC framing card transmits and expects a C2 byte of 0x01.
A mismatch between the transmit and receive cards on any of the following parameters can cause the alarm:
•
•
•
•
Mode (HDLC, GFP-F)
Encapsulation (LEX, HDLC, PPP)
CRC size (16 or 32)
Scrambling state (on or off)
This alarm is demoted by a PLM-P or PLM-V condition.
Note By default, an ENCAP-MISMATCH-P alarm causes an ML-Series card data link to go down. This behavior can be modified using the command line interface (CLI) command no pos trigger defect encap .
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the ENCAP-MISMATCH-P Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Ensure that the correct framing mode is in use on the receive card: a.
b.
In node view, double-click the receive ML-Series card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c.
In the Mode drop-down list, ensure that the same mode (GFP or HDLC) is selected. If it is not, choose it and click Apply .
Ensure that the correct framing mode is in use on the transmit card, and that it is identical to the receiving card: a.
b.
In node view, double-click the transmit ML-Series card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c.
In the Mode drop-down list, ensure that the same mode (GFP or HDLC) is selected. If it is not, choose it and click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, use the CLI to ensure that the remaining settings are correctly configured on the ML-Series card:
•
•
•
Encapsulation
CRC size
Scrambling state
2-78
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.76 EOC
Step 4
To open the interface, click the IOS tab and click Open IOS Command Line Interface (CLI) . Refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 entries on all three of these topics to obtain the full configuration command sequences.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.76 EOC
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: OCN, TRUNK
The SONET DCC Termination Failure alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses its data communications channel. Although this alarm is primarily SONET, it can apply to DWDM. For example, the OSCM card can raise this alarm on its OC-3 section overhead.
The SDCCs consist of three bytes, D1 through D3, in the SONET overhead. The bytes convey information about Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P). The
ONS 15454 uses the DCC on the SONET section layer to communicate network management information.
Warning On the ONS 15454 OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Note If a circuit shows a partial state when this alarm is raised, the logical circuit is in place. The circuit is able to carry traffic when the connection issue is resolved. You do not need to delete the circuit when troubleshooting this alarm.
Clear the EOC Alarm
Step 1 If the
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-79
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.76 EOC
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
If the
.
If the alarm does not clear on the reporting node, verify the physical connections between the cards and the fiber-optic cables are configured to carry SDCC traffic. If they are not, correct them. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If the physical connections are correct and configured to carry DCC traffic, verify that both ends of the fiber span have in-service (IS-NR) ports. Verify that the ACT/SBY LED on each OC-N card is green.
When the LEDs on the OC-N cards are correctly illuminated, complete the
at both ends of the fiber span.
Repeat
If DCC is provisioned for the ends of the span, verify that the port is active and in service: a.
Confirm that the OC-N card shows a green LED in CTC or on the physical card.
b.
c.
d.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS .
e.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and click IS in the drop-down list. Click Apply .
For all nodes, if the card is in service, use an optical test set to determine whether signal failures are present on fiber terminations.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
Caution Using an optical test set disrupts service on the OC-N card. It could be necessary to manually switch traffic carrying circuits over to a protection path. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used switching procedures.
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If no signal failures exist on terminations, measure power levels to verify that the budget loss is within the parameters of the receiver. See the
“1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels” section on page 1-154
for non-DWDM card levels and refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide for DWDM card levels.
If budget loss is within parameters, ensure that fiber connectors are securely fastened and properly terminated. For more information refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install
Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If fiber connectors are properly fastened and terminated, complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 .
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card.
2-80
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.77 EOC-L
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Step 14
Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P switches control to the standby TCC2/TCC2P. If the alarm clears when the ONS 15454 node switches to the standby TCC2/TCC2P, the user can assume that the previously active card is the cause of the alarm.
If the TCC2/TCC2P reset does not clear the alarm, delete the problematic SDCC termination: a.
From card view, click View > Go to Previous View if you have not already done so.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the
Highlight the problematic DCC termination.
Click
Provisioning > Comm Channels > SDCC
Delete .
Click Yes in the Confirmation Dialog box.
tabs.
Recreate the SDCC termination. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 5, “Turn Up
Network,” for instructions.
Verify that both ends of the DCC have been recreated at the optical ports.
If the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
. If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
2.8.77 EOC-L
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: OCN, TRUNK
The Line DCC Termination Failure alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses its line data communications channel. For example, the OSCM card can raise this alarm on its OC-3 line overhead.
The LDCCs are nine bytes, D4 through D12, in the SONET overhead. The bytes convey information about OAM&P. The ONS 15454 uses the LDCCs on the SONET line layer to communicate network management information.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-81
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.78 EQPT
Note If a circuit shows a partial status when the EOC-L alarm is raised, it occurs when the logical circuit is in place. The circuit is able to carry traffic when the DCC termination issue is resolved. You do not need to delete the circuit when troubleshooting this alarm.
Clear the EOC-L Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the EOC Alarm” procedure on page 2-79
.
If the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
2.8.78 EQPT
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: AICI-AEP, AICI-AIE, EQPT, PPM
An Equipment Failure alarm indicates that a hardware failure has occurred on the reporting card. If the
This alarm is also invoked if a diagnostic circuit detects a card application-specific integrated circuit
(ASIC) failure. In this case, if the card is part of a protection group, an APS switch occurs. If the card is the protect card, switching is inhibited and a PROTNA alarm is raised. The standby path generates a path-type alarm.
Clear the EQPT Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If traffic is active on the alarmed port, you might need to switch traffic away from it. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. Verify the
LED status. A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-82 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.79 EQPT-DIAG
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 6 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.79 EQPT-DIAG
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
An Equipment-Diagnostic Failure alarm indicates that a software or hardware failure has occurred on the reporting card. This alarm can be raised against a traffic card or a cross-connect card.
Clear the EQPT-DIAG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
If traffic is active on the alarmed card, you might need to switch traffic away from it. Refer to the
“2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures” section on page 2-272
for procedures.
Complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270 for the alarmed card
Caution If the card carries live traffic, reseating it can affect this traffic.
Step 3
Step 4
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
if it is raised against a traffic card, or complete the
“Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect
Card” procedure on page 2-271 if the alarm is raised against the cross-connect card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.80 EQPT-MISS
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: FAN
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-83
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.81 ERFI-P-CONN
The Replaceable Equipment or Unit Missing alarm is reported against the fan-tray assembly unit. It indicates that the replaceable fan-tray assembly is missing or not fully inserted. It might also indicate that the ribbon cable connecting the AIP to the system board is bad.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Clear the EQPT-MISS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the alarm is reported against the fan, verify that the fan-tray assembly is present.
If the fan-tray assembly is present, complete the
“Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 2-277
.
If no fan-tray assembly is present, obtain a fan-tray assembly and refer to the “Install the Fan-Tray
Assembly,” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, replace the ribbon cable from the AIP to the system board with a known-good ribbon cable.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.81 ERFI-P-CONN
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The Three-Bit (Enhanced) Remote Failure Indication Path Connectivity condition is triggered on DS-1,
DS-3, or VT circuits when the
“UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249 and the
are raised on the transmission signal.
Clear the ERFI-P-CONN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the UNEQ-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-249 . This should clear the ERFI
condition.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.82 ERFI-P-PAYLD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The Three-Bit ERFI Path Payload condition is triggered on DS-1, DS-3, or VT circuits when the
is raised on the transmission signal.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-84 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.83 ERFI-P-SRVR
Clear the ERFI-P-PAYLD Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the PLM-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-204
. This should clear the ERFI condition.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.83 ERFI-P-SRVR
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The Three-Bit ERFI Path Server condition is triggered on DS-1, DS-3, or VT circuits when the
“AIS-P” condition on page 2-31
or the
is raised on the transmission signal.
Clear the ERFI-P-SRVR Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the LOP-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-145
. This should clear the ERFI condition.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.84 ERROR-CONFIG
•
•
The Error in Startup Configuration alarm applies to the ML-Series Ethernet cards. These cards process startup configuration files line by line. If one or more lines cannot be executed, the error causes the
ERROR-CONFIG alarm. ERROR-CONFIG is not caused by hardware failure.
The typical reasons for an errored startup file are:
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The user stored the configuration for one type of ML-Series card in the database and then installed another type in its slot.
The configuration file contained a syntax error on one of the lines.
Note For information about provisioning the ML-Series Ethernet cards from the Cisco IOS interface, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the ERROR-CONFIG Alarm
Step 1 If you have a different type of ML-Series card specified in the startup configuration file than what you have installed, create the correct startup configuration.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-85
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.85 ETH-LINKLOSS
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Follow the card provisioning instructions in the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 .
Upload the configuration file to the TCC2/TCC2P: a.
In node view, right-click the ML-Series card graphic.
b.
c.
Choose IOS Startup Config from the shortcut menu.
Click Local > TCC and navigate to the file location in the Open dialog box.
Complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 .
If the alarm does not clear or if your configuration file was correct according to the installed card, start a Cisco IOS CLI for the card: a.
b.
Right click the ML-Series card graphic in node view.
Choose Open IOS Connection from the shortcut menu.
Note Open IOS Connection is not available unless the ML-Series card is physically installed in the shelf.
Step 5
Step 6
Follow the card provisioning instructions in the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 to correct the errored configuration file line.
Execute the CLI command: copy run start
The command copies the new card configuration into the database and clears the alarm.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.85 ETH-LINKLOSS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The Rear Panel Ethernet Link Removed condition, if enabled in the network defaults, is raised under the following conditions:
•
•
•
The node.network.general.AlarmMissingBackplaneLAN field in NE default is enabled.
The node is configured as a gateway network element (GNE).
The backplane LAN cable is removed.
Clear the ETH-LINKLOSS Condition
Step 1 To clear this alarm, reconnect the backplane LAN cable. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 1, “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable,” for instructions to install this cable.
2-86
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.86 E-W-MISMATCH
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.86 E-W-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
A Procedural Error Misconnect East/West Direction alarm occurs during BLSR setup, or when nodes in a ring have slots misconnected. An east slot can be misconnected to another east slot, or a west slot can be misconnected to another west slot. In most cases, the user did not connect the fibers correctly or the ring provisioning plan was flawed. You can physically reconnect the cable to the correct slots to clear the E-W-MISMATCH alarm. Alternately, you can delete and recreate the span in CTC to change the west line and east line designations. The CTC method clears the alarm, but could change the traditional east-west node connection pattern of the ring.
Note The E-W-MISMATCH alarm also appears during the initial set up of a ring with its east-west slots configured correctly. If the alarm appears during the initial setup, the alarm clears itself shortly after the ring setup is complete.
Note The lower-numbered slot at a node is traditionally labeled as the west slot and the higher numbered slot is labeled as the east slot. For example, Slot 6 is west and Slot 12 is east.
Note The physical switch procedure is the recommend method of clearing the E-W-MISMATCH alarm. The physical switch method reestablishes the logical pattern of connection in the ring. However, you can also use CTC to recreate the span and identify the misconnected slots as east and west. The CTC method is useful when the misconnected node is not geographically near the troubleshooter.
Clear the E-W-MISMATCH Alarm with a Physical Switch
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Diagram the ring setup, including nodes and spans, on a piece of paper or white board.
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
Label each of the nodes on the diagram with the same name that appears on the network map.
Right-click each span to reveal the node name/slot/port for each end of the span.
Label the span ends on the diagram with the same information. For example, with
Node1/Slot12/Port1—Node2/Slot6/Port1 (2F BLSR OC48, ring name=0), label the end of the span that connects Node 1 and Node 2 at the Node 1 end as Slot 12/Port 1. Label the Node 2 end of that same span
Slot 6/Port 1.
Repeat Steps
and
5 for each span on your diagram.
Label the highest slot at each node east and the lowest slot at each node west .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-87
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.86 E-W-MISMATCH
Step 8
Step 9
Examine the diagram. You should see a clockwise pattern of west slots connecting to east slots for each span. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable,” for more information about cabling the system.
If any span has an east-to-east or west-to-west connection, physically switching the fiber connectors from the card that does not fit the pattern to the card that continues the pattern should clear the alarm.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Step 10 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
Clear the E-W-MISMATCH Alarm in CTC
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Log into the misconnected node. A misconnected node has both ring fibers connecting it to its neighbor nodes misconnected.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
From the row of information for the fiber span, complete the
“Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID
Line column and West Line column. Record the above information.
Click View > Go to Network View .
Delete and recreate the BLSR: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the
Click the row from
Delete .
Click
Provisioning > BLSR
Create .
tabs.
Fill in the ring name and node ID from the information collected in
.
e.
Click Finish .
Display node view and click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Change the West Line field to the slot you recorded for the East Line in
Change the East Line field to the slot you recorded for the West Line in
Click OK .
2-88
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.87 EXCCOL
Step 10 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.87 EXCCOL
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Excess Collisions on the LAN alarm indicates that too many collisions are occurring between data packets on the network management LAN, and communications between the ONS 15454 and CTC could be affected. The network management LAN is the data network connecting the workstation running the
CTC software to the TCC2/TCC2P card. The problem causing the alarm is external to the ONS 15454.
Troubleshoot the network management LAN connected to the TCC2/TCC2P for excess collisions. You might need to contact the system administrator of the network management LAN to accomplish the following steps.
Clear the EXCCOL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Verify that the network device port connected to the TCC2/TCC2P card has a flow rate set to 10 Mb, half-duplex.
If the port has the correct flow rate and duplex setting, troubleshoot the network device connected to the
TCC2/TCC2P card and the network management LAN.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.88 EXERCISE-RING-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Exercise Ring command issues ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The EXERCISE-RING-FAIL condition is raised if the command was issued and accepted but the exercise did not take place.
Note If the exercise command gets rejected due to the existence of a higher-priority condition in the ring,
EXERCISE-RING-FAIL is not reported.
Clear the EXERCISE-RING-FAIL Condition
Step 1 Look for and clear, if present, the
“LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143
, the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
, or BLSR alarms.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-89
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.89 EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL
Step 2
Step 3
Reissue the Exercise Ring command: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the affected ring under the West Switch column.
c.
Select Exercise Ring in the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.89 EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Exercise Span command issues span switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL alarm is raised if the command was issued and accepted but the exercise did not take place.
Note If the exercise command gets rejected due to the existence of a higher-priority condition in the span or ring, EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL is not reported.
Clear the EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Look for and clear, if present, the
“LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143 , the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
, or a BLSR alarm.
Reissue the Exercise Span command: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Determine whether the card you would like to exercise is the west card or the east card.
Click the row of the affected span under the East Switch or West Switch column.
Select Exercise Span in the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.90 EXT
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: ENVALRM
A Failure Detected External to the NE alarm occurs because an environmental alarm is present. For example, a door could be open or flooding might have occurred.
2-90
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.91 EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT
Clear the EXT Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view double-click the AIC or AIC-I card to display the card view.
Double-click the AIC or AIC-I card Maintenance > External Alarms tab.
Follow your standard operating procedure to remedy environmental conditions that cause alarms. The alarm clears when the situation is remedied.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.91 EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: OCN
An Extra Traffic Preempted alarm occurs on OC-N cards in two-fiber and four-fiber BLSRs when low-priority traffic directed to the protect system has been preempted by a working system protection switch.
Clear the EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Verify that the protection switch has occurred by checking the Conditions tab.
If a ring switch has occurred, clear the ring switch on the working system by following the appropriate
Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 or the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm occurred on a four-fiber BLSR and the span switch occurred on this OC-N, clear the span switch on the working system.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.92 FAILTOSW
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, EQPT, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Failure to Switch to Protection condition occurs when a working electrical card cannot switch to the protect card in a protection group because another working electrical card with a higher-priority alarm has switched to the protect card.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-91
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.93 FAILTOSW-PATH
Clear the FAILTOSW Condition
Step 1 Look up and troubleshoot the higher-priority alarm. Clearing the higher-priority condition frees the card and clears the FAILTOSW.
Note A higher-priority alarm is an alarm raised on the working DS-N card using the 1:N card protection group. The working DS-N card is reporting an alarm but not reporting a FAILTOSW condition.
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, replace the working electrical card that is reporting the higher-priority
working electrical card using the protect card and not reporting FAILTOSW.
Replacing the working electrical card that is reporting the higher-priority alarm allows traffic to revert to the working slot and the card reporting the FAILTOSW to switch to the protect card.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 3 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.93 FAILTOSW-PATH
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, VT-MON
The Fail to Switch to Protection Path condition occurs when the working circuit does not switch to the protection circuit on a path protection. Common causes of the FAILTOSW-PATH alarm include a missing or defective protect port, a lockout set on one of the path protection nodes, or path level alarms that would cause a path protection switch to fail including the
“AIS-P” condition on page 2-31 , the
“LOP-P” alarm on page 2-145 , the
“SD-P” condition on page 2-220 , the
“SF-P” condition on page 2-223
, and the “UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249 .
The “LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143
, the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , the
“SD-L” condition on page 2-219
, or the
“SF-L” condition on page 2-223 can also occur on the failed path.
2-92
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.94 FAILTOSWR
Clear the FAILTOSW-PATH Condition in a Path Protection Configuration
Step 1 Look up and clear the higher-priority alarm. Clearing this alarm frees the standby card and clears the
FAILTOSW-PATH condition. If the
“AIS-P” condition on page 2-31
, the
the
, the
“SF-P” condition on page 2-223 , the
“SD-P” condition on page 2-220
, the
“LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143 , the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
, the
“SD-L” condition on page 2-219
, or the
“SF-L” condition on page 2-223 are also occurring on the reporting port,
complete the applicable alarm clearing procedure.
Note A higher-priority alarm is an alarm raised on the working DS-N card using the 1:N card protection group. The working DS-N card is reporting an alarm but not reporting a FAILTOSW condition.
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, replace the active OC-N card that is reporting the higher-priority alarm.
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 . Replacing the active OC-N
card that is reporting the higher-priority alarm allows traffic to revert to the active slot. Reverting frees the standby card, which can then take over traffic from the card reporting the lower-priority alarm and the FAILTOSW-PATH condition.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 3 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.94 FAILTOSWR
•
•
The Fail to Switch to Protection Ring condition occurs when a ring switch did not complete because of internal APS problems.
FAILTOSWR clears in any of the following situations:
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
A physical card pull of the active TCC2/TCC2P card (done under Cisco TAC supervision).
A node power cycle.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-93
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.94 FAILTOSWR
•
•
•
A higher-priority event such as an external switch command.
The next ring switch succeeds.
The cause of the APS switch (such as the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217
or the
(DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-221
) clears.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the FAILTOSWR Condition in a BLSR Configuration
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 1
Step 7
Perform the Exercise Ring command on the reporting card: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the affected ring under the West Switch column.
c.
Select Exercise Ring in the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, from the view menu, choose Go to Network View .
Look for alarms on OC-N cards that make up the ring or span and troubleshoot these alarms.
If clearing other alarms does not clear the FAILTOSWR condition, log into the local node.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Record the OC-N cards listed under West Line and East Line. Ensure that these OC-N cards and ports and port are active and in service: a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify the LED status: A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
e.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
If the OC-N cards are active and in service, verify fiber continuity to the ports on the recorded cards.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
2-94
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.95 FAILTOSWS
Step 8 If fiber continuity to the ports is okay, use an optical test set to verify that a valid signal exists on the line.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
Caution Using an optical test set disrupts service on the OC-N card. It could be necessary to manually switch traffic carrying circuits over to a protection path. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used switching procedures.
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
If the signal is valid, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If cleaning the fiber does not clear the condition, verify that the power level of the optical signal is within the OC-N card receiver specifications. The
“1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels” section on page 1-154 lists these specifications.
Repeat Steps
through
10 for any other ports on the card.
If the optical power level for all OC-N cards is within specifications, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the protect standby OC-N card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 13
Step 14
If the condition does not clear after you replace the BLSR cards on the node one by one, repeat
Steps
for each of the nodes in the ring.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.95 FAILTOSWS
•
•
The Failure to Switch to Protection Span condition signals an APS span switch failure. For a four-fiber
BLSR, a failed span switch initiates a ring switch. If the ring switch occurs, the FAILTOSWS condition does not appear. If the ring switch does not occur, the FAILTOSWS condition appears. FAILTOSWS clears when one of the following situations occurs:
• A physical card pull of the active TCC2/TCC2P done under Cisco TAC supervision.
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
•
•
A node power cycle.
A higher-priority event such as an external switch command occurs.
The next span switch succeeds.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-95
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.95 FAILTOSWS
• The cause of the APS switch (such as the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217
or the
(DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-221
) clears.
Clear the FAILTOSWS Condition
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 1
Step 7 a.
b.
c.
Perform the Exercise Span command on the reporting card:
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Determine whether the card you would like to exercise is the west card or the east card.
d.
Click the row of the affected span under the East Switch or West Switch column.
Select Exercise Span in the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, from the view menu, choose Go to Network View .
Look for alarms on OC-N cards that make up the ring or span and troubleshoot these alarms.
If clearing other alarms does not clear the FAILTOSWS condition, log into the local node.
Click the Maintenance > BLSR tabs.
Record the OC-N cards listed under West Line and East Line. Ensure that these OC-N cards are active and in service: a.
Verify the LED status: A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
b.
c.
To determine whether the OC-N port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
d.
e.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
If the OC-N cards are active and in service, verify fiber continuity to the ports on the recorded cards.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 8 If fiber continuity to the ports is okay, use an optical test set to verify that a valid signal exists on the line. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
Caution Using an optical test set disrupts service on the OC-N card. It could be necessary to manually switch traffic carrying circuits over to a protection path. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used switching procedures.
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
If the signal is valid, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If cleaning the fiber does not clear the condition, verify that the power level of the optical signal is within
lists these specifications.
Repeat Steps
for any other ports on the card.
2-96
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.96 FAN
Step 12 If the optical power level for all OC-N cards is within specifications, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the protect standby OC-N card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 13
Step 14
If the condition does not clear after you replace the BLSR cards on the node one by one, follow
Steps
for each of the nodes in the ring.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.96 FAN
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: FAN
The Fan Failure alarm indicates a problem with the fan-tray assembly. When the fan-tray assembly is not fully functional, the temperature of the ONS 15454 can rise above its normal operating range.
The fan-tray assembly contains six fans and needs a minimum of five working fans to properly cool the shelf. However, even with five working fans, the fan-tray assembly could need replacement because a sixth working fan is required for extra protection against overheating.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Clear the FAN Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Determine whether the air filter needs replacement. Complete the
“Inspect, Clean, and Replace the
Reusable Air Filter” procedure on page 2-275 .
If the filter is clean, complete the
“Replace the Alarm Interface Panel” procedure on page 2-279
.
Note The fan should run immediately when correctly inserted.
Step 3
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-97
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.97 FC-NO-CREDITS
Step 4 If the replacement fan-tray assembly does not operate correctly, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.97 FC-NO-CREDITS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: FC, FCMR
The Fibre Channel Distance Extension Credit Starvation alarm occurs on storage access networking
(SAN) Fibre Channel/Fiber Connectivity (FICON) FC_MR-4 cards when the congestion prevents the
GFP transmitter from sending frames to the FC_MR-4 card port. for example, the alarm can be raised when an operator configures a card to autodetect framing credits but the card is not connected to an interoperable FC-SW-standards-based Fibre Channel/FICON port.
FC-NO-CREDITS is raised only if transmission is completely prevented. (If traffic is slowed but still passing, this alarm is not raised.) The alarm is raised in conjunction with the GFP-NO-BUFFERS alarm.
For example, if the FC-NO-CREDITS alarm is generated at an FC_MR-4 data port, a
GFP-NO-BUFFERS alarm might be raised at the upstream remote FC_MR-4 data port.
Clear the FC-NO-CREDITS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the port is connected to a Fibre Channel/FICON switch, make sure it is configured for interoperation mode. Follow manufacturer instructions.
If the port is not connected to a switch, turn off Autodetect Credits: a.
Double-click the FC_MR-4 card.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Click Provisioning > Port > General.
Under Admin State, click the cell and choose OOS,MT .
Click Apply
Click the
.
Provisioning > Port > Distance Extension tabs.
g.
h.
i.
Uncheck the Autodetect Credits column check box.
Click Apply .
Click Provisioning > Port > General.
Under Admin State, click the cell and choose IS . j.
Click Apply .
Program the Credits Available value based on the buffers available on the connected equipment:
Note The NumCredits must be provisioned to a value smaller than or equal to the receive buffers or credits available on the connected equipment.
a.
b.
Double-click the FC_MR-4 card.
Click the Provisioning > Port > Distance Extension tabs.
2-98
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.98 FE-AIS
Step 4 c.
Enter a new value in the Credits Available column.
d.
Click Apply .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.98 FE-AIS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: DS3
The Far-End AIS condition occurs when an AIS has occurred at the remote node. FE-AIS usually occurs in conjunction with a downstream LOS alarm (see the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 ).
Generally, any AIS is a special SONET signal that communicates to the receiving node when the transmit node does not send a valid signal. AIS is not considered an error. It is raised by the receiving node on each input when it sees the AIS instead of a real signal. In most cases when this condition is raised, an upstream node is raising an alarm to indicate a signal failure; all nodes downstream from it only raise some type of AIS. This condition clears when you resolved the problem on the upstream node.
Clear the FE-AIS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.99 FEC-MISM
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The Forward Error Correction (FEC) Mismatch alarm occurs if one end of a span using
MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards is configured to use FEC and the other is not. FEC-MISM is related to ITU-T G.709 and is only raised against a trunk port.
Clear the FEC-MISM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,TXP_MR_10E or TXPP_MR_2.5G card.
Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
In the FEC column, click Standard or Enhanced if you desire to enable the monitoring, or Disable if you do not.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-99
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.100 FE-DS1-MULTLOS
Step 4
Step 5
Verify that the remote-node card is configured the same way by repeating
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.100 FE-DS1-MULTLOS
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far-End Multiple DS-1 LOS Detected condition occurs when multiple DS-1 signals are lost on a remote-node DS-1 card.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-DS1-MULTLOS condition. Troubleshoot the FE alarm or condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-DS1-MULTLOS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an ONS 15454 FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.101 FE-DS1-NSA
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: DS3
The Far End DS-1 Equipment Failure Non-Service Affecting condition occurs when a remote-node DS-1 equipment failure occurs, but does not affect service because the port is protected and traffic is able to switch to the protect port.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-DS1-NSA alarm. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source.
The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
2-100
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.102 FE-DS1-SA
Clear the FE-DS1-NSA Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an alarm from a card in an ONS 15454 Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to an alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.102 FE-DS1-SA
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End DS-1 Equipment Failure Service Affecting condition occurs when there is a remote-node equipment failure on a DS-1 card that affects service because traffic is unable to switch to the protect port.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-DS1-SA alarm. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source.
The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-DS1-SA Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an alarm from a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to an alarm from a card in
Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.103 FE-DS1-SNGLLOS
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far-End Single DS-1 LOS condition occurs when a single DS-1 signal is lost on remote-node DS-1 equipment (within a DS3). Signal loss also causes the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-101
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.104 FE-DS3-NSA
The prefix FE in an alarm or condition means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-DS1-SNGLLOS alarm. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-DS1-SNGLLOS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to an alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.104 FE-DS3-NSA
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End DS-3 Equipment Failure Non-Service Affecting condition occurs when a remote-node
ONS 15454 DS-3 equipment failure occurs in C-bit framing mode, but does not affect service because the port is protected and traffic is able to switch to the protect port.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting
FE-DS3-NSA alarm. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-DS3-NSA Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an alarm from a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to an alarm from a card in
Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.105 FE-DS3-SA
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
2-102
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.106 FE-EQPT-NSA
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End DS-3 Equipment Failure Service Affecting condition occurs when there is a remote-node equipment failure on an ONS 15454 DS-3 card in C-bit framing mode that affects service because traffic is unable to switch to the protect port.
The prefix FE in an alarm or condition means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE condition. Troubleshoot the FE alarm by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-DS3-SA Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an alarm from a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to an alarm from a card in
Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.106 FE-EQPT-NSA
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End Common Equipment Failure condition occurs when a non-service-affecting equipment failure is detected on remote-node DS-3 equipment.
The prefix FE occurs when the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-EQPT-NSA alarm. Troubleshoot the FE alarm or condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-EQPT-NSA Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-103
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.107 FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN
2.8.107 FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Far End Forced Switch Back to Working—Span condition is raised on a remote-node 1+1 working port when it is Force switched to the working port.
Note WKSWBK-type conditions apply only to revertive circuits.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the primary alarm clears.
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear a 1+1 Protection Port Force or Manual Switch Command” procedure on page 2-261
for the remote-node port.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.108 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Far End Ring Working Facility Forced to Switch to Protection condition occurs from a remote-node node when a BLSR is forced from working to protect using the Force Ring command.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the primary alarm clears.
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an FE-AIS condition from the OC-48 card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to the main AIS condition from an OC-48 card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm.
If the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING condition does not also clear, complete the
Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 .
2-104
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.109 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN
Step 5 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.109 FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Far End Working Facility Forced to Switch to Protection Span condition occurs from a remote-node node when a span on a four-fiber BLSR is forced from working to protect using the Force Span command.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an FE-AIS condition from the OC-48 card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to the main AIS condition from an OC-48 card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm.
If the FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN condition does not also clear, complete the
Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 for instructions.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.110 FE-IDLE
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: DS3
The Far End Idle condition occurs when a remote-node node detects an idle DS-3 signal in C-bit framing mode.
The prefix FE in an alarm or condition occurs when the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-IDLE condition. Troubleshoot the FE alarm or condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. Both alarms clear when the main alarm clears.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-105
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.111 FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN
Clear the FE-IDLE Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot the FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm by clearing the protection switch. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.111 FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Far-End Lock Out of Protection Span condition occurs when a BSLR span is locked out of the protection system from a remote-node node using the Lockout Protect Span command.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an FE-AIS condition from the OC-48 card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to the main AIS condition from an OC-48 card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Ensure there is no lockout set. Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.112 FE-LOF
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End LOF condition occurs when a remote node reports the
“LOF (DS3)” alarm on page 2-141
in C-bit framing mode.
2-106
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.113 FE-LOS
The prefix FE in an alarm or condition occurs when the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-LOF condition. Troubleshoot the FE alarm or condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-LOF Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Complete the
“Clear the LOF (DS1) Alarm” procedure on page 2-141 . It also applies to FE-LOF.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.113 FE-LOS
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The Far End LOS condition occurs in C-bit framing mode when a remote node reports the
“LOS (DS3)” alarm on page 2-149
.
The prefix FE occurs when the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node, and not at the node reporting the FE-LOS condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-LOS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot the FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Complete the
“Clear the LOS (DS1) Alarm” procedure on page 2-148 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.114 FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-107
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.115 FE-MANWKSWPR-RING
The Far End Manual Switch Back to Working—Span condition occurs when a remote-node path protection span is Manual switched back to working.
Note WKSWBK-type conditions apply only to nonrevertive circuits.
The prefix FE occurs when the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node, and not at the node reporting the FE-LOS condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot the FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE condition. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Complete the “Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.115 FE-MANWKSWPR-RING
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Far End Ring Manual Switch of Working Facility to Protect condition occurs when a BLSR working ring is switched from working to protect at a remote-node node using the Manual Ring command.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the FE-MANWKSWPR-RING condition. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-MANWKSWPR-RING Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an FE-AIS condition from the OC-48 card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to the main AIS condition from an OC-48 card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Complete the “Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-108
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.116 FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN
2.8.116 FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Far-End Span Manual Switch Working Facility to Protect condition occurs when a four-fiber BLSR span is switched from working to protect at the remote-node node using the Manual to Protect command.
The prefix FE means the main alarm is occurring at the remote-node node and not at the node reporting the alarm. Troubleshoot the FE condition by troubleshooting the main alarm at its source. The secondary alarms or conditions clear when the main alarm clears.
Clear the FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To troubleshoot an FE condition, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the
FE alarm. For example, an FE-AIS condition from the OC-48 card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could link to the main AIS condition from an OC-48 card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” alarm on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.117 FEPRLF
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Far End Protection Line Failure alarm occurs when an APS channel
“SF (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-221
occurs on the protect card coming into the node.
Note The FEPRLF alarm occurs when bidirectional protection is used on optical cards in a 1+1 configuration or four-fiber BLSR configuration.
Clear the FEPRLF Alarm on a Four-Fiber BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
To troubleshoot the FE alarm, determine which node and card link directly to the card reporting the FE alarm. For example, an FE condition on a card in Slot 12 of Node 1 could relate to a main alarm from a card in Slot 6 of Node 2.
Log into the node that links directly to the card reporting the FE condition.
Clear the main alarm. Refer to the appropriate alarm section in this chapter in this chapter for instructions.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-109
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.118 FIBERTEMP-DEG
Step 4 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.118 FIBERTEMP-DEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Fiber Temperature Degrade alarm occurs when a DWDM card internal heater-control circuit fails.
Degraded temperature can cause some signal drift. The card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the FIBERTEMP-DEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
at the next opportunity.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.119 FORCED-REQ
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EQPT, STSMON, VT-MON
The Force Switch Request on Facility or Port condition occurs when you enter the Force command on a port to force traffic from a working port to a protect port or protection span (or vice versa). You do not need to clear the condition if you want the Force switch to remain.
Clear the FORCED-REQ Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear a 1+1 Protection Port Force or Manual Switch Command” procedure on page 2-261
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.120 FORCED-REQ-RING
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Force Switch Request Ring condition applies to optical trunk cards when the Force Ring command is applied to two-fiber and four-fiber BLSRs to move traffic from working to protect.
2-110
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN
Clear the FORCED-REQ-RING Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.121 FORCED-REQ-SPAN
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Force Switch Request Span condition applies to optical trunk cards in two-fiber or four-fiber BLSRs when the Force Span command is applied to a BLSR to force traffic from working to protect or from protect to working.
Clear the FORCED-REQ-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.122 FRCDSWTOINT
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE-SREF
The Force Switch to Internal Timing condition occurs when the user issues a Force command to switch to an internal timing source.
Note FRCDSWTOINT is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.123 FRCDSWTOPRI
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Force Switch to Primary Timing Source condition occurs when the user issues a Force command to switch to the primary timing source.
Note FRCDSWTOPRI is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-111
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.124 FRCDSWTOSEC
2.8.124 FRCDSWTOSEC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Force Switch to Second Timing Source condition occurs when the user issues a Force command to switch to the second timing source.
Note FRCDSWTOSEC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.125 FRCDSWTOTHIRD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Force Switch to Third Timing Source condition occurs when the user issues a Force command to switch to the third timing source.
Note FRCDSWTOTHIRD is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.126 FRNGSYNC
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: NE-SREF
The Free Running Synchronization Mode condition occurs when the reporting ONS 15454 is in free-run synchronization mode. External timing sources have been disabled and the node is using its internal clock, or the node has lost its designated building integrated timing supply (BITS) timing source. After the 24-hour holdover period expires, timing slips could begin to occur on an ONS 15454 node relying on an internal clock.
Note If the ONS 15454 is configured to operate from its internal clock, disregard the FRNGSYNC condition.
Clear the FRNGSYNC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the ONS 15454 is configured to operate from an external timing source, verify that the BITS timing source is valid. Common problems with a BITS timing source include reversed wiring and bad timing cards. Refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for more information about timing.
If the BITS source is valid, clear alarms related to the failures of the primary and secondary reference sources, such as the
and the
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-112
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.127 FSTSYNC
2.8.127 FSTSYNC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE-SREF
A Fast Start Synchronization mode alarm occurs when the node is choosing a new timing reference. The previous timing reference has failed.
The FSTSYNC alarm disappears after approximately 30 seconds. If the alarm does not clear, log into the
Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447).
Note FSTSYNC is an informational alarm. It does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.128 FULLPASSTHR-BI
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Bidirectional Full Pass-Through Active condition occurs on a nonswitching node in a BLSR when the protect channels on the node are active and carrying traffic and there is a change in the receive K byte from No Request.
Clear the FULLPASSTHR-BI Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.129 GAIN-HDEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Gain High Degrade alarm is raised on DWDM OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards when the gain reaches the high degrade threshold and is prevented from reaching the setpoint due to an internal failure. The card should be replaced at the first opportunity.
Note This alarm is applicable only when the amplifier working mode is set to Control Gain.
Clear the GAIN-HDEG Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-113
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.129 GAIN-HDEG
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
If the cabling is okay, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. A red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card.
Verify that the received power (opwrMin) is within the expected range shown in Cisco MetroPlanner. To check the level in CTC: a.
b.
Double-click the amplifier card to display the card view.
Display the optical thresholds by clicking the OPT-BST or OPT-PRE Provisioning >
Opt. Ampli. Line > Optics Thresholds tab.
If the power value is outside the expected range, verify that all impacted optical signal sources are in
IS-NR service state and that their outputs are within expected range. Optical signal sources include the trunk port of a TXP or MXP card, or an ITU-T line card.
If the signal source is OOS,DSBLD admin state, put it in IS state. This creates the IS-NR service state.
If the service state is IS-NR but the output power is outside of specifications, complete the
LOS-P (OCH) Alarm” procedure on page 2-159 .
If the signal source is IS and the power is within the expected range, go back to the unit reporting the alarm and clean the fiber connected to amplifier's COM-RX port according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Note Unplugging fiber from the COM-RX port can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic
switch if possible using the procedures outlined in the “2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 . For more in-depth information about protection
switches, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide for acceptance testing procedures that can be used for troubleshooting purposes.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the GAIN-HDEG, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the GAIN-HDEG, place all of the card ports in OOS,DSBLD admin state.
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the reporting card.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database apart from restoring the card's port to the IS,AINS admin state.
Step 11 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-114
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.130 GAIN-HFAIL
2.8.130 GAIN-HFAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Gain High Fail alarm is raised on DWDM OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards when the gain crosses the high failure point threshold. The card must be replaced.
Note This alarm is applicable only when the amplifier working mode is set to Control Gain.
Clear the GAIN-HFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the
“Clear the GAIN-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-113
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.131 GAIN-LDEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Gain Low Degrade alarm is raised on DWDM OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards when the gain has crossed the low degrade threshold and is prevented from reaching the setpoint due to an internal failure. The card should be replaced at the first opportunity.
Note This alarm is applicable only when the amplifier working mode is set to Control Gain.
Clear the GAIN-LDEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the
“Clear the GAIN-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-113
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.132 GAIN-LFAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Gain Low Fail alarm is raised on DWDM OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards when the gain crosses the low failure point threshold. The card must be replaced.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-115
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.133 GCC-EOC
Note This alarm is applicable only when the amplifier working mode is set to Control Gain.
Clear the GAIN-LFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the “Clear the GAIN-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-113 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.133 GCC-EOC
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The GCC Embedded Operation Channel Failure alarm applies to the optical transport network (OTN) communication channel for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and
MXP_2.5G_10G cards. The GCC-EOC is raised when the channel cannot operate.
Clear the GCC-EOC Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the EOC Alarm” procedure on page 2-79
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.134 GE-OOSYNC
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: FC, GE, ISC, TRUNK
The Gigabit Ethernet Out of Synchronization alarm applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards when the Gigabit Ethernet signal is out of synchronization and is very similar to the SONET LOS alarm. This alarm can occur when you try to input a SONET signal to the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card. A signal is present, so there is no CARLOSS alarm, but it is not correctly formatted for the card and so raises the
GE-OOSYNC alarm.
Clear the GE-OOSYNC Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Ensure that the incoming signal is provisioned with the correct physical-layer protocol.
Ensure that the line is provisioned with the correct line speed (10 Gbps).
2-116
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.135 GFP-CSF
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.135 GFP-CSF
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: CE100T, FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP Client Signal Fail Detected alarm is a secondary alarm raised on local GFP data ports when a service-affecting alarm such as the
“SIGLOSS” alarm on page 2-225 , an Ethernet client loss
[
,
2.8.47 CARLOSS (E100T, E1000F) , 2.8.46 CARLOSS (CE100T)
, or
2.8.50 CARLOSS (G1000) , 2.8.49 CARLOSS (FC) ,
2.8.51 CARLOSS (GE) , 2.8.52 CARLOSS
(ISC) ], a trunk carrier loss (the
“CARLOSS (TRUNK)” alarm on page 2-63
), or a
alarm causes invalid data transmission. The alarm is raised locally on FC_MR-4, ML100T, ML1000,
MXP_MR_25G, MXPP_MR_25G, TXP, or TXPP data ports and indicates that a signal loss or frame failure (such as from a degraded or pulled Rx cable) has affected a remote data port's Rx. This alarm can be demoted when a facility loopback is placed on the FC_MR-4 port.
Clear the GFP-CSF Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Clear the service-affecting alarm at the remote data port, using the appropriate procedure in this chapter.
If the GFP-CSF alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.136 GFP-DE-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP Fibre Channel Distance Extension Mismatch alarm indicates that a port configured for
Distance Extension is connected to a port that is not operating in Cisco's proprietary Distance Extension mode. It is raised on Fibre Channel and FICON card GFP ports supporting distance extension. The alarm occurs when distance extension is enabled on one side of the transport but not on the other. To clear, distance extension must be enabled on both ports connected by a circuit.
Clear the GFP-DE-MISMATCH Alarm
Step 1 Ensure that the distance extension protocol is configured correctly on both sides: a.
b.
c.
d.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Port > General tabs.
Under Admin State, click the cell and choose
Click Apply .
OOS,MT .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-117
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.137 GFP-EX-MISMATCH
Step 2 e.
f.
Click the Provisioning > Port > Distance Extension tabs.
Check the check box in the Enable Distance Extension column.
Click Apply .
g.
h.
i.
Click the Provisioning > Port > General tabs.
Under Admin State, click the cell and choose IS-NR .
j.
Click Apply .
If the GFP-DE-MISMATCH alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service affecting problem.
2.8.137 GFP-EX-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP Extension Header Mismatch alarm is raised on Fibre Channel/FICON cards when it receives frames with an extension header that is not null. The alarm occurs when a provisioning error causes all
GFP frames to be dropped for 2.5 seconds.
Ensure that both end ports are sending a null extension header for a GFP frame. The FC_MR-4 card always sends a null extension header, so if the equipment is connected to other vendors’ equipment, those need to be provisioned appropriately.
Clear the GFP-EX-MISMATCH Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Ensure that the vendor equipment is provisioned to send a null extension header in order to interoperate with the FC_MR-4 card. (The FC_MR-4 card always sends a null extension header.)
If the GFP-EX-MISMATCH alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service affecting problem.
2.8.138 GFP-LFD
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: CE100T, FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP Loss of Frame Delineation alarm applies to Fibre Channel/FICON GFP ports and occurs if there is a bad SONET connection, if SONET path errors cause GFP header errors in the check sum calculated over payload length (PLI/cHEC) combination, or if the GFP source port sends an invalid
PLI/cHEC combination. The loss causes traffic stoppage.
2-118
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.139 GFP-NO-BUFFERS
Clear the GFP-LFD Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Look for and clear any associated SONET path errors such as LOS or AIS-L originating at the transmit node.
If the GFP-LFD alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service affecting problem.
2.8.139 GFP-NO-BUFFERS
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP Fibre Channel Distance Extension Buffer Starvation alarm is raised on Fibre Channel/FICON card ports supporting GFP and the distance extension protocol when the GFP transmitter cannot send
GFP frames due to lack of remote GFP receiver buffers. This occurs when the remote GFP-T receiver experiences congestion and is unable to send frames over the Fibre Channel/FICON link.
This alarm might be raised in conjunction with the FC-NO-CREDITS alarm. For example, if the
FC-NO-CREDITS alarm is generated at an FC_MR-4 data port, a GFP-NO-BUFFERS alarm might be raised at the upstream remote FC_MR-4 data port.
Clear the GFP-NO-BUFFERS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the FC-NO-CREDITS Alarm” procedure on page 2-98
.
If the GFP-NO-BUFFERS alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service affecting problem.
2.8.140 GFP-UP-MISMATCH
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: FCMR, GFP-FAC, ML100T, ML1000
The GFP User Payload Mismatch is raised against Fibre Channel/FICON ports supporting GFP. It occurs when the received frame user payload identifier (UPI) does not match the transmitted UPI and all frames are dropped. The alarm is caused by a provisioning error, such as the port media type not matching the remote port media type. For example, the local port media type could be set to Fibre Channel 1 Gig or
Fibre Channel 2 Gig and the remote port media type could be set to FICON 1 Gig or FICON 2 Gig.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-119
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.141 HELLO
Clear the GFP-UP-MISMATCH Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3 a.
b.
c.
Ensure that the transmit port and receive port are provisioned the same way for distance extension:
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Port > Distance Extension tabs.
d.
Check the check box in the
Click Apply .
Enable Distance Extension column.
Ensure that both ports are set for the correct media type. For each port, complete the following: a.
Double-click the card to display the card view (if you are not already in card view).
b.
c.
Click the Provisioning > Port> General tabs.
Choose the correct media type (Fibre Channel 1 Gbps, Fibre Channel 2 Gbps, FICON 1 Gbps, or
FICON 2 Gbps) from the drop-down list.
d.
Click Apply .
If the GFP-UP-MISMATCH alarm does not also clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service affecting problem.
2.8.141 HELLO
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service-Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: OCN
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Hello alarm is raised when the two end nodes cannot bring an
OSPF neighbor up to the full state. Typically, this problem is caused by an area ID mismatch, and/or an
OSPF HELLO packet loss over the DCC.
Clear the HELLO Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Ensure that the area ID is correct on the missing neighbor: a.
b.
c.
d.
In node view, click the
If the address does not match, click the incorrect cell and correct it.
Click Apply .
Provisioning > Network > OSPF tabs.
Ensure that the IP address in the Area ID column matches the other nodes.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.142 HIBATVG
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
2-120
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.143 HI-CCVOLT
• Logical Object: PWR
The High Voltage Battery alarm occurs in a –48 VDC environment when a battery lead input voltage exceeds the high power threshold. This threshold, with a default value of –52 VDC, is user-provisionable. The alarm remains raised until the voltage remains under the threshold for
120 seconds. (For information about changing this threshold, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 4, “Turn Up Node.”)
Clear the HIBATVG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
The problem is external to the ONS 15454. Troubleshoot the power source supplying the battery leads.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.143 HI-CCVOLT
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: BITS
The 64K Composite Clock High NE Voltage alarm occurs when the 64K signal peak voltage exceeds
1.1 Vdc.
Clear the HI-CCVOLT Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Lower the source voltage to the clock.
If the condition does not clear, add more cable length or add a 5 dBm attenuator to the cable.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.144 HI-LASERBIAS
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN,
TRUNK; Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for PPM
Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, PPM, TRUNK
The Equipment High Transmit Laser Bias Current alarm is raised against TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G card laser performance. The alarm indicates that the card laser has reached the maximum laser bias tolerance.
Laser bias typically starts at about 30 percent of the manufacturer maximum laser bias specification and increases as the laser ages. If the HI-LASERBIAS alarm threshold is set at 100 percent of the maximum, the laser usability has ended. If the threshold is set at 90 percent of the maximum, the card is still usable for several weeks or months before it needs to be replaced.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-121
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.145 HI-LASERTEMP
Clear the HI-LASERBIAS Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Clear the LASEREOL Alarm” procedure on page 2-135
. Replacement is not urgent and can be scheduled during a maintenance window.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.145 HI-LASERTEMP
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA) or OCN; Not Alarmed (NA),
Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for PPM
Logical Objects: OCN, PPM
The Equipment High Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards.
HI-LASERTEMP occurs when the internally measured transceiver temperature exceeds the card setting by 35.6 degrees F (2 degrees C). A laser temperature change affects the transmitted wavelength.
When the TXP or MXP card raises this alarm, the laser is automatically shut off. The
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 is raised at the remote node and the
is raised at the local node.
Clear the HI-LASERTEMP Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, double-click the card to display the card view.
Click the Performance > Optics PM tabs.
Verify the card laser temperature levels. Maximum, minimum, and average laser temperatures are shown in the Current column entries in the Laser Temp rows.
Complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the reporting MXP or TXP
card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting MXP or TXP card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-122
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER
2.8.146 HI-RXPOWER
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Equipment High Receive Power alarm is an indicator of the optical signal power that is transmitted to the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or MXP_2.5G_10G card.
HI-RXPOWER occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal exceeds the threshold.
The threshold value is user-provisionable.
Clear the HI-RXPOWER Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Find out whether gain (the amplification power) of any amplifiers has been changed. This change also causes channel power to need adjustment.
Find out whether channels have been dropped from the fiber. Increasing or decreasing channels can affect power. If channels have been dropped, the power levels of all channels have to be adjusted.
Note If the card is part of an amplified DWDM system, dropping channels on the fiber affects the transmission power of each channel more than it would in an unamplified system.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
At the transmit end of the errored circuit, decrease the transmit power level within safe limits.
If neither of these problems cause the HI-RXPOWER alarm, there is a slight possibility that another wavelength is drifting on top of the alarmed signal. In this case, the receiver gets signals from two transmitters at the same time and data alarms would be present. If wavelengths are drifting, the data is garbled and receive power increases by about +3 dBm.
If the alarm does not clear, add fiber attenuators to the receive ports. Start with low-resistance attenuators and use stronger ones as needed, depending on factors such as the transmission distance, according to standard practice.
If the alarm does not clear and no faults are present on the other port(s) of the transmit or receive card, use a known-good loopback cable to complete the
“1.6.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a
Source-Node MXP/TXP/FC_MR-4 Port” procedure on page 1-88 and test the loopback.
the card at the next available maintenance window.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 8 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-123
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.147 HITEMP
2.8.147 HITEMP
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA) for NE; Default Severity: Minor (MN),
Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for EQPT
Logical Objects: EQPT, NE •
The High Temperature alarm occurs when the temperature of the ONS 15454 is above 122 degrees F
(50 degrees C).
Clear the HITEMP Alarm
Step 1 View the temperature displayed on the ONS 15454 LCD front panel (
Figure 2-2 Shelf LCD Panel
Slot Status Port
8/18/03
04.06-002L-10
24˚C
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Verify that the environmental temperature of the room is not abnormally high.
If the room temperature is not abnormal, physically ensure that nothing prevents the fan-tray assembly from passing air through the ONS 15454 shelf.
If airflow is not blocked, physically ensure that blank faceplates fill the ONS 15454 shelf empty slots.
Blank faceplates help airflow.
If faceplates fill the empty slots, determine whether the air filter needs replacement. Refer to the
“Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter” procedure on page 2-275 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 6 If the fan does not run or the alarm persists, complete the
“Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 2-277
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note The fan should run immediately when correctly inserted.
2-124
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER
Step 7 If the replacement fan-tray assembly does not operate correctly, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447) if it applies to the NE, or a non-service-affecting problem if it applies to equipment.
2.8.148 HI-TXPOWER
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, PPM, TRUNK
The Equipment High Transmit Power alarm is an indicator on the TXP_MR_E, TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_2.5G_10G card transmitted optical signal power.
HI-TXPOWER occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted signal exceeds the threshold.
Clear the HI-TXPOWER Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, display the card view for the TXP_MR_E, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Click the Provisioning > Optical Thresholds tabs.
Decrease (change toward the negative direction) the OPT-HIGH column value by 0.5 dBm.
If the card transmit power setting cannot be lowered without disrupting the signal, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” section on page 2-271
.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 5 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.149 HLDOVRSYNC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE-SREF
The Holdover Synchronization Mode condition indicates a loss of the primary or secondary timing reference. Timing reference loss occurs when line coding on the timing input is different from the configuration on the ONS 15454. It also usually occurs during the selection of a new node reference
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-125
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.150 I-HITEMP clock. The HLDOVRSYNC condition indicates that the ONS 15454 has gone into holdover and is using the ONS node internal reference clock, which is a Stratum 3-level timing device. The condition clears when primary or secondary timing is reestablished.
Clear the HLDOVRSYNC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
•
•
•
Clear additional alarms that relate to timing, such as:
•
•
•
2.8.149 HLDOVRSYNC, page 2-125
2.8.173 LOF (BITS), page 2-139
2.8.185 LOS (BITS), page 2-147
2.8.231 MANSWTOINT, page 2-177
•
•
•
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI, page 2-178
2.8.233 MANSWTOSEC, page 2-178
2.8.234 MANSWTOTHIRD, page 2-178
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reestablish a primary and secondary timing source according to local site practice. If none exists, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 10, “Change Node Settings.”
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.150 I-HITEMP
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: NE
The Industrial High Temperature alarm occurs when the temperature of the ONS 15454 is above 149
degrees F (65 degrees C) or below –40 degrees F (–40 degrees C). This alarm is similar to the HITEMP
alarm but is used for the industrial environment. If this alarm is used, you can customize your alarm profile to ignore the lower-temperature HITEMP alarm.
2-126
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.151 IMPROPRMVL
Clear the I-HITEMP Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the HITEMP Alarm” procedure on page 2-124
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call TAC (1-800-553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.151 IMPROPRMVL
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: EQPT, PPM
The Improper Removal equipment alarm occurs when a card is physically removed from its slot before it is deleted from CTC. The card does not need to be in service to cause the IMPROPRMVL alarm; it only needs to be recognized by CTC. The alarm does not appear if you delete the card from CTC before you physically remove the card from the node. It can also occur if the card is inserted into a slot but is not fully plugged into the backplane. For PPMs, the alarm occurs if you provision a PPM but no physical module is inserted on the port.
Caution Do not remove a card during a card reboot. If CTC begins to reboot a card before you remove the card, allow the card to finish rebooting. After the card reboots, delete the card in CTC again and physically remove the card before it begins to reboot. When you delete the card, CTC loses connection with the node view and go to network view.
Note CTC gives the user approximately 15 seconds to physically remove the card before CTC begins a card reboot.
Note It can take up to 30 minutes for software to be updated on a standby TCC2/TCC2P card.
Clear the IMPROPRMVL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
In node view, right-click the card reporting the IMPROPRMVL.
Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Note CTC does not allow you to delete the reporting card if the card is in service, has a circuit mapped to it, is paired in a working protection scheme, has DCC enabled, or is used as a timing reference.
Step 3 If any ports on the card are in service, place them out of service (OOS,MT):
Caution Before placing a port out of service (OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD), ensure that no live traffic is present.
a.
In node view, double-click the reporting card to display the card view.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-127
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.152 INC-ISD
Step 4 b.
c.
d.
Click the Provisioning > Line tab.
Click the Admin State column of any in-service (IS) ports.
Choose OOS,MT to take the ports out of service.
If a circuit has been mapped to the card, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 .
Caution Before deleting the circuit, ensure that the circuit does not carry live traffic.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the card is paired in a protection scheme, delete the protection group: a.
b.
c.
d.
Click View > Go to Previous View
Click the protection group of the reporting card.
Click Delete .
to return to node view.
If you are already in node view, click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
If the card is provisioned for DCC, delete the DCC provisioning: a.
Click the ONS 15454 Provisioning > Comm Channels > SDCC tabs. b.
c.
Click the slots and ports listed in DCC terminations.
Click Delete and click Yes in the dialog box that appears.
If the card is used as a timing reference, change the timing reference: a.
Click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.
b.
c.
Under NE Reference, click the drop-down arrow for Ref-1 .
Change Ref-1 from the listed OC-N card to Internal Clock .
d.
Click Apply .
Right-click the card reporting the IMPROPRMVL alarm and choose Delete .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.152 INC-ISD
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS3
The DS-3 Idle condition indicates that the DS-3 card is receiving an idle signal, meaning that the payload of the signal contains a repeating pattern of bits. The INC-ISD condition occurs when the transmitting port has an OOS-MA,MT service state. It is resolved when the OOS-MA,MT state ends.
Note INC-ISD is a condition and not an alarm. It is for information only and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.153 INHSWPR
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
2-128
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.154 INHSWWKG
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Inhibit Switch To Protect Request on Equipment condition occurs on traffic cards when the ability to switch to protect has been disabled. If the card is part of a 1:1 or 1+1 protection scheme, traffic remains locked onto the working system. If the card is part of a 1:N protection scheme, traffic can be switched between working cards when the switch to protect is disabled.
Clear the INHSWPR Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the condition is raised against a 1+1 port, complete the
“Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Manual Switch
Command” section on page 2-261 .
to switch it back.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.154 INHSWWKG
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Inhibit Switch To Working Request on Equipment condition occurs on traffic cards when the ability to switch to working has been disabled. If the card is part of a 1:1 or 1+1 protection scheme, traffic remains locked onto the protect system. If the card is part of a 1:N protection scheme, traffic can be switched between protect cards when the switch to working is disabled.
Clear the INHSWWKG Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
If the condition is raised against a 1+1 port, complete the
“Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Manual Switch
Command” section on page 2-261 .
to switch traffic back.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.155 INTRUSION-PSWD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-129
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.156 INVMACADR
The Security Intrusion Incorrect Password condition occurs after a user attempts a provisionable (by
Superuser) number of unsuccessful logins, a login with an expired password, or an invalid password. The alarmed user is locked out of the system, and INTRUSION-PSWD condition is raised. The
INTRUSION-PSWD condition is automatically cleared when a provisionable lockout timeout expires, or it can be manually cleared in CTC by the Superuser if lockout is permanent.
Note This condition is only shown in Superuser login sessions, not login sessions for lower-level users.
Clear the INTRUSION-PSWD Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
In node view, click the Provisioning > Security tabs.
Click the Clear security intrusion alarm button.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.156 INVMACADR
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: AIP, BPLANE
The Equipment Failure Invalid Media Access Control (MAC) Address alarm occurs when the
ONS 15454 MAC address is invalid. Each ONS 15454 has a unique, permanently assigned MAC address. The address resides on an AIP EEPROM. The TCC2/TCC2P card reads the address value from the AIP chip during boot-up and keeps this value in its synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM).
Under normal circumstances, the read-only MAC address can be viewed in the Provisioning/Network tab in CTC.
The ONS 15454 uses both IP and MAC addresses for circuit routing. When an INVMACADR alarm exists on a node, you see a PARTIAL circuit in the CTC circuit status column. The circuit works and is able to carry traffic, but CTC cannot logically display the circuit end-to-end information.
An invalid MAC address can be caused when:
•
•
There is a read error from the AIP during bootup; in this case, the reading TCC2/TCC2P uses the default MAC address (00-10-cf-ff-ff-ff).
There is a read error occurring on one of the redundant TCC2/TCC2P cards that read the address from the AIP; these cards read the address independently and could therefore each read different address values.
•
•
An AIP component failure causes a read error.
The ribbon cable connecting the AIP card to the backplane is bad.
Clear the INVMACADR Alarm
Step 1 Check for any outstanding alarms that were raised against the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P and resolve them.
2-130
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.156 INVMACADR
Step 2
Step 3
If the alarm does not clear, determine whether the LCD display on the fan tray (
) is blank or if the text is garbled. If so, proceed to
. If not, continue with Step 3
.
At the earliest maintenance window, reset the standby TCC2/TCC2P:
Note The reset requires approximately five minutes. Do not perform any other step until the reset is complete.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7 a.
b.
c.
d.
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with Step
Identify the active TCC2/TCC2P card.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Right-click the standby TCC2/TCC2P card in CTC.
Choose Reset Card from the shortcut menu.
e.
f.
Click Yes in the Are You Sure dialog box.
The card resets, the FAIL LED blinks on the physical card, and connection to the node is lost. CTC switches to network view.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free, and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card. g.
Double-click the node and ensure that the reset TCC2/TCC2P card is still in standby mode and that the other TCC2/TCC2P card is active.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
Ensure that no new alarms associated with this reset appear in the CTC Alarms window.
h.
If the standby TCC2/TCC2P fails to boot into standby mode and reloads continuously, the AIP is probably defective. In this case, the standby TCC2/TCC2P is unsuccessfully attempting to read the
EEPROM located on the AIP. The TCC2/TCC2P reloads until it reads the EEPROM. Proceed to
If the standby TCC2/TCC2P rebooted successfully into standby mode, complete the
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 .
Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P causes the standby TCC2/TCC2P to become active. The standby
TCC2/TCC2P keeps a copy of the chassis MAC address. If its stored MAC address is valid, the alarm should clear.
After the reset, note whether or not the INVMACADR alarm has cleared or is still present.
Complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268
again to place the standby TCC2/TCC2P back into active mode.
After the reset, note whether or not the INVMACADR alarm has cleared or is still present. If the
INVMACADR alarm remains standing through both TCC2/TCC2P resets, this indicates that the AIP is probably defective. Proceed to
.
If the INVMACADR was raised during one TCC2/TCC2P reset and cleared during the other, the
TCC2/TCC2P that was active while the alarm was raised needs to be replaced. Continue with
.
If the faulty TCC2/TCC2P is currently in standby mode, complete the
the next available maintenance window complete the
“Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the
Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 and then complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-131
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.157 IOSCFGCOPY
Note If the replacement TCC2/TCC2P is loaded with a different software version from the current
TCC2/TCC2P card, the card bootup might take up to 30 minutes. During this time, the card
LEDs flicker between Fail and Act/Sby as the active TCC2/TCC2P version software is copied to the new standby card.
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Open a case with Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) for assistance with determining the node’s previous MAC address.
Replace the ribbon cable between the system board and the AIP with a known-good cable.
If the alarm persists, complete the
“Replace the Alarm Interface Panel” procedure on page 2-279
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.157 IOSCFGCOPY
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The IOS Configuration Copy in Progress condition occurs on ML-Series Ethernet cards when a
Cisco IOS startup configuration file is being uploaded or downloaded to or from an ML-Series card.
(This condition is very similar to the
“SFTWDOWN” condition on page 2-224
but it applies to
ML-Series Ethernet cards rather than to the TCC2/TCC2P.)
The condition clears after the copy operation is complete. (If it does not complete correctly, the
“NO-CONFIG” condition on page 2-186 might be raised.)
Note IOSCFGCOPY is an informational condition.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
2.8.158 KB-PASSTHR
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The K Bytes Pass Through Active condition occurs on a nonswitching node in a BLSR when the protect channels on the node are not active and the node is in K Byte pass-through state. It also occurs when a
BLSR ring is being exercised using the Exercise Ring command.
Clear the KB-PASSTHR Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 .
2-132
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.159 KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.159 KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The APS Channel Failure alarm is raised when a span is provisioned for different APS channels on each side. For instance, the alarm is raised if K3 is selected on one end and F1, E2, or Z2 is selected on the other end.
This alarm is also raised during checksum failure if the K1 and K2 bytes are overwritten by test equipment. It is not raised in bidirectional full pass-through or K-byte pass-through states. The alarm is overridden by
,
2.8.177 LOF (OCN), page 2-143 ,
or
Clear the KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
The alarm is most frequently raised due to mismatched span provisioning. In this case, reprovision one side of the span with the same parameters. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 5, “Turn Up Network.”
If the error is not caused by misprovisioning, it is due to checksum errors within an OC-N, cross-connect, or TCC2/TCC2P card. In this case, complete the
“Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G
Cross-Connect Cards” procedure on page 2-269 to allow CTC to resolve the issue.
If third-party equipment is involved, ensure that it is configured for the same APS channel as the
Cisco ONS equipment.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.160 LAN-POL-REV
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: NE
The LAN Connection Polarity Reversed condition is not raised in shelves that contain TCC2 cards. It is raised during software upgrade when the card detects that a connected Ethernet cable has reversed receive wire pairs. The card automatically compensates for this reversal, but LAN-POL-REV stays active.
Clear the LAN-POL-REV Condition
Step 1 Replace the connected Ethernet cable with a cable that has the correct pinout. For correct pin mapping, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-133
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.161 LASER-APR
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.161 LASER-APR
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: AOTS
The Laser Automatic Power Reduction (APR) alarm condition is raised by OSC-CSM, OSCM,
OPT-BST, and OPT-PRE cards when the laser is working in power reduction mode. The condition clears as soon as safety conditions are released and the power value reaches the normal setpoint.
Note LASER-APR is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.162 LASERBIAS-DEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OTS
The Laser Bias Current Degrade alarm occurs on DWDM amplifier cards such as the OPT-BST or
OPT-PRE when laser aging causes a degrade, but not failure, of laser transmission. The card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the LASERBIAS-DEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
at the next opportunity.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.163 LASERBIAS-FAIL
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: AOTS
The Laser Bias Current Failure alarm occurs on DWDM amplifier cards such as OPT-BST or OPT-PRE when the laser control circuit fails or if the laser itself fails service. The card must be replaced to restore traffic.
Clear the LASERBIAS-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
For the alarmed card, complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2-134
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.164 LASEREOL
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.164 LASEREOL
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Laser Approaching End of Life alarm applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G,
must happen depends upon the HI-LASERBIAS threshold. If the threshold is set under 100 percent, the laser replacement can usually be done during a maintenance window. But if the HI-LASERBIAS threshold is set at 100 percent and is accompanied by data errors, the card must be replaced sooner.
Clear the LASEREOL Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.165 LASERTEMP-DEG
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: AOTS
The Laser Temperature Degrade alarm occurs when the Peltier control circuit fails on a DWDM amplifier card such as the OPT-BST or OPT-PRE. The Peltier control provides cooling for the amplifier.
The card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the LASERTEMP-DEG Alarm
Step 1 For the alarmed DWDM card, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
at the next opportunity.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-135
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.166 LCAS-CRC
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.166 LCAS-CRC
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) Control Word CRC Failure condition is raised against
ML-Series Ethernet cards. It occurs when there is an equipment, path, or provisioning error on the virtual concatenation group (VCG) that causes consecutive 2.5 second CRC failures in the LCAS control word.
Transmission errors would be reflected in CV-P, ES-P, or SES-P performance monitoring statistics. If these errors do not exist, an equipment failure is indicated.
If LCAS is not supported on the peer node, the condition does not clear.
LCAS-CRC can also occur if the VCG source node is not LCAS-enabled, but the receiving node does have the capability enabled. Both source and destination nodes must have LCAS enabled. Otherwise, the
LCAS-CRC condition persists on the VCG.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the LCAS-CRC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Look for and clear any associated equipment failures, such as the EQPT alarm, on the receive node or transmit node.
Look for and clear any bit error rate alarms at the transmit node.
If no equipment or SONET path errors exist, ensure that the remote node has LCAS enabled on the circuit: a.
b.
c.
d.
In node view, click the Circuit tab.
Choose the VCAT circuit and click Edit .
In the Edit Circuit window, click the General tab.
Verify that the Mode column says LCAS .
If the column does not say LCAS, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
and recreate it in LCAS mode using the instructions in the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-136
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.167 LCAS-RX-FAIL
2.8.167 LCAS-RX-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The LCAS VCG Member Receive-Side-In Fail condition is raised against FC_MR-4 cards and
ML-Series Ethernet cards with LCAS-enabled VCG.
LCAS VCGs treat failures unidirectionally, meaning that failures of the transmit or receive points occur independently of each other. The LCAS-RX-FAIL condition can occur on the receive side of an LCAS
VCG member for the following reasons:
•
•
SONET path failure (a unidirectional failure as seen by the receive side)
VCAT member is set out of group at the transmit side, but is set in group at the receive side
• VCAT member does not exist at the transmit side but does exist and is in group at the receive side
The condition can be raised during provisioning operations on LCAS VCGs but should clear when the provisioning is completed.
Software-enabled LCAS VCGs treat failure bidirectionally, meaning that both directions of a VCG member are considered failed if either transmit or receive fails. The LCAS-RX-FAIL condition is raised on these VCG members when a member receive side fails due to a SONET path failure.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the LCAS-RX-FAIL Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Check for and clear any line or path alarms.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.168 LCAS-TX-ADD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The LCAS VCG Member Transmit-Side-In Add State condition is raised against ML-Series Ethernet cards when the transmit side of an LCAS VCG member is in the add state. The condition clears after provisioning is completed.
Note LCAS-TX-ADD is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-137
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.169 LCAS-TX-DNU
2.8.169 LCAS-TX-DNU
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The LCAS VCG Member Transmit-Side-In Do Not Use condition is raised on FC_MR-4 cards and
ML-Series Ethernet cards when the transmit side of an LCAS VCG member is in the do-not use state.
For a unidirectional failure, this condition is only raised at the source node.
The node reporting this condition likely reports an
, and the remote node likely reports a path alarm such as
.
Note LCAS-TX-DNU is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
2.8.170 LKOUTPR-S
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Lockout of Protection Span condition occurs when path protection traffic is locked out of a protect span using the Lockout of Protect command.
Clear the LKOUTPR-S Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.171 LOA
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: VCG
The Loss of Alignment on a VCG is a VCAT member alarm. (VCAT member circuits are independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into a higher-rate signal.) The alarm occurs when members of a VCG travel over different paths in the network (due to initial operator provisioning or to protection or restoration events) and the differential delays between the paths cannot be recovered by terminating hardware buffers.
Note This alarm occurs only if you provision circuits outside of CTC, such as by using TL1.
2-138
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ
Clear the LOA Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In network view, click the Circuits tab.
Click the alarmed VCG and then click Edit .
In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click Show Detailed Map to see the source and destination circuit slots, ports, and STSs.
Identify whether the STS travels across different fibers. If it does, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
.
Recreate the circuit using the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 6, “Create
Circuits and Tunnels.”
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.172 LOCKOUT-REQ
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, EQPT, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, STSMON, TRUNK, VT-MON
The Lockout Switch Request on Facility or Equipment condition occurs when a user initiates a lockout switch request for an OC-N port in a 1+1 facility protection group. This can be accomplished by locking traffic onto the working port with the LOCK ON command (thus locking it off the protect port), or locking it off the protect port with the LOCK OUT command. In either case, the protect port will show
“Lockout of Protection,” and the Conditions window will show the LOCKOUT-REQ condition.
A lockout prevents protection switching. Clearing the lockout again allows protection switching and clears the LOCKOUT-REQ condition.
Clear the LOCKOUT-REQ Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a Card or Port Lock On or Lock Out Command” procedure on page 2-262
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.173 LOF (BITS)
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: BITS
The Loss of Frame (LOF) BITS alarm occurs when a port on theTCC2/TCC2P BITS input detects an
LOF on the incoming BITS timing reference signal. LOF indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming data.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-139
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.174 LOF (DS1)
Note The procedure assumes that the BITS timing reference signal is functioning properly. It also assumes the alarm is not appearing during node turn-up.
Clear the LOF (BITS) Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the line framing and line coding match between the BITS input and the TCC2/TCC2P: a.
In node or card view, note the slot and port reporting the alarm.
b.
c.
d.
Find the coding and framing formats of the external BITS timing source. The formats should be in the user documentation for the external BITS timing source or on the timing source itself.
Click the Provisioning > Timing tabs to display the General Timing window.
e.
Verify that Coding matches the coding of the BITS timing source, either B8ZS or AMI.
If the coding does not match, click Coding and choose the appropriate coding from the drop-down list.
f.
g.
Verify that Framing matches the framing of the BITS timing source, either ESF or SF (D4).
If the framing does not match, click Framing and choose the appropriate framing from the drop-down list.
Note On the timing subtab, the B8ZS coding field is normally paired with ESF in the Framing field and the AMI coding field is normally paired with SF (D4) in the Framing field.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear when the line framing and line coding match between the BITS input and the
TCC2/TCC2P, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the
TCC2/TCC2P.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.174 LOF (DS1)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS1
2-140
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.175 LOF (DS3)
The DS-1 LOF alarm indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in an incoming
DS-1 data stream. If the LOF appears on the DS1N-14 card, the transmitting equipment could have its framing set to a format that differs from the receiving node.
Clear the LOF (DS1) Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the line framing and line coding match between the DS1N-14 port and the signal source: d.
e.
a.
b.
c.
In CTC, note the slot and port reporting the alarm.
Find the coding and framing formats of the signal source for the card reporting the alarm. You might need to contact your network administrator for the format information.
Display the card view of the reporting ONS 15454 card.
Click the ONS 15454 Provisioning > Line tabs.
f.
Verify that the line type of the reporting port matches the line type of the signal source (DS4 and
DS4, unframed and unframed, or ESF and ESF). If the signal source line type does not match the reporting port, click the Line Type cell to reveal a drop-down list and choose the matching type.
Verify that the reporting Line Coding matches the signal source line coding (AMI and AMI or B8ZS and B8ZS). If the signal source line coding does not match the reporting port, click the Line Coding cell and choose the correct type from the drop-down list. g.
Click Apply .
Note On the Line tab, the B8ZS coding field is normally paired with ESF in the Framing field.
AMI coding is normally paired with SF (D4) in the Framing field.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.175 LOF (DS3)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS3
The DS-3 LOF alarm indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming
DS-3 data stream. The framing of the transmitting equipment could be set to a format that differs from the receiving system. On DS3XM-6 cards, the alarm occurs only on cards with the provisionable framing format set to C Bit or M13 and not on cards with the provisionable framing format is set to unframed.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-141
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.176 LOF (EC1)
Clear the LOF (DS3) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2 a.
b.
c.
Change the line type of the non-ONS equipment attached to the reporting card to C Bit:
Display the card view of the reporting card.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
d.
Verify that the line type of the reporting port matches the line type of the signal source.
If the signal source line type does not match the reporting port, click Line Type and choose C Bit from the drop-down list.
e.
Click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.176 LOF (EC1)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12
The EC1 LOF alarm occurs when a port on the reporting EC1 card has an LOF condition. LOF indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming data. LOF occurs when the
SONET overhead loses a valid framing pattern for 3 milliseconds. Receiving two consecutive valid
A1/A2 framing patterns clears the alarm.
Clear the LOF (EC1, EC1-12) Alarm
Step 1 Verify cabling continuity to the port reporting the alarm.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If cabling continuity is okay, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, see the loopback procedures in
Chapter 1, “General Troubleshooting” to
isolate the fault causing the LOF alarm.
If the alarm does not clear, or if you need assistance conducting network troubleshooting tests, call
Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447).
2-142
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.177 LOF (OCN)
2.8.177 LOF (OCN)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
The LOF alarm occurs when a port on the reporting card has an LOF condition. It can also occur on
ONS 15454 MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards reporting LOF. The alarm indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming data. LOF occurs when the SONET overhead loses a valid framing pattern for 3 milliseconds.
Receiving two consecutive valid A1/A2 framing patterns clears the alarm.
When the alarm is raised on an OC-N card, it is sometimes an indication that the OC-N card expects a specific line rate and the input line rate source does not match the input line rate of the optical receiver.
Clear the LOF (OCN) Alarm
Step 1 Verify cabling continuity to the port reporting the alarm.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If cabling continuity is okay, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, see the loopback procedures in Chapter 1, “General Troubleshooting” to
isolate the fault causing the LOF alarm.
If the alarm does not clear, or if you need assistance conducting network troubleshooting tests, call
Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.178 LOF (TRUNK)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Loss of Frame for the DWDM trunk applies to the trunk optical or electrical signal that is carried to
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards. It indicates that the receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming data from trunk that serves the cards. LOF occurs when the SONET overhead loses a valid framing pattern for 3 milliseconds.
Receiving two consecutive valid A1/A2 framing patterns clears the alarm.
Clear the LOF (TRUNK) Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Clear the LOF (OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-143 .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-143
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.179 LO-LASERTEMP
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, or if you need assistance conducting network troubleshooting tests, call
Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.179 LO-LASERTEMP
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Equipment Low Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards.
LO-LASERTEMP occurs when the internally measured transceiver temperature falls below the card setting by35.6 degrees F or 2 degrees C. A laser temperature change affects the transmitted wavelength.
(Two degrees Celsius is equivalent to about 200 picometers in the wavelength.)
When the TXP or MXP card raises this alarm, the laser is automatically shut off. The
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 is raised at the remote node and the
is raised at the local node. To verify the card laser temperature level, double-click the card in node view and click the Performance > Optics PM > Current PM tabs. Maximum, minimum, and average laser temperatures are shown in the Current column entries in the Laser Temp rows.
Clear the LO-LASERTEMP Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the reporting MXP or TXP
card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting MXP or TXP card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.180 LOM
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA) for STSTRM, TRUNK; Major (MJ) for
VT-TERM
Logical Objects: STSTRM, TRUNK, VT-TERM •
The Optical Transport Unit (OTU) Loss of Multiframe is a VCAT member alarm. (VCAT member circuits are independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into a higher-rate signal.)
The alarm applies to MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards when the Multi Frame Alignment Signal (MFAS) overhead field is errored for more than five frames and persists for more than 3 milliseconds.
Clear the LOM Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the SD-L Condition” procedure on page 2-220
.
2-144
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.181 LOP-P
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.181 LOP-P
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
A Loss of Pointer Path alarm indicates that the SONET path pointer in the overhead has been lost. LOP occurs when valid H1/H2 pointer bytes are missing from the overhead. Receiving equipment monitors the H1/H2 pointer bytes to locate the SONET payload. An LOP-P alarm occurs when eight, nine, or ten consecutive frames do not have valid pointer values. The alarm clears when three consecutive valid pointers are received.
The LOP-P alarm can occur when the received payload does not match the provisioned payload. The alarm is caused by a circuit type mismatch on the concatenation facility. For example, if an STS-1 is sent across a circuit provisioned for STS-3c, an LOP-P alarm occurs.
For FC_MR-4 card, an LOP-P is raised if a port is configured for a SONET signal but receives an
SONET signal instead. (This information is contained in the H1 byte bits 5 and 6.)
Clear the LOP-P Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
In node view, click the Circuits tab and view the alarmed circuit.
Verify the circuit size listed in the Size column. If the size is different from what is expected, such as an
STS3c instead of an STS1, this causes the alarm.
If you have been monitoring the circuit with optical test equipment, a mismatch between the provisioned circuit size and the size expected by the test set can cause this alarm. Ensure that the test set monitoring is set up for the same size as the circuit provisioning.
For instructions to use the optical test set, consult the manufacturer.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
If you have not been using a test set, or if the test set is correctly set up, the error is in the provisioned
CTC circuit size. Complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
.
Recreate the circuit for the correct size. For instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels.”
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.182 LOP-V
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-145
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.183 LO-RXPOWER
• Logical Objects: VT-MON, VT-TERM
The LOP VT alarm indicates a loss of pointer at the VT level.
The LOP-V alarm can occur when the received payload does not match the provisioned payload. LOP-V is caused by a circuit size mismatch on the concatenation facility.
Clear the LOP-V Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the LOP-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-145 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.183 LO-RXPOWER
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Equipment Low Receive Power alarm is an indicator for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G card received optical signal power.
LO-RXPOWER occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal falls under the threshold.
The threshold value is user-provisionable.
Clear the LO-RXPOWER Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
At the transmit end of the errored circuit, increase the transmit power level within safe limits.
Find out whether new channels have been added to the fiber. Up to 32 channels can be transmitted on the same fiber, but the number of channels affects power. If channels have been added, power levels of all channels need to be adjusted.
Note If the card is part of an amplified DWDM system, adding channels on the fiber affects the transmission power of each channel more than it would in an unamplified system.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Find out whether gain (the amplification power) of any amplifiers has been changed. Changing amplification also causes channel power to need adjustment.
If the alarm does not clear, remove any receive fiber attenuators or replace them with lower-resistance attenuators.
If the alarm does not clear, inspect and clean the receive and transmit node fiber connections according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
2-146
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.184 LOS (2R)
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
If the alarm does not clear, ensure that the fiber is not broken or damaged by testing it with an optical test set. If no test set is available, use the fiber for a facility (line) loopback on a known-good port. The error readings you get is not as precise, but you generally know whether the fiber is faulty.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the alarm does not clear, and no faults are present on the other port(s) of the transmit or receive card, do a facility loopback on the transmit and receive ports with known-good loopback cable. Complete the
“1.4.1 Perform a Facility (Line) Loopback on a Source-Node Optical Port” procedure on page 1-47 or
the
to test the loopback.
the card at the next available maintenance window.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 9 If no ports are shown bad and the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.184 LOS (2R)
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: 2R
The Loss of Signal for a 2R Client applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards. The alarm is raised when the card port is not receiving input.
An AIS is sent upstream.
Clear the LOS (2R) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the LOS (OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-153 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.185 LOS (BITS)
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-147
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.186 LOS (DS1)
• Logical Object: BITS
The LOS (BITS) alarm indicates that the TCC2/TCC2P has an LOS from the BITS timing source. The
LOS (BITS) means the BITS clock or the connection to the BITS clock failed.
Clear the LOS (BITS) Alarm
Step 1 Verify the wiring connection from the BITS clock pin fields on the ONS 15454 backplane to the timing source.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
If wiring is good, verify that the BITS clock is operating properly.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.186 LOS (DS1)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: DS1
A LOS (DS1) alarm for a DS-1 port occurs when the port on the card is in service but no signal is being received. The cabling is not correctly connected to the card, or no signal exists on the line.
Clear the LOS (DS1) Alarm
Step 1 Verify that the fiber cable is properly connected and attached to the correct port. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15,
“Maintain the Node.”
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Consult site records to determine whether the port raising the alarm has been assigned.
If the port is not currently assigned, place the port out of service using the following steps: a.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
b.
c.
For a DS1 card, click the Maintenance > Loopback tabs. For a DS-1 line on a DS3XM-6 or
DS3XM-12 card, click the Maintenance > DS1 tabs.
Under Admin State, click OOS,DSBLD .
d.
Click Apply .
If the port is assigned, verify that the correct port is in service: a.
To confirm this physically, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-148 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.187 LOS (DS3)
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10 b.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine this virtually, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view:
• Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
•
•
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose IS . Click Apply .
Use a test set to confirm that a valid signal exists on the line. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
Ensure that the transmit and receive outputs from the DSx panel to your equipment are properly connected. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If there is a valid signal, replace the electrical connector on the ONS 15454.
If a valid Ethernet signal is not present and the transmitting device is operational, replace the fiber cable connecting the transmitting device to the Ethernet port. To do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
Repeat Steps
to
8 for any other port on the card that reports the LOS.
If no other alarms are present that could be the source of the LOS (DS-1), or if clearing an alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 11 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.187 LOS (DS3)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS3
The LOS (DS3) for a DS-3 port occurs when the port on the card is in service but no signal is being received. The cabling is not correctly connected to the card, or no signal exists on the line. Possible causes for no signal on the line include upstream equipment failure or a fiber cut.
Note If a circuit shows a partial status when this alarm is raised, the logical circuit is in place. The circuit is able to carry traffic when the connection issue is resolved. You do not need to delete the circuit when troubleshooting this alarm.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-149
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.188 LOS (EC1, EC1-12)
Clear the LOS (DS3) Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the LOS (DS1) Alarm” procedure on page 2-148
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.188 LOS (EC1, EC1-12)
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12
LOS on an EC1/EC1-12 port occurs when a SONET receiver detects an all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or longer. An LOS (EC1/EC1-12) means that the upstream transmitter has failed. If an
EC1-12 LOS alarm is not accompanied by additional alarms, a cabling problem is usually the cause of the alarm. The condition clears when two consecutive valid frames are received.
Note If a circuit shows a partial status when this alarm is raised, the logical circuit is in place. The circuit is able to carry traffic when the connection issue is resolved. You do not need to delete the circuit when troubleshooting this alarm.
Clear the LOS (EC1, EC1-12) Alarm
Step 1 Verify cabling continuity to the port reporting the alarm.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
2-150
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2 If the cabling is okay, verify that the correct port is in service: a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly lit on the physical card.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
d.
e.
b.
c.
To determine whether the port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.189 LOS (ESCON)
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
If the correct port is in service, use an optical test set to confirm that a valid signal exists on the line.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
If the signal is valid, ensure that the transmit and receive outputs from the DSx panel to your equipment are properly connected. For more information about fiber connections and terminations, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If a valid signal exists, replace the cable connector on the ONS 15454.
Repeat Steps
through
5 for any other port on the card that reports the LOS (EC1).
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS (EC1), or if clearing an alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 9 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.189 LOS (ESCON)
The LOS alarm for ESCON is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.190 LOS (FUDC)
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: FUDC
The LOS (FUDC) alarm is raised if there is a UDC circuit created on an AIC-I UDC port but the port is not receiving signal input. The downstream node has an AIS condition raised against the AIC-I port transmitting the UDC. FUDC refers to the 64-kb user data channel using the F1 byte.
Clear the LOS (FUDC) Alarm
Step 1 Verify cable continuity to the AIC-I UDC port.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-151
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.191 LOS (ISC)
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Note To verify cable continuity, follow site practices.
Verify that there is a valid input signal using a test set.
If there is a valid signal, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, verify that the UDC is provisioned: a.
At the network view, click the Provisioning > Overhead Circuits tabs.
b.
c.
If no UDC circuit exists, create one. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 6,
“Create Circuits and VT Tunnels.”
If a user data circuit exists (shown as User Data F1 under the Type column), check the source and destination ports. These must be located on AIC-I cards to function.
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS (FUDC), or if clearing another alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 7 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.191 LOS (ISC)
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: ISC
The LOS alarm for the ISC port applies to TXP_MR_2.5G client PPMs provisioned at the ISC port rate.
Troubleshooting is similar to the LOS (2R) alarm.
Clear the LOS (ISC) Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the LOS (2R) Alarm” procedure on page 2-147 .
2-152
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.192 LOS (MSUDC)
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.192 LOS (MSUDC)
The LOS (MSUDC) alarm is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.193 LOS (OCN)
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: OCN
An LOS alarm on an OC-N port occurs when a SONET receiver detects an all-zero pattern for
10 microseconds or longer. An LOS alarm means the upstream transmitter has failed. If an OC-N LOS alarm is not accompanied by additional alarms, a fiber break is usually the cause of the alarm. The condition clears when two consecutive valid frames are received.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Note If a circuit shows a partial status when this alarm is raised, the logical circuit is in place. The circuit is able to carry traffic when the connection issue is resolved. You do not need to delete the circuit when troubleshooting this alarm.
Clear the LOS (OCN) Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-153
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.193 LOS (OCN)
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
If the cabling is okay, verify that the correct port is in service: a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the OC-N port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . f.
Click Apply .
If the correct port is in service, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, verify that the power level of the optical signal is within the OC-N card receiver specifications. The
“1.13.3 OC-N Card Transmit and Receive Levels” section on page 1-154
lists these specifications for each OC-N card. For DWDM cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Installation and Operations Guide for levels.
If the optical power level is within specifications, use an optical test set to verify that a valid signal exists on the line.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
If a valid signal exists, replace the connector on the backplane.
Repeat Steps
6 for any other port on the card reporting the LOS (OC-N).
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 10 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2-154
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.194 LOS (OTS)
2.8.194 LOS (OTS)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OTS
The Loss of Signal for the OTS applies to the LINE-3-RX port of the OPT-BST amplifier and the
LINE-2-RX port of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card. It indicates that a fiber cut has occurred and no power is being received from the span. The alarm is raised when both LOS-P and LOS-O alarms occur, and demotes them.
Clear the LOS (OTS) Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
If the cabling is okay, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. A red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card.
Verify that the received power (opwrMin value of the Line 4-1-RX port) is within the expected range shown in Cisco MetroPlanner. To check the level: a.
b.
Double-click the amplifier card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c.
Compare the opwrMin (dBm) column value with the MetroPlanner-generated value. (For more information about using MetroPlanner, refer to the Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide .
If the optical power level is within specifications, check and modify the channel LOS and OSC LOS thresholds, then run automatic node setup (ANS) to execute the changes. (For more information about
ANS, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.) a.
b.
In node view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Consult the Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide to decide what values to use, then modify the following items: c.
c.
•
•
West Side Rx. Channel OSC LOS Threshold
West Side Rx. Channel LOS Threshold
Click the WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Click Launch ANS and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
d.
If the optical power is outside of the expected range, check the power level transmitted at the other side of the span using CTC: a.
On the transmitting node, double-click the transmitting MXP or TXP to display the card view.
b.
Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tab.
View the TX Power High and TX Power Low values, comparing them with the
MetroPlanner-generated values.
If the transmitted power value is within the expected range, clean the receiving node (where the LOS is raised) and clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-155
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.195 LOS (TRUNK)
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the transmitted power value is outside of the expected range, troubleshoot using the DWDM acceptance tests in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 10 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.195 LOS (TRUNK)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Loss of Signal for a TRUNK applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards. The alarm is raised when the card port is not receiving input.
An AIS is sent upstream.
Clear the LOS (TRUNK) Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2 If the cabling is okay, verify that the correct port is in service: a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card.
d.
e.
b.
c.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
2-156
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.196 LOS-O
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the correct port is in service, clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, verify that the power level of the optical signal is within the TXP or MXP card receiver specifications. Refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for levels.
If the optical power level is within specifications, use an optical test set to verify that a valid signal exists on the line.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
If a valid signal exists, replace the connector on the backplane.
Repeat Steps
to
6 for any other port on the card reporting the LOS (TRUNK).
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the LOS, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 10 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.196 LOS-O
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: OCH, OMS, OTS
The Incoming Overhead Loss of Signal alarm applies to the OSC-RX port of OPT-BST (LINE-2-RX), the OSC-RX port of OSCM (LINE-1-RX), and the internal optical port of OSC-CSM card (LINE-3-RX
Port 3). It is raised when the monitored input power crosses the FAIL-LOW threshold and the OSC signal is lost. The is alarm is demoted if another LOS alarm is also present.
Clear the LOS-O Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-157
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.196 LOS-O
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
If the cabling is okay, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. A red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card.
Verify that the received power (opwrMin) is within the expected range shown in Cisco MetroPlanner. To check the level: a.
Double-click the amplifier card to display the card view.
b.
Display the optical thresholds by clicking the following tabs:
• OPT-BST Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Optics Thresholds tab
• OSCM or OSC-CSM Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tab
If the optical power level is within specifications, check and modify the OSC LOS threshold, then run
ANS to execute the changes. (For more information about ANS, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Installation and Operations Guide.
) a.
b.
c.
d.
In node view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Consult the Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide to decide upon values, then modify the
West Side Rx. Channel OSC LOS Threshold.
Click the WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Click Launch ANS and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
If the port power is outside of the expected range, verify that OSC connections have been created on the other side of the span. If the connections are not present, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Installation and Operations Guide for procedures.
If OSC connections are present, check the OSC transmitted power using CTC: a.
b.
On the transmitting node, double-click the transmitting OSC-CSM to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tab.
c.
View the TX Power High and TX Power Low values, comparing them with the
MetroPlanner-generated values.
If the transmitted OSC value is out of range, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide for DWDM acceptance test procedures that aids in troubleshooting the problem.
If the OSC value is within range, come back to the port reporting the LOS-O alarm and clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the LOS-O, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the
LOS-O, place all of the card ports in OOS,DSBLD admin state.
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the reporting card.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external traffic switch if possible.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database apart from restoring the card's port to the IS,AINS admin state.
2-158
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.197 LOS-P (OCH)
Step 12 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.197 LOS-P (OCH)
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCH
The Loss of Signal for Optical Channel alarm on the OCH layer applies to the channel ADD or pass-through ports on the AD-1C -xx.x
, AD-2C -xx.x
, AD-4C -xx.x
, 32MUX-O and 32WSS-O DWDM cards.
Note For 32WSS-O cards, this alarm also applies to pass-through ports. If the LOS-P (OCH) alarm is raised against this kind of port, it means that the port does not have an optical power source directly connected to it. Follow the general troubleshooting rules stated in the chapter Network Level (inter-nodes)
Troubleshooting to identify upstream alarms in the logical signal flow that could cause an LOS-P.
LOS-P (OCH) indicates a loss of receive signal when the monitored input power value has crossed the
Power Failure Low threshold associated with the port. This threshold value is relative to the specific variable optical attenuation (VOA) power reference setpoint provisioned on VOA along the path.
Clear the LOS-P (OCH) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Check the LED behavior on the physical card. A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card, and a red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card. If the LED is red, complete the
Card” procedure on page 2-271 and continue to
.
Verify that there truly is a loss of received signal: a.
b.
Double-click the card to open the card view.
View the proper input power values by clicking one of the following tabs as appropriate:
•
•
For the ADx C card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameter s tabs.
For the 32MUX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c.
• For the 32WSS-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical Connector x >
Parameters tabs.
Display the proper Power Failure Low threshold by clicking one of the following tabs as appropriate:
•
•
•
For the AD-xC card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32MUX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32WSS-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical Connector x > Optics
Thresholds tabs.
Tip To view the alarm thresholds (as opposed to the warning thresholds), check the Alarm check box on the
Optics Thresholds tab and click Reset .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-159
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.197 LOS-P (OCH)
2-160
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8 d.
Compare the actual assigned Power value with the Alarm Threshold value and complete one of the following actions:
•
•
If the Power value is less than the Fail Low threshold, go to
If the Power value is greater than the Fail Low threshold plus the alarm allowance value (default
1 dBm), complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
Verify the fiber continuity to the port. To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
In MetroPlanner, obtain the “Internal Connections” file for the node where the errored card is located.
If necessary, correct the node cabling in accordance with the MP file connections list. For procedures to cable a DWDM node, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the cabling is good, verify that each involved optical signal source, including TXP, MXP or ITU-T line card trunk transmit ports, is in the IS admin state. To do this, click the following tabs as appropriate:
•
•
•
For the TXP_MR_10G card, click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
For the TXP_MR_10E card, click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
For the TXP_MR_2.5G card, click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
For the TXPP_MR_2.5G card, click the Provisioning > Line > OC48 tabs.
•
•
•
• For the MXP_MR_2.5G card, click the Provisioning > Line > OC48 tabs.
For the MXPP_MR_2.5G card, click the Provisioning > Line > OC48 tabs.
For the MXP_2.5G_10E card, click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
For the MXP_2.5G_10G card, click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
•
If the port admin state is not IS, choose IS from the Admin state drop-down list. If the alarm does not
.
If the signal source is in IS admin state, use an optical test set to verify that the transmit laser is active.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the laser is active, compare the card’s provisioned transmit optical power value with the expected range in the “Hardware Specifications” appendix of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide . To display the provisioned transmit optical power values, click the following tabs as appropriate:
• For the TXP_MR_10G card, click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values > Trunk Port tabs.
•
•
• For the MXP_2.5G_10G card, click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values > Trunk
Port tabs.
Use an optical test set to measure actual transmit optical power for the following cards as applicable:
•
For the TXP_MR_10E card, click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values > Trunk Port tabs.
For the MXP_2.5G_10E card, click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values > Trunk Port tabs.
•
•
•
•
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
Each ITU-T line card
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS)
If the tested optical transmit optical power is comparable to the correctly provisioned value and the expected value, go to
Step 9 . If the tested, actual power value is outside the specification range, complete
the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
. When the newly installed card becomes active, verify that the LOS-P (OCH) alarm clears. If it does not, continue with
.
Tip
Step 9
If a spare cards is unavailable and the transmit power still functions, you can temporarily clear the LOS-P alarm by following the general procedure to add path VOAs during startup failure located in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the power is within the expected range, clean the alarmed port’s fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the “Maintain the Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide .
Note Unplugging the fiber can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 for basic
instructions, or refer to the “Maintain the Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more detailed information.
Step 10
Step 11
If the alarm does not clear, follow the general procedure for adding path VOAs during startup failure in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS)
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: OMS, OTS
The Loss of Signal for Optical Channel alarm (OMS or OTS layer) applies to all input ports of the following DWDM cards: AD-1B -xx.x
, AD-4B -xx.x
, 32 DMX, 32DMX-O, OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, and
OSC-CSM.
For AD-1C -xx.x
, AD-2C -xx.x
, AD-4C -xx.x
, 32MUX-O and 32WSS cards, this alarm applies only to the
COM-RX, EXP-RX, xxBAND-RX input ports where an aggregate signal is managed. (These ports are solely used for the OMS and OTS layers.)
LOS-P (OMS or OTS) indicates a loss of receive signal when the monitored input power value has crossed the Power Failure Low Threshold associated to the port.
Note When the LOS-P alarm is raised on the LINE-RX port of the OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide for a fiber cut detection procedure.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-161
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.198 LOS-P (OMS, OTS)
Clear the LOS-P (OMS, OTS) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Check the LED behavior on the physical card. A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card, and a red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card. If the LED is red, complete the
and continue to
Verify that there truly is a loss of input signal: a.
Double-click the card to open the card view.
b.
Verify the proper input power values by clicking one of the following tabs as appropriate:
• For the OPT-BST card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c.
•
•
•
•
•
For the OPT-PRE card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
For the AD-xC card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
For the AD-xB card, click the
For the AD-xB card, click the
Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs.
tabs.
•
•
For the 32MUX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameter s tabs.
For the 32WSS card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
For the 32DMX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
For the 32DMX card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. •
• For the OSC-CSM card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Display the proper Power Failure Low threshold by clicking one of the following tabs as appropriate:
•
•
•
•
For the OPT-BST card, click the
For the OPT-PRE card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the AD-xC card, click the
Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
tabs.
For the AD-xB card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
For the AD-xB card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32MUX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32WSS card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32DMX-O card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the 32DMX card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
For the OSC-CSM card, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Tip To view the alarm thresholds (as opposed to the warning thresholds), check the Alarm check box on the
Optics Thresholds tab and click Reset .
d.
Compare the actual assigned Power value with the Alarm Threshold value and complete one of the following actions:
• If the Power value is less than the Fail Low threshold, go to
• If the Power value is greater than the Fail Low threshold plus the alarm allowance value (default
1 dBm), complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
2-162
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.199 LOS-P (TRUNK)
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Verify the fiber continuity to the port. To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
In MetroPlanner, obtain the “Internal Connections” file for the node where the errored card is located.
If necessary, correct the node cabling in accordance with the MP file connections list. To cable a DWDM node, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the cabling is good, use an optical test set to measure the power value on the output port connected to the alarmed card. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. If the power difference reported is greater than 1 dBm (standard fiber jumper insertion loss is 0.3 dBm), clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the “Maintain the
Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
Note Unplugging the fiber can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 for basic
instructions, or to the “Maintain the Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more detailed information.
Step 6
Step 7
If the alarm does not clear, follow the general troubleshooting for identifying upstream alarms in the logical signal flow (that could cause an LOS-P) located in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.199 LOS-P (TRUNK)
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Loss of Signal for Optical Channel alarm indicates that no optical power is detected at the input trunk port for the following cards:
•
•
•
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
•
•
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10G
TXP_MR_2.5G
•
•
•
•
TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
All ITU-T line cards
Clear the LOS-P (TRUNK) Alarm
Step 1 Check the LED behavior on the physical card. A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card, and a red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card. If the LED is red, complete the
Card” procedure on page 2-271 and continue to
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-163
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.200 LO-TXPOWER
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Verify that there truly is a loss of received optical power: a.
b.
c.
Double-click the alarmed card to open the card view.
Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values > Trunk Port tab.
Compare the actual received power levels with the expected power range given in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide . Then take one of the following actions:
• If power is less than –40 dBm, go to
.
• If power is greater than –40 dBm and within the expected range, complete the
Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card and then go to Step 9
.
Verify the fiber continuity to the port. To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
In MetroPlanner, obtain the “Internal Connections” file for the node containing the alarmed card. If necessary, correct the node cabling in accordance with the MP file connections list. For procedures to cable a DWDM node, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide .
If the cabling is good, use a test set to verify the power value on the DWDM CH_DROP-TX port on the
ADx C, 32DMX-O, or 32DMX. For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the power difference reported is greater than 1 dBm (standard fiber jumper insertion loss is 0.3 dBm), clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the
“Maintain the Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
Note Unplugging the fiber can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for basic instructions, or to the “Maintain the Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more detailed information.
Step 8
Step 9
If the alarm does not clear, follow the general troubleshooting rules stated in the chapter Network Level
(inter-nodes) Troubleshooting to identify upstream alarms in the logical signal flow that could cause an
LOS-P.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.200 LO-TXPOWER
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, PPM, TRUNK
The Equipment Low Transmit Power alarm is an indicator for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G card transmitted optical signal power.
LO-TXPOWER occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted signal falls under the threshold. The threshold value is user-provisionable.
2-164
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.201 LPBKCRS
Clear the LO-TXPOWER Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G card view.
Click the Provisioning > Optical Thresholds tabs.
Increase the TX Power Low column value by 0.5 dBm.
If the card transmit power setting cannot be increased without affecting the signal, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 5 If no ports are shown bad and the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.201 LPBKCRS
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: STSMON
The Loopback Cross-Connect condition indicates that there is a software cross-connect loopback active between an optical card and an XC10G card. A cross-connect loopback test occurs below line speed and does not affect traffic.
For more information on loopbacks, see the
“1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit Paths With
Loopbacks” section on page 1-47 .
Note Cross-connect loopbacks occur below line speed. They do not affect traffic.
Clear the LPBKCRS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
To remove the loopback cross-connect condition, double-click the optical card in CTC to display the card view.
Complete the
“Clear an OC-N Card Cross-Connect (XC) Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-165
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.202 LPBKDS1FEAC
2.8.202 LPBKDS1FEAC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
A Loopback Caused by Far-End Alarm and Control (FEAC) Command DS-1 condition on DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12 cards occurs when a DS-1 loopback signal is received from the remote-node node due to a FEAC command. An FEAC command is often used with loopbacks.
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKDS1FEAC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, double-click the DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > DS1 tabs.
Click the cell for the port in the Send Code column and click No Code from the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.203 LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: DS1
The DS-1 Loopback Command Sent To Far End condition occurs on the local node when you send a
DS-1 FEAC loopback. For more information about FEAC loopbacks, see the
DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks” section on page 1-45
.
Note LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
2.8.204 LPBKDS3FEAC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: DS3
A Loopback Due to FEAC Command DS-3 condition occurs when a DS3XM-6, DS3XM-12, DS3-12E, or DS3/EC1-48 card loopback signal is received in C-bit framing mode from the remote-node node because of an FEAC command. An FEAC command is often used with loopbacks. LPBKDS3FEAC is only reported by these DS cards. DS3XM-6, DS3XM-12, and DS3/EC1-48 cards generate and report
FEAC alarms or conditions, but a DS3-12E card only reports FEAC alarms or conditions.
2-166
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.205 LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD
Caution CTC permits loopbacks on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Note LPBKDS3FEAC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
Clear the LPBKDS3FEAC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, double-click the DS-3 card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs.
Click the cell for the port in the Send Code column and click No Code from the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.205 LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: DS3
The DS-3 Loopback Command Sent To Far End condition occurs on the local node when you send a
DS-3 FEAC loopback. For more information about FEAC loopbacks, see the
DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Electrical Paths With FEAC Loopbacks” section on page 1-45
.
Note LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.206 LPBKFACILITY (CE100T)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: CE100T
A Loopback Facility condition on a CE-100T-8 port occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a port on the card.
For information about troubleshooting Ethernet circuits, refer to the “1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-69
.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (CE100T) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an Ethernet Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-275 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-167
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.207 LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)
2.8.207 LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
A Loopback Facility condition occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a DS1 or DS3 port on the reporting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card.
For information about troubleshooting electrical circuits, refer to the
“1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-9 .
Note CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Performing a loopback is service-affecting. If you did not perform a lockout or Force switch to protect traffic, the
LPBKFACILITY condition can be accompanied by a more serious alarms such as LOS.
Note DS-3 facility (line) loopbacks do not transmit an AIS in the direction away from the loopback. Instead of AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (DS1, DS3) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.208 LPBKFACILITY (EC1)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EC1
A Loopback Facility condition occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a port on the reporting EC1 card.
For information about troubleshooting electrical circuits, refer to the
“1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-9 .
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (EC1, EC1-12) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-168
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.209 LPBKFACILITY (ESCON)
2.8.209 LPBKFACILITY (ESCON)
The LPBKFACILITY condition for ESCON is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.210 LPBKFACILITY (FC)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: FC
A Loopback Facility condition occurs on a fibre channel (FC) line when a software facility (line) loopback is active for an MXPP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card client PPM provisioned at the
FC1G or FC2G line speed.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (FC) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.211 LPBKFACILITY (FCMR)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: FCMR
A Loopback Facility for FC_MR condition occurs when a facility loopback is provisioned on an
FC_MR-4 card.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (FCMR) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.212 LPBKFACILITY (G1000)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-169
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.213 LPBKFACILITY (GE)
• Logical Object: G1000
A Loopback Facility condition for the G1000 object occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a port on the reporting G-Series Ethernet card.
For information about troubleshooting Ethernet circuits, refer to the
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-69 .
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (G1000) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.213 LPBKFACILITY (GE)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: GE
A Loopback Facility condition for a Gigabit Ethernet (GE) port occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for an MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_2.5G, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card client PPM provisioned at the ONE_GE port rate. For the TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10G cards, this condition occurs when there is a facility loopback on a client PPM provisioned at the TEN_GE port rate.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87
.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (GE) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.214 LPBKFACILITY (ISC)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: ISC
A Loopback Facility condition for an ISC port occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a TXP_MR_2.5G client PPM provisioned at the ISC port rate.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87
.
2-170
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.215 LPBKFACILITY (OCN)
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (ISC) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.215 LPBKFACILITY (OCN)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
A Loopback Facility condition occurs when a software facility (line) loopback is active for a port on the reporting OC-N card.
For information about troubleshooting optical circuits, refer to the
“1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit
Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-47
.
Note OC-3 facility loopbacks do not transmit an AIS in the direction away from the loopback. Instead of AIS, a continuance of the signal transmitted to the loopback is provided.
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (OCN) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
Caution Before performing a facility (line) loopback on an OC-N card, ensure that the card contains at least two
DCC paths to the node where the card is installed. A second DCC path provides a nonlooped path to log into the node after the loopback is applied, thus enabling you to remove the facility loopback. Ensuring a second DCC is not necessary if you are directly connected to the ONS 15454 containing the loopback
OC-N.
2.8.216 LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-171
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.217 LPKTERMINAL (CE100T)
A Loopback Facility condition on MXP and TXP card client port indicates that there is an active facility
(line) loopback on the port. For this condition to be present, the admin state is OOS,MT and the service state is OOS-MA, LPBK & MT.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87
.
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.217 LPKTERMINAL (CE100T)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: CE100T
A Loopback Terminal condition on a CE-100T-8 port occurs when a software terminal loopback is active for a port on the card.
For information about troubleshooting Ethernet circuits, refer to the
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-69 .
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (CE100T) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an Ethernet Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-275
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.218 LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
A Loopback Terminal condition occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for a DS1 or DS3 port on the reporting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card. DS-1 and DS-3 terminal loopbacks do not typically return an AIS signal.
For information about troubleshooting electrical circuits, refer to the
.
2-172
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.219 LPBKTERMINAL (EC1)
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (DS1, DS3) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.219 LPBKTERMINAL (EC1)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EC1
A Loopback Terminal condition occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for a port on the reporting EC1 card.
For information about troubleshooting electrical circuits, refer to the
“1.2 Troubleshooting Electrical
Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-9
.
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (EC1, EC1-12) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.220 LPBKTERMINAL (ESCON)
The LPBKTERMINAL condition for ESCON is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.221 LPBKTERMINAL (FC)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: FC
A Loopback Terminal condition occurs on an FC when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for an MXPP_MR_2.5G or TXP_MR_2.5G card client PPM provisioned at the FC1G or FC2G line speed.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-173
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.222 LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR)
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (FC) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.222 LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: FCMR
A Loopback Terminal for FCMR condition occurs when a terminal loopback is provisioned on an
FC_MR-4 card.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87
.
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.223 LPBKTERMINAL (G1000)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: G1000
A Loopback Terminal condition occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for a port on the reporting G-Series Ethernet card.
When a port in terminal (inward) loopback, its outgoing signal is redirected into the receive direction on the same port, and the externally received signal is ignored. On the G1000-4 card, the outgoing signal is not transmitted; it is only redirected in the receive direction.
For more information about troubleshooting Ethernet circuits, refer to the
Ethernet Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-69 .
Caution CTC permits loopbacks to be performed on an in-service (IS) circuit. Loopbacks are service-affecting.
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (G1000) Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks” procedure on page 2-274
.
2-174
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.224 LPBKTERMINAL (GE)
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.224 LPBKTERMINAL (GE)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: GE
A Loopback Terminal condition for a GE port occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for an MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_2.5G, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card client PPM provisioned at the ONE_GE port rate. For the TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10G cards, this condition occurs when there is a facility loopback on a client PPM provisioned at the TEN_GE port rate.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (GE) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.225 LPBKTERMINAL (ISC)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: ISC
A Loopback Terminal condition for an ISC port occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for a TXP_MR_2.5G client PPM provisioned at the ISC port rate.
For information about troubleshooting these circuits, refer to the
“1.6 Troubleshooting MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 Circuit Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-87 .
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (ISC) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.226 LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-175
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.227 LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK)
• Logical Object: OCN
A Loopback Terminal condition occurs when a software terminal (inward) loopback is active for a port on the reporting card. OC-N terminal loopbacks do not typically return an AIS.
Note Performing a loopback on an in-service circuit is service-affecting. If you did not perform a lockout or
Force switch to protect traffic, the LPBKTERMINAL condition can also be accompanied by a more serious alarm such as LOS.
For information about troubleshooting circuits, refer to the loopback procedures in
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (OCN) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.227 LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
A Loopback Terminal condition on MXP or TXP client or trunk cards indicates that there is an active terminal (inward) loopback on the port.
For information about troubleshooting optical circuits, refer to the
“1.4 Troubleshooting Optical Circuit
Paths With Loopbacks” section on page 1-47 .
Clear the LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-274
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.228 LWBATVG
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: PWR
2-176
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.229 MAN-REQ
The Low Voltage Battery alarm occurs in a –48 VDC environment when a battery lead input voltage falls below the low power threshold. This threshold, with a default value of –44 VDC, is user-provisionable.
The alarm remains raised until the voltage remains above the threshold for 120 seconds. (For information about changing this threshold, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 4,
“Turn Up Node.”)
Clear the LWBATVG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
The problem is external to the ONS 15454. Troubleshoot the power source supplying the battery leads.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.229 MAN-REQ
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EQPT, STSMON, VT-MON
The Manual Switch Request condition occurs when a user initiates a Manual switch request on an OC-N port. Clearing the Manual switch clears the MAN-REQ condition. You do not need to clear the switch if you want the manual switch to remain.
Clear the MAN-REQ Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Manual Switch Command” procedure on page 2-261
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.230 MANRESET
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
A User-Initiated Manual Reset condition occurs when you right-click a card in CTC and choose Reset.
Resets performed during a software upgrade also prompt the condition. The MANRESET condition clears automatically when the card finishes resetting.
Note MANRESET is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.231 MANSWTOINT
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-177
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI
• Logical Object: NE-SREF
The Manual Switch To Internal Clock condition occurs when the NE timing source is manually switched to the internal timing source.
Note MANSWTOINT is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.232 MANSWTOPRI
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Manual Switch To Primary Reference condition occurs when the NE timing source is manually switched to the primary timing source.
Note MANSWTOPRI is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.233 MANSWTOSEC
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Manual Switch To Second Reference condition occurs when the NE timing source is manually switched to the second timing source.
Note MANSWTOSEC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.234 MANSWTOTHIRD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Manual Switch To Third Reference condition occurs when the NE timing source is manually switched to the third timing source.
Note MANSWTOTHIRD is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.235 MANUAL-REQ-RING
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Manual Switch Request on Ring condition occurs when a user initiates a Manual Ring command on two-fiber and four-fiber BLSR rings to switch from working to protect or protect to working.
2-178
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.236 MANUAL-REQ-SPAN
Clear the MANUAL-REQ-RING Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.236 MANUAL-REQ-SPAN
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
The Manual Switch Request on Ring condition occurs on BLSRs when a user initiates a Manual Span command to move BLSR traffic from a working span to a protect span.
Clear the MANUAL-REQ-SPAN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear a BLSR External Switching Command” procedure on page 2-267
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.237 MEA (AIP)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: AIP
If the Mismatch of Equipment Attributes (MEA) alarm is reported against the AIP, the fuse in the AIP board blew or is missing. The MEA alarm also occurs when an old AIP board with a 2-A fuse is installed in a newer ANSI 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD).
Clear the MEA (AIP) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Replace the Alarm Interface Panel” procedure on page 2-279
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.238 MEA (BIC)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: BIC
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-179
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.238 MEA (BIC)
The Missing Equipment Attributes alarm for the backplane interface connector (BIC) indicates a compatibility issue in using high-density DS-3 cards with universal backplane interface connectors
(UBIC) and an older shelf backplane. Backplane versions 15454-SA-HD and later are compatible with the UBIC with horizontal connectors (UBIC-H) and UBIC with vertical connectors (UBIC-V) that the high-density EC-1, DS-1, and DS-3 electrical connections require. The MEA alarm is raised if you attempt to install a high-density card into Slots 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, or 14 with an older noncompatible backplane installed. The card is not usable in this case. It is also raised if you attempt to use an older
BIC with the newer backplane.
Clear the MEA (BIC) Alarm
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > Inventory tabs to determine your backplane model. If the backplane is not a
the BICs that are compatible with various backplanes.
Table 2-10 BIC Compatibility Matrix
BIC Type
BICs that work with the current and previous backplane
New HD BICs that work only with the new backplanes
High-density BICs that work only with
15454-SA-HD
Part No.
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_SMB_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_SMB_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_BNC_24_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_BNC_48_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_SMB
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_SMB_ALT
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_BNC_24
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_BNC_48
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_UNIV_VERT
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_UNIV_VERT
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_UNIV_HORIZ
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_UNIV_HORIZ
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_MINI_BNC_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_B_MINI_BNC_HD_BP
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_SMB
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_SMB_ALT
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_BNC_24
MANUF_EQPT_ID_BIC_A_BNC_48
Step 2 If you determine that your BIC type and backplane are compatible despite the MEA alarm, or if the alarm does not clear after you resolve the incompatibilities, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2-180
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.239 MEA (EQPT)
2.8.239 MEA (EQPT)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The MEA alarm for equipment is reported against a card slot when the physical card inserted into a slot does not match the card type that is provisioned for that slot in CTC. The alarm also occurs when certain cards introduced in Release 3.1 or later are inserted into an older shelf assembly or when older Ethernet cards (E1000-2 and E100T-12) are used in a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly.
Removing the incompatible cards clears the alarm.
Note If an OC3-8 card is installed in Slots 5 to 6 and 12 to 13, it does not appear in CTC and raises an MEA.
Clear the MEA (EQPT) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Physically verify the type of card that sits in the slot reporting the MEA alarm. In node view, click the
Inventory tab.
Determine whether the ONS 15454 shelf assembly is a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly
(15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) or an earlier shelf assembly. Under the HW Part # column, if the part number is 800-19857-XX or 800-19856-XX, then you have a 15454-SA-ANSI shelf. If the part number is 800-24848-XX, then you have a 15454-SA-HD shelf. If the number is not one of those listed above, then you are using an earlier shelf assembly.
Note On the 15454-SA-HD (P/N: 800-24848), 15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3, and
15454-SA-R1 (P/N: 800-07149) shelves, the AIP cover is clear plastic. On the 15454-SA-ANSI shelf (P/N: 800-19857), the AIP cover is metal.
Step 3 Verify the type of card that sits in the slot reported in the object column of the MEA row on the Alarms window by reading the name at the top of the card faceplate.
• If you have a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) and the card reporting the alarm is not an E1000-2 or E100T-12, proceed to
• If you have a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) and the card reporting the alarm is an E1000-2 or E100T-12, then that version of the Ethernet card is incompatible and must be removed. Proceed to
.
Note The E1000-2-G and E100T-G cards are compatible with the newer ANSI
10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly and are the functional equivalent of the older, noncompatible E1000-2 and E100T-12 cards. E1000-2-G and E100T-G cards can be used as replacements for E1000-2 and E100T-12 cards in a 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly.
•
•
If you have an older shelf assembly and the card reporting the alarm is not a card introduced in
Release 3.1 or later, which includes the OC-192, E1000-2-G, E100T-G, or OC-48 any slot (AS), proceed to
If you have an older shelf assembly and the card reporting the alarm is a card introduced in Release
3.1 or later, which includes the OC-192, E1000-2-G, E100T-G, or OC-48 any slot (AS), the reporting card is incompatible with the shelf assembly and must be removed Proceed to
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-181
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.239 MEA (EQPT)
Step 4 If you prefer the card type depicted by CTC, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 5 If you prefer the card that physically occupies the slot but the card is not in service, has no circuits mapped to it, and is not part of a protection group, put the cursor over the provisioned card in CTC and right-click to choose Delete Card .
The card that physically occupies the slot reboots, and CTC automatically provisions the card type into that slot.
Note If the card is in service, has a circuit mapped to it, is paired in a working protection scheme, has
DCC communications turned on, or is used as a timing reference, CTC does not allow you to delete the card.
Step 6 If any ports on the card are in service, place them out of service (OOS,MT):
Caution Before placing ports out of service, ensure that live traffic is not present.
Step 7 c.
d.
a.
b.
Double-click the reporting card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning tab.
Click the admin state of any in-service ports.
Choose OOS,MT to take the ports out of service.
If a circuit has been mapped to the card, complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 .
Caution Before deleting the circuit, ensure that live traffic is not present.
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the card is paired in a protection scheme, delete the protection group: a.
b.
Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Choose the protection group of the reporting card.
c.
Click Delete .
Right-click the card reporting the alarm.
Choose Delete .
The card that physically occupies the slot reboots, and CTC automatically provisions the card type into that slot.
2-182
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.240 MEA (FAN)
Step 11 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.240 MEA (FAN)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: FAN
The MEA alarm is reported against the fan-tray assembly when a newer fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3) with a 5-A fuse is used with an older shelf assembly or when an older fan-tray assembly with a 2-A fuse is used with a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) that contains cards introduced in Release 3.1 or later. If a 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly contains only cards introduced before Release 3.1, then an older fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA-2) can be used and does not report an MEA alarm.
Clear the MEA (FAN) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Determine whether the shelf assembly is a newer 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) or an earlier shelf assembly. In node view, click the Inventory tab.
Under the HW Part # column, if the part number is 800-19857-XX or 800-19856-XX, then you have a
15454-SA-ANSI shelf. If the part number is 800-24848-XX, you have a 15454-SA-HD shelf.
Under the HW Part # column, if the number is not one of those listed above, then you are using an earlier shelf assembly.
If you have a 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD), the alarm indicates that an older incompatible fan-tray assembly is installed in the shelf assembly. Obtain a newer fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3) with a 5-A fuse and complete the
“Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 2-277
.
If you are using an earlier shelf assembly, the alarm indicates that you are using a newer fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3), which is incompatible with the earlier version of the shelf assembly. Obtain an earlier version of the fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA2) and complete the
Assembly” procedure on page 2-277 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.241 MEA (PPM)
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: PPM
The Missing Equipment Attributes alarm for the PPM is raised on DWDM cards when the PPM is misprovisioned or unsupported. It can occur when you plug in a PPM without first preprovisioning it, or when you provision the PPM for a wavelength that is explicitly not the first tunable wavelength.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-183
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.242 MEM-GONE
Clear the MEA (PPM) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
To provision the PPM, you must first create it in CTC. To do this, complete the following steps: a.
b.
Double-click the MXP or TXP MR card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. (If you already see the PPM listed in the
Pluggable Port Modules Area, go to
c.
d.
e.
c.
Under the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create .
In the Create PPM dialog box, choose the MXP or TXP card PPM number from the drop-down list
(for example, PPM 1).
Choose the PPM type from the second drop-down list, for example PPM (1 Port).
Click OK .
f.
After you have created the PPM, or if you see it listed in the Pluggable Port Modules area but not in the
Selected PPM area, choose the port rate: a.
Under the Selected PPM area, click Create .
b.
In the Create Port dialog box, choose the port (for example, 1-1) from the drop-down list.
Choose the correct port type from the drop-down list. (For more information about selecting PPM port types, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide . Chapter 10,
“Change Card Settings.”) d.
Click OK .
If you see the port listed in the Pluggable Port Modules area and the Selected PPM, the MEA indicates that the incorrect port rate was selected. Click the port in the Selected PPM area and click Delete .
Complete
Step 2 to correctly provision the port rate.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.242 MEM-GONE
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Memory Gone alarm occurs when data generated by software operations exceeds the memory capacity of the TCC2/TCC2P card. CTC does not function properly until the alarm clears. The alarm clears when additional memory becomes available.
Note The alarm does not require user intervention. If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support
Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.243 MEM-LOW
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-184 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.244 MFGMEM
The Free Memory of Card Almost Gone alarm occurs when data generated by software operations is close to exceeding the memory capacity of the TCC2/TCC2P card. The alarm clears when additional memory becomes available. If additional memory is not made available and the memory capacity of the
TCC2/TCC2P is exceeded, CTC ceases to function.
Note The alarm does not require user intervention. If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support
Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.244 MFGMEM
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: AICI-AEP, AICI-AIE, AIP, BPLANE, EQPT, FAN, PPM
The Manufacturing Data Memory Failure alarm occurs when the EEPROM fails on a card or component, or when the TCC2/TCC2P card cannot read this memory. EEPROM stores manufacturing data that a system TCC2/TCC2P uses to determine system compatibility and shelf inventory status. Unavailability of this information can cause minor problems. The AIP EEPROM also stores the system MAC address.
If the MFGMEM alarm indicates EEPROM failure on these panels, IP connectivity could be disrupted and the system icon is grayed out in CTC network view.
Tip When you lose LAN connectivity with an ONS 15454 due to an MFGMEM alarm on the AIP, you can reestablish node management by disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the panel and connecting it to the active TCC2/TCC2P LAN port.
Clear the MFGMEM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270
.
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card.
If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete the
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 . If the Cisco TAC
technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, complete the
Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
If the MFGMEM alarm continues to report after replacing the TCC2/TCC2Ps, the problem is with the
EEPROM.
If the MFGMEM is reported from the fan-tray assembly, obtain a fan-tray assembly and complete the
“Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 2-277 .
If the MFGMEM is reported from the AIP, the backplane, or the alarm persists after the fan-tray assembly is replaced, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-185
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.245 NO-CONFIG
2.8.245 NO-CONFIG
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The No Startup Configuration condition applies to ML-Series Ethernet cards and occurs when no startup configuration file has been downloaded to the TCC2/TCC2P, whether or not you preprovision the card slot. This alarm is to be expected during provisioning. When the startup configuration file is copied to the active TCC2/TCC2P, the alarm clears.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the NO-CONFIG Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Create a startup configuration for the card in Cisco IOS.
Follow the card provisioning instructions in the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 .
Upload the configuration file to the TCC2/TCC2P: a.
In node view, right-click the ML-Series card graphic.
b.
c.
Choose IOS Startup Config from the shortcut menu.
Click Local > TCC and navigate to the file location.
Complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.246 NOT-AUTHENTICATED
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service-Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: SYSTEM
The NOT-AUTHENTICATED alarm is raised by CTC (not by the NE) when it fails to log into a node.
This alarm only displays in CTC where the login failure occurred. This alarm differs from the
“INTRUSION-PSWD” alarm on page 2-129
in that INTRUSION-PSWD occurs when a user exceeds the login failures threshold.
Note NOT-AUTHENTICATED is an informational alarm and is resolved when CTC successfully logs into the node.
2-186
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.247 OCHNC-INC
2.8.247 OCHNC-INC
The OCHNC-INC condition is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.248 ODUK-1-AIS-PM
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK-1-AIS-PM is a secondary condition raised on MXP card trunk signals when they experience an LOS (2R). Although the ODUK-1-AIS-PM is raised against the TRUNK object, it actually refers to the client signals contained within the trunk.
A single ODUK-x-AIS-PM can occur when one remote-node client signal is lost; multiple
ODK-x-AIS-PMs can occur (ODUK-1-AIS-PM, ODUK-2-AIS-PM, ODUK-3-AIS-PM,
ODUK-4-AIS-PM) if more than one remote-node client is lost. If the entire trunk signal is lost, LOS
(TRUNK) occurs and demotes any LOS (2R) alarms.
Clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Look for and clear the LOS (2R) alarm on remote-node client. This should clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM condition on trunk.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.249 ODUK-2-AIS-PM
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK-2-AIS-PM is a secondary condition raised on MXP card trunk signals when they experience an LOS (2R). Although the ODUK-2-AIS-PM is raised against the TRUNK object, it actually refers to the client signals contained within the trunk.
A single ODUK-x-AIS-PM can occur when one remote-node client signal is lost; multiple
ODK-x-AIS-PMs can occur (ODUK-1-AIS-PM, ODUK-2-AIS-PM, ODUK-3-AIS-PM,
ODUK-4-AIS-PM) if more than one remote-node client is lost. If the entire trunk signal is lost, LOS
(TRUNK) occurs and demotes any LOS (2R) alarms.
Clear the ODUK-2-AIS-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM Condition” procedure on page 2-187 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-187
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.250 ODUK-3-AIS-PM
2.8.250 ODUK-3-AIS-PM
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK-3-AIS-PM is a secondary condition raised on MXP card trunk signals when they experience an LOS (2R). Although the ODUK-3-AIS-PM is raised against the TRUNK object, it actually refers to the client signals contained within the trunk.
A single ODUK-x-AIS-PM can occur when one remote-node client signal is lost; multiple
ODK-x-AIS-PMs can occur (ODUK-1-AIS-PM, ODUK-2-AIS-PM, ODUK-3-AIS-PM,
ODUK-4-AIS-PM) if more than one remote-node client is lost. If the entire trunk signal is lost, LOS
(TRUNK) occurs and demotes any LOS (2R) alarms.
Clear the ODUK-3-AIS-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM Condition” procedure on page 2-187
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.251 ODUK-4-AIS-PM
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK-4-AIS-PM is a secondary condition raised on MXP card trunk signals when they experience an LOS (2R). Although the ODUK-4-AIS-PM is raised against the TRUNK object, it actually refers to the client signals contained within the trunk.
A single ODUK-x-AIS-PM can occur when one remote-node client signal is lost; multiple
ODK-x-AIS-PMs can occur (ODUK-1-AIS-PM, ODUK-2-AIS-PM, ODUK-3-AIS-PM,
ODUK-4-AIS-PM) if more than one remote-node client is lost. If the entire trunk signal is lost, LOS
(TRUNK) occurs and demotes any LOS (2R) alarms.
Clear the ODUK-4-AIS-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the ODUK-1-AIS-PM Condition” procedure on page 2-187
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.252 ODUK-AIS-PM
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
2-188
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM
The Optical Data Unit (ODUK) AIS Path Monitoring (PM) condition applies to TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. ODUK-AIS-PM is a secondary condition that indicates a more serious condition such as the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 occurring downstream. The
ODUK-AIS-PM condition is reported in the path monitoring area of the optical data unit wrapper overhead. ODUK-AIS-PM is caused by the upstream
2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM, page 2-190
.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-AIS-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Determine whether upstream nodes and equipment have alarms, especially the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
, or OOS ports.
Clear the upstream alarms using the applicable procedures in this chapter.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK Backward Defect Indicator (BDI) PM condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. It indicates that there is a path termination error upstream in the data. The error is read as a BDI bit in the path monitoring area of the digital wrapper overhead.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP cards or MXP cards to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-BDI-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the OTUK-BDI Condition” procedure on page 2-197 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.254 ODUK-LCK-PM
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-189
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK Locked Defect (LCK) PM condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. ODUK-LCK-PM indicates that a signal is being sent downstream to indicate that the upstream connection is locked, preventing the signal from being passed. The lock is indicated by the
STAT bit in the path overhead monitoring fields of the optical transport unit overhead of the digital wrapper.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, or TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 8, “Monitor
Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-LCK-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Unlock the upstream node signal.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.255 ODUK-OCI-PM
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK Open Connection Indication (OCI) PM condition applies to TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. It indicates that the upstream signal is not connected to a trail termination source. The error is read as a STAT bit in the path monitoring area of the digital wrapper overhead. ODUK-OCI-PM causes an
2.8.254 ODUK-LCK-PM, page 2-189 , downstream.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-OCI-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Verify the fiber connectivity at nodes upstream.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.256 ODUK-SD-PM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-190 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.257 ODUK-SF-PM
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK Signal Degrade (SD) PM condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled. ODUK-SD-PM indicates that incoming signal quality is poor, but the incoming line bit error rate (BER) has not passed the fail threshold. The BER problem is indicated in the path monitoring area of the optical data unit frame overhead.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-SD-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD-L Condition” procedure on page 2-220 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.257 ODUK-SF-PM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The ODUK Signal Fail (SF) PM condition (ODUK-SD-PM) applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled. ODUK-SF-PM indicates that incoming signal quality is poor and the incoming line BER has passed the fail threshold.
The BER problem is indicated in the path monitoring area of the optical data unit frame overhead.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-SF-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SF (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-222
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.258 ODUK-TIM-PM
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-191
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.259 OOU-TPT
The ODUK Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) PM condition applies to the path monitoring area of the
OTN overhead for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and
MXP_2.5G_10G cards. The condition occurs when there is a trace identifier mismatch in the data stream. ODUK-TIM-PM causes an
2.8.253 ODUK-BDI-PM, page 2-189
, downstream.
The ODUK-TIM-PM condition applies to TX cards and MXP cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. It indicates that there is an error upstream in the optical transport unit overhead of the digital wrapper.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the ODUK-TIM-PM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the TIM-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-243
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.259 OOU-TPT
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The Out of Use Transport Failure alarm is a VCAT member alarm. (VCAT member circuits are independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into a higher-rate signal.) This condition is raised when a member circuit in a VCAT is unused, such as when it is removed by
SW-LCAS. It occurs in conjunction with the
“VCG-DEG” condition on page 2-253
.
Clear the OOT-TPT Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the VCG-DEG Condition” procedure on page 2-253
. Clearing that condition clears this condition as well.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.260 OPTNTWMIS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
2-192
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.261 OPWR-HDEG
The Optical Network Type Mismatch alarm is raised when DWDM nodes are not configured for the same type of network, either MetroCore or MetroAccess. All DWDM nodes on the same network must be configured for the same network type because APC and ANS behave differently on each of these network types. For more information about APC and ANS, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide.
When the OPTNTWMIS occurs, the “APC-DISABLED” alarm on page 2-33 could also be raised.
Clear the OPTNTWMIS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
In node view of the alarmed node, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Choose the correct option from the Network Type list box, and click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.261 OPWR-HDEG
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Output Power High Degrade alarm occurs on all DWDM ports that use a setpoint, including the
OPT-BST and OPT-PRE card AOTS ports in control power mode; the 32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32MUX-O, and 32WSS card OCH ports, and the OSC-CSM and OSCM OSC-TX ports.
The alarm generally indicates that an internal signal transmission problem prevents the signal output power from maintaining its setpoint and the signal has crossed the high degrade threshold. For 32DMX,
32DMX-O, 32MUX-O, and 32WSS OCH ports and OSC-CSM and OSCM OSC-TX ports,
OPWR-HDEG indicates that the card has a VOA control circuit failure affecting its attenuation capability. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the OPWR-HDEG Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the cabling is okay, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. A red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card.
Verify that the power read by photodiode on the port is within the expected range foreseen by
MetroPlanner. The application generates a spreadsheet of values containing this information.
If the optical power level is within specifications, check the opwrMin threshold. Consult the
Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide and decide what value to use for modifying the power level: a.
b.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Display the optical thresholds by clicking the following tabs:
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-193
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.261 OPWR-HDEG
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
•
•
OPT-BST Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Optics Thresholds tab
OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Optics Thresholds tab
AD-xC Provisioning > Optical Chn> Optics Thresholds tab
•
•
•
• AD-xB Provisioning > Optical Band > Optics Thresholds tab
32DMX or 32DMX-O Provisioning > Optical Chn > Optics Thresholds tab
32MUX Provisioning > Optical Chn > Optics Thresholds tab
32WSS Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical Connector x > Optics Thresholds tab •
• OSCM or OSC-CSM Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tab
If the received optical power level is within specifications, consult the Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM
Operations Guide to determine the correct levels and check the opwrMin threshold. If necessary, modify the value as required.
If the optical power is outside of the expected range, verify that all involved optical signal sources, namely the TXP or MXP trunk port or an ITU-T line card, are in IS admin state by clicking the correct tab:
• MXPP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab
•
•
•
MXP_2.5G_10E Provisioning > Line > Trunk tab
MXP_2.5G_10G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
MXP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab
TXPP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab •
•
•
TXP_MR_10E Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
TXP_MR_10G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
• TXP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
If it is not IS-NR, choose IS from the admin state drop-down list. This creates the IS-NR service state.
If the port is in IS-NR service state but its output power is outside of the specifications, complete the
“Clear the LOS-P (OCH) Alarm” procedure on page 2-159
.
If the signal source is IS and within expected range, come back to the unit reporting OPWR-HDEG and clean all connected fiber in the same line direction as the reported alarm according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15,
“Maintain the Node.”
Note Unplugging fiber can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible. Refer
Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Repeat Steps
8 for any other port on the card reporting the OPWR-HDEG alarm.
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the OPWR-HDEG, or if clearing an alarm did not clear the alarm, place all of the card ports in OOS,DSBLD admin state.
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the reporting card.
2-194
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.262 OPWR-HFAIL
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database apart from restoring the card's port to the IS,AINS admin state.
Step 13 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.262 OPWR-HFAIL
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Output Power Failure alarm occurs on an DWDM OPT-BST or OPT-PRE amplifier card AOTS port if the transmitted power exceeds the high fail threshold. This alarm is raised only in control power working mode. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the OPWR-HFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the OPWR-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-193
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.263 OPWR-LDEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Output Power Low Degrade alarm occurs on all DWDM ports that use a setpoint, including the
OPT-BST and OPT-PRE card AOTS ports in control power mode; the 32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32MUX-O, and 32WSS card OCH ports; and the OSC-CSM and OSCM card OSC-TX ports.
The alarm generally indicates that an internal signal transmission problem prevents the signal output power from maintaining its setpoint and the signal has crossed the low degrade threshold. For the
32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32MUX-O, and 32WSS card OCH ports and the OSC-CSM and OSCM card
OSC-TX ports, OPWR-HDEG indicates that the card has a VOA control circuit failure affecting its attenuation capability. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the OPWR-LDEG Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Clear the OPWR-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-193
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-195
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.264 OPWR-LFAIL
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.264 OPWR-LFAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Output Power Failure alarm applies to DWDM OPT-BS T and OPT-PRE amplifier AOTS ports. It also applies to AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, 32MUX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32WSS, and OSC-CSM transmit (TX) ports. The alarm is raised when monitored input power crosses the low fail threshold.
For the AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x card OCH ports and the
32MUX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-O; 32WSS, OSCM, and OSC-CSM cards, OPWR-LFAIL indicates that the card has a VOA control circuit failure that affects its attenuation capability.
Clear the OPWR-LFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the OPWR-HDEG Alarm” procedure on page 2-193
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.265 OSRION
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OTS
The Optical Safety Remote Interlock On condition is raised for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST amplifier cards when OSRI is set to ON. The condition does not correlate with the
“OPWR-LFAIL” alarm on page 2-196
also reported on the same port.
Clear the OSRION Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Turn the OSRI off: a.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
b.
c.
Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
In the OSRI column, choose OFF from the drop-down list.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-196
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.266 OTUK-AIS
2.8.266 OTUK-AIS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Optical Transport Unit (OTUK) AIS condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. OTUK-AIS is a secondary condition that indicates a more serious condition, such as the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , is occurring downstream. OTUK-AIS is reported in the optical
transport unit overhead of the digital wrapper.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 8, “Monitor
Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-AIS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.267 OTUK-BDI
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK BDI condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards.
OTUK-BDI is indicated by the BDI bit in the section monitoring overhead. The alarm occurs when there is an SF condition upstream. OTUK-BDI is triggered by the
“OTUK-TIM” condition on page 2-200
.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-BDI Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Determine whether upstream nodes have the
“OTUK-AIS” condition on page 2-197
.
In the upstream node, click the MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card in node view to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tabs.
Compare the Current Transmit String with the Current Expected String in the downstream node. (Verify the Current Expected String by making the same navigations in another CTC session to the downstream node.)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-197
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.268 OTUK-IAE
Step 5
Step 6
If the two do not match, modify the Current Expected String.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.268 OTUK-IAE
Default Severity: [Minor (MN), Non-Service-Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK Section-Monitoring Incoming Alignment Error (IAE) alarm occurs on TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards and the trunk connection is present. This alarm is raised on the near-end node to indicate that the far-end node it has detected errors in the received OTU frames, but
they might not bad enough to cause an “OTUK-LOF” alarm on page 2-199
.
The IAE bit in the section overhead allows the ingress point (in this case, the far-end node) to inform its corresponding egress (near-end) point that the alignment error is detected on the incoming signal OTU frame alignment errors from NE. The error is an out-of-frame (OOF) alignment, in which the optical transport unit overhead frame alignment (FAS) area is errored for more than five frames. If the OOF condition persists for 3ms, OTUK-LOF is raised.
Note For more information about MXP and TXP cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide .
Clear the OTUK-IAE Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
At the near-end and far-end node, use site practices to clean transmitting fiber on near-end node's reporting port and receiving fiber on correspondent far-end port. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the OTUK-IAE alarm does not clear, look for other OTU-related alarm, such as the
If the OTUK-IAE alarm does not clear, use an OTN test set such as the Agilent OmniBerOTN tester to to check near-end transmitting signal quality.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the source of the alarm is not found, verify the two nodes’ timing source. To do this, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 10, “Change Node Settings,” DLP-A195 “Verify Timing in a Reduced Ring.”
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-198
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.269 OTUK-LOF
2.8.269 OTUK-LOF
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK-LOF alarm applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. The alarm indicates that the card has lost frame delineation on the input data. Loss of frame occurs when the optical transport unit overhead frame alignment (FAS) area is errored for more than five frames and that the error persists more than three milliseconds.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card of MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-LOF Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the LOF (OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-143 .
If the alarm does not clear, or if you need assistance conducting network troubleshooting tests, call
Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.270 OTUK-SD
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA) Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK-SD condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled. The condition indicates that incoming signal quality is poor, but the incoming line BER has not passed the fail threshold. The BER problem is indicated in the optical transport unit frame overhead.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-SD Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD-L Condition” procedure on page 2-220 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-199
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.271 OTUK-SF
2.8.271 OTUK-SF
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK-SF condition applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled. The condition indicates that incoming signal quality is poor and that the BER for the incoming line has passed the fail threshold. The
BER problem is indicated in the optical transport unit frame overhead.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP and MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-SF Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the SD-L Condition” procedure on page 2-220
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.272 OTUK-TIM
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The OTUK-TIM alarm applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards when ITU-T G.709 monitoring is enabled and section trace mode is set to manual. The alarm indicates that the expected TT1 string does not match the received TTI string in the optical transport unit overhead of the digital wrapper. OTUK-TIM triggers an
“ODUK-BDI-PM” condition on page 2-189
.
ITU-T G.709 monitoring refers to a digital data wrapper that is transparent across networking standards
(such as SONET) and protocols (such as Ethernet or IP). For information about provisioning the TXP card or MXP card to enable ITU-T G.709 monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Chapter 8, “Monitor Performance.”
Clear the OTUK-TIM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the TIM-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-243
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-200
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.273 OUT-OF-SYNC
2.8.273 OUT-OF-SYNC
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: FC, GE, ISC, TRUNK
The Ethernet Out of Synchronization condition occurs on TXP_MR_2.5 and TXPP_MR_2.5 cards when the PPM port is not correctly configured for the Gigabit Ethernet payload rate.
Clear the OUT-OF-SYNC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Double-click the alarmed card to display the card view.
Delete the provisioning for the PPM: a.
b.
Click the PPM in the Selected PPM area.
Click Delete .
Recreate the PPM provisioning using the correct data rate: a.
Click Create .
b.
c.
In the Port Type drop-down list, choose ONE_GE .
Click OK.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.274 PARAM-MISM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The Plug-in Module Range Settings Mismatch condition is raised for OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards, optical add-drop multiplexer (OADM) cards (AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x,
AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x), multiplexer cards (32MUX-O and 32WSS), and demultiplexer cards
(32DMX-O and 32DMX) when the parameter range values stored on the card are different from the parameters stored in TCC2/TCC2P database. The condition is not user-serviceable. Log into the
Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447).
2.8.275 PDI-P
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
PDI-P is a set of application-specific codes indicating a signal label mismatch failure (SLMF) in the
ONS 15454 STS path overhead. The alarm indicates to downstream equipment that there is a defect in one or more of the directly mapped payloads contained in that STS synchronous payload envelope
(SPE). For example, the mismatch could occur in the overhead to the path selector in a downstream node configured as part of a path protection. The PDI-P codes appear in the STS Signal Label (C2 byte).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-201
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.275 PDI-P
An SLMF often occurs when the payload (for example, ATM) does not match what the signal label is
reporting. The “AIS” condition on page 2-30
often accompanies a PDI-P condition. If the PDI-P is the only condition reported with the AIS, clearing PDI-P clears the AIS. PDI-P can also occur during an upgrade, but usually clears itself and is not a valid condition.
A PDI-P condition reported on an OC-N port supporting a G1000-4 card circuit could result from the end-to-end Ethernet link integrity feature of the G1000-4 card. If the link integrity is the cause of the path defect, it is typically accompanied by the
“TPTFAIL (G1000)” alarm on page 2-245
or the
“CARLOSS (G1000)” alarm on page 2-58
reported against one or both Ethernet ports terminating the circuit. If this is the case, clear the TPTFAIL and CARLOSS alarms to resolve the PDI-P condition.
A PDI-P condition reported on an OC-N port supporting an ML-Series card circuit could result from the end-to-end Ethernet link integrity feature of the ML-Series card. If the link integrity is the cause, it is typically accompanied by the
“TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000)” alarm on page 2-245 reported against one
or both packet-over-SONET (POS) ports terminating the circuit. If TPTFAIL is reported against one or both of the POS ports, troubleshooting the accompanying alarm clears the PDI-P condition. Refer to the
<I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 for more information about ML-Series cards.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the PDI-P Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Verify that all circuits terminating in the reporting card are DISCOVERED: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Verify that the Status column lists the circuit as active.
c.
If the Status column lists the circuit as PARTIAL, wait 10 minutes for the ONS 15454 to initialize fully. If the PARTIAL status does not change after full initialization, log into the Technical Support
Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447).
After determining that the circuit is DISCOVERED, ensure that the signal source to the card reporting the alarm is working.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
2-202
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.276 PEER-NORESPONSE
Step 3
If traffic is affected, complete the “Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272 .
Caution Deleting a circuit can affect existing traffic.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Recreate the circuit with the correct circuit size. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter
6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels,” for detailed procedures to create circuits.
If circuit deletion and recreation does not clear the condition, verify that there is no problem stemming from the remote-node OC-N card providing STS payload to the reporting card.
If the condition does not clear, confirm the cross-connect between the OC-N card and the reporting card.
If the condition does not clear, clean the remote-node optical fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the condition does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the optical/electrical cards.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 for
commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 9 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.276 PEER-NORESPONSE
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The switch agent raises a Peer Card Not Responding alarm if either traffic card in a protection group does not receive a response to the peer status request message. PEER-NORESPONSE is a software failure and occurs at the task level, as opposed to a communication failure, which is a hardware failure between peer cards.
Clear the PEER-NORESPONSE Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268 for the reporting card. For the LED
behavior, see the “2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. Verify the
LED appearance: A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-203
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.277 PLM-P
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.277 PLM-P
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
A Payload Label Mismatch Path alarm indicates that signal does not match its label. The condition occurs due to a problematic C2 byte value in the SONET path overhead. The alarm is raised if all of the following conditions are met:
• The received C2 byte is not 0x00 (unequipped).
•
•
•
•
The received C2 byte is not a PDI value.
The received C2 does not match the expected C2.
The expected C2 byte is not 0x01 (equipped, unspecified).
The received C2 byte is not 0x01 (equipped, unspecified).
For example, on nodes equipped with CTC Software R4.1 and earlier, this alarm could occur when you have a DS3XM-6 card connected to a DS-3 card instead of a DS-1 card. The DS3XM-6 card expects a
C2 label byte value of 01. A DS-1 card transmits this value, but a DS-3 card transmits a value of 04. The mismatch between the sent and expected values causes the PLM-P alarm.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293 .
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the PLM-P Alarm
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the PDI-P Condition” procedure on page 2-202 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
2-204
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.278 PLM-V
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.278 PLM-V
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: VT-TERM
A Payload Label Mismatch VT Layer alarm indicates that the content of the V5 byte in the SONET overhead is inconsistent or invalid. PLM-V occurs when ONS 15454s interoperate with equipment that performs bit-synchronous mapping for DS-1. The ONS 15454 uses asynchronous mapping.
Clear the PLM-V Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Verify that your signal source matches the signal allowed by the traffic card. For example, the traffic card does not allow VT6 or VT9 mapping.
If the signal source matches the card, verify that the SONET VT path originator is sending the correct
VT label value. You can find the SONET VT path originator using circuit provisioning steps.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.279 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-HI
The Add Port Power High Degrade alarm is not used in this platform in this release in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.280 PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-LOW
The Add Port Power Low Degrade alarm is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.281 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-HI
The Add Port Power High Fail alarm is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.282 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCH
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-205
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.282 PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW
The Add Port Power Low Fail alarm occurs on a 32WSS ADD port if an internal signal transmission crosses the low fail threshold and prevents the signal output power from reaching its setpoint. This alarm indicates that the card has a VOA control circuit failure, which affects the card automatic signal attenuation. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW Alarm
Step 1 Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the cabling is okay, confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. A red ACT/SBY LED indicates a failed card.
Verify that the received power (opwrMin) is within the expected range shown in Cisco MetroPlanner. To check the level: a.
Double-click the card to display the card view.
b.
Display the optical thresholds by clicking the 32WSS Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical
Connector x > Optics Thresholds tab.
If the optical power level is within specifications, check the opwrMin threshold and consult the
Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide to determine the correct value. Modify the value as necessary.
If the power value is outside the expected range verify that the trunk port of a TXP or MXP card connected to ADD-RX port is in IS-NR service state by clicking the correct tab:
• MXPP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab
•
•
•
MXP_2.5G_10E Provisioning > Line > Trunk tab
MXP_2.5G_10G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
MXP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab
TXPP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > OC48 tab •
•
•
TXP_MR_10E Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
TXP_MR_10G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
• TXP_MR_2.5G Provisioning > Line > SONET tab
If it is not IS-NR, choose IS from the admin state drop-down list. This creates the IS-NR service state.
If the port is in IS-NR service state but its output power is outside of the specifications, complete the
“Clear the LOS-P (OCH) Alarm” procedure on page 2-159
.
If the signal source is IS-NR and within expected range, come back to the port reporting the
PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW alarm and clean the fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the
Node.”
Repeat Steps
for any other port on the card reporting the alarm.
If the alarm does not clear, look for and troubleshoot any other alarm that could identify the source of the problem.
If no other alarms exist that could be the source of the PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW, or if this procedure did not clear the alarm, place all of the card ports in OOS,DSBLD admin state.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-206 September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.283 PORT-MISMATCH
Step 11 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform a traffic switch if possible. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 for short-version procedures. For more detailed
protection switching information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15,
“Maintain the Node.”
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database apart from restoring the card's port to the IS,AINS admin state.
Step 12 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.283 PORT-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: FCMR
The Pluggable Port Mismatch alarm applies to ML-Series Ethernet (traffic) card and TXP card SFP connectors. The alarm indicates that the provisioned payload for the connector does not match the SFP configuration.
The error must be resolved in the Cisco IOS configuration. PORT-MISMATCH cannot be resolved in
CTC. For information about provisioning the ML-Series Ethernet cards from the Cisco IOS interface, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC to report a service-affecting problem (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.284 PRC-DUPID
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: NE, OCN
The Procedural Error Duplicate Node ID alarm indicates that two identical node IDs exist in the same ring. The ONS 15454 requires each node in the ring to have a unique node ID.
Clear the PRC-DUPID Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Log into a node on the ring.
Find the node ID by completing the
“Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259
.
for all the nodes on the ring.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-207
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.285 PROTNA
Step 4
Step 5
If two nodes have an identical node ID number, complete the
“Change a BLSR Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259 so that each node ID is unique.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.285 PROTNA
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Protection Unit Not Available alarm is caused by an OOS protection card when a TCC2/TCC2P or
XC10G cross-connect card that has been provisioned as part of a protection group is not available.
Unavailable protection can occur when a card is reset, but the alarm clears as soon as the card is back in service. The alarm clears if the device or facility is brought back in service.
Clear the PROTNA Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
If the PROTNA alarm occurs and does not clear, and if it is raised against a controller or cross-connect card, ensure that there is a redundant TCC2/TCC2P card installed and provisioned in the chassis.
If the alarm is raised against a line card, verify that the ports have been taken out of service (OOS,MT): a.
In CTC, double-click the reporting card to display the card view (if the card is not an XC10G cross-connect card).
b.
c.
Click the Provisioning tab.
Click the admin state of any in-service (IS) ports.
d.
Choose OOS,MT to take the ports out of service.
Complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. Verify the
LED appearance: A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the reporting card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.286 PTIM
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
2-208
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.287 PWR-FAIL-A
The Payload Type Identifier Mismatch alarm occurs when there is a mismatch between the way the
ITU-T G.709 option is configured on MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card at each end of the optical span.
Clear the PTIM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Double-click the alarmed MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
Ensure that the G.709 OTN check box is checked. If not, check it and click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.287 PWR-FAIL-A
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Equipment Power Failure at Connector A alarm occurs when there is no power supply from the main power connector to the equipment. This alarm occurs on the electrical interface assemblies (EIA), cross-connect card, OC-N cards, or TCC2/TCC2P card.
Warning The power supply circuitry for the equipment can constitute an energy hazard. Before you install or replace the equipment, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). Metal objects can come into contact with exposed power supply wiring or circuitry inside the DSLAM equipment.
This could cause the metal objects to heat up and cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the equipment. Statement 207
Clear the PWR-FAIL-A Alarm
Step 1 If a single card has reported the alarm, take the following actions depending on the reporting card:
• If the reporting card is an active traffic line port in a 1+1 or part of a path protection, ensure that an automatic protection switch (APS) traffic switch has occurred to move traffic to the protect port.
Note Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260 for
commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Step 2
Step 3
If the alarm is reported against a TCC2/TCC2P card, complete the “Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and
Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 .
If the alarm is reported against an OC-N card, complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-209
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.288 PWR-FAIL-B
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the alarm is reported against a cross-connect card, complete the
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting card.
If the single card replacement does not clear the alarm, or if multiple cards report the alarm, verify the office power. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 1, Install the Shelf and Backplane
Cable,” for instructions to install power or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide Chapter
1, “General Troubleshooting,” for power supply troubleshooting procedures.
If the alarm does not clear, reseat the power cable connection to the connector.
If the alarm does not clear, physically replace the power cable connection to the connector.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.288 PWR-FAIL-B
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Equipment Power Failure at Connector B alarm occurs when there is no power supply from the main power connector to the equipment. This alarm occurs on the electrical interface assemblies (EIA), cross-connect card, OC-N cards, or TCC2/TCC2P card.
Warning The power supply circuitry for the equipment can constitute an energy hazard. Before you install or replace the equipment, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). Metal objects can come into contact with exposed power supply wiring or circuitry inside the DSLAM equipment.
This could cause the metal objects to heat up and cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the equipment. Statement 207
Clear the PWR-FAIL-B Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the PWR-FAIL-A Alarm” procedure on page 2-209
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.289 PWR-FAIL-RET-A
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
2-210
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.290 PWR-FAIL-RET-B
The Equipment Power Failure at Connector A alarm occurs when there is no power supplied to the backup power connector on the shelf. This alarm occurs on the EIA, cross-connect card, OC-N cards, or
TCC2/TCC2P card.
Clear the PWR-FAIL-RET-A Alarm:
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the PWR-FAIL-A Alarm” procedure on page 2-209 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.290 PWR-FAIL-RET-B
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Equipment Power Failure at Connector B alarm occurs when there is no power supplied to the backup power connector on the shelf. This alarm occurs on the EIA, cross-connect card, OC-N cards, or
TCC2/TCC2P card.
Clear the PWR-FAIL-RET-A Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the PWR-FAIL-A Alarm” procedure on page 2-209 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.291 RAI
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
The Remote Alarm Indication condition signifies an end-to-end failure. The error condition is sent from one end of the SONET path to the other. RAI on a DS3XM-6 card indicates that the remote-node node is receiving a DS-3 AIS.
Clear the RAI Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-31 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-211
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.292 RCVR-MISS
2.8.292 RCVR-MISS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS1
A Facility Termination Equipment Receiver Missing alarm occurs when the facility termination equipment detects an incorrect amount of impedance on its backplane connector. Incorrect impedance usually occurs when a receive cable is missing from a DS-1 port, or a possible mismatch of backplane equipment occurs. For example, an SMB connector or a BNC connector might be misconnected to a
DS-1 card.
Note DS-1s are four-wire circuits and need a positive (tip) and negative (ring) connection for both transmit and receive.
Clear the RCVR-MISS Alarm
Step 1 Ensure that the device attached to the DS-1 port is operational.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If the attachment is okay, verify that the cabling is securely connected.
If the cabling is okay, verify that the pinouts are correct.
If the pinouts are correct, replace the receive cable.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.293 RFI
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The Remote Failure Indication condition is similar to the
“RFI-L” condition on page 2-213 but it is
raised against an MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card when it has the
. The MXP or TXP card only raise
AIS (or remote failure indication [RFI]) when they are in line or section termination mode, that is, when the MXP or TXP cards in line termination mode or section termination mode has improperly terminated overhead bytes.
Clear the RFI Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
and then recreate the circuit.
2-212
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.294 RFI-L
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.294 RFI-L
•
•
Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12, OCN
A RFI Line condition occurs when the ONS 15454 detects an RFI in OC-N card SONET overhead because of a fault in another node. Resolving the fault in the adjoining node clears the RFI-L condition in the reporting node. RFI-L indicates that the condition is occurring at the line level.
Clear the RFI-L Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Log into the node at the remote-node node of the reporting ONS 15454.
Identify and clear any alarms, particularly the “LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.295 RFI-P
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The RFI Path condition occurs when the ONS 15454 detects an RFI in the an STS-1 signal SONET overhead because of a fault in another node. Resolving the fault in the adjoining node clears the RFI-P condition in the reporting node. RFI-P occurs in the terminating node in that path segment.
Clear the RFI-P Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Verify that the ports are enabled and in service (IS-NR) on the reporting ONS 15454: a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card.
b.
c.
d.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the OC-N port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
e.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSLBD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
To find the path and node failure, verify the integrity of the SONET STS circuit path at each of the intermediate SONET nodes.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-213
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.296 RFI-V
Step 3
Step 4
Clear alarms in the node with the failure, especially the
“UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249 or the
“UNEQ-V” alarm on page 2-251 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.296 RFI-V
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: VT-TERM
An RFI VT Layer condition occurs when the ONS 15454 detects an RFI in the SONET overhead because of a fault in another node. Resolving the fault in the adjoining node clears the RFI-V condition in the reporting node. RFI-V indicates that an upstream failure has occurred at the VT layer.
Clear the RFI-V Condition
Step 1 Verify that the connectors are securely fastened and connected to the correct slot. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
If connectors are correctly connected, verify that the DS-1 port is active and in service (IS-NR): a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card: b.
c.
d.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the OC-N port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
e.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
If the ports are active and in service, use an optical test set to verify that the signal source does not have errors.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the signal is valid, log into the node at the remote-node of the reporting ONS 15454.
Clear alarms in the remote node, especially the “UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249
or the
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-214
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.297 RING-ID-MIS
2.8.297 RING-ID-MIS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: OCN, OSC-RING
The Ring ID Mismatch condition refers to the ring ID in APC. It occurs when a ring name does not match other detectable node ring names, and can cause problems with applications that require data exchange with APC. This alarm is similar to BLSR RING-MISMATCH, but rather than apply to ring protection,
RING-ID-MIS applies to DWDM node discovery within the same network. For more information about
APC, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide.
Clear the RING-ID-MIS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the RING-MISMATCH Alarm” procedure on page 2-215
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.298 RING-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: OCN
A Procedural Error Mismatch Ring alarm occurs when the ring name of the ONS 15454 node that is reporting the alarm does not match the ring name of another node in the BLSR. Nodes connected in a
BLSR must have identical ring names to function. This alarm can occur during BLSR provisioning.
RING-MISMATCH is somewhat similar to RING-ID-MIS, but it applies to BLSR protection discovery instead of DWDM node discovery.
Clear the RING-MISMATCH Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
In node view, click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Note the name in the Ring Name field.
Log into the next ONS 15454 node in the BLSR.
Complete the
“Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number” procedure on page 2-259 .
If the ring name matches the ring name in the reporting node, repeat
Step 4 for the next ONS 15454 in
the BLSR.
Complete the
“Change a BLSR Ring Name” procedure on page 2-259
.
Verify that the ring map is correct.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-215
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.299 RING-SW-EAST
2.8.299 RING-SW-EAST
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Ring Switch Is Active East Side condition occurs when a ring switch occurs at the east side of a
BLSR using a Force Ring command. The condition clears when the switch is cleared.
Note RING-SW-EAST is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.300 RING-SW-WEST
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Ring Switch Is Active West Side condition occurs when a ring switch occurs at the west side of a
BLSR using a Force Ring command. The condition clears when the switch is cleared.
Note RING-SW-WEST is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.301 RPRW
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service-Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: CE100T, ML100T, ML1000
The Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) Wrapped condition applies to CE100T-8 and ML-Series cards and occurs when the RPR protocol initiates a ring wrap due to a fiber cut, node failure, node restoration, new node insertion, or other traffic problem. It can also be raised if the POS port has an Admin down condition. (In this case, you will not see any SONET-level or TPTFAIL alarms.)
When the wrap occurs, traffic is redirected to the original destination by sending it in the opposite direction around the ring after a link state change or after receiving any SONET path-level alarms.
Note ML-Series card POS interfaces normally send the
“PDI-P” alarm on page 2-201 to the far end when the
POS link goes down or when RPR wraps. ML-Series card POS interfaces do not send a PDI-P alarm to the far end when this alarm is detected, when the alarm is being sent to the far end, or when the only defects being detected are the
“GFP-LFD” alarm on page 2-118 , the
, the VCAT
, or the VCAT “SQM” alarm on page 2-230
.
Note For more information about CE-100T-8 and ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card
Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and
Cisco ONS 15327.
2-216
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.302 RUNCFG-SAVENEED
Clear the RPRW Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Look for and clear any service-affecting SONET path-level alarms on the affected circuit, such as the
,
“LOS-P (TRUNK)” alarm on page 2-163
,
, or the
. Clearing this alarm can also clear RPRW.
If the condition does not clear, look for and clear any service alarms for the ML-Series card itself, such
as the “CARLOSS (CE100T)” alarm on page 2-54 ,
“CARLOSS (ML100T, ML1000)” alarm on page 2-62
,
“TPTFAIL (CE100T)” alarm on page 2-244 , or the
“TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000)” alarm on page 2-245 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.302 RUNCFG-SAVENEED
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: EQPT
The Run Configuration Save Needed condition occurs when you change the running configuration file for ML1000-2 and ML100T-12 cards. It is a reminder that you must save the change to the startup configuration file for it to be permanent.
The condition clears after you save the running configuration to the startup configuration, such as by entering: copy run start at the privileged EXEC mode of the Cisco IOS CLI. If you do not save the change, the change is lost after the card reboots. If the command 'copy run start' is executed in configuration mode and not privileged EXEC mode, the running configuration will be saved, but the alarm will not clear.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
2.8.303 SD (DS1, DS3)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
A Signal Degrade (SD) condition for DS-1 or DS-3 occurs when the quality of an electrical signal has exceeded the BER signal degrade threshold. Signal degrade is defined by Telcordia as a soft failure condition. SD and also signal fail (SF) both monitor the incoming BER and are similar alarms, but SD is triggered at a lower bit error rate than SF.
The BER threshold is user provisionable and has a range for SD from 10
–9 to 10
–5
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-217
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.303 SD (DS1, DS3)
SD can be reported on electrical card ports that are In-Service and Normal (IS-NR); Out-of-Service and
Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OOS-AU,AIS); or Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance
(OOS-MA,MT) but not in the Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled (OOS-MA,DSBLD) service state. The BER count increase associated with this alarm does not take an IS-NR port out of service, but if it occurs on an AINS port, the alarm prevents the port from going into service.
The SD condition clears when the BER level falls to one-tenth of the threshold level that triggered the condition. A BER increase is sometimes caused by a physical fiber problem, including a faulty fiber connection, a bend in the fiber that exceeds the permitted bend radius, or a bad fiber splice. SD can also be caused by repeated XC10G cross-connect card switches that in turn can cause switching on the lines or paths.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Note Some levels of BER errors (such as 10
-9
) take a long period to raise or clear, about 9,000 seconds, or 150 minutes. If the SD threshold is provisioned at 10
-9
rate, the SD alarm needs at least one and a half hours to raise and then another period at least as long to clear.
Note The recommended test set for use on all SONET ONS electrical cards is the Omniber 718.
Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit” procedure on page 2-273 .
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Ensure that the fiber connector for the card is completely plugged in. For more information about fiber connections and card insertion, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 2, “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable.”
If the BER threshold is correct and at the expected level, use an optical test set to measure the power level of the line to ensure it is within guidelines.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the optical power level is okay, verify that optical receive levels are within the acceptable range.
If receive levels are okay, clean the fibers at both ends according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
If the condition does not clear, verify that single-mode fiber is used.
2-218
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.304 SD (TRUNK)
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
If the fiber is the correct type, verify that a single-mode laser is used at the remote-node node.
Clean the fiber connectors at both ends for a signal degrade according to site practice.
Verify that a single-mode laser is used at the remote node.
If the problem does not clear, the transmitter at the other end of the optical line could be failing and require replacement. Refer to the
“2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement” section on page 2-269 .
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 11 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.304 SD (TRUNK)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
An SD condition on the trunk occurs when the quality of an optical signal to the MXP_2.5G_10G,
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card has BER on the incoming optical line that passes the signal degrade threshold. The alarm applies to the card ports and the trunk carrying optical or electrical signals to the card.
Signal degrade is defined by Telcordia as a soft failure condition. SD and SF both monitor the incoming
BER and are similar alarms, but SD is triggered at a lower BER than SF. The BER threshold on the
ONS 15454 is user provisionable and has a range for SD from 10 –9 to 10 –5 .
Clear the SD (TRUNK) Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.305 SD-L
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12, OCN
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-219
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.306 SD-P
An SD Line condition is similar to the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217 . It applies to the line
level of the SONET signal and travels on the B2 byte of the SONET overhead.
An SD-L on an Ethernet or OC-N card does not cause a protection switch. If the alarm is reported on a card that has also undergone a protection switch, the SD BER count continues to accumulate. The alarm is superseded by higher-priority alarms such as
, and
.
Clear the SD-L Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.306 SD-P
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM, VT-TERM
An SD Path condition is similar to the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217 , but it applies to the
path (STS) layer of the SONET overhead. A path or STS-level SD alarm travels on the B3 byte of the
SONET overhead.
For path protection protected circuits, the BER threshold is user provisionable and has a range for SD from 10
–9 to 10
–5
. For BLSR 1+1 and unprotected circuits, the BER threshold value is not user provisionable and the error rate is hard-coded to 10
–6
.
On path protection, an SD-P condition causes a switch from the working card to the protect card at the path (STS) level. On BLSR, 1+1, and on unprotected circuits, an SD-P condition does not cause switching.
The BER increase that causes the alarm is sometimes caused by a physical fiber problem such as a poor fiber connection, a bend in the fiber that exceeds the permitted bend radius, or a bad fiber splice.
Signal degrade and signal fail both monitor the incoming BER and are similar alarms, but SD is triggered at a lower BER than SF. SD causes the card to switch from working to protect. The SD alarm clears when the BER level falls to one-tenth of the threshold level that triggered the alarm.
Clear the SD-P Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.307 SD-V
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
2-220
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.308 SF (DS1, DS3)
• Logical Object: VT-MON
An SD-V condition is similar to the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217 , but it applies to the VT
layer of the SONET overhead.
For path protection protected circuits, the BER threshold is user provisionable and has a range for SD from 10
–9 to 10
–5
. For BLSR 1+1 and unprotected circuits, the BER threshold value is not user provisionable and the error rate is hard-coded to 10
–6
.
On path protection configurations, an SD-V condition does not cause a switch from the working card to the protect card at the path (STS) level. On BLSR, 1+1, and on unprotected circuits, an SD-V condition does not cause switching.
The BER increase that causes the alarm is sometimes caused by a physical fiber problem such as a poor fiber connection, a bend in the fiber that exceeds the permitted bend radius, or a bad fiber splice.
Signal degrade and signal fail both monitor the incoming BER and are similar alarms, but SD is triggered at a lower BER than SF. SD causes the card to switch from working to protect. The SD alarm clears when the BER level falls to one-tenth of the threshold level that triggered the alarm.
Clear the SD-V Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.308 SF (DS1, DS3)
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
A Signal Fail (SF) condition occurs when the quality of the signal has exceeded the BER signal failure threshold. Signal failure is defined by Telcordia as a “hard failure” condition. The SD and SF conditions both monitor the incoming BER error rate and are similar conditions, but SF is triggered at a higher BER than SD.
The BER threshold is user provisionable and has a range for SF from 10
–5
to 10
–3
.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-221
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.309 SF (TRUNK)
Clear the SF (DS1, DS3) Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.309 SF (TRUNK)
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
An SF condition for the trunk occurs when the quality of an optical signal to the MXP_2.5G_10G,
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or TXPP_MR_2.5G card has BER on the incoming optical line that passes the signal fail threshold. The alarm applies to the card ports and the trunk carrying optical or electrical signals to the card.
Signal fail is defined by Telcordia as a hard failure condition. SF monitors the incoming BER and is triggered when the BER surpasses the default range.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the SF (TRUNK) Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-222
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.310 SF-L
2.8.310 SF-L
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EC1, EC1-12, OCN
An SF Line condition is similar to the
“SF (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-221 , but it applies to the
line layer B2 overhead byte of the SONET signal. It can trigger a protection switch.
The SF-L condition clears when the BER level falls to one-tenth of the threshold level that triggered the condition. A BER increase is sometimes caused by a physical fiber problem, including a poor fiber connection, a bend in the fiber that exceeds the permitted bend radius, or a bad fiber splice.
The alarm is superseded by higher-priority alarms such as
,
.
Clear the SF-L Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.311 SF-P
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM, VT-TERM
(STS) layer B3 byte of the SONET overhead. It can trigger a protection switch.
The SF-P condition clears when the BER level falls to one-tenth of the threshold level that triggered the condition. A BER increase is sometimes caused by a physical fiber problem, including a poor fiber connection, a bend in the fiber that exceeds the permitted bend radius, or a bad fiber splice.
Clear the SF-P Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.312 SF-V
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: VT-MON
An SF-V condition is similar to the “SF (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-221
, but it applies to the VT layer of the SONET overhead.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-223
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.313 SFTWDOWN
Clear the SF-V Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the SD (DS1, DS3) Condition” procedure on page 2-218
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.313 SFTWDOWN
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
A Software Download in Progress alarm occurs when the TCC2/TCC2P is downloading or transferring software.
If the active and standby TCC2/TCC2Ps have the same versions of software, it takes approximately three minutes for software to be updated on a standby TCC2/TCC2P.
If the active and standby TCC2/TCC2Ps have different software versions, the transfer can take up to
30 minutes. Software transfers occur when different software versions exist on the two cards. After the transfer completes, the active TCC2/TCC2P reboots and goes into standby mode after approximately three minutes.
No action is necessary. Wait for the transfer or the software download to complete. If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
Note SFTWDOWN is an informational alarm.
2.8.314 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIGH
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OTS
The Switch Insertion Loss Variation Degrade High alarm occurs as the OSC-CSM card optical switch ages and slowly increases its insertion loss. This alarm indicates that the insertion loss has crossed the high degrade threshold. The card must be replaced eventually.
2.8.314.1 Clear the SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIGH Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 as
appropriate.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-224
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LOW
2.8.315 SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LOW
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OTS
The Switch Insertion Loss Variation Degrade Low alarm occurs as the OSC-CSM card optical switch ages and slowly decreases its insertion loss. This alarm indicates that the insertion loss has crossed the low degrade threshold. The card must eventually be replaced.
2.8.315.1 Clear the SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-LOW Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
For the alarmed card, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
as appropriate.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.316 SHUTTER-OPEN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OTS
The SHUTTER-OPEN condition occurs if an OSC-CSM card laser shutter remains open after the
alarm is detected. A laser shutter remains open if an optical safety issue is present and closes when the OSC-CSM card LINE-RX port receives OSC power for three consecutive seconds.
Clear the SHUTTER-OPEN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the
“Clear the LOS (OTS) Alarm” procedure on page 2-155 .
If the SHUTTER-OPEN condition still does not clear, it indicates that the unit shutter is not working
properly. Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.317 SIGLOSS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: FC, FCMR, GE, ISC,TRUNK
The Signal Loss on Data Interface alarm is raised on FC_MR-4 card receive client ports when there is an LOS. It can be cleared by a terminal loopback state on the FC_MR-4 port. SIGLOSS demotes the
SYNCLOSS alarm.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-225
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.318 SNTP-HOST
Clear the SIGLOSS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Ensure that the Fibre Channel data port connection at the local card port of the SONET link is operational.
Verify fiber continuity to the port.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 3
Step 4
Check the physical port LED on the Fibre Channel card. The port LED looks clear (that is, not lit green) if the link is not connected.
If the alarm does not clear, log onto http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call
Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.318 SNTP-HOST
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: NE
The Simple Network Timing Protocol (SNTP) Host Failure alarm indicates that an ONS 15454 serving as an IP proxy for the other ONS 15454s in the ring is not forwarding SNTP information to the other nodes in the network. The forwarding failure can result from two causes: either the IP network attached to the ONS 15454 proxy node is experiencing problems, or the ONS 15454 proxy node itself is not functioning properly.
Clear the SNTP-HOST Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Ping the SNTP host from a workstation in the same subnet to ensure that communication is possible within the subnet.
If the ping fails, contact the network administrator who manages the IP network that supplies the SNTP information to the proxy and determine whether the network is experiencing problems which could affect the SNTP server/router connecting to the proxy ONS 15454 system.
If no network problems exist, ensure that the ONS system proxy is provisioned correctly: a.
b.
c.
d.
In node view for the ONS 15454 serving as the proxy, click the
Ensure that the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box is checked.
If the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box is not checked, click it.
Provisioning > General
Ensure that the Use NTP/SNTP Server field contains a valid IP address for the server.
tabs.
If proxy is correctly provisioned, refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for more information on SNTP Host.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-226
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.319 SPAN-SW-EAST
2.8.319 SPAN-SW-EAST
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Span Switch Is Active East Side condition occurs when a span switch occurs at the east side of a four-fiber BLSR span using a Force Span command. The condition clears when the switch is cleared.
Note SPAN-SW-EAST is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.320 SPAN-SW-WEST
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCN
The Span Switch Is Active West Side condition occurs when a span switch occurs at the west side of a four-fiber BLSR span using a Force Span command. The condition clears when the switch is cleared.
Note SPAN-SW-WEST is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.321 SQUELCH
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: OCN
The Ring Squelching Traffic condition occurs in a BLSR when a node that originates or terminates STS circuits fails or is isolated by multiple fiber cuts or maintenance Force Ring commands. The isolation or failure of the node disables circuits that originate or terminate on the failed node. SQUELCH conditions appear on one or both of the nodes on either side of the isolated or failed node. The
“AIS-P” condition on page 2-31 also appears on all nodes in the ring except the isolated node.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293 .
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-227
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.321 SQUELCH
Clear the SQUELCH Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Determine the isolated node: a.
b.
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
The grayed out node with red spans is the isolated node.
Verify fiber continuity to the ports on the isolated node.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Note To verify fiber continuity, follow site practices.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
If fiber continuity is okay, verify that the proper ports are in service: a.
Confirm that the LED is correctly illuminated on the physical card.
b.
c.
d.
A green ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
To determine whether the OC-N port is in service, double-click the card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Verify that the Admin State column lists the port as IS.
e.
If the Admin State column lists the port as OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the column and choose
IS . Click Apply .
If the correct ports are in service, use an optical test set to verify that a valid signal exists on the line.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer. Test the line as close to the receiving card as possible.
If the signal is valid, verify that the power level of the optical signal is within the optical card receiver specifications. Refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for card specifications.
If the receiver levels are okay, ensure that the optical transmit and receive fibers are connected properly.
If the connectors are okay, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the OC-N card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 8 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-228
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.322 SQUELCHED
2.8.322 SQUELCHED
•
•
The Client Signal Squelched condition is raised by a TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_2.5G, or MXPP_MR_2.6G card.
The condition can be raised in the following situations:
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, TRUNK
•
An MXP or TXP client facility detects that an upstream Rx facility has experienced a loss of signal
(such as an Ethernet CARLOSS, DWDM SIGLOSS, or optical LOS). In response, the facility’s Tx is turned off (SQUELCHED). The upstream Rx facilities are the trunk Rx on the same card as the client, as well as the client Rx on the card at the other end of the trunk span.
The client will squelch if the upstream trunk Rx (on the same card) experiences a SIGLOSS,
Ethernet CARLOSS, LOS, or LOS (TRUNK) alarm. In some transparent modes, the client is squelched if the trunk detects an AIS condition or a TIM alarm.
• The client will squelch if the upstream client Rx (on the card at the other end of the DWDM span) experiences CARLOSS, SIGLOSS, or LOS.
In an example situation, an upstream MXP_2.5G_10G client port Rx experiences a “loss of light,” and this port raises CARLOSS, SIGLOSS, or LOS (determined by the payload type) locally. The port also sends client signal fail (GFP-CSF) to its downstream card. The downstream card raises a GFP-CSF alarm, turns off the client Tx laser, and raises the SQUELCHED condition.
The local client raises SQUELCHED if it also raises one of the following alarms, all of which are signalled by the upstream node:
•
“GFP-CSF” alarm on page 2-117 for the client
•
•
•
•
•
for the client
“GFP-NO-BUFFERS” alarm on page 2-119
for the client
“GFP-DE-MISMATCH” alarm on page 2-117
for the client
“GFP-EX-MISMATCH” alarm on page 2-118
for the client
•
•
•
“ODUK-1-AIS-PM” alarm on page 2-187 for the client
“ODUK-2-AIS-PM” alarm on page 2-187 for the client
“ODUK-3-AIS-PM” alarm on page 2-188 for the client
“ODUK-4-AIS-PM” alarm on page 2-188 for the client
On the MXP_MR_10G, the local client raises SQUELCHED if the upstream client detects one of the following alarms. Note that no corresponding local alarm is raised to indicate which of these conditions is present upstream.
• LOS for the clients including
“LOS (2R)” alarm on page 2-147 ,
“LOS (ESCON)” alarm on page 2-151
, and
“LOS (ISC)” alarm on page 2-152
• CARLOSS for the clients including
“CARLOSS (FC)” alarm on page 2-58 ,
“CARLOSS (GE)” alarm on page 2-61 , and “CARLOSS (ISC)” alarm on page 2-61
The local client raises SQUELCHED if the local trunk raises one of the following alarms:
•
•
•
“OTUK-LOF” alarm on page 2-199
for the trunk
“OTUK-AIS” alarm on page 2-197 for the trunk
“LOS (TRUNK)” alarm on page 2-156
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-229
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.323 SQM
•
•
“OTUK-TIM” alarm on page 2-200 squelching enabled, for the trunk
“ODUK-AIS-PM” alarm on page 2-188
for the trunk
“ODUK-LCK-PM” alarm on page 2-189 for the trunk
•
•
•
•
“ODUK-TIM-PM” alarm on page 2-191
with squelching enabled, for the trunk
“TIM” alarm on page 2-242 with squelching enabled, for OC-N
“LOF (OCN)” alarm on page 2-143
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153
•
•
•
When troubleshooting the SQUELCHED condition locally, look for failures progressing upstream in the following order. (If you are troubleshooting this alarm remotely, reverse the order of progress.)
• Local client alarms, as above
•
•
“CARLOSS (TRUNK)” alarm on page 2-63
“WVL-MISMATCH” alarm on page 2-256 for the client or trunk
Local trunk alarms, as above
Remote (upstream) client Rx alarms, as above
Note Note: If you see a SQUELCHED condition on the trunk, this can only be caused by a transponder (TXP) card.
Clear the SQUELCHED Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the object is reported against any object besides ESCON, determine whether the remote node and local node reports and LOF or the LOS alarm (for the client trunk, as listed above). If it does, turn to the relevant section in this chapter and complete the troubleshooting procedure.
If no LOF or LOS is reported, determine whether any other listed remote node or local node conditions as listed above has occurred. If so, turn to the relevant section of this chapter and complete the troubleshooting procedure.
If none of these alarms is reported, determine whether the local port reporting the SQUELCHED condition is in loopback. (You will see LPBKFACILITY OR LPBKTERMINAL in the condition window for this port.) If it is in loopback, complete the following steps: a.
b.
Double-click the client card to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tabs.
c.
If the port Admin State column says OOS,MT or OOS,DSBLD, click the cell to highlight it and choose IS from the drop-down list. Changing the state to IS also clears any loopback provisioned on the port.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.323 SQM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
2-230
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.324 SSM-DUS
• Logical Object: STSTRM, VT-TERM
The Sequence Mismatch alarm is a virtual concatenated (VCAT) member alarm. (VCAT member circuits are independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into a higher-rate signal.) The alarm occurs when the expected sequence numbers of VCAT members do not match the received sequence numbers.
Clear the SQM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
For the errored circuit, complete the “Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
.
Recreate the circuit using the procedure in the “Manage Circuits” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels.”
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.324 SSM-DUS
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, OCN, TRUNK
The Synchronization Status (SSM) Message Quality Changed to Do Not Use (DUS) condition occurs when the synchronization status message (SSM) quality level degrades to DUS or is manually changed to DUS.
The signal is often manually changed to DUS to prevent timing loops from occurring. Sending a DUS prevents the timing from being reused in a loop. The DUS signal can also be sent for line maintenance testing.
Note SSM-DUS is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.325 SSM-FAIL
• Single Failure Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA); Double Failure
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Failed alarm occurs when the synchronization status messaging received by the ONS 15454 fails. The problem is external to ONS 15454. The ONS 15454 is set up to receive SSM, but the timing source is not delivering valid SSM messages.
Clear the SSM-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Verify that SSM is enabled on the external timing source.
If timing is enabled, use an optical test set to determine that the external timing source is delivering SSM.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-231
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.326 SSM-LNC
Step 3 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.326 SSM-LNC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The SSM Local Node Clock (LNC) Traceable condition occurs when the SSM (S1) byte of the SONET overhead multiplexing section has been changed to signify that the line or BITS timing source is the
LNC.
Note SSM-LNC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.327 SSM-OFF
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Off condition applies to references used for timing the node. It occurs when the SSM for the reference has been turned off. The ONS system is set up to receive SSM, but the timing source is not delivering SSM messages.
Clear the SSM-OFF Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the SSM-FAIL Alarm” procedure on page 2-231
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.328 SSM-PRC
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: TRUNK
The SSM Primary Reference Clock (PRC) Traceable condition occurs when the SONET transmission level is changed to PRC.
Note SSM-PRC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2-232
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.329 SSM-PRS
2.8.329 SSM-PRS
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Primary Reference Source (PRS) Traceable condition occurs when the SSM transmission level is changed to Stratum 1 Traceable.
Note SSM-PRS is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.330 SSM-RES
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Reserved (RES) For Network Synchronization Use condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level is changed to RES.
Note SSM-RES is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.331 SSM-SDN-TN
The SSM-SDN-TN condition is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.332 SSM-SETS
The SSM-SETS condition is not used in this platform in this release. It is reserved for future development.
2.8.333 SSM-SMC
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM SONET Minimum Clock (SMC) Traceable condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level changes to SMC. The login node does not use the clock because the node cannot use any reference beneath its internal level, which is ST3.
Note SSM-SMC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-233
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.334 SSM-ST2
2.8.334 SSM-ST2
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Stratum 2 (ST2) Traceable condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level is changed to ST2.
Note SSM-ST2 is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.335 SSM-ST3
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Stratum 3 (ST3) Traceable condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level is changed to ST3.
Note SSM-ST3 is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.336 SSM-ST3E
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Stratum 3E (ST3E) Traceable condition indicates that the synchronization message quality level is changed to ST3E from a lower level of synchronization. SSM-ST3E is a Generation 2 SSM and is used for Generation 1.
Note SSM-ST3E is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.337 SSM-ST4
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Stratum 4 (ST4) Traceable condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level is lowered to ST4. The message quality is not used because it is below ST3.
Note SSM-ST4 is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2-234
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.338 SSM-STU
2.8.338 SSM-STU
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Synchronization Traceability Unknown (STU) condition occurs when the reporting node is timed to a reference that does not support SSM, but the ONS 15454 has SSM support enabled. STU can also occur if the timing source is sending out SSM messages but SSM is not enabled on the ONS 15454.
Clear the SSM-STU Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.
Complete one of the following depending upon the status of the Sync Messaging Enabled check box:
•
•
If the Sync Messaging Enabled check box for the BITS source is checked, uncheck the box.
If the Sync Messaging Enabled check box for the BITS source is not checked, check the box.
Click Apply .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.339 SSM-TNC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: BITS, DS1, NE-SREF, OCN, TRUNK
The SSM Transit Node Clock (TNC) Traceable condition occurs when the synchronization message quality level is changed to TNC.
Note SSM-TNC is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.340 SWMTXMOD
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: EQPT
The Switching Matrix Module Failure alarm occurs on cross-connect cards and traffic cards. If the alarm reports against a traffic card, it occurs when the logic component on the cross-connect card is out of frame (OOF) with the logic component on the reporting traffic card. All traffic on the reporting traffic card is lost.
If the alarm reports against a cross-connect card, it occurs when a logic component internal to the reporting cross-connect card is OOF with a second logic component on the same cross-connect card. One or more traffic cards could lose traffic as a result of the cross-connect frame failure.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-235
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.340 SWMTXMOD
In R5.0, the alarm initiates an autonomous switch in 1+1, 1:1, 1:N, path protection, and BLSR protection schemes if it is raised on the following I/O cards: DS-1, DS3-E, DS3-CR, OC-12, OC-48 IR, and OC-48
ELR. The switching time is greater than 60 milliseconds and typically lasts approximately
500 milliseconds.
If the alarm is raised against active XCVT card, an autonomous switch to the standby XCVT occurs under the following circumstances:
• The standby XCVT does not have an SWMTXMOD alarm active.
• No lockout condition is present on the XCVT card.
If the standby XCVT does has an active SWMTXMOD alarm, the cross-connect switch request from
CTC or TL1 is denied.
Clear the SWMTXMOD Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
If the card reporting the alarm is the standby cross-connect card, complete the
for the card. For the LED behavior, see the
LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the standby cross-connect card.
Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Cards” procedure on page 2-269 .
Note After the active cross-connect card goes into standby mode, the original standby slot becomes active. The former standby card ACT/SBY LED becomes green.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
If the card reporting the alarm is not the active cross-connect card or if you completed the side switch in
, complete the “Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258
.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the standby cross-connect card.
If the card reporting the alarm is a traffic card, complete the
“Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G
Cross-Connect Cards” procedure on page 2-269
.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Reset a Traffic Card in CTC” procedure on page 2-268
for the reporting card. For the LED behavior, see the
“2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. A green
ACT/SBY LED indicates an active card. An amber ACT/SBY LED indicates a standby card.
If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card” procedure on page 2-270
for the traffic line card.
2-236
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.341 SWTOPRI
Step 12 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.341 SWTOPRI
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Synchronization Switch to Primary Reference condition occurs when the ONS 15454 switches to the primary timing source (reference 1). The ONS 15454 uses three ranked timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference.
Note SWTOPRI is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.342 SWTOSEC
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Synchronization Switch to Secondary Reference condition occurs when the ONS 15454 has switched to the secondary timing source (reference 2). The ONS 15454 uses three ranked timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference.
Clear the SWTOSEC Condition
Step 1
Step 2
To clear the condition, clear alarms related to failures of the primary source, such as the
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.343 SWTOTHIRD
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
The Synchronization Switch to Third Reference condition occurs when the ONS 15454 has switched to the third timing source (reference 3). The ONS 15454 uses three ranked timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-237
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.344 SYNC-FREQ
Clear the SWTOTHIRD Condition
Step 1
Step 2
To clear the condition, clear alarms related to failures of the primary source, such as the
“SYNCPRI” alarm on page 2-239 or the
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.344 SYNC-FREQ
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: BITS, OCN, TRUNK
The Synchronization Reference Frequency Out of Bounds condition is reported against any reference that is out of the bounds for valid references. The login node fails the reference and chooses another internal or external reference to use.
Clear the SYNC-FREQ Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Use an optical test set to verify the timing frequency of the line or BITS timing source and ensure that it falls within the proper frequency.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
For BITS, the proper timing frequency range is approximately –15 PPM to 15 PPM. For optical line timing, the proper frequency range is approximately –16 PPM to 16 PPM.
for the TCC2/TCC2P.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Note It takes up to 30 minutes for the TCC2/TCC2P to transfer the system software to the newly installed TCC2/TCC2P. Software transfer occurs in instances where different software versions exist on the two cards. When the transfer completes, the active TCC2/TCC2P reboots and goes into standby mode after approximately three minutes.
Step 3 If the SYNC-FREQ condition continues to report after replacing the TCC2/TCC2P card, log into the
Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447).
2.8.345 SYNCLOSS
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
2-238
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.346 SYNCPRI
• Logical Objects: FC, FCMR, GE, ISC, TRUNK
The Loss of Synchronization on Data Interface alarm is raised on FC_MR-4 cards when there is a loss of signal synchronization on the client port. This alarm can raise on the FC_MR-4 local port when the port is put into terminal loopback state (LPBKTERMINAL).This alarm is demoted by the SIGLOSS alarm.
Clear the SYNCLOSS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Ensure that the fibre channel data port connection at the near-end card port of the SONET link is operational.
Verify fiber continuity to the port. To do this follow site practices.
View the FC_MR-4 physical port LED to determine whether the alarm has cleared.
If the port LED to determine the card’s status:
•
•
If the is green, the alarm has cleared.
If the port LED is clear (that is, not illuminated green), the link is not connected and the alarm has not cleared.
• If the LED is red, this indicates that the fiber is pulled.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.346 SYNCPRI
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for EXT-SREF; Major (MJ),
Service-Affecting (SA) for NE-SREF
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF •
A Loss of Timing on Primary Reference alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses the primary timing source (reference 1). The ONS 15454 uses three ranking timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference. If SYNCPRI occurs, the
ONS 15454 should switch to its secondary timing source (reference 2). Switching to the secondary timing source also triggers the
.
Clear the SYNCPRI Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.
Verify the current configuration for the REF-1 of the NE Reference.
If the primary timing reference is a BITS input, complete the
“Clear the LOS (BITS) Alarm” procedure on page 2-148 .
If the primary reference clock is an incoming port on the ONS 15454, complete the
(OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-153
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-239
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.347 SYNCSEC
Step 5 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.347 SYNCSEC
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
A Loss of Timing on Secondary Reference alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses the secondary timing source (reference 2). The ONS 15454 uses three ranked timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference. If SYNCSEC occurs, the
ONS 15454 should switch to the third timing source (reference 3) to obtain valid timing for the
ONS 15454. Switching to the third timing source also triggers the “SWTOTHIRD” alarm on page 2-237
.
Clear the SYNCSEC Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.
Verify the current configuration of the REF-2 for the NE Reference.
If the second reference is a BITS input, complete the
“Clear the LOS (BITS) Alarm” procedure on page 2-148
.
Verify that the BITS clock is operating properly.
If the secondary timing source is an incoming port on the ONS 15454, complete the
(OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-153 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.348 SYNCTHIRD
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: EXT-SREF, NE-SREF
A Loss of Timing on Third Reference alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses the third timing source
(reference 3). The ONS 15454 uses three ranking timing references. The timing references are typically two BITS-level or line-level sources and an internal reference. If SYNCTHIRD occurs and the
ONS 15454 uses an internal reference for source three, the TCC2/TCC2P card might have failed. The
ONS 15454 often reports either the
“FRNGSYNC” condition on page 2-112
or the
“HLDOVRSYNC” condition on page 2-125
after a SYNCTHIRD alarm.
Clear the SYNCTHIRD Alarm
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.
2-240
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.349 SYSBOOT
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Verify that the current configuration of the REF-3 for the NE Reference. For more information about references, refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapter 9, “Security and Timing.”
If the third timing source is a BITS input, complete the
“Clear the LOS (BITS) Alarm” procedure on page 2-148
.
If the third timing source is an incoming port on the ONS 15454, complete the
Alarm” procedure on page 2-153
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 5
Step 6
If the third timing source uses the internal ONS 15454 timing, complete the
TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card” procedure on page 2-268 .
Wait ten minutes to verify that the card you reset completely reboots and becomes the standby card.
If the reset card has not rebooted successfully, or the alarm has not cleared, call Cisco TAC
(1 800 553-2447). If the Cisco TAC technician tells you to reseat the card, complete
Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card” procedure on page 2-270 . If the Cisco TAC
technician tells you to remove the card and reinstall a new one, follow the
Card” procedure on page 2-271 .
2.8.349 SYSBOOT
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: NE
The System Reboot alarm indicates that new software is booting on the TCC2/TCC2P card. No action is required. The alarm clears when all cards finish rebooting the new software.The reboot takes up to
30 minutes.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
Note SYSBOOT is an informational alarm. It only requires troubleshooting if it does not clear.
2.8.350 TEMP-MISM
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Object: NE
Temperature Reading Mismatch Between Control Cards is raised when the temperature readings on the two TCC2/TCC2Ps are out of range of each other by more than some predefined difference (such as 5 degrees C). A message containing power monitoring and temperature information is exchanged between the two TCC2/TCC2Ps, allowing the values to be compared. The temperature of each TCC2/TCC2P is read from a system variable.
This condition can be caused by a clogged fan filter or by fan tray stoppage.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-241
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.351 TIM
Clear the TEMP-MISM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the “Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter” procedure on page 2-275 .
If the condition does not clear, complete the
“Remove and Reinsert a Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 2-277
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.351 TIM
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: OCN, TRUNK
The Section TIM alarm occurs when the expected J0 section trace string does not match the received section trace string.
If the alarm occurs on a port that has been operating with no alarms, the circuit path has changed or someone entered a new incorrect value into the Current Transmit String field. Follow the procedure below to clear either instance.
TIM occurs on a port that has previously been operating without alarms if someone switches optical fibers that connect the ports. TIM is usually accompanied by other alarms, such as the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 or the
. If these alarms accompany TIM, reattach or replace the original cables/fibers to clear the alarms. If a Transmit or Expected String was changed, restore the original string.
Clear the TIM Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into the circuit source node and click the Circuits tab.
Select the circuit reporting the condition, then click Edit .
In the Edit Circuit window, check the Show Detailed Map box.
On the detailed circuit map, right-click the source circuit port and choose Edit J0 Path Trace (port) from the shortcut menu.
Compare the Current Transmit String and the Current Expected String entries in the Edit J0 Path Trace dialog box.
If the strings differ, correct the Transmit or Expected strings and click Apply .
Click Close .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem if necessary.
2-242
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.352 TIM-MON
2.8.352 TIM-MON
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: OCN, TRUNK
The TIM Section Monitor Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm is similar to the
, but it applies to TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and
MXP_2.5G_10G cards when they are configured in transparent mode. (In transparent termination mode, all SONET overhead bytes are passed through from client ports to the trunk ports or vice versa.)
Clear the TIM-MON Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the TIM-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-243 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.353 TIM-P
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA) for STSTRM; Default Severity: Minor
(MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA) for STSMON
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
The TIM Path alarm occurs when the expected path trace string does not match the received path trace string. Path Trace Mode must be set to Manual or Auto for the TIM-P alarm to occur.
In manual mode at the Path Trace window, the user types the expected string into the Current Expected
String field for the receiving port. The string must match the string typed into the Transmit String field for the sending port. If these fields do not match, the login node raises the TIM-P alarm. In Auto mode on the receiving port, the card sets the expected string to the value of the received string. If the alarm occurs on a port that has been operating with no alarms, the circuit path has changed or someone entered a new incorrect value into the Current Transmit String field. Complete the following procedure to clear either instance.
TIM-P also occurs on a port that has previously been operating without alarms if someone switches or removes the DS-3 cables or optical fibers that connect the ports. TIM-P is usually accompanied by other alarms, such as the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , the
, or the
“PLM-P” alarm on page 2-204 . If these alarms accompany TIM-P, reattach or replace the original
cables/fibers to clear the alarms.
Clear the TIM-P Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the TIM Alarm” procedure on page 2-242 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447). If the alarm applies to the STSTRM object, it is service-affecting.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-243
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.354 TIM-V
2.8.354 TIM-V
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: VT-TERM
The VT Path Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm is raised on VT terminations when the the J2 path trace is enabled and is mismatched with the expected trace string.
Clear the TIM-V Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the TIM Alarm” procedure on page 2-242
.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.355 TPTFAIL (CE100T)
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: CE100T
The Transport (TPT) Layer Failure alarm for the CE-100T-8 card indicates a break in the end-to-end
Ethernet link integrity feature of the ONS 15454 CE-100T-8 card. TPTFAIL indicates a remote-node condition and not a problem with the port reporting TPTFAIL.
Clear the TPTFAIL (CE100T) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the TPTFAIL (G1000) Alarm” procedure on page 2-245 .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.356 TPTFAIL (FCMR)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: FCMR
The Transport Fail alarm is raised against a local Fibre Channel (FC) port on an FC_MR-4 card when the port receives another SONET error such as AIS-P, LOP-P, UNEQ-P, PLM-P, TIM-P, LOM (for VCAT only), or SQM (for VCAT only).
This TPTFAIL can be raised against Fibre Channel cards if the remote FC card port is down from
SIGLOSS or SYNCLOSS. In that case, the remote FC card port sends a PDI-P error code in the SONET
C2 byte and signals the local FC port transmitter to turn off (thus causing the local FC port to raise the
TPTFAIL alarm). A TPTFAIL can also be raised when a remote-node Rx fiber is pulled. This alarm can be demoted when a facility loopback is placed on the FC_MR-4 port.
2-244
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.357 TPTFAIL (G1000)
Clear the TPTFAIL (FCMR) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Find and clear any path alarms applying to the port. Refer to the correct section of this chapter for trouble clearing instructions. Clearing the path alarm also clears the TPTFAIL.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.357 TPTFAIL (G1000)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Object: G1000
The Transport Layer Failure alarm for the G-Series Ethernet cards indicates a break in the end-to-end
Ethernet link integrity feature of the ONS 15454 G1000-4 cards. TPTFAIL indicates a remote-node condition and not a problem with the port reporting TPTFAIL.
The TPTFAIL alarm indicates a problem on either the SONET path or the remote Ethernet port that prevents the complete end-to-end Ethernet path from working. If any SONET path alarms such as the
, the
, the “PDI-P” alarm on page 2-201 , or
the “UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249
exist on the SONET path used by the Ethernet port, the affected port causes a TPTFAIL alarm. Also, if the remote-node G1000-4 port Ethernet port is administratively disabled or it is reporting the
“CARLOSS (G1000)” alarm on page 2-58 , the C2 byte in the SONET path
overhead indicates the
“PDI-P” alarm on page 2-201 , which in turn causes a TPTFAIL to be reported
against the local port.
When a TPTFAIL alarm occurs, the local port is automatically disabled (transmit laser turned off). In turn, the laser shutoff can also cause the external Ethernet device attached at the local node to detect a link down and turn off its transmitter. This also causes a CARLOSS alarm to occur on the reporting port.
In all cases, the source problem is either in the SONET path being used by the G1000-4 port or the far- end G1000-4 port to which it is mapped.
An occurrence of TPTFAIL on an ONS 15454 G1000-4 port indicates either a problem with the SONET path that the port is using or with the remote-node G1000-4 port that is mapped to the port.
Clear the TPTFAIL (G1000) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Clear any alarms being reported by the OC-N card on the G1000-4 circuit.
If no alarms are reported by the OC-N card, or if the
“PDI-P” condition on page 2-201 is reported, the
problem could be on the remote-node G1000-4 port. Clear any alarms, such as CARLOSS, reported against the remote-node port or card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.358 TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000)
• Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-245
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.359 TRMT
• Logical Objects: ML100T, ML1000
The TPT Layer Failure alarm for the ML-Series Ethernet cards indicates a break in the end-to-end packet-over-SONET (POS) link integrity feature of the ML-Series POS cards. TPTFAIL indicates a remote-node condition or misconfiguration of the POS port.
The TPTFAIL alarm indicates a problem on the SONET path, a problem on the remote POS port, or a misconfiguration of the POS port that prevents the complete end-to-end POS path from working. If any
SONET path alarms such as the “AIS-P” condition on page 2-31 , the
, the
“PDI-P” condition on page 2-201 , or the
“UNEQ-P” alarm on page 2-249 exist on the circuit used by the
POS port, the affected port could report a TPTFAIL alarm. If the remote-node ML POS port is administratively disabled, it inserts an
“AIS-P” condition on page 2-31 that is detected by the local port.
The local port could report TPTFAIL in this event. If the POS port is misconfigured at the Cisco IOS
CLI level, the misconfiguration causes the port to go down and report TPTFAIL.
Note For more information about the ML-Series Ethernet cards, refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software
Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Clear the TPTFAIL (ML100T, ML1000) Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If there are no SONET alarms reported against the POS port circuit, verify that both POS ports are properly configured. Refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 for configuration information.
If the
is the only one reported against the POS port circuit, verify that both POS ports are properly configured. Refer to the <I_Ital>Ethernet Card Software Feature and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327 for configuration information.
If the
“PDI-P” condition on page 2-201
is the only one reported against the POS port circuit and the circuit is terminated by a G-Series card, determine whether a
“CARLOSS (G1000)” alarm on page 2-58
is reported against the G-Series card, and if so, complete the
“Clear the CARLOSS (G1000) Alarm” procedure on page 2-59 .
If the
“AIS-P” alarm on page 2-31 , the
, or the
is present, clear those alarms using the procedures in those sections.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.359 TRMT
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS1
A Missing Transmitter alarm occurs when there is a transmit failure on the ONS 15454 DS-1 card because of an internal hardware failure. The card must be replaced.
2-246
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.360 TRMT-MISS
Clear the TRMT Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the reporting DS-1 card.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.360 TRMT-MISS
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: DS1
A Facility Termination Equipment Transmitter Missing alarm occurs when the facility termination equipment detects an incorrect amount of impedance on its backplane connector. Incorrect impedance is detected when a transmit cable is missing on the DS-1 port or the backplane does not match the inserted card. For example, an SMB connector or a BNC connector might be connected to a DS-1 card instead of a DS-3 card.
Note DS-1s are four-wire circuits and need a positive and negative connection for both transmit and receive.
Clear the TRMT-MISS Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Verify that the device attached to the DS-1 port is operational.
If the device is operational, verify that the cabling is securely connected.
If the cabling is secure, verify that the pinouts are correct.
If the pinouts are correct, replace the transmit cable.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.361 TX-AIS
• Default Severity: Not Reported (NR), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-247
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.362 TX-RAI
• Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
The (TX) Transmit Direction AIS condition is raised by the ONS 15454 backplane when it receives a remote-node DS-1 LOS.
Clear the TX-AIS Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Determine whether there are alarms on the downstream nodes and equipment, especially the
(OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , or OOS ports.
Clear the downstream alarms using the applicable procedures in this chapter.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.362 TX-RAI
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: DS1, DS3
The Transmit Direction RAI condition is transmitted by the backplane when it receives a DS-1 TX-AIS.
This alarm is raised only at the transmit side, but RAI is raised at both ends.
Clear the TX-RAI Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the TX-AIS Condition” procedure on page 2-248 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.363 UNC-WORD
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Uncorrected FEC Word condition indicates that the forward error correction (FEC) capability could not sufficiently correct the frame.
FEC allows the system to tolerate a 7- to 8-dBm reduction in signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Clear the UNC-WORD Condition
Step 1
Complete the “Clear the SD-L Condition” procedure on page 2-220
.
2-248
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.364 UNEQ-P
Step 2 If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.364 UNEQ-P
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: STSMON, STSTRM
An SLMF UNEQ Path alarm occurs when the path does not have a valid sender. The UNEQ-P indicator is carried in the C2 signal path byte in the SONET overhead. The source of the problem is the node that is transmitting the signal into the node reporting the UNEQ-P.
The alarm could result from a PARTIAL circuit or an empty VT tunnel. UNEQ-P occurs in the node that terminates a path.
Note
is reported on the terminating cards. These alarms clear when the circuit carries a signal.
Caution Deleting a circuit affects traffic.
Clear the UNEQ-P Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
Right-click the alarm to display the Select Affected Circuits shortcut menu.
Click Select Affected Circuits .
When the affected circuits appear, look in the Type column for VTT, which indicates a VT tunnel circuit.
A VT tunnel with no VTs assigned could be the cause of an UNEQ-P alarm.
If the Type column does not contain VTT, there are no VT tunnels connected with the alarm. Go to
If the Type column does contain VTT, attempt to delete these row(s):
Note The node does not allow you to delete a valid VT tunnel or one with a valid VT circuit inside.
Step 7 a.
Click the VT tunnel circuit row to highlight it. Complete the
“Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
.
If an error message dialog box appears, the VT tunnel is valid and not the cause of the alarm.
b.
c.
If any other rows contain VTT, repeat
If all nodes in the ring appear in the CTC network view, determine whether the circuits are complete: a.
b.
Click the Circuits tab.
Verify that PARTIAL is not listed in the Status column of any circuits.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-249
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.364 UNEQ-P
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
If you find circuits listed as PARTIAL, use an optical test set to verify that these circuits are not working circuits that continue to pass traffic.
For specific procedures to use the test set equipment, consult the manufacturer.
If the PARTIAL circuits are not needed or are not passing traffic, delete the PARTIAL circuits.
Complete the “Delete a Circuit” procedure on page 2-272
.
Recreate the circuit with the correct circuit size. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter
6, “Create Circuits and Tunnels.”
Log back in and verify that all circuits terminating in the reporting card are active: a.
Click the Circuits tab.
b.
Verify that the Status column lists all circuits as active.
If the alarm does not clear, clean the remote-node optical fiber according to site practice. If no site practice exists, complete the procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 13 If the alarm does not clear, complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the OC-N and DS-N cards.
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Note When you replace a card with an identical type of card, you do not need to make any changes to the database.
2-250
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.365 UNEQ-V
Step 14 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.365 UNEQ-V
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: VT-MON, VT-TERM
An SLMF UNEQ VT alarm indicates that the node is receiving SONET path overhead with Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 overhead byte all set to zeroes. The source of the problem is the node that is transmitting the VT-level signal into the node reporting the UNEQ-V. The problem node is the next node upstream that processes the signal at the VT level. The V in UNEQ-V indicates that the failure has occurred at the
VT layer.
Warning On the OC-192 card, the laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position
(labeled 1). The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off (labeled 0). Statement 293 .
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Clear the UNEQ-V Alarm
Step 1 Complete the
“Clear the UNEQ-P Alarm” procedure on page 2-249
.
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 2 If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.366 UNREACHABLE-TARGET-POWER
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: OCH
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-251
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.367 UT-COMM-FAIL
The Unreachable Port Target Power alarm occurs on WSS32 cards during startup as the card laser attains its correct power level. The condition disappears when the card successfully boots.
Note UNREACHABLE-TARGET-POWER is an informational condition. It only requires troubleshooting if it does not clear.
2.8.367 UT-COMM-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Universal Transponder (UT) Module Communication Failure alarm is raised on MXP_2.5G_10E and TXP_MR_10E cards when there is a universal transponder communication failure because the UT has stopped responding to the TCC2/TCC2P.
Clear the UT-COMM-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Double-click the card to display the card view.
Request a laser restart: a.
b.
Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Check the Request Laser Restart check box.
c.
Click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.368 UT-FAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Universal Transponder Module Hardware Failure alarm is raised against MXP_2.5G_10E and
TXP_MR_10E cards when a UT-COMM-FAIL alarm persists despite being reset.
Clear the UT-FAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the alarmed card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2-252
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.369 VCG-DEG
2.8.369 VCG-DEG
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: VCG
The VCAT Group Degraded alarm is a VCAT group alarm. (VCATs are groups of independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into higher-rate signals.) The alarm occurs when one member circuit carried by the ML-Series Ethernet card is down. This alarm is accompanied by the
“OOU-TPT” alarm on page 2-192 . It only occurs when a critical alarm, such as LOS, causes a signal
loss.
Clear the VCG-DEG Condition
Step 1
Step 2
or
“LOS (OTS)” alarm on page 2-155 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.370 VCG-DOWN
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: VCG
The VCAT Group Down alarm is a VCAT group alarm. (VCATs are groups of independent circuits that are concatenated from different time slots into higher-rate signals.) The alarm occurs when both member circuits carried by the ML-Series Ethernet card are down. This alarm occurs in conjunction with another critical alarm, such as the
“LOS (2R)” alarm on page 2-147
.
Clear the VCG-DOWN Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Clear the VCG-DEG Condition” procedure on page 2-253 .
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.371 VOA-HDEG
• Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The VOA High Degrade alarm is raised on DWDM cards when an equipped VOA exceeds the setpoint due to an internal problem. The alarm indicates that the attenuation has crossed the high degrade threshold. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-253
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.372 VOA-HFAIL
Clear the VOA-HDEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the alarmed card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.372 VOA-HFAIL
• Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
• Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The VOA High Fail alarm is raised on DWDM cards when an equipped VOA exceeds the setpoint due to an internal problem. The alarm indicates that the attenuation has crossed the high fail threshold. The card must be replaced.
Clear the VOA-HFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the alarmed card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.373 VOA-LDEG
•
•
Default Severity: Minor (MN), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The VOA Low Degrade alarm is raised on DWDM cards when an equipped VOA does not reach the setpoint due to an internal problem. The alarm indicates that the attenuation has crossed the low degrade threshold. The alarmed card should be replaced at the next opportunity.
Clear the VOA-LDEG Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271 for the alarmed card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2-254
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.374 VOA-LFAIL
2.8.374 VOA-LFAIL
•
•
Default Severity: Critical (CR), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Objects: AOTS, OCH, OMS, OTS
The VOA Low Fail alarm is raised on DWDM cards when an equipped VOA does not reach the setpoint due to an internal problem. The alarm indicates that the attenuation has crossed the low fail threshold.
The card must be replaced.
Clear the VOA-LFAIL Alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the
“Physically Replace a Traffic Card” procedure on page 2-271
for the alarmed card.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.8.375 VOLT-MISM
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Object: PWR
The Power Monitoring Mismatch Between Control Cards alarm is raised against the shelf when the power voltages of both TCC2/TCC2Ps are out of range of each other by more than 5Vdc.
Clear the VOLT-MISM Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Check the incoming voltage level to the shelf using a voltmeter. Follow site practices or consult the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 1, “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable,” for power installation procedures.
Correct any incoming voltage issues.
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.376 WKSWPR
•
•
Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
Logical Objects: 2R, EQPT, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, STSMON, TRUNK, VT-MON
The Working Switched To Protection condition occurs when a line experiences the
“LOS (OCN)” alarm on page 2-153 , the
“SD (DS1, DS3)” condition on page 2-217 , or the
“SD (TRUNK)” condition on page 2-219
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-255
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.8.377 WTR
Clear the WKSWPR Condition
Step 1
Step 2
Complete the “Clear the LOS (OCN) Alarm” procedure on page 2-153
.
If the condition does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
2.8.377 WTR
• Default Severity: Not Alarmed (NA), Non-Service Affecting (NSA)
• Logical Objects: 2R, EQPT, ESCON, FC, GE, ISC, OCN, STSMON, TRUNK, VT-MON
The Wait To Restore condition occurs when the
“WKSWPR” condition on page 2-255 is raised, but the
wait-to-restore time has not expired, meaning that the active protect path cannot revert to the working path. The condition clears when the timer expires and traffic is switched back to the working path.
Caution DS-1 traffic loss can occur on a DS-1 with 1:N protection if a DS-1 card is reset with the protect card in the WTR state.
Note WTR is an informational condition and does not require troubleshooting.
2.8.378 WVL-MISMATCH
•
•
Default Severity: Major (MJ), Service-Affecting (SA)
Logical Object: TRUNK
The Equipment Wavelength Mismatch alarm applies to the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10G cards. It occurs when you provision the card in
CTC with a wavelength that the card does not support.
Clear the WVL-MISMATCH alarm
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or
MXP_2.5G_10G card to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
In the Wavelength field, view the provisioned card wavelength.
If you have access to the site, compare the wavelength listed on the card faceplate with the provisioned wavelength. If you are remote, compare this wavelength with the card identification in the inventory: a.
In node view, click the Inventory tab.
b.
Locate the slot where the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, or
MXP_2.5G_10G card is installed and view the card wavelength in the name.
2-256
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.9 DWDM Card LED Activity
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
If the card was provisioned for the wrong wavelength, double-click the card in node view to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
In the Wavelength field, click the drop-down list and choose the correct wavelength.
Click Apply .
If the alarm does not clear, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport for more information or call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) in order to report a service-affecting problem.
2.9 DWDM Card LED Activity
ONS 15454 DWDM card LED activity differs from typical traffic card LED activity. The following sections list the DWDM card LED sequences during card insertion and reset.
2.9.1 DWDM Card LED Activity After Insertion
When an DWDM card is inserted in the shelf, the following LED activities occur:
1.
The FAIL LED illuminates for approximately 35 seconds.
2.
3.
4.
The FAIL LED blinks for approximately 40 seconds.
All LEDs illuminate and then turn off within 5 seconds.
5.
6.
If new software is being downloaded to the card, the ACT and SF LEDs blink for 20 seconds to
3.5 minutes, depending on the card type.
The ACT LED illuminates.
The SF LED stays illuminated until all card ports connect to their remote-node counterparts and a signal is present.
2.9.2 DWDM Card LED Activity During Reset
When an DWDM card resets (by software or hardware), the following LED activities occur:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The FAIL LED switches on for few seconds.
The FAIL LED on the physical card blinks and turns off.
The white LED with the letters “LDG” appears on the reset card in CTC.
The green ACT LED appears in CTC.
2.10 Traffic Card LED Activity
ONS 15454 traffic card LED behavior patterns are listed in the following sections. These sections give behavior for card insertion, reset, and side-switch.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-257
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.10.1 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity After Insertion
2.10.1 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity After Insertion
When a non-DWDM card is inserted, the following LED activities occur:
1.
The red FAIL LED turns on and remains illuminated for 20 to 30 seconds.
2.
3.
4.
The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.
All LEDs blink once and turn off for 5 to 10 seconds.
The ACT or ACT/SBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect to their remote-node counterparts and a signal is present.
2.10.2 Typical Traffic Card LED Activity During Reset
While a non-DWDM card resets, the following LED activities occur:
1.
2.
3.
The FAIL LED on the physical card blinks and turns off.
The white LED with the letters “LDG” appears on the reset card in CTC.
The green ACT LED appears in CTC.
2.10.3 Typical Card LED State After Successful Reset
When a non-DWDM card successfully resets, the following LED states are present:
•
•
If you are looking at the physical ONS 15454, the ACT/SBY LED is illuminated.
If you are looking at node view of the ONS 15454, the current standby card has an amber LED depiction with the initials “SBY,” and this has replaced the white “LDG” depiction on the card in
CTC.
• If you are looking at node view of the ONS 15454, the current active card has a green LED depiction with the initials “ACT,” and this has replaced the white “LDG” depiction on the card in CTC.
2.10.4 Typical Cross-Connect LED Activity During Side Switch
While an XC10G cross-connect card is switched in CTC from active (ACT) to standby (SBY) or vice versa, the following LED activities occur:
1.
2.
3.
The FAIL LED on the physical card blinks and turns off.
The standby card yellow SBY LED becomes a green ACT LED, indicating it is now active.
The active card green ACT LED becomes a yellow SBY LED, indicating it is now standby.
2.11 Frequently Used Alarm Troubleshooting Procedures
This section gives common procedures that are frequently used when troubleshooting alarms. Most of these procedures are summarized versions of fuller procedures existing elsewhere in the ONS 15454 documentation. They are included in this chapter for the user’s convenience. For further information, please refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
2-258
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.1 Node and Ring Identification, Change, Visibility, and Termination
2.11.1 Node and Ring Identification, Change, Visibility, and Termination
The following procedures relate how to identify or change BLSR names and node IDs, and how to verify visibility from other nodes.
Identify a BLSR Ring Name or Node ID Number
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, go to
.
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
From the Ring Name column, record the ring name, or in the Nodes column, record the Node IDs in the
BLSR. The Node IDs are the numbers in parentheses next to the node name.
Note For more information about ring or node traffic switching operations, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Change a BLSR Ring Name
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, go to
.
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Highlight the ring and click Edit .
In the BLSR window, enter the new name in the Ring Name field.
Click Apply .
Click Yes in the Changing Ring Name dialog box.
Change a BLSR Node ID Number
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, go to
.
In node view, click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Highlight the ring and click Edit .
In the BLSR window, right-click the node on the ring map.
Select Set Node ID from the shortcut menu.
In the Edit Node ID dialog box, enter the new ID. The Node ID is the number in parentheses after the
Node Name.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-259
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Step 8 Click OK .
Verify Node Visibility for Other Nodes
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
In node view, click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Highlight a BLSR.
Click Ring Map .
In the BLSR Ring Map window, verify that each node in the ring appears on the ring map with a node
ID and IP address.
Click Close .
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
The following sections give instructions for port, ring, and span switching and switch-clearing commands, as well as lock-ons and lockouts.
Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Force Switch Command
This procedure switches 1+1 protection group traffic from one port in the group to the other using a
Force switch.
Caution The Force command overrides normal protective switching mechanisms. Applying this command incorrectly can cause traffic outages.
Caution Traffic is not protected during a Force protection switch.
Note A Force command switches traffic on a working path even if the path has signal degrade (SD) or signal fail (SF) conditions. A Force switch does not switch traffic on a protect path. A Force switch preempts a Manual switch.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups area, select the protection group with the port you want to switch.
In the Selected Groups area, select the port belonging to the card you are replacing. You can carry out this command for the working or protect port. For example, if you need to replace the card with the
Protect/Standby port, click this port.
In the Switch Commands area, click Force .
Click Yes in the Confirm Force Operation dialog box.
2-260
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Step 6 If the switch is successful, the group says “Force to working” in the Selected Groups area.
Initiate a 1+1 Protection Port Manual Switch Command
This procedure switches 1+1 protection group traffic from one port in the group to the other using a
Manual switch.
Note A Manual command switches traffic if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade. A Manual switch is preempted by a Force switch.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups area, select the protection group with the port you want to switch.
In the Selected Groups area, select the port belonging to the card you are replacing. You can carry out this command for the working or protect port. For example, if you need to replace the card with the protect/standby port, click this port.
In the Switch Commands area, click Manual .
Click Yes in the Confirm Force Operation dialog box.
If the switch is successful, the group now says “Manual to working” in the Selected Groups area.
Clear a 1+1 Protection Port Force or Manual Switch Command
Note If the 1+1 protection group is configured as revertive, clearing a Force switch to protect (or working) moves traffic back to the working port. In revertive operation, the traffic always switches back to working. There is no revert to protect. If ports are not configured as revertive, clearing a Force switch to protect does not move traffic back.
Note If the Force Switch was user-initiated, the reversion occurs immediately when the clear command is issued. The five-minute WTR period is not needed in this case. If the Force was system-initiated, allow the five-minute waiting period (during WTR) before the reversion occurs.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups area, choose the protection group containing the port you want to clear.
In the Selected Group area, choose the port you want to clear.
In the Switching Commands area, click Clear .
Click Yes in the Confirmation Dialog box.
The Force switch is cleared. Traffic immediately reverts to the working port if the group was configured for revertive switching.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-261
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Initiate a Card or Port Lock On Command
Note For 1:1 and 1:N electrical protection groups, working or protect cards can be placed in the Lock On state.
For a 1+1 optical protection group, only the working port can be placed in the Lock On state.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups list, click the protection group where you want to apply a lock-on.
If you determine that the protect card is in standby mode and you want to apply the lock-on to the protect card, make the protect card active if necessary: a.
b.
In the Selected Group list, click the protect card.
In the Switch Commands area, click Force .
In the Selected Group list, click the active card where you want to lock traffic.
In the Inhibit Switching area, click Lock On .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Initiate a Card or Port Lock Out Command
Note For 1:1 or 1:N electrical protection groups, working or protect cards can be placed in the Lock Out state.
For a 1+1 optical protection group, only the protect port can be placed in the Lock Out state.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups list, click the protection group that contains the card you want to lockout.
In the Selected Group list, click the card you want to lock traffic out of.
In the Inhibit Switching area, click Lock Out .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The lockout has been applied and traffic is switched to the opposite card.
Clear a Card or Port Lock On or Lock Out Command
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
In the Protection Groups list, click the protection group that contains the card you want to clear.
In the Selected Group list, click the card you want to clear.
In the Inhibit Switching area, click Unlock .
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
2-262
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
The lock-on or lockout is cleared.
Initiate a 1:1 Card Switch Command
Note The Switch command only works on the Active card, whether it is Working or Protect. It does not work on the Standby card.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
Click the protection group that contains the card you want to switch.
Under Selected Group, click the active card.
Next to Switch Commands, click Switch .
The working slot should change to Working/Active and the protect slot should change to
Protect/Standby.
Initiate a Force Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
This procedure forces all circuits in a path protection from the working span to the protect. It is used to remove traffic from a card that originates or terminates path protection circuits.
Caution The Force command overrides normal protective switching mechanisms. Applying this command incorrectly can cause traffic outages.
Caution Traffic is not protected during a Force protection switch.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Click View > Go to Network View .
Right-click a network span and choose Circuits .
The Circuits on Span dialog box shows the path protection circuits, including circuit names, locations, and a color code showing which circuits are active on the span.
Click the Perform UPSR span switching field.
Choose Force Switch Away from the drop-down list.
Click Apply .
In the Confirm UPSR Switch dialog box, click Yes .
In the Protection Switch Result dialog box, click OK .
In the Circuits on Span dialog box, the switch state for all circuits is FORCE. Unprotected circuits do not switch.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-263
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Initiate a Manual Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
This procedure manually switches all circuits in a path protection from the working span to the protect.
It is used to remove traffic from a card that originates or terminates path protection circuits.
Caution The Manual command does not override normal protective switching mechanisms.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 1
Step 2
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Right-click a network span and choose Circuits .
The Circuits on Span dialog box shows the path protection circuits, including circuit names, locations, and a color code showing which circuits are active on the span.
Click the Perform UPSR span switching field.
Choose Manual from the drop-down list.
Click Apply .
In the Confirm UPSR Switch dialog box, click Yes .
In the Protection Switch Result dialog box, click OK .
In the Circuits on Span dialog box, the switch state for all circuits is Manual. Unprotected circuits do not switch.
Initiate a Lock Out of Protect-Switch for All Circuits on a Path Protection Span
This procedure prevents all circuits in a path protection working span from switching to the protect span.
It is used to keep traffic off cards that originate or terminate path protection circuits.
Caution The Lock Out of Protect command does not override normal protective switching mechanisms.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 1
Step 2
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Right-click a network span and choose Circuits .
The Circuits on Span dialog box shows the path protection circuits, including circuit names, locations, and a color code showing which circuits are active on the span.
Click the Perform UPSR span switching field.
Choose Lock Out of Protect from the drop-down list.
Click Apply .
In the Confirm UPSR Switch dialog box, click Yes .
In the Protection Switch Result dialog box, click OK .
In the Circuits on Span dialog box, the switch state for all circuits is FORCE. Unprotected circuits do not switch.
2-264
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Clear a Path Protection Span External Switching Command
Note If the ports terminating a span are configured as revertive, clearing a Force switch to protect (or working) moves traffic back to the working port. If ports are not configured as revertive, clearing a Force switch to protect does not move traffic back.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Right-click a network span and choose Circuits .
The Circuits on Span dialog box shows the path protection circuits, including circuit names, locations, and a color code showing which circuits are active on the span.
Initiate a Force switch for all circuits on the span: a.
Click the Perform UPSR span switching field. b.
c.
d.
e.
Choose Clear
Click Apply . from the drop-down list.
In the Confirm UPSR Switch dialog box, click Yes .
In the Protection Switch Result dialog box, click OK .
In the Circuits on Span dialog box, the switch state for all circuits is Clear. Unprotected circuits do not switch.
Initiate a Force Ring Switch on a BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
From the View menu choose Go to Network View .
In network view, click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the BLSR you are switching, then click Edit .
Right-click a BLSR node west port and choose Set West Protection Operation .
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box, choose Force Ring from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the two Confirm BLSR Operation dialog boxes that appear.
Initiate a Force Span Switch on a Four-Fiber BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
From the View menu choose Go to Network View .
In network view, click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the BLSR you are switching, then click Edit .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-265
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock Initiation, and Clearing
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Right-click a BLSR node west port and choose Set West Protection Operation .
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box, choose Force Span from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the two Confirm BLSR Operation dialog boxes that appear.
Initiate a Manual Ring Switch on a BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
From the View menu, choose Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Choose the BLSR and click Edit .
Right-click the BLSR node channel (port) and choose Set West Protection Operation (if you chose a west channel) or Set East Protection Operation (if you chose an east channel).
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box or the Set East Protection Operation dialog box, choose
Manual Ring from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the two Confirm BLSR Operation dialog boxes.
Initiate a Lock Out on a BLSR Protect Span
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
From the View menu choose Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Choose the BLSR and click Edit .
Right-click the BLSR node channel (port) and choose Set West Protection Operation (if you chose a west channel) or Set East Protection Operation (if you chose an east channel).
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box or the Set East Protection Operation dialog box, choose
Lockout Protect Span from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the two Confirm BLSR Operation dialog boxes.
Initiate an Exercise Ring Switch on a BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the BLSR you are exercising, then click Edit .
Right-click the west port of a node and choose Set West Protection Operation .
2-266
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.3 CTC Card Resetting and Switching
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box, choose Exercise Ring from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the Confirm BLSR Operation dialog box.
Initiate an Exercise Ring Switch on a Four Fiber BLSR
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Click the row of the BLSR you are exercising, then click Edit .
Right-click the west port of a node and choose Set West Protection Operation .
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box, choose Exercise Span from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the Confirm BLSR Operation dialog box.
Clear a BLSR External Switching Command
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Click View > Go to Network View .
Click the Provisioning > BLSR tabs.
Click the BLSR you want to clear.
Right-click the west port of the BLSR node where you invoked the switch and choose Set West
Protection Operation .
In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box, choose Clear from the drop-down list.
Click OK .
Click Yes in the Confirm BLSR Operation dialog box.
2.11.3 CTC Card Resetting and Switching
This section gives instructions for resetting traffic cards, TCC2/TCC2P cards, and cross-connect cards.
Caution For TXP and MXP cards placed in a Y-cable protection group, do not perform a software reset on both cards simultaneously. Doing so will cause a traffic hit of more than one minute. For more information about Y-cable protection groups, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations
Guide .
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-267
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.3 CTC Card Resetting and Switching
Caution Resetting the active card in a Y-cable group will cause a traffic outage if the standby card is down for any reason.
Reset a Traffic Card in CTC
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
In node view, position the cursor over the optical or electrical traffic card slot reporting the alarm.
Right-click the card. Choose Reset Card from the shortcut menu.
Click Yes in the Resetting Card dialog box.
Reset an Active TCC2/TCC2P and Activate the Standby Card
Caution Resetting an active TCC2/TCC2P card reset can be traffic-affecting.
Note Before you reset the TCC2/TCC2P, you should wait at least 60 seconds after the last provisioning change you made to avoid losing any changes to the database.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Identify the active TCC2/TCC2P card:
If you are looking at the physical ONS 15454 shelf, the ACT/SBY LED of the active card is green. The
ACT/STBLY LED of the standby card is amber.
Right-click the active TCC2/TCC2P in CTC.
Choose Reset Card from the shortcut menu.
Click Yes in the Confirmation Dialog box.
The card resets, the FAIL LED blinks on the physical card, and connection to the node is lost. CTC switches to network view.
Verify that the reset is complete and error-free and that no new related alarms appear in CTC. For LED appearance, see the
“2.10.3 Typical Card LED State After Successful Reset” section on page 2-258 .
Double-click the node and ensure that the reset TCC2/TCC2P is in standby mode and that the other
TCC2/TCC2P is active. Verify the following:
•
•
If you are looking at the physical ONS 15454 shelf, the ACT/SBY LED of the active card is green.
The ACT/STBLY LED of the standby card is amber.
No new alarms appear in the Alarms window in CTC.
2-268
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement
Side Switch the Active and Standby XC10G Cross-Connect Cards
Caution The cross-connect card side switch is usually traffic-affecting.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Log into a node on the network. For instructions regarding how to log into a node, refer Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide, Release 8.0
. If you are already logged in, continue with
Display node view.
Determine the active or standby XC10G cross-connect card.
The ACT/SBY LED of the active card is green. The ACT/SBY LED of the standby card is amber.
Note You can also position the cursor over the card graphic to display a popup identifying the card as active or standby.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
In node view, click the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards tabs.
Click Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box. See the
“2.10.4 Typical Cross-Connect LED Activity
During Side Switch” section on page 2-258 for LED information.
Note During a maintenance side switch or soft reset of an active XC10G card, the 1+1 protection group might display a protection switch. To disallow the protection switch from being displayed, the protection group should be locked at the node where XC switch or soft reset of an active XC switch is in progress.
Caution Active cross connect (XC10G/XCVT) cards should not be physically removed.
The following rules must be followed for removing an Active Cross Connect Card (XC10G/XCVT):
If the active cross connect has to be removed, perform an XCVT/XC10G side switch to change the status of the card from active to standby and then remove the cross connect card once it goes back to standby.
OR
Perform a lockout on all circuits that originate from the node whose active cross connect card has to be removed (performing a lockout on all spans will also accomplish the same goal).
2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement
This section gives instructions for physically reseating and replacing TCC2/TCC2P, cross-connect, and traffic cards.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-269
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement
Caution Do not physically replace a card without first making provisions to switch or move traffic to a different card or circuit. General procedures for this are located in the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
. In-depth traffic switching procedures and information can be found in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) the Standby TCC2/TCC2P Card
Caution Do not perform this action without the supervision and direction of Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
Caution The TCC2/TCC2P reseat might be traffic-affecting. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for traffic-switching procedures.
Note Before you reset the TCC2/TCC2P card, you should wait at least 60 seconds after the last provisioning change you made to avoid losing any changes to the database.
Note When a standby TSC card is removed and reinserted (reseated), all three fan lights might momentarily illuminate, indicating that the fan TCC2/TCC2Ps have also reset.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Ensure that theTCC2/TCC2P you want to reseat is in standby mode. A standby card has an amber
ACT/SBY (Active/Standby) LED illuminated.
When the TCC2/TCC2P is in standby mode, unlatch both the top and bottom ejectors on the
TCC2/TCC2P.
Physically pull the card at least partly out of the slot until the lighted LEDs turn off.
Wait 30 seconds. Reinsert the card and close the ejectors.
Note The TCC2/TCC2P requires several minutes to reboot and display the amber standby LED after rebooting. Refer to the <I_Ital>Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual for more information about LED behavior during card rebooting.
Remove and Reinsert (Reseat) Any Card
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the card ejectors.
Slide the card halfway out of the slot along the guide rails.
Slide the card all the way back into the slot along the guide rails.
2-270
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.4 Physical Card Reseating, Resetting, and Replacement
Step 4 Close the ejectors.
Physically Replace a Traffic Card
Caution Removing a card that currently carries traffic on one or more ports can cause a traffic hit. To avoid this, perform an external switch if a switch has not already occurred. See the
Lock Initiation, and Clearing” section on page 2-260
for commonly used traffic-switching procedures.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Open the card ejectors.
Slide the card out of the slot.
Open the ejectors on the replacement card.
Slide the replacement card into the slot along the guide rails.
Close the ejectors.
Physically Replace an In-Service Cross-Connect Card
Caution The cross-connect reseat might be traffic-affecting. Refer to the
“2.11.2 Protection Switching, Lock
procedure.
Note This procedure is placed in the chapter as a quick guide for the user’s convenience. An in-depth procedure is located in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter 15, “Maintain the Node.”
Step 1 Determine the active cross-connect card (XCVT/XC10G). The ACT/STBY LED of the active card is green. The ACT/STBY LED of the standby card is amber.
Note You can also place the cursor over the card graphic to display a popup identifying the card as active or standby.
Step 2 Switch the active cross-connect card (XCVT/XC10G) to standby: a.
In the node view, click the Maintenance > Cross-Connect tabs.
b.
c.
Under Cross Connect Cards, choose Switch .
Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box.
Note After the active XCVT/XC10G goes into standby, the original standby slot becomes active. This causes the ACT/STBY LED to become green on the former standby card.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-271
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures
Step 3 Physically remove the new standby cross-connect card (XCVT/XC10G) from the ONS 15454.
Note An improper removal (IMPROPRMVL) alarm is raised when a card reseat is performed, unless the card is first deleted in Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). The alarm clears after the card replacement is complete.
Step 4 Insert the replacement cross-connect card (XCVT/XC10G) into the empty slot.
The replacement card boots up and becomes ready for service after approximately one minute.
2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures
This section gives instructions for verify BER thresholds, deleting circuits, provisioning SDCC terminations, and clearing loopbacks.
Verify the Signal BER Threshold Level
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
In node view, double-click the card reporting the alarm to display the card view.
Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Under the SD BER (or SF BER ) column on the Provisioning window, verify that the cell entry is consistent with the originally provisioned threshold. The default setting is 1E-7.
If the entry is consistent with the original provisioning, go back to your original procedure.
If the entry is not consistent with what the system was originally provisioned for, click the cell to reveal the range of choices and click the original entry.
Click Apply .
Delete a Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
In node view, click the Circuits tab.
Click the circuit row to highlight it and click Delete .
Click Yes in the Delete Circuits dialog box.
Verify or Create Node Section DCC Terminations
Note Portions of this procedure are different for ONS 15454 DWDM nodes.
2-272
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > SDCC tab.
View the Port column entries to see where terminations are present for a node. If terminations are missing, proceed to
.
If necessary, create a DCC termination: a.
Click Create .
b.
c.
d.
e.
In the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, click the ports where you want to create the DCC termination. To select more than one port, press the Shift key.
In the port state area, click the Set to IS radio button.
Verify that the Disable OSPF on Link check box is unchecked.
Click OK .
Clear an OC-N Card Facility or Terminal Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > Port tabs.
In the Loopback Type column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than None.
If a row contains another state besides None, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select None.
In the Admin State column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than IS .
If a row shows a state other than IS, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select IS .
Click Apply .
Clear an OC-N Card Cross-Connect (XC) Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback > SONET STS tabs.
Uncheck the XC Loopback check box.
Click Apply .
Clear a DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Card Loopback Circuit
Step 1 Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-273
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.5 Generic Signal and Circuit Procedures
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > DS3 tabs or the Maintenance > DS1 tabs.
In the Loopback Type column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than None.
If a row contains another state besides None, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select None.
In the Admin State column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than IS .
If a row shows a state other than IS, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select IS .
Click Apply .
Clear Other DS-N Card, EC-1, or G1000 Card Loopbacks
Note This procedure does not apply to DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tabs.
In the Loopback Type column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than None.
If a row contains another state besides None, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select None .
In the Admin State column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than IS .
If a row shows a state other than IS, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select IS .
Click Apply .
Clear an MXP, TXP, or FC_MR Card Loopback Circuit
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tabs.
In the Loopback Type column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than None.
If a row contains another state besides None, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select None.
In the Admin State column, determine whether any port row shows an admin state other than IS, for example, OOS,MT .
If a row shows an admin state other than IS, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select IS .
2-274
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.6 Air Filter and Fan Procedures
Step 8 Click Apply .
Clear an Ethernet Card Loopback Circuit
This procedure applies to CE_100T-8 cards.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Log into a node on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with
.
Double-click the reporting card in CTC to display the card view.
Click the Maintenance > Loopback tabs.
In the Loopback Type column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than None.
If a row contains another state besides None, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select None .
In the Admin State column, determine whether any port row shows a state other than IS, for example,
OOS,MT .
If a row shows an Admin State other than IS, click in the column cell to display the drop-down list and select IS .
Click Apply .
2.11.6 Air Filter and Fan Procedures
This section gives instructions for cleaning or replacing the air filter and reseating or replacing the fan tray assembly.
Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter
To complete this task, you need a vacuum cleaner or detergent and water faucet, a spare filter, and a pinned hex key.
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan. Exposed circuitry could constitute an energy hazard. Statement 206
Although the filter works if it is installed with either side facing up, Cisco recommends that you install it with the metal bracing facing up to preserve the surface of the filter.
Step 1
Step 2
Verify that you are replacing a reusable air filter. The reusable filter is made of a gray, open-cell, polyurethane foam that is specially coated to provide fire and fungi resistance. NEBS 3E and later versions of the ONS 15454 use a reusable air filter.
If the air filter is installed in the external filter brackets, slide the filter out of the brackets while being careful not to dislodge any dust that might have collected on the filter. If the filter is installed beneath the fan tray and not in the external filter brackets, open and remove the front door assembly: a.
Open the front door of the shelf assembly. If it is already open or if the shelf assembly does not have a front door, continue with
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007 2-275
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.6 Air Filter and Fan Procedures
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8 b.
•
•
Open the front door lock.
Press the door button to release the latch.
Swing the door open. •
Remove the front door (optional):
• Detach the ground strap from either the door or the chassis by removing one of the Kepnuts.
•
•
Place the Kepnut back on the stud after the ground strap is removed to avoid misplacement.
Secure the dangling end of the ground strap to the door or chassis with tape.
Push the outer side of the handles on the fan-tray assembly to expose the handles.
Pull the handles and slide the fan-tray assembly one inch (25.4 mm) out of the shelf assembly and wait until the fans stop.
When the fans have stopped, pull the fan-tray assembly completely out of the shelf assembly.
Gently remove the air filter from the shelf assembly. Be careful not to dislodge any dust that might have collected on the filter.
Visually inspect the air filter material for dirt and dust.
If the reusable air filter has a concentration of dirt and dust, either vacuum or wash the air filter. Prior to washing the air filter, replace the dirty air filter with a clean air filter and also reinsert the fan-tray assembly. Wash the dirty air filter under a faucet with a light detergent.
Spare ONS 15454 filters should be kept in stock for this purpose.
Note Cleaning should take place outside the operating environment to avoid releasing dirt and dust near the equipment.
Step 9 If you washed the filter, allow it to completely air dry for at least eight hours.
Caution Do not put a damp filter back in the ONS 15454.
Step 10
Step 11
If the air filter should be installed in the external filter brackets, slide the air filter all the way to the back of the brackets to complete the procedure.
If the filter should be installed beneath the fan-tray assembly, remove the fan-tray assembly and slide the air filter into the recessed compartment at the bottom of the shelf assembly. Put the front edge of the air filter flush against the front edge of the recessed compartment. Push the fan tray back into the shelf assembly.
Caution If the fan tray does not slide all the way to the back of the shelf assembly, pull the fan tray out and readjust the position of the reusable filter until the fan tray fits correctly.
Note On a powered-up ONS 15454, the fans start immediately after the fan-tray assembly is correctly inserted.
Step 12
Step 13
To verify that the tray is plugged into the backplane, ensure that the LCD on the front of the fan-tray assembly is activated and displays node information.
Rotate the retractable handles back into their compartments.
2-276
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.6 Air Filter and Fan Procedures
Step 14 Replace the door and reattach the ground strap.
Remove and Reinsert a Fan-Tray Assembly
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Use the retractable handles embedded in the front of the fan-tray assembly to pull it forward several inches.
Push the fan-tray assembly firmly back into the ONS 15454.
Close the retractable handles.
Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly
Caution The 15454-FTA3 fan-tray assembly can only be installed in ONS 15454 R3.1 and later shelf assemblies
(15454-SA-ANSI, P/N: 800-19857; 15454-SA-HD, P/N: 800-24848). It includes a pin that does not allow it to be installed in ONS 15454 shelf assemblies released before ONS 15454 R3.1
(15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3, and 15454-SA-R1, P/N: 800-07149). Equipment damage can result from attempting to install the 15454-FTA3 in a incompatible shelf assembly.
Caution Do not force a fan-tray assembly into place. Doing so can damage the connectors on the fan tray and/or the connectors on the backplane.
Note The 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly and 15454-FTA3 fan-tray assembly are required with the ONS 15454 OC-192 and OC-48 AS cards.
To replace the fan-tray assembly (FTA), it is not necessary to move any of the cable management facilities.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Open the front door of the shelf assembly. If the shelf assembly does not have a front door, continue with
a.
Open the front door lock.
b.
c.
c.
Press the door button to release the latch.
Swing the door open.
Remove the front door (optional): a.
Detach the ground strap from either the door or the chassis by removing one of the Kepnuts.
b.
Place the Kepnut back on the stud after the ground strap is removed to avoid misplacement.
Secure the dangling end of the ground strap to the door or chassis with tape.
Push the outer side of the handles on the fan-tray assembly to expose the handles.
Fold out the retractable handles at the outside edges of the fan tray.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-277
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Pull the handles and slide the fan-tray assembly one inch (25.4 mm) out of the shelf assembly and wait until the fans stop.
When the fans have stopped, pull the fan-tray assembly completely out of the shelf assembly.
If you are replacing the fan-tray air filter and it is installed beneath the fan-tray assembly, slide the existing air filter out of the shelf assembly and replace it before replacing the fan-tray assembly.
If you are replacing the fan-tray air filter and it is installed in the external bottom bracket, you can slide the existing air filter out of the bracket and replace it at anytime. For more information on the fan-tray air filter, see the
“Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Reusable Air Filter” section on page 2-275 .
Slide the new fan tray into the shelf assembly until the electrical plug at the rear of the tray plugs into the corresponding receptacle on the backplane.
To verify that the tray has plugged into the backplane, check that the LCD on the front of the fan tray is activated.
If you replace the door, be sure to reattach the ground strap.
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
This section includes instructions for replacing an ONS 15454 EIA and an ONS 15454 AIP.
Replace the Electrical Interface Assembly
Note You need a #2 Phillips screwdriver. If you use high-density BNC EIAs, you also need a BNC insertion and removal tool.
Step 1
Step 2
To remove the lower backplane cover, loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it away from the shelf assembly.
Loosen the nine perimeter screws that hold the backplane sheet metal cover or EIA in place. Do not remove the interior screws.
Note If you are removing an AMP Champ EIA, remove the fastening plate before proceeding. To remove the fastening plate, loosen the two thumbscrews.
Step 3
Step 4
If a backplane cover is attached to the ONS 15454, lift the panel by the bottom to remove it from the shelf assembly and store the panel for later use.
If an EIA is attached to the ONS 15454, lift the EIA handles and gently pull it away from the backplane.
Note Attach backplane sheet metal covers whenever EIAs are not installed.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Line up the connectors on the new EIA with the mating connectors on the backplane.
Gently push the EIA until both sets of connectors fit together snugly.
Replace the nine perimeter screws that you removed while removing the backplane cover.
2-278
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
Step 8
Step 9
If you are installing an AMP Champ EIA, attach the fastening plate with the two thumbscrews.
Reattach the lower backplane cover.
Replace the Alarm Interface Panel
Caution Do not use a 2A AIP with a 5A fan-tray assembly; doing so causes a blown fuse on the AIP.
Caution If any nodes in an Ethernet circuit are not using Software R4.0 or later, there is a risk of Ethernet traffic disruptions. Contact Cisco TAC at 1 800 553-2447 when prompted to do so in the procedure.
Note Perform this procedure during a maintenance window. Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P card can cause a service disruption of less then 50 ms to OC-N or DS-N traffic. Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P card can cause a service disruption of 3 to 5 minutes on all Ethernet traffic due to spanning tree reconvergence if any nodes in the Ethernet circuit are not using Software R4.0 or later.
Caution Do not perform this procedure on a node with live traffic. Hot-swapping the AIP can affect traffic and result in a loss of data. For assistance with AIP replacement contact Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447).
This procedure replaces an existing AIP with a new AIP on an in-service node without affecting traffic.
Ethernet circuits that traverse nodes with a software release prior to R4.0 is affected.
You need a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Ensure that all nodes in the affected network are running the same software version before replacing the
AIP and repairing circuits: a.
b.
In network view, click the Maintenance > Software tabs. The working software version for each node is listed in the Working Version column.
If you need to upgrade the software on a node, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Software Upgrade
Guide for software upgrade procedures . No hardware should be changed or circuit repair performed until after the software upgrade is complete. If you do not need to upgrade software or have completed the software upgrade, proceed to
Record the MAC address of the old AIP: a.
Log into the node where you are replacing the AIP. For login procedures, see the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide Chapter 3, “Connect the PC and Log into the GUI.” b.
c.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Network tabs.
Record the MAC address shown in the General tab.
Call Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) for assistance in replacing the AIP and maintaining the original MAC address.
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-279
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.
Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right edge of the shelf assembly.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Unscrew the five screws that hold the lower backplane cover in place.
Grip the lower backplane cover and gently pull it away from the backplane.
Unscrew the two screws that hold the AIP cover in place.
Grip the cover and gently pull away from the backplane.
Note On the 15454-SA-HD (P/N: 800-24848), 15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3, and
15454-SA-R1 (P/N: 800-07149) shelves the AIP cover is clear plastic. On the 15454-SA-ANSI shelf (P/N: 800-19857), the AIP cover is metal.
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Grip the AIP and gently pull it away from the backplane.
Disconnect the fan-tray assembly power cable from the AIP.
Set the old AIP aside for return to Cisco.
Caution The type of shelf the AIP resides in determines the version of AIP that should replace the failed AIP. The
15454-SA-ANSI shelf (P/N: 800-19857) and 15454-SA-HD (P/N: 800-24848) currently use the 5A AIP,
(P/N: 73-7665-01). The 15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3, and 15454-SA-R1 (P/N: 800-07149) shelves and earlier use the 2A AIP (P/N: 73-5262-01).
Caution Do not put a 2A AIP (P/N: 73-5262-01) into a 15454-SA-ANSI (P/N: 800-19857) or 15454-SA-HD
(P/N: 800-24848) shelf; doing so causes a blown fuse on the AIP.
Step 11
Step 12
Step 13
Step 14
Step 15
Attach the fan-tray assembly power cable to the new AIP.
Place the new AIP on the backplane by plugging the panel into the backplane using the DIN connector.
Replace the AIP cover over the AIP and secure the cover with the two screws.
Replace the lower backplane cover and secure the cover with the five screws.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Network tabs.
Caution Cisco recommends TCC2/TCC2P card resets be performed in a maintenance window to avoid any potential service disruptions.
Step 16 Reset the standby TCC2/TCC2P card: a.
Right-click the standby TCC2/TCC2P card and choose Reset Card .
b.
Click Yes in the Resetting Card dialog box. As the card resets, a loading (Ldg) indication appears on the card in CTC.
Note The reset takes approximately five minutes. Do not perform any other steps until the reset is complete.
2-280
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
Step 17 Reset the active TCC2/TCC2P card: a.
b.
Right click the active TCC2/TCC2P card and choose Reset Card .
Click Yes in the Resetting Card dialog box. As the card resets, a Ldg indication appears on the card in CTC.
Note The reset takes approximately five minutes and CTC loses its connection with the node.
Step 18
Step 19
Step 20
Step 21
Step 22
Step 23
Step 24
Step 25
From the File drop-down list, choose Exit to exit the CTC session.
Log back into the node. At the Login dialog box, choose (None) from the Additional Nodes drop-down list.
Record the new MAC address: a.
In node view, click the Provisioning > Network tabs.
b.
Record the MAC address shown in the General tab.
In node view, click the Circuits tab. Note that all circuits listed are PARTIAL.
In node view, choose Repair Circuits from the Tools drop-down list. The Circuit Repair dialog box appears.
Read the instructions in the Circuit Repair dialog box. If all the steps in the dialog box have been completed, click Next . Ensure that you have the old and new MAC addresses.
The Node MAC Addresses dialog box appears: a.
From the Node drop-down list, choose the name of the node where you replaced the AIP.
b.
In the Old MAC Address field, enter the old MAC address that was recorded in
c.
Click Next .
The Repair Circuits dialog box appears. Read the information in the dialog box and click Finish .
Note The CTC session freezes until all circuits are repaired. Circuit repair can take up to five minutes or more depending on the number of circuits provisioned.
Step 26
Step 27
When the circuit repair is complete, the Circuits Repaired dialog box appears.
Click OK .
In the node view of the new node, click the Circuits tab. Note that all circuits listed are DISCOVERED.
If all circuits listed do not have a DISCOVERED status, call the Cisco TAC (1 800 553-2447) to open a
Return Material Authorization (RMA).
September 2007
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
2-281
2.11.7 Interface Procedures
Chapter 2 Alarm Troubleshooting
2-282
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
September 2007
C H A P T E R
3
Error Messages
Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter lists the Cisco ONS 15454, 15454 SDH, 15600, 15327 and 15310 error messages.
gives a list of all error message numbers, the messages, and a brief description of each message. The table lists two types of messages: error messages (EIDnnnn ) and warning messages (WIDnnnn ). Error messages are alerts that an unexpected or undesirable operation has occurred which either indicates the risk of loss of traffic or an inability to properly manage devices in the network. Warnings are alerts that the requested operation could lead to an error. Warnings are sometimes used to convey important information.
The error dialog box in Figure 3-1
consists of three parts: the error title, error ID, and the error message.
Figure 3-1 Error Dialog Box
Error Title
Error ID
Error Message
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-0
EID-1
Error Messages
Error or Warning Message
Invalid error ID.
Null pointer encountered in {0}.
December 2004
Description
The error ID is invalid.
Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) encountered a null pointer in the area described by the specified item.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-1
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-1000
EID-1001
EID-1002
EID-1003
EID-1004
EID-1005
EID-1006
EID-1007
EID-1018
EID-1019
EID-1020
EID-1021
EID-1022
EID-1023
EID-1025
EID-1026
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
The host name of the network element cannot be resolved to an address.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to launch CTC due to applet security restrictions. Please review the installation instructions to make sure that the CTC launcher is given the permissions it needs. Note that you must exit and restart your browser in order for the new permissions to take effect.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The host name (e.g., for the network element) was successfully resolved to its address, but no route can be found through the network to reach the address.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An error was encountered while attempting to launch CTC.
{0}
Problem Deleting CTC Cache: {0} {1}
An error occurred while writing to the {0} file.
The URL used to download {0} is malformed.
An I/O error occurred while trying to download {0}.
Unexpected exception or error while launching CTC from the applet.
CTC encountered a problem deleting the cache.
CTC could not write the launching batch file.
The URL used to download the
Launcher.jar file is malformed.
An input or output exception was encountered when CTC tried to download the GUI launcher.
The password is invalid. Password must contain at least 1 alphabetic, 1 numeric, and 1 special character (+, # or %).
Password shall not contain the associated user-ID.
Could not create {0}.
Please enter another filename.
Fatal exception occurred, exiting CTC.
Unable to switch to the Network view.
CTC could not create the file due to an invalid filename.
CTC was unable to switch from the node or card view to the network view, and is now shutting down.
Unable to navigate to {0}.
Unable to locate HelpSet.
Failed to display the indicated view—node or network.
Refer to error or warning message text.
A session cannot be opened right now with this slot. Most likely someone else (using a different CTC) already has a session opened with this slot.
Please try again later.
This session has been terminated. This can happen if the card resets, the session has timed out, or if someone else (possibly using a different CTC) already has a session open with this slot.
Unable to create Help Broker.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC was unable to create the help broker for the online help.
CTC was unable to locate the help set for the online help.
3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-1027
EID-1028
EID-1031
EID-1032
EID-1034
EID-1035
WID-1036
EID-1037
EID-1038
EID-2001
EID-2002
EID-2003
EID-2004
EID-2005
EID-2006
EID-2007
EID-2008
EID-2009
EID-2010
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Unable to locate Help ID: {0}
Description
CTC was unable to locate the help ID for the online help.
Error saving table. {0} There was an error saving the specified table.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC cannot locate the online user manual files. The files may have been moved, deleted, or not installed. To install online user manuals, run the CTC installation wizard on the software or documentation CD.
CTC cannot locate Acrobat Reader. If Acrobat Reader is not installed, you can install the Reader using the CTC installation wizard provided on the software or documentation CD.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to locate HelpSet when searching for Help ID “{0}”.
CTC is unable to locate the subset {0} of the context sensitive help files.
CTC experienced an I/O error while working with the log files.
Usually this means that the computer has run out of disk space.
This problem may or may not cause CTC to stop responding.
Ending this CTC session is recommended, but not required.
WARNING: Deleting the CTC cache may cause any CTC running on this system to behave in an unexpected manner.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Could not open {0}. Please enter another filename.
The file {0} does not exist.
No rolls selected. {0}
The Roll must be completed or cancelled before it can be deleted.
Error deleting roll.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
No rolls were selected for the bridge and roll.
You cannot delete the roll unless it has been completed or canceled.
There was an error when CTC tried to delete the roll.
You did not select a Cisco IOS slot.
No IOS slot selected.
CTC cannot find the online help files for {0}. The files may have been moved, deleted, or not installed. To install online help, run the setup program on the software or documentation
CDs.
Error editing circuit(s). {0} {1}.
CTC cannot find the online help files for the specified window. The files might have been moved, deleted, or not installed. To install online help, run the setup program on the software or documentation CDs.
An error occurred when CTC tried to open the circuit for editing.
Unable to save preferences.
Unable to store circuit preferences: {0}
CTC cannot save the preferences.
CTC cannot find the file needed to save the circuit preferences.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to download package:
{0}
Delete destination failed.
CTC could not delete the destination.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-3
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-2014
EID-2015
EID-2016
EID-2017
EID-2018
EID-2019
EID-2020
EID-2021
EID-2022
EID-2023
EID-2024
EID-2025
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2011
EID-2012
EID-2013
EID-2026
EID-2027
EID-2028
EID-2029
EID-2030
EID-2031
EID-2032
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Circuit destroy failed.
Reverse circuit destroy failed.
Description
CTC could not destroy the circuit.
CTC could not reverse the circuit destroy.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit creation error. Circuit creation cannot proceed due to changes in the network which affected the circuit(s) being created. The dialog will close. Please try again.
No circuit(s) selected. {0}
Unable to delete circuit {0}as it has one or more rolls.
Unable to delete circuit.
Error mapping circuit. {0}
You must select a circuit to complete this function.
CTC cannot delete the circuit because it contains one or more rolls.
There was an error deleting the circuit.
There was an error mapping the circuit.
Circuit roll failure. The circuit has to be in the DISCOVERED state in order to perform a roll.
Circuit roll failure. Current version of CTC does not support bridge and roll on a VT tunnel or VT aggregation point circuit.
Circuit roll failure. The two circuits must have the same direction.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit roll failure. The two circuits must have the same size.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit roll failure. A maximum of two circuits can be selected for a bridge and roll operation.
Unable to create new user account.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error message text.
Node selection error.
This feature cannot be used. Verify that each of the endpoints of this circuit are running software that supports this feature.
There was an error during node selection.
Refer to error or warning message text. This error is generated from the
AnsOpticsParamsPane to indicate that the selected ring type is not supported by the endpoints of the circuit. In the VLAN tab it indicates that the back-end spanning tree protocol (STP) disabling is not supported.
Unable to apply UPSR request. {0}
Error deleting circuit drop.
Error removing circuit node.
The requested operation is not supported.
Error occurred while attempting to switch a path protection circuit away from a span.
CTC could not delete the circuit drop.
CTC could not remove the circuit node.
The task you are trying to complete is not supported by CTC.
Provisioning error.
Error adding node.
Unable to rename circuit. {0}
There was an error during provisioning.
There was an error while adding a node.
CTC could not rename the circuit.
3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2033
EID-2034
EID-2035
EID-2036
EID-2037
EID-2038
EID-2040
EID-2041
EID-2042
EID-2043
EID-2044
EID-2045
EID-2047
EID-2048
EID-2050
EID-2051
EID-2052
EID-2054
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
An error occurred during validation. {0}
Description
There was an internal error while validating the user changes after the Apply button was pressed. This error can occur in the Edit
Circuit dialog box or in the BLSR table in the shelf view (rare condition).
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to add network circuits:
{0}
The source and destination nodes are not connected.
Cannot delete this {0}.
LAN Access has been disabled on this node and this {0} is needed to access the node.
Application error. Cannot find attribute for {0}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC cannot find an attribute for the specified item.
There was an invalid protection operation.
Invalid protection operation.
Please select a node first.
You must select a node before performing the task.
Refer to error or warning message text.
No paths are available on this link. Please make another selection.
This span is not selectable. Only the green spans with an arrow may be selected.
Refer to error or warning message text.
This node is not selectable. Only the source node and nodes attached to included spans (blue) are selectable. Selecting a selectable node will enable its available outgoing spans.
This link may not be included in the required list. Constraints only apply to the primary path. Each node may have a maximum of one incoming signal and one outgoing link.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
This link may not be included in the required list. Only one outgoing link may be included for each node.
Error validating slot number. Please enter a valid value for the slot number.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error validating port number. Please enter a valid value for the port number.
Refer to error or warning message text.
New circuit destroy failed.
Circuit cannot be downgraded. {0}
Error during circuit processing.
Endpoint selection error.
CTC could not destroy the new circuit.
The specified circuit cannot be downgraded.
There was an error during the circuit processing.
There was an error during the endpoint selection.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-5
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-2066
EID-2067
EID-2068
EID-2069
EID-2070
EID-2071
EID-2072
EID-2073
EID-2074
EID-2075
EID-2077
EID-2078
EID-2079
EID-2059
EID-2060
EID-2061
EID-2062
EID-2063
EID-2064
EID-2065
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2055
EID-2056
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
No endpoints are available for this selection. Please make another selection.
File write error. {0}
Unable to load alarm profile from node.
Description
This error occurs in the circuit creation dialog only during a race condition that has incorrectly allowed entities without endpoints to be displayed in the combo boxes.
Communication error. {0} An internal error occurred while synchronizing alarms with the nodes.
Network Alarm tab.
There was an error during the node deletion.
Node deletion Error. {0}
No PCA circuits found.
CTC could not find any protection channel access (PCA) circuits for this task.
There was an error defining the VLAN.
Error provisioning VLAN.
Cannot delete VLAN. No VLAN(s) are selected. Please select a VLAN.
Cannot delete default VLAN.
Cannot delete VLAN. No VLAN(s) are selected. Please select a VLAN.
The selected VLAN is the default VLAN, and cannot be deleted.
There was an error deleting the VLAN.
Error deleting VLANs.
{0}
Cannot import profile. Profile "{0}" exists in the editor and the maximum number of copies (ten) exists in the editor. Aborting the import. The profile has already been loaded eleven times.
Cannot import profile. The specified profile exists in the editor and the maximum number of copies (ten) exists in the editor.
Aborting the import. The profile has already been loaded eleven times.
Unable to store profile. Error writing to {0}.
CTC encountered an error while trying to store the profile.
CTC encountered a file write error.
File not found or I/O exception. {0}
Failure deleting profile. {0}
Only one column may be highlighted.
Only one profile may be highlighted.
This column is permanent and may not be removed.
CTC encountered an error trying to load the alarm profile from the node.
Either the file was not found, or there was an input/output exception.
The profile deletion failed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Select one or more profiles.
This column is permanent and may not be reset.
This column is permanent and may not be renamed.
At least two columns must be highlighted.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot load alarmables into table. There are no reachable nodes from which the list of alarmables may be loaded. Please wait until such a node is reachable and try again.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-6 December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2080
EID-2081
EID-2082
EID-2083
EID-2085
EID-2086
EID-2087
EID-2088
EID-2089
EID-2090
EID-2091
EID-2092
EID-2093
EID-2094
EID-2095
EID-2096
EID-2097
EID-2099
EID-2100
EID-2101
EID-2102
EID-2103
EID-2104
EID-2106
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Node {0} has no profiles.
Error removing profile {0} from node {1}.
Cannot find profile {0} on node {1}.
Description
The specified node does not have any profiles.
There was an error removing the specified profile from the node.
CTC cannot find the specified profile from the specified node.
Error adding profile {0} to node {1}.
Invalid profile selection. No profiles were selected.
Invalid node selection. No nodes were selected.
No profiles were selected. Please select at least one profile.
Invalid profile name.
Too many copies of {0} exist. Please choose another name.
No nodes selected. Please select the node(s) on which to store the profile(s).
Unable to switch to node {0}.
There was an error adding the specified profile to the specified node.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Too many copies of the specified item exist.
Refer to error or warning message text.
General exception error.
Not enough characters in name. {0}
CTC is unable to switch to the specified node.
CTC encountered a general exception error while trying to complete the task.
There are not enough characters in the name.
Password and confirmed password fields do not match.
You must make sure the two fields have the same password.
The password you entered is not allowed.
Illegal password.
{0}
The user must have a security level.
You must have an assigned security level to perform this task.
You did not specify a user name.
No user name specified.
Ring switching error.
Please select at least one profile to delete.
Protection switching error.
The forced switch could not be removed for some circuits. You must switch these circuits manually.
There was an error during the ring switch.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There was an error during the protection switch.
The forced switch could not be removed for some circuits. You must switch these circuits manually.
Error upgrading span.
Unable to switch circuits back as one or both nodes are not reachable.
The node name cannot be empty.
There was an error during the span upgrade.
This error occurs during the path protection span upgrade procedure.
You must supply a name for the node.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-7
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2107
EID-2108
EID-2109
EID-2110
EID-2111
EID-2113
EID-2114
EID-2115
EID-2116
EID-2118
EID-2119
EID-2120
EID-2121
EID-2122
EID-2123
EID-2124
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Error adding {0}, unknown host.
{0} is already in the network.
Description
There was an error adding the specified item.
The specified item is already in the network.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The node is already in the current login group.
Please enter a number between 0 and {0}.
This node ID is already in use. Please choose another.
Cannot set extension byte for ring.
{0}
Card communication failure. Error applying operation.
You must enter a number in the range between 0 and the specified value.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC cannot set the extension byte.
Error applying operation.
{0}
Invalid extension byte setting.
{0}
This error can occur during an attempt to apply a BLSR protection operation to a line.
There was an error applying the specified operation.
The extension byte set is invalid.
Cannot delete ring. There is a protection operation set. All protection operations must be clear for ring to be deleted.
Cannot delete {0} because a protection switch is in effect.
Please clear any protection operations, make sure that the reversion time is not "never" and allow any protection switches to clear before trying again.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The following nodes could not be unprovisioned
{0}
Therefore you will need to delete this {1} again later.
Cannot upgrade ring.
{0}
The specified nodes could not be unprovisioned.
CTC cannot upgrade the ring.
Inadequate ring speed for upgrade. Only {0} (or higher) {1} can be upgraded to 4-fiber.
Verify that the following nodes have at least two in-service ports with the same speed as the 2-fiber {0}. The ports cannot serve as a timing reference, and they cannot have DCC terminations or overhead circuits. {1}
You have selected an incorrect ring speed for upgrade. Only rings within the specified parameters can be upgraded to 4-fiber
BLSR.
Nonupgradable nodes. Verify that the specified nodes have at least two IS-NR ports with the same speed as the 2-fiber
BLSR.
The specified ports cannot serve as a timing reference, and they cannot have data communications channel (DCC) terminations or overhead circuits.
You cannot add this span because it is connected to a node that already has the east and west ports defined.
Refer to error or warning message text.
3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2125
EID-2126
EID-2127
EID-2128
EID-2129
EID-2130
EID-2131
EID-2135
EID-2137
EID-2138
EID-2139
EID-2143
EID-2144
EID-2145
EID-2146
EID-2147
EID-2148
WID-2149
WID-2150
WID-2152
WID-2153
WID-2154
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
You cannot add this span as it would cause a single card to host both the east span and the west span. A card cannot protect itself.
OSPF area error.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
There is an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area error.
{0}
You cannot add this span. It would cause the following circuit(s) to occupy different STS regions on different spans.
{0}
Either select a different span or delete the above circuit(s).
Illegal state error.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An internal error occurred while trying to remove a span from a BLSR.
This alarm occurs in the network-level
BLSR creation dialog box.
Refer to error or warning message text.
This port is already assigned. The east and west ports must be different.
The ring ID value, {0}, is not valid. Please enter a valid number between 0 and 9999.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot set reversion to INCONSISTENT.
I/O error. Unable to store overhead circuit preferences.
{0}
Circuit merge error. {0}
Cannot delete all destinations. Please try again.
Error updating destinations.
You must select another reversion type.
Input/Output error. Unable to store overhead circuit preferences.
There was an error merging the circuits.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There was an error updating the circuit destinations.
No online help version selected. Cannot delete the online help book.
You cannot delete the online help.
You cannot delete the online help.
Error deleting online help book(s).
{0}
Unable to locate a node with an IOS card.
Security violation. You may only logout your own account.
Security violation. You may only change your own account.
Unable to locate a node with a Cisco IOS card.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Security violation. You may not delete the account under which you are currently logged in.
There is nothing exportable on this view.
Node {0} is not initialized. Please wait and try again.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Spanning tree protection is being disabled for this circuit.
Adding this drop makes the circuit a PCA circuit.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Disallow creating monitor circuits on a port grouping circuit.
Refer to error or warning message text.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-9
Chapter 3 Error Messages
WID-2157
EID-2158
EID-2159
EID-2160
EID-2161
EID-2162
EID-2163
EID-2164
WID-2165
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-2155
WID-2156
WID-2166
WID-2167
WID-2168
WID-2169
WID-2170
WID-2171
WID-2172
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Only partial switch count support on some nodes.
{0}
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Manual roll mode is recommended for dual rolls. For auto dual rolls, please verify that roll to facilities are in service and error free.
Cannot complete roll(s).
{0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC cannot complete the roll(s).
The selected roll mode is invalid.
Invalid roll mode.
{0}
Roll not ready for completion.
{0}
Roll not connected.
{0}
Sibling roll not complete.
{0}
Error during roll acknowledgement.
{0}
Cannot cancel roll.
{0}
The roll is not ready for completion.
The selected roll is not connected.
The sibling roll is not complete.
There was an error during the roll acknowledgement.
CTC cannot cancel the roll.
Roll error.
{0}
The MAC address of node {0} has been changed. All circuits originating from or dropping at this node will need to be repaired.
Unable to insert node into the domain as the node is not initialized.
Insufficient security privilege to perform this action.
CTC encountered a roll error.
The MAC address of the specified node has been changed. All circuits originating from or dropping at this node need to be repaired.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Warnings loading{0}. {1}
One or more of the profiles selected do not exist on one or more of the nodes selected.
The profile list on node {0} is full. Please delete one or more profiles if you wish to add profile.
{1}
You have been logged out. Click OK to exit CTC.
The CTC CORBA (IIOP) listener port setting of {0} will be applied on the next CTC restart.
You have insufficient security privilege to perform this action.
CTC encountered warnings while loading the specified item.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The profile list on the specified node is full.
Please delete one or more profiles if you wish to add the specified profile.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified CTC Common Object
Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) listener port setting will be applied on the next CTC restart.
3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2173
EID-2174
WID-2175
WID-2176
WID-2178
WID-2179
EID-2180
EID-2181
EID-2182
EID-2183
EID-2184
EID-2185
EID-2186
EID-2187
EID-2188
EID-2189
EID-2190
EID-2191
EID-2192
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Port unavailable. The desired CTC CORBA (IIOP) listener port, {0}, is already in use or you do not have permission to listen on it. Please select an alternate port.
Description
The port is unavailable. The desired CTC
CORBA (IIOP) listener port is already in use or you do not have permission to listen on it. Please select an alternate port.
Invalid number entered. Please check it and try again.
Extension byte mismatch.
{0}
Not all spans have the same OSPF Area ID. This will cause problems with protection switching. To determine the OSPF
Area for a given span, click on the span and the OSPF Area will be displayed in the pane to the left of the network map.
Only one edit pane can be opened at a time. The existing pane will be displayed.
There is no update as the circuit has been deleted.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC initialization failed in step {0}.
This link may not be included as it originates from the destination.
The value of {0} is invalid.
You entered an invalid firewall port number.
There is a mismatch with the extension byte.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Because the circuit has been deleted, there is no update for it.
CTC initialization failed in the specified step.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The value of the specified item is invalid.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit roll failure. Current version of CTC does not support bridge and roll on a VCAT circuit.
Cannot enable the STP on some ports because they have been assigned an incompatible list of VLANs. You can view the
VLAN/Spanning Tree table or reassign ethernet ports VLANs.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot assign the VLANs on some ports because they are incompatible with the Spanning Tree Protocol. You can view the VLAN/Spanning Tree table or reassign VLANs.
Software download failed on node {0}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The maximum length for the ring name that can be used is {0}.
Please try again.
The software could not be downloaded onto the specified node.
You must shorten the length of the ring name.
The nodes in this ring do not support alphanumeric IDs. Please use a ring ID between {0} and {1}.
The nodes in this ring do not support alphanumeric IDs. Please use a ring ID within the specified range.
Refer to error or warning message text.
TL1 keyword "all" can not be used as the ring name. Please provide another name.
Adding this span will cause the ring to contain more nodes than allowed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Ring name must not be empty.
Cannot find a valid route for the circuit creation request.
You must supply a ring name.
Refer to error or warning message text.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-11
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-2208
EID-2209
EID-2210
EID-2211
EID-2212
WID-2213
EID-2214
EID-2215
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2193
EID-2194
EID-2195
EID-2196
EID-2197
EID-2198
EID-2199
EID-2200
EID-2202
EID-2203
EID-2204
EID-2205
EID-2206
EID-2207
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message Description
Cannot find a valid route for the circuit drop creation request.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot find a valid route for the roll creation request.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The circuit VLAN list cannot be mapped to one spanning tree.
You can view the VLAN/Spanning Tree table or reassign
VLANs.
Unable to relaunch the CTC. {0}
CORBA failure. Unable to proceed.
Please verify that the correct Java version is being used.
Close and restart the CTC and browser applications.
Unable to switch to the {0} view.
There is an error relaunching CTC.
There was a CORBA failure, and the task cannot proceed.
CTC is unable to switch to the specified view.
Login failed on {0} {1}
CTC has detected a jar file deletion. The jar file was used to manage one or more nodes. This CTC session will not be able to manage those nodes and they will appear gray on the network map. It is recommended that you exit this CTC session and start a new one.
Intra-node circuit must have two sources to be Dual Ring
Interconnect.
The login failed on the specified task.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Intranode circuit must have two sources to be a dual ring interconnect (DRI).
No member selected.
Number of circuits must be a positive integer
Circuit Type must be selected
Unable to autoselect profile! Please select profile(s) to store and try again.
You must select a member.
The number of circuits cannot be negative.
You must select a circuit type.
Refer to error or warning message text.
You cannot add this span. Either the ring name is too big (i.e., ring name length is greater than {0}) or the endpoints do not support alphanumeric IDs.
This is an invalid or unsupported JRE.
You cannot add this span. Either the ring name is too big (that is, the ring name length is greater than the specified length) or the endpoints do not support alphanumeric IDs.
The version of Java Runtime Environment
(JRE) is either invalid or unsupported.
The user name must be at least {0} characters long.
The user name must be at least the specified character length.
You must select a package name.
No package name selected.
No node selected for upgrade.
Protected Line is not provisionable.
You must select a node for the upgrade.
The protected line cannot be provisioned.
The current type or state of some drops does not allow the new circuit state of {0} to be applied to them indirectly.
The circuit state, specified by {0} cannot be applied to the selected drops.
The node is disconnected. Please wait till the node reconnects. Refer to error or warning message text.
Error while leaving {0} page.
There was an error while leaving the specified page.
3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-2216
EID-2217
EID-2218
EID-2219
EID-2220
EID-2221
EID-2222
EID-2223
EID-2224
EID-2225
EID-2320
EID-2321
WID-2322
EID-2323
EID-2324
EID-2325
WID-2326
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Error while entering {0} page.
Description
There was an error entering the specified page.
Some conditions could not be retrieved from the network view Refer to error or warning message text.
Bandwidth must be between {0} and {1} percent.
The bandwidth must be within the specified parameters.
Protection operation failed, XC loopback is applied on cross-connection.
Protection operation failed; a cross-connect
(XC) loopback will be applied on cross-connection.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The tunnel status is PARTIAL. CTC will not be able to change it. Please try again later
Cannot find a valid route for the unprotected to UPSR upgrade request.
Refer to error or warning message text.
One or more of the following nodes are currently part of a
4-fiber {0}. Only a single 4-fiber {0} is supported per node.
{1}
The nodes, specified by {1}, are already part of a 4-fiber ring type, specified by {0}.
Only one circuit can be upgraded at a time.
Refer to error or warning message text.
This link may not be included as it terminates on the source.
Refer to error or warning message text.
No valid signal while trying to complete the roll. (0)
This VCAT circuit does not support deletion of its member circuits.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error deleting member circuits.
{0}
Not all cross-connects from selected circuits could be merged into the current circuit. They may appear as partial circuits.
Circuit roll failure. Current version of CTC does not support bridge and roll on a DRI protected circuit.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit upgrade error.
{0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
You have failed {0} times to unlock this session. CTC will exit after you click OK or close this dialog box.
The maximum amount of attempts to unlock this session has been reached.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Current version of CTC does not support bridge and roll on circuits, which are entirely created by TL1. To continue with bridge and roll in CTC, selected circuits will be ungraded.
CAUTION: Once circuits are upgraded, future bridge and roll on the circuits can only be done in CTC.
OK to upgrade selected circuits and continue bridge and roll operation?
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-13
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-2327
EID-2328
EID-2329
EID-2330
EID-2331
EID-2332
EID-3001
EID-3002
EID-3003
EID-3004
EID-3005
EID-3006
EID-3007
EID-3008
EID-3009
EID-3010
EID-3011
EID-3012
EID-3013
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Current version of CTC does not support bridge and roll on circuits, which are partially created by TL1. To continue with bridge and roll in CTC, selected circuits must be ungraded.
CAUTION: Once circuits are upgraded, future bridge and roll on the circuits can only be done in CTC.
OK to upgrade selected circuits and continue bridge and roll operation?
Circuit reconfigure error.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
{0}
{0} of {1} circuits could not be successfully created.
Circuit verification: selected {0} invalid!
{1}
Deleting {0} may be service affecting.
Hold-off timer validation error in row [0].
{1} hold-off timer for {2} must be between {3}-10,000 ms, in steps of 100 ms.
An Ethernet RMON threshold with the same parameters already exists. Please change one or more of the parameters and try again.
Error retrieving defaults from the node: {0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The selected item, specified by {0}, is invalid as per the details, specified in {1}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An Ethernet remote monitoring (RMON) threshold with the same parameters already exists. Please change one or more of the parameters and try again.
There was an error retrieving the defaults from the specified node.
CTC cannot load the specified file.
Cannot load file {0}.
Cannot load properties from the node
Cannot save NE Update values to file {0}
Cannot load NE Update properties from the node
Provisioning Error for {0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC cannot save the network element (NE) update values to the specified file.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There was a provisioning error for the specified item.
Not a valid Card
No {0} selected
Unable to create bidirectional optical link
The file {0} doesn't exist or cannot be read.
The size of {0} is zero.
{0} encountered while restoring database.
You cannot perform DWDM automatic node setup (ANS) from the Card view.
Please navigate to the Node view and try again.
No item selected.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified file does not exist or cannot be read.
The size of the item is zero.
The specified item was encountered while restoring the database (DB).
3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3014
EID-3015
EID-3016
EID-3017
EID-3018
EID-3019
EID-3020
EID-3021
EID-3022
EID-3023
EID-3024
EID-3025
EID-3026
EID-3027
EID-3028
EID-3029
EID-3031
EID-3032
EID-3033
EID-3035
EID-3036
EID-3037
EID-3038
EID-3039
EID-3040
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Job terminated, {0} was encountered.
{0} encountered while performing DB backup.
Description
The job terminated because the specified item was encountered.
The specified item was encountered while performing the DB backup.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Invalid subnet address.
Subnet address already exists.
Standby TSC not ready.
Incomplete internal subnet address.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The standby Timing and Shelf Control card
(TSC) not ready.
There is an incomplete internal subnet address.
TSC One and TSC Two subnet addresses cannot be the same.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An error was encountered while retrieving the diagnostics: CTC encountered an error.
{0}
Requested action not allowed.
Unable to retrieve low order cross connect mode.
Unable to switch low order cross connect mode.
The requested action is not allowed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error while retrieving thresholds.
Cannot modify send DoNotUse.
Cannot modify SyncMsg.
Cannot change port type.
Unable to switch to the byte because an overhead change is present on this byte of the port.
Error hard-resetting card.
Error resetting card.
The lamp test is not supported on this shelf.
The was an error retrieving the thresholds.
CTC cannot modify the Send DoNotUse field.
CTC cannot modify the SyncMsg field.
CTC cannot change the port type.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There was an error hard-resetting card.
There was an error resetting the card.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The cross connect diagnostics cannot be performed Refer to error or warning message text.
The cross connect diagnostics test is not supported on this shelf. The cross-connect diagnostics test is not supported on this shelf.
A software downgrade cannot be performed to the selected version while a SSXC card is inserted in this shelf. Please follow the steps to replace the SSXC with a CXC card before continuing the software downgrade.
A software downgrade cannot be performed to the selected version while a Single-Shelf
Cross-Connect (SSXC) card is inserted in this shelf. Please follow the steps to replace the SSXC with a Core Cross-Connect card
(CXC) card before continuing the software downgrade.
A software downgrade cannot be performed at the present time. Refer to error or warning message text.
Card change error.
Invalid card type.
There was a card change error.
The card type is invalid.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-15
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3041
EID-3042
EID-3043
EID-3044
EID-3045
EID-3046
EID-3047
EID-3048
EID-3049
EID-3050
EID-3051
EID-3052
EID-3053
EID-3054
EID-3055
EID-3056
EID-3057
EID-3058
EID-3059
EID-3060
EID-3061
EID-3062
EID-3063
EID-3064
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Error applying changes.
The flow control low value must be less than the flow control high value for all ports in the card.
Error while retrieving line info settings.
Error while retrieving line admin info settings.
Error while retrieving transponder line admin info settings.
Description
There was an error applying the changes.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The flow control water mark value must be between {0} and
{1}, inclusive.
The file named {0} could not be read. Please check the name and try again.
There is no IOS startup config file available to download.
The flow control watermark value must be between the specified values.
The specified file could not be read. Please check the name and try again.
There is no Cisco IOS startup configuration file available to download.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There is an update in progress so the download cannot be done at this time.
An exception was caught trying to save the file to your local file system.
The maximum size for a config file in bytes is: {0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The maximum size for a configuration file in bytes is the value specified in the message.
There was an error saving the config file to the TCC.
The value of {0} must be between {1} and {2}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The value of the item must be between the specified values.
Cannot remove provisioned input/output ports or another user is updating the card, please try later.
Cannot create soak maintance pane.
Cannot save defaults to file {0}
Cannot load default properties from the node.
File {0} does not exist.
Error encountered while refreshing.
Cannot remove provisioned input or output ports or another user is updating the card.
Please try later.
CTC cannot create Soak Maintenance tab.
Cannot save defaults to the specified file.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified file does not exist.
There was an error in refreshing.
The ALS Recovery Pulse Interval must be between {0} seconds and {1} seconds.
The ALS Recovery Pulse Duration must be between {0} seconds and {1} seconds.
The automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
Recovery Interval must be between
100 seconds and 300 seconds.
The ALS Recovery Pulse Width must be between 2.00 seconds and 100.0 seconds.
Error encountered while setting values.
Unable to retriever bridge port settings.
Not a G1000 Card.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
This card is not a G1000-4 card.
3-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3066
EID-3067
EID-3068
EID-3069
EID-3070
EID-3075
EID-3076
EID-3077
EID-3078
EID-3079
EID-3080
EID-3081
EID-3082
EID-3083
EID-3084
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3065
EID-3071
EID-3072
EID-3073
EID-3074
EID-3085
EID-3086
EID-3087
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
An error was encountered while attempting to create RMON threshold:
{0}
Description
You must wait some time before you try again.
Minimum sample period must be greater than or equal to 10.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Rising Threshold: Invalid Entry, valid range is from 1 to {0} This is an invalid rising threshold entry. The valid range is from 1 to the specified value.
Falling Threshold: Invalid Entry, valid range is from 1 to {0} This is an invalid falling threshold entry.
The valid range is from 1 to the specified value.
Rising threshold must be greater than or equal to falling threshold.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error in data for ports {0} Exactly one VLAN must be marked untagged for each port. These changes will not be applied.
Get Learned Address
There was an error in the data for the specified ports. Exactly one VLAN must be marked Untagged for each port. These changes will not be applied.
Unable to retrieve the learned MAC address from the NE.
Clear Learned Address
Clear Selected Rows
Clear By {0}
Failure attempting to clear the learned MAC address from a specific card or Ether group.
Failure attempting to clear the learned MAC address from a specific card or Ether group.
Error encountered trying to clear the learned MAC address from either a VLAN or a port.
At least one row in param column needs to be selected.
CTC lost its connection with this node. The NE Setup Wizard will exit.
No optical link selected.
Unable to create optical link.
Cannot apply defaults to node: {0}
Cannot go to the target tab {0}
Port type can't be changed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot apply defaults to the specified node.
Cannot go to the target tab.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot modify the extension byte.
Error in getting statistics.
Cannot modify the {0} extension byte.
Error while retrieving stats.
Error encountered while trying to retrieve laser parameters for
{0}
No OSC Terminations selected
One or more Osc terminations could not be created.
OSC termination could not be edited.
There is no card, or there was an internal communications error when attempting to get the laser statistics from the card.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-17
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3097
EID-3098
EID-3099
EID-3100
EID-3101
EID-3102
EID-3103
EID-3104
EID-3105
EID-3106
EID-3107
EID-3109
EID-3110
EID-3111
EID-3112
EID-3113
EID-3114
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3088
EID-3089
EID-3090
EID-3091
EID-3092
EID-3093
EID-3094
EID-3095
WID-3096
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
No {0} card to switch.
Cannot use/change {0} state when {1} is failed or missing.
Description
No card of the specified type to switch.
Cannot use or change the specified state when it is failed or missing.
Cannot perform operation.
Cannot perform operation as {0} is
{1}LOCKED_ON/LOCKED_OUT.
Cannot perform the operation as protect is active.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Invalid service state. The requested action cannot be applied.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot perform the operation as duplex pair is {0}locked.
Cannot perform the operation as no XC redundancy is available.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Deletion failed since the circuit is in use
Internal communication error encountered while trying to retrieve laser parameters. This can happen when equipment is not present or when equipment is resetting. Check the equipment state and try to refresh the values again.
The ring termination is in use.
No ring terminations selected.
Sorry, entered key does not match existing authentication key.
The entered key does not match existing authentication key.
Error encountered during authentication.
There was an error in authentication.
DCC Metric is not in the range 1 - 65535.
The DCC metric is not in the range 1 to
65535.
There was an invalid DCC metric.
Invalid DCC Metric
Invalid IP Address: {0}
Router priority is not in the range of 0 - 255
The IP address is Invalid.
The router priority is not in the range of 0 to
255.
Invalid Router Priority
Hello Interval is not in the range of 1 - 65535
Invalid Hello Interval
Invalid Dead Interval value. Valid range is 1 - 2147483647
Dead Interval must be larger than Hello Interval
LAN transit delay is not in the range of 1 - 3600 seconds
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The router priority is Invalid.
The hello interval is not in the range of 1 to
65535.
The hello interval is Invalid.
The dead interval is invalid.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The LAN transit delay is not in the range of
1 to 3600 seconds.
Invalid Transmit Delay
Retransmit Interval is not in the range 1 - 3600 seconds
Invalid Retransit Interval
The transmit delay is invalid.
The retransmit interval is not in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
The retransmit interval is invalid.
3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3115
EID-3116
EID-3117
EID-3118
EID-3119
EID-3120
EID-3121
EID-3122
EID-3123
EID-3124
EID-3125
EID-3126
EID-3127
EID-3128
EID-3129
EID-3130
EID-3131
EID-3132
EID-3133
EID-3134
EID-3135
EID-3136
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
LAN Metric is not in the range 1 - 65535.
Invalid LAN Metric
If OSPF is active on LAN, no DCC Area Ids may be 0.0.0.0.
Please change all DCC Area Ids to non-0.0.0.0 values before enabling OSPF on the LAN.
Description
The LAN metric is not in the range 1 to
65535.
The LAN metric is invalid.
Refer to error or warning message text.
If OSPF is active on LAN, LAN Area ID may not be the same as DCC Area Id.
Validation Error
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC was unable to validate the values entered by the user. This error message is common to several different provisioning tabs within CTC (examples include the
SNMP provisioning tab, the General>
Network provisioning tab, the Security >
Configuration provisioning tab, etc.).
No object of type {0} selected to delete.
No object of the selected type selected to delete.
There is an error deleting the item.
Error Deleting {0}
No object of type {0} selected to edit.
No object of the specified type selected to edit.
There was an error editing the item.
Error Editing {0}
{0} termination is in use. Check if {0} is used by IPCC.
No {0} Terminations selected.
The specified termination is in use.
No specified terminations are selected.
{0} termination could not be edited.
The specified termination could not be edited.
Unable to provision orderwire because E2 byte is in use by {0}. Refer to error or warning message text.
The authentication key may only be {0} characters maximum The authentication key can only be the specified characters maximum.
The authentication keys do not match!
Error creating OSPF area virtual link.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error creating OSPF virtual link.
CTC encountered an error creating the Area
Virtual Link.
CTC encountered an error creating the
Virtual Link.
Error setting OSPF area range: {0}, {1}, false.
Max number of OSPF area ranges exceeded.
CTC encountered an error setting the area range for the specified values.
The maximum number of area ranges has been exceeded.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Invalid Area ID. Use DCC OSPF Area ID, LAN Port Area ID, or 0.0.0.0.
Invalid Mask
Invalid Range Address
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004 3-19
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3138
EID-3139
EID-3140
EID-3141
EID-3142
EID-3143
EID-3144
EID-3145
EID-3146
EID-3147
EID-3148
EID-3149
EID-3150
EID-3151
EID-3152
EID-3153
EID-3154
EID-3155
EID-3156
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3137
EID-3157
EID-3158
EID-3159
1
EID-3160
EID-3161
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Your request has been rejected because the timing source information was updated while your changes were still pending. Please retry.
Invalid clock source for switching.
Cannot switch to a reference of inferior quality.
Higher priority switch already active.
Attempt to access a bad reference.
No Switch Active.
Error creating static route entry.
Max number of static routes exceeded.
RIP Metric is not in the range 1-15.
Invalid RIP Metric
Error creating summary address.
No Layer 2 domain has been provisioned.
Unable to retrieve MAC addresses.
The target file {0} is not a normal file.
The target file {0} is not writeable.
Error creating Protection Group
Cannot delete card, it is in use.
Cannot {0} card, provisioning error.
Error Building Menu
Error on building menu (cards not found for {0} group)
Unable to set selected model: unexpected model class {0}
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The maximum number of static routes has been exceeded.
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) metric is not in the range 1 to 15.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified target file is not a normal file.
The specified target file is not writeable.
CTC encountered an error creating
Protection Group.
Cannot delete card. It is in use.
CTC cannot perform the task on the card.
CTC encountered an error building the menu.
CTC encountered an error on building the menu (cards not found for the specified group).
CTC encountered an unexpected model class while trying to complete the task.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to switch, a similar or higher priority condition exists on peer or far-end card.
Error applying operation.
{0} error encountered.
Ring Upgrade Error
CTC encountered an error applying this operation.
CTC encountered the displayed error.
An error was encountered while attempting to upgrade the BLSR. Refer to the details portion of the error dialog box for more information.
3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3162
EID-3163
EID-3164
EID-3165
EID-3166
EID-3167
EID-3168
EID-3169
EID-3170
EID-3171
EID-3172
EID-3173
EID-3174
EID-3175
EID-3176
EID-3177
EID-3178
EID-3179
EID-3180
EID-3181
EID-3182
EID-3183
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
This protection operation cannot be set because the protection operation on the other side has been changed but not yet applied.
Cannot validate data for row {0}
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot validate data for the specified row.
New Node ID ({0}) for Ring ID {1} duplicates ID of node {2} The new specified node ID for the specified ring ID is the same as the second specified node ID.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The Ring ID provided is already in use. Ring IDs must be unique
Error refreshing {0} table
Slot already in use
Provisioning Error
CTC encountered an error refreshing the specified table.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An error was encountered while attempting the specified provisioning operation. Refer to the details portion of the error dialog box for more information.
Error Adding Card
Cannot delete card, {0}
Error creating Trap Destination
No RMON Thresholds selected
The contact “{0}” exceeds the limit of {1} characters.
The location “{0}” exceeds the limit of {1} characters.
CTC encountered an error adding the card.
Cannot delete the specified card.
CTC encountered an error creating the trap destination.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified contact exceeds the specified character limit.
The specified location exceeds the specified character limit.
The operator identifier “{0}” exceeds the limit of {1} characters.
The operator specific information “{0}” exceeds the limit of
{1} characters.
The node name cannot be empty.
The name “{0}” exceeds the limit of {1} characters.
Protect card is in use.
1+1 Protection Group does not exist.
Y Cable Protection Group does not exist.
The Topology Element is in use and cannot be deleted as requested
Error Deleting Protection Group
The specified operator identifier exceeds the specified character limit.
The specified operator specific information exceeds the specified character limit.
The specified name is empty.
The specified name exceeds the specified character limit.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC encountered an error deleting the protection group.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-21
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3216
EID-3217
EID-3218
EID-3219
EID-3220
EID-3222
EID-3223
EID-3224
EID-3225
EID-3226
EID-3227
EID-3228
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3184
EID-3185
EID-3186
EID-3187
EID-3214
EID-3215
EID-3229
EID-3230
EID-3231
EID-3232
EID-3233
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
No {0} selected.
There is a protection switch operation on this ring. Therefore, it cannot be deleted at this time.
Busy {0} is {1} and cannot be deleted as requested.
Description
You must select an item before completing this task.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error deleting trap destination.
Could not get number of HOs for line.
Error in refreshing.
Invalid proxy port.
Could not refresh stats.
Unable to launch automatic node setup.
Unable to refresh automatic node setup information.
Error refreshing row {0}
Could not clear stats.
Error cancelling software upgrade.
Error accepting load.
Error while refreshing pane.
{0} termination(s) could not be deleted. {1}
Unable to record a baseline, performance metrics will remain unchanged.
{0} termination(s) could not be created.
{1}
RIP is active on the LAN. Please disable RIP before enabling
OSPF.
OSPF is active on the LAN. Please disable OSPF before enabling RIP.
Error in Set OPR
Cannot transition port state indirectly: try editing directly
Current loopback provisioning does not allow this state transition
The item is in use and cannot be deleted as requested.
CTC encountered an error deleting the trap destination.
The number of High Orders for line is not available.
Used frequently in pane classes to indicate a general error condition when trying to refresh from the model.
Invalid Proxy port.
Could not refresh statistics.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Failure trying to retrieve optical link information.
Error refreshing the specified row.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
RIP is active on the LAN. Please disable
RIP before enabling OSPF.
OSPF is active on the LAN. Please disable
OSPF before enabling RIP.
An error was encountered while attempting to provision the optical power received
(OPR).
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3246
EID-3247
EID-3248
EID-3249
EID-3250
EID-3251
EID-3252
EID-3253
EID-3254
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3234
EID-3235
EID-3236
EID-3237
EID-3238
EID-3239
EID-3240
EID-3241
EID-3242
WID-3243
EID-3244
WID-3245
EID-3255
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Current synchronization provisioning does not allow this state transition
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot perform requested state transition on this software version.
Database Restore failed. {0}
Database Backup failed. {0}
Send PDIP setting on {0} is inconsistent with that of control node {1}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The specified database restore failed.
The specified database backup failed.
The send payload defect indicator path
(PDI-P) setting on the specified item is inconsistent with that of the specified control node.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The overhead termination is invalid
The maximum number of overhead terminations has been exceeded.
The {0} termination port is in use.
LDCC exists on the selected ports.
Please create SDCC one by one.
LDCC exists on the selected port.
Please remove one after the connection is created.
SDCC exists on the selected ports.
Please create LDCC one by one.
The port you have chosen as LDCC endpoint already supports an SDCC. The port cannot support both DCCs. After the LDCC is created, verify that no EOC alarms are present and then delete the SDCC to complete the upgrade.
Wizard unable to validate data: {0}
Ordering error. The absolute value should be {0}
Wrong parameter is changed: {0}
Invalid voltage increment value.
Invalid power monitor range.
Unable to complete requested action. {0}
No download has been initiated from this CTC session.
Reboot operation failed. {0}
Validation Error. {0}
The specified termination port is in use.
The line DCC (LDCC) exists on the selected ports. Please create SDCC one by one.
An LDCC exists on this port. Delete the
LDCC after the connection is created.
SDCC exists on the selected ports. Please create LDCC one by one.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC encountered an error.
Ordering error. The absolute value should be the number specified.
CTC changed the wrong parameter.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC is unable to complete requested action.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The reboot operation failed.
The Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) was unable to validate the values entered by the user, specified by {0}. This error message is common to several different provisioning tabs within the CTC.
Can not change timing configuration, manual/force operation is performed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004 3-23
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-3256
EID-3257
EID-3258
EID-3259
EID-3260
EID-3261
EID-3262
WID-3263
EID-3264
EID-3265
EID-3266
WID-3267
WID-3268
WID-3269
WID-3270
WID-3271
WID-3272
WID-3273
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Could not assign timing reference(s) because - at least one timing reference has already been used and/or - a timing reference has been attempted to be used twice. Please use the
“Reset” button and verify the settings.
Duplicate DCC number detected: {0}.
There was a software error attempting to download the file.
Please try again later.
Create FC-MR Threshold
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC detected a duplicate DCC number.
Refer to error or warning message text.
You must create an Fibre Channel Multirate
(FC_MR) card threshold.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An error was encountered while provisioning the internal subnet:
{0}
The port rate provisioning cannot be changed while circuits exist on this port.
The port provisioning cannot be changed when the port status is not OOS.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
You are using Java version {0}. CTC should run with Java version {1}. It can be obtained from the installation CD or http://java.sun.com/j2se/
CTC is being launched with the wrong version of the JRE {0}. This version of CTC requires a particular version of the JRE {1}.
The CTC and browser must be closed and restarted to allow the correct Java version to be loaded.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The port provisioning cannot be changed while the port is in service.
Error modifying Protection Group There was an error modifying the protection group.
Conditions could not be retrieved from the shelf or card view.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot edit XTC protection group.
Invalid entry. {0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The entry is invalid.
{0} was successfully initiated for {1} but its completion status was not able to be obtained from the node. {0} may or may not have succeeded. When the node is accessible, check its software version.
The file {0} does not exist.
The value entered must be greater than {0}.
The specified task was successfully initiated for the item, but its completion status was not able to be obtained from the node. The task might or might not have succeeded. When the node is accessible, check its software version.
The specified file does not exist.
Entry required
{0} already exists in the list.
The value entered must be greater than the value shown.
An entry is required for this task.
The specified item already exists in the list.
3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-3274
WID-3275
WID-3276
WID-3277
WID-3279
WID-3280
WID-3281
WID-3283
WID-3284
WID-3285
WID-3286
WID-3287
WID-3288
EID-3290
EID-3291
EID-3292
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
A software upgrade is in progress. Network configuration changes that results a node reboot can not take place during software upgrade. Please try again after software upgrade is done.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Make sure the Remote Interface ID and the Local Interface ID on the two sides are matched. (Local Interface ID on this node should equal Remote Interface ID on the neighbor node and vice-versa.)
Both SDCC and LDCC exist on the same selected port.
{0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The description cannot contain more than {0} characters. Your input will be truncated.
Card deleted, returning to shelf view.
Refer to error or warning message text.
ALS will not engage until both the protected trunk ports detect
LOS.
A software upgrade is in progress. {0} can not proceed during a software upgrade. Please try again after the software upgrade has completed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There is a protection switch or another protection operation applied on the ring. Applying this protection operation now will probably cause a traffic outage. OK to continue?
Protection Channel Access circuit found on {0} being set to non-revertive. These circuits will not be able to re-establish after ring or span switch. OK to continue?
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Applying FORCE or LOCKOUT operations may result in traffic loss.
The ring status is INCOMPLETE. CTC cannot determine if there are existing protection operations or switches in other parts of the ring. Applying a protection operation at this time could cause a traffic outage. Please confirm that no other protection operations or switches exist before continuing.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There is a protection operation or protection switch present on the ring. Applying this protection operation now will probably cause a traffic outage.
This ring status is INCOMPLETE. CTC will not be able to apply this change to all of the nodes in the {0}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to delete specified provisionable patchcord(s).
Cannot change revertive behavior due to an active protection switch.
Error resetting shelf.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-25
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3293
EID-3294
EID-3295
EID-3296
EID-3298
EID-3300
EID-3301
EID-3302
EID-3303
EID-3304
EID-3306
EID-3307
EID-3308
EID-3309
EID-3310
EID-3311
EID-3312
EID-3313
EID-3314
EID-3315
EID-3316
EID-3317
EID-3318
EID-3319
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
No such provisionable patchcord.
{1}
DCC number is out of range.
not OSPF turned on the LAN interface and the back bone area set on a DCC interface.
Ethernet circuits must be bidirectional.
Error while creating connection object at {0}.
DWDM Link can be used only for optical channel circuits.
OCH-NC circuit: link excluded - wrong direction.
Description
You are attempting to delete a provisionable patchcord that does not exist. This happens when multiple instances of CTC are running and attempting to delete the same provisionable patchcord concurrently.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
No RMON thresholds available for selected port.
This card does not support RMON thresholds.
Buffer-to-buffer credit is only supported for Fibre Channel (FC) and FICON.
ALS Auto Restart is not supported by this interface.
Can not have duplicate OSPF Area IDs.
LAN metric may not be zero.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Standby {0} not ready.
DCC Area ID and {0} conflict.
Standby controller card is not ready.
DCC Area ID and ring type, specified by
{0}, conflict each other due to the details specified by {1}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
You cannot have the default OSPF area on a
DCC while OSPF is enabled on the LAN.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
DWDM Link does not have wavelength available.
Laser already on.
Unable to change the power setpoint {0} {1}
Refer to error or warning message text.
The optical channel (circuit) does not allow the specified link to be included because it is in the wrong optical direction.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to change the power setpoint.
Unable to modify offset. Amplifier port is in service state.
Requested action not allowed. Invalid state value.
Unable to perform operation.
Wrong node side.
Name too long.
Illegal name.
Wrong line selection.
The new setpoint would either make the thresholds inconsistent or set the fail threshold outside the range.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
CTC is unable to perform operation.
This task was applied to the wrong node side.
The name you entered is too long.
The name you entered is illegal.
You selected the wrong line.
3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-3328
EID-3330
EID-3331
EID-3334
EID-3335
EID-3336
EID-3337
EID-3338
EID-3339
EID-3340
EID-3341
EID-3342
EID-3343
EID-3344
EID-3345
EID-3346
EID-3347
EID-3348
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3320
EID-3321
EID-3322
EID-3323
EID-3324
EID-3325
EID-3326
EID-3327
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Unable to delete optical link.
This feature is unsupported by this version of software.
Equipment is not plugged-in.
APC system is busy.
No path to regulate.
Requested action not allowed.
Wrong input value.
Error in getting thresholds.
Error applying changes to row {0}.Value out of range.
Description
CTC is unable to delete the optical link.
Refer to error or warning message text.
At least one equipment is not plugged in.
Automatic Power Control (APC) system is busy.
There is no circuit path to be regulated.
Generic DWDM provisioning failure message.
The input value is incorrect.
There was an error retrieving the thresholds.
This message is displayed only for the
OSCM/OSC-CSM line thresholds.
There was an error applying the changes to the specified row. The value is out of range.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to switch to the byte because an overhead channel is present on this byte of the port.
Error applying changes to row.
Cannot change timing parameters on protect port.
This port's type cannot be changed: SDH validation check failed. Check if this port is part of a circuit, protection group,
SONET DCC, orderwire, or UNI-C interface.
Error on reading a control mode value.
Error on setting a set point gain value.
Error on reading a set-point gain value.
Error on setting a tilt calibration value.
Error on setting expected wavelength.
Error on reading expected wavelength.
Error on reading actual wavelength.
Error on reading actual band.
Error on reading expected band.
Error on setting expected band.
Error retrieving defaults from the node: {0}.
Cannot load file {0}.
Cannot load properties from the node.
There was an error applying changes to the row.
You cannot change timing parameters on protect port.
This port's type cannot be changed. The
SDH validation check failed. Check to see if this port is part of a circuit, protection group, SONET DCC, orderwire, or user network interface, client (UNI-C) interface.
The Control Mode must be retrieved.
The Gain Set Point must be set.
The Gain Set Point must be retrieved.
The tilt calibration must be set.
The expected wavelength must be set.
The expected wavelength must be retrieved.
The actual wavelength must be retrieved.
The actual band must be retrieved.
The expected band must be retrieved.
The expected band must be set.
There was an error retrieving defaults from the specified node.
CTC cannot load the specified file.
CTC cannot load properties from the node.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-27
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3349
EID-3350
EID-3351
EID-3352
EID-3353
EID-3354
EID-3355
EID-3357
EID-3358
EID-3359
EID-3361
EID-3362
EID-3363
EID-3364
EID-3365
EID-3366
EID-3370
EID-3371
EID-3372
EID-3375
EID-3376
EID-3377
EID-3378
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Cannot save NE Update values to file.
Cannot load NE Update properties from the node:
File {0} does not exist.
Error on setting value at {0}.
There is no such interface available.
Specified endpoint is in use.
Specified endpoint is incompatible.
Unable to calculate connections.
Optical link model does not exist for specified interface.
Unable to set optical parameters for the node.
Ring termination is in use. Error deleting ring termination
Error deleting ring termination.
No ring terminations selected.
Error creating ring ID.
OSC termination is in use.
Error deleting OSC termination.
No optical link has been selected
Error while calculating automatic optical link list.
Attempt to access an OCH-NC connection that has been destroyed.
Expected span loss must be set.
Unable to retrieve measured span loss.
Wrong interface used.
Duplicate origination patchcord identifier.
EID-3379 Duplicate termination patchcord identifier.
Description
CTC cannot save NE Update values to file.
CTC cannot load NE Update properties from the node.
The specified file does not exist.
There was an error setting the value at the specified location.
No such interface exists in CTC.
The end point is in use.
The end point is incompatible.
CTC is unable to calculate connections.
The optical link does not exist for the specified index.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
There was an error deleting ring termination.
You must select a ring termination.
There was an error creating the ring ID.
The optical service channel (OSC) termination is in use.
There was an error deleting the OSC termination.
You must select an optical link.
There was an error calculating the automatic optical link list.
Attempt to access an optical channel network connection that has been destroyed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The provisionable patchcord identifier to the patchcord you are attempting to provision is already in use by another patchcord on the origination node.
The provisionable patchcord identifier to the patchcord you are attempting to provision is already in use by another patchcord on the remote node.
3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3380
EID-3381
EID-3382
EID-3383
WID-3384
EID-3385
EID-3386
EID-3387
EID-3388
EID-3389
EID-3390
EID-3391
WID-3392
WID-3393
WID-3394
WID-3395
EID-3396
EID-3397
EID-3398
EID-3399
EID-3400
EID-3401
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Unable to locate host.
Maximum Frame size must be between {0} and {1} and may be increased in increments of {2}.
Number of credits must be between {0} and {1}.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
GFP Buffers Available must be between {0} and {1} and may be increased in increments of {2}.
You are about to force the use of Secure Mode for this chassis.
You will not be able to undo this operation. OK to continue?
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
{0}. Delete circuits, then try again.
Unable to provision transponder mode:
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
{0}
You must change port{0} to an out-of-service state before changing card parameters. Click Reset to revert the changes.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to change the card mode because the card has circuits.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error encountered while changing the card mode.
Port is in use.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Unable to change the port rate because the port has been deleted.
Could not assign timing reference(s) because - with external timing, only a single protected, or two unprotected timing references per BITS Out may be selected. Please use the
“Reset” button and verify the settings.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Could not assign timing reference(s) because - with line or mixed timing, only a single unprotected timing reference per
BITS Out may be selected. Please use the “Reset” button and verify the settings.
Error refreshing Power Monitoring values.
Invalid IP Configuration: {0}
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Error in IP address, net mask length, default router, or a restricted IIOP port was selected.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Invalid Configuration: The standby controller card is not a
TCC2P card.
Wrong version for file {0}.
Cannot delete PPM.
Cannot delete PPM. It has port(s) in use.
Unable to switch, force to Primary Facility not allowed.
{0} cannot be provisioned for the port while {1} is enabled.
The file {0} is of wrong version.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The relationship between parameters {0} and {1} are such that enabling either one, prevents the provisioning of the other.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-29
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
EID-3402
EID-3403
EID-3404
EID-4000
EID-4001
EID-5000
EID-5001
EID-5002
EID-5003
EID-5004
WID-5005
WID-5006
WID-5007
WID-5008
WID-5009
EID-5010
EID-5011
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Unable to complete the FORCE operation. The protect card is either not present or is not responding. Please check the protect card state and try again.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cannot perform requested state transition on monitored port.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The far end IP address could not be set on the {0} termination.
The IP address cannot be:
Refer to error or warning message text.
loopback (127.0.0.0/8) class D (224.0.0.0/4) class E (240.0.0.0/4) broadcast (255.255.255.255/32) internal {1}
The {0} ring name cannot be changed now. A {0} switch is active.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The {0} ring ID cannot be changed now. A {0} switch is active. You cannot change the ring ID because a switch of the same ring type is active.
Cannot find a valid route for tunnel change request.
Tunnel could not be changed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Tunnel could not be restored and must be recreated manually.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Circuit roll failure.
Refer to error or warning message text.
{0}
There is already one 4F {0} provisioned on the set of nodes involved in {1}. The maximum number of 4F {0} rings has been reached for that node.
There is already one 4F BLSR provisioned on the set of nodes involved in the ring. The maximum number of 4F BLSR rings has been reached for that node.
Refer to error or warning message text.
A non-zero hold-off time can violate switching time standards, and should only be used for a circuit with multiple path selectors.
Warning: Different secondary {0} node should only be used for
DRI or Open-ended path protected circuits.
You should use different secondary end point only for DRI or open-ended path protected circuits.
If you change the scope of this view, the contents of this profile editor will be lost.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Please make sure all the protection groups are in proper state after the cancellation.
Circuit {0} not upgradable. No {1} capable {2}s are available at node {3}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
No VT capable STSs are available at the node.
Domain name already exists.
Domain name may not exceed {0} characters.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-5012
EID-5013
EID-5014
WID-5015
EID-5016
EID-5017
EID-5018
EID-5019
EID-6000
EID-6001
EID-6002
EID-6003
EID-6004
EID-6005
EID-6006
WID-6007
EID-6008
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
Software load on {0} does not support the addition of a node to a 1+1protection group.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
{0} doesn’t support Bridge and Roll Feature. Please select a different port.
An automatic network layout is already in progress, please wait for it to complete for running it again.
{0} cannot be applied to {1}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
You must for the automatic network layout to complete before running it again.
You cannot apply the admin state operation, specified by {0}, to port count, specified by
{1}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
An error was encountered while attempting to provision the
{0}. {1}
Unable to rollback provisioning, the {0} may be left in an
INCOMPLETE state and should be manually removed.
{0} is {1} node and cannot be added to {2} network.
You may have to remove the BLSR manually as it was left incomplete.
You cannot add the node {0} of type {1} to the host node of type {2}. This prevents you from hosting both SONET and SDH nodes in the same session.
Manual mode for this equipment does not support an expected string consisting of all null characters.
Please change the expected string or the path trace mode.
Platform does not support power monitoring thresholds
One of the XC cards has failures or is missing.
The path trace mode does not support strings that consist of null characters. You must either change the expected string or the path trace mode.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
One of the XC cards is locked.
Unable to create OSC termination.
Ring ID already assigned.
Unable to perform a system reset while a BLSR ring is provisioned on the node.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Could not assign timing references:
- Only two DS1 or BITS interfaces can be specified.
- DS1 interfaces cannot be retimed and used as a reference
- BITS-2 is not supported on this platform.
Could not assign timing references:
- NE reference can only be used if timing mode is LINE.
- A BITS reference can only be used if timing mode is not
LINE.
- A line reference can only be used if timing mode is not
EXTERNAL.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cancelling a software upgrade during standby TSC clock acquisition may result in a traffic outage
SF BER and SD BER are not provisionable on the protect line of a protection group.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-31
Chapter 3 Error Messages
EID-6021
EID-6022
EID-6023
EID-6024
EID-6025
EID-6026
EID-6027
EID-6028
EID-6029
EID-6014
EID-6015
EID-6016
EID-6017
EID-6018
EID-6019
EID-6020
Table 3-1
Error or
Warning ID
WID-6009
WID-6010
WID-6011
EID-6012
EID-6013
Error Messages (continued)
Error or Warning Message
If Autoadjust GFP Buffers is disabled, GFP Buffers Available must be set to an appropriate value based on the distance between the circuit end points.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
If Auto Detection of credits is disabled, Credits Available must be set to a value less than or equal to the number of receive credits on the connected FC end point.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Idle filtering should be turned off only when required to operate with non-Cisco FibreChannel/FICON-over-SONET equipment.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Could not change the retiming configuration. There are circuits on this port
NTP/SNTP server could not be changed.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
{1}
Operation failed. The reference state is OOS.
Distance Extension cannot be disabled if the port media type is
FICON 1Gbps ISL or FICON 2Gbps ISL.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Card mode cannot be changed to Fibre Channel Line Rate if the port media type is FICON 1Gbps ISL or FICON 2Gbps ISL.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The destination of a static route cannot be a node IP address.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The destination of a static route cannot be the same as the subnet used by the node.
The destination of a static route cannot be 255.255.255.255
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The destination of a static route cannot be the loopback network
(127.0.0.0/8)
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The subnet mask length for a non-default route must be between 8 and 32.
The subnet mask length for a default route must be 0.
The destination of a static route cannot be an internal network{0}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The destination of a static route cannot be a class D
(224.0.0.0/4) or class E (240.0.0.0/4) address.
The destination of a static route cannot be a class A broadcast address (x.255.255.255/8)
The destination of a static route cannot be a class B broadcast address (x.x.255.255/16)
The destination of a static route cannot be a class C broadcast address (x.x.x.255/24)
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The destination of a static route cannot be the subnet broadcast address associated with a node IP address.
Refer to error or warning message text.
The next hop of a static route cannot be the same as the destination of the route or an internal network{0}.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-32 December 2004
Chapter 3 Error Messages
Table 3-1 Error Messages (continued)
Error or
Warning ID
EID-6030
EID-6031
EID-6032
EID-6033
EID-6035
EID-6036
EID-6037
EID-6038
EID-6039
EID-6040
EID-6041
EID-6042
EID-6043
EID-6044
EID-6045
EID-6046
EID-6047
EID-6048
EID-6049
EID-6050
EID-6051
Error or Warning Message
The next hop of a static default route must be the provisioned default router.
No more static routes can be created.
This static route already exists.
Previous operation is still in progress.
Parent entity does not exist.
Parent PPM entity does not exist.
Equipment type is not supported.
Invalid PPM port.
Card is part of a regeneration group.
Out of memory.
Port is already present.
Port is used as timing source.
DCC or GCC is present.
Card or port is part of protection group.
Port has overhead circuit(s).
G.709 configuration is not compatible with data rate.
Port cannot be deleted bacause its service state is
OOS-MA,LPBK&MT.
{0} is {1}.
Changing the encapsulation type with ports enabled might be service affecting. A circuit using this port must have the same encapsulation at both ends.
Some {0} terminations were not {1}d.
{2}
All {0} terminations were {1}d successfully.
{2}
The authentication key can not be blank.
Description
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
Refer to error or warning message text.
EID-6052 Refer to error or warning message text.
1.
EID-3159 can appear if you attempt to perform another switching operation within a certain time interval. This interval is an algorithm of three seconds per working card in the protection group. The maximum interval is 10 seconds.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
3-33
Chapter 3 Error Messages
3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
C H A P T E R
4
Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring (PM) parameters are used by service providers to gather, store, set thresholds, and report performance data for early detection of problems. In this chapter, PM parameters and concepts are defined for electrical cards, Ethernet cards, optical cards, and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) cards in the Cisco ONS 15454.
For information about enabling and viewing PM values, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
Chapter topics include:
•
4.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring, page 4-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring, page 4-2
4.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring, page 4-3
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions, page 4-4
4.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards, page 4-11
4.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards, page 4-26
4.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards, page 4-36
4.8 Performance Monitoring for Transponder and Muxponder Cards, page 4-38
4.9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking Cards, page 4-41
4.10 Performance Monitoring for DWDM Cards, page 4-43
Note For additional information regarding PM parameters, refer to Telcordia documents GR-1230-CORE,
GR-820-CORE, GR-499-CORE, and GR-253-CORE and the ANSI T1.231 document entitled Digital
Hierarchy - Layer 1 In-Service Digital Transmission Performance Monitoring .
4.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring
Thresholds are used to set error levels for each PM parameter. You can set individual PM threshold values from the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) card view Provisioning tab. For procedures on provisioning card thresholds, such as line, path, and SONET thresholds, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide .
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-1 December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
During the accumulation cycle, if the current value of a performance monitoring parameter reaches or exceeds its corresponding threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (TCA) is generated by the node and displayed by CTC. TCAs provide early detection of performance degradation. When a threshold is crossed, the node continues to count the errors during a given accumulation period. If zero is entered as the threshold value, generation of TCAs is disabled, but performance monitoring continues.
Note Due to limitation of memory and number of TCAs generates by different platforms, you can manually add/modify the following two (2) properties to their property file (CTC.INI for Windows and .ctcrc for
Unix) to fit the need: ctc.15xxx.node.tr.lowater=yyy (where xxx is platform and yyy is number of lowater mark. Default lowater mark is 25) ctc.15xxx.node.tr.hiwater=yyy (where xxx is platform and yyy is number of hiwater mark. Default hiwater mark is 50)
If the number of incoming TCA is greater than the hiwater, it will keep the latest lowater and discard older ones.
Change the threshold if the default value does not satisfy your error monitoring needs. For example, customers with a critical DS-1 installed for 911 calls must guarantee the best quality of service on the line; therefore, they lower all thresholds so that the slightest error raises a TCA.
4.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
Intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows transparent monitoring of a constituent channel of an incoming transmission signal by a node that does not terminate that channel. Many large networks only use line terminating equipment (LTE), not path terminating equipment (PTE).
shows ONS 15454 cards that are considered LTE.
Table 4-1 ONS 15454 Line Terminating Equipment
Electrical LTE
ONS 15454 EC1-12 card
ONS 15454 Optical LTE
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310
OC12 IR/STM4 SH1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550
OC48 IR 1310
1
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
TXP_MR_10G
MXP_MR_2.5G
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8
OC12 LR/STM4 LH1310
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4
OC48 LR 1550
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550
OC48 ELR 200 GHz
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
1.
An OC-48 IR card used in a BLSR does not support IPPM during a protection switch.
4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
ONS 15454 Software R3.0 and higher allow LTE cards to monitor near-end PM data on individual STS payloads by enabling IPPM. After enabling IPPM provisioning on the line card, service providers can monitor large amounts of STS traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient.
IPPM occurs only on STS paths that have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the IPPM enabled paths. The monitored IPPM parameters are STS CV-P, STS ES-P, STS SES-P,
STS UAS-P, and STS FC-P.
Note Far-end IPPM is not supported by all OC-N cards. It is supported by OC3-4 and EC-1 cards. However,
SONET path PMs can be monitored by logging into the far-end node directly.
The ONS 15454 performs IPPM by examining the overhead in the monitored path and by reading all of the near-end path PM values in the incoming direction of transmission. The IPPM process allows the path signal to pass bidirectionally through the node completely unaltered.
See
for detailed information and definitions of specific IPPM parameters.
4.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate timing errors on SONET networks. When a network is out of synchronization, jitter and wander occur on the transported signal. Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip.
Slips cause different effects in service. Voice service has intermittent audible clicks. Compressed voice technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls. Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience dropped calls. Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames. Encryption service loses the encryption key, causing data to be transmitted again.
Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VT payloads. The STS payload pointer is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1 byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss.
There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification count parameters. PPJC is a count of path-detected (PPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) positive pointer justifications.
NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) negative pointer justifications depending on the specific PM name. PJCDIFF is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. PJCS-PDET-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more
PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN.
A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes. A difference between the counts means the node transmitting the original pointer justification has timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the STS-1.
You must enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for LTE cards. See
for a list of Cisco ONS 15454 LTE cards. In CTC, the count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the card view Provisioning tab.
for detailed information and definitions of specific pointer justification count
PM parameters.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-3
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
Table 4-2 gives definitions for each type of performance-monitoring parameter found in this chapter.
Table 4-2 Performance-Monitoring Parameters
Parameter
AISS-P
BBE-PM
BBE-SM
BBER-PM
BBER-SM
BIEC
CSS
CSS-P
CVCP-P
CVCP-PFE
CGV
CV-L
CV-P
CV-PFE
Definition
AIS Seconds Path (AISS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more alarm indication signal (AIS) defects.
Path Monitoring Background Block Errors (BBE-PM) indicates the number of background block errors recorded in the optical transport network (OTN) path during the PM time interval.
Section Monitoring Background Block Errors (BBE-SM) indicates the number of background block errors recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Path Monitoring Background Block Errors Ratio (BBER-PM) indicates the background block errors ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
Section Monitoring Background Block Errors Ratio (BBER-SM) indicates the background block errors ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Bit Errors Corrected (BIEC) indicated the number of bit errors corrected in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval.
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) indicates the count of the seconds when at least one or more controlled slips have occurred.
Controlled Slip Seconds Path (CSS-P) indicates the count of the seconds when at least one or more controlled slips have occurred.
Code Violation CP-bit Path (CVCP-P) is a count of CP-bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation period.
Code Violation CP-bit Path (CVCP-PFE) is a parameter that is counted when the three far-end block error (FEBE) bits in an M-frame are not all collectively set to 1.
Code Group Violations (CGV) is a count of received code groups that do not contain a start or end delimiter.
Line Code Violation (CV-L) indicates the number of coding violations occurring on the line. This parameter is a count of bipolar violations
(BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the accumulation period.
Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P second register.
Far-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-PFE) is a count of BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current
CV-PFE second register.
4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
Table 4-2
Parameter
CVP-P
CV-S
CV-V
DCG
ESA-P
ESB-P
ESCP-P
ESCP-PFE
ES-L
ES-P
ES-PFE
ES-PM
ESP-P
ESR-PM
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Code Violation Path (CVP-P) is a code violation parameter for M23 applications. CVP-P is a count of P-bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation period.
Section Coding Violation (CV-S) is a count of bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors detected at the section-layer (that is, using the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). Up to eight section BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame; each error increments the current CV-S second register.
Code Violation VT Layer (CV-V) is a count of the BIP errors detected at the VT path layer. Up to two BIP errors can be detected per VT superframe, with each error incrementing the current CV-V second register.
Data Code Groups (DCG) is a count of received data code groups that do not contain ordered sets.
Path Errored Seconds-A (ESA-P) is the count of 1-second intervals with exactly one CRC-6 error and no alarm indication signal (AIS) or SEF defects.
Path Errored Seconds-B (Rx ESB-P) is a count of 1-second intervals with between 2 and 319 CRC-6 errors and no AIS or SEF.
Errored Seconds CP-bit Path (ESCP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more
AIS defects. ESCP-P is defined for the C-bit parity application.
Far-End Errored Seconds CP-bit Path (ESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more M-frames with the three
FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1 or one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.
Line Errored Seconds (ES-L) is a count of the seconds containing one or more anomalies (BPV + EXZ) and/or defects (that is, loss of signal) on the line.
Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS Path (AIS-P) defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or a Loss of
Pointer Path (LOP-P) defect can also cause an ES-P.
Far-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-PFE) is a count of the seconds when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, far-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also cause an STS ES-PFE.
Path Monitoring Errored Seconds (ES-PM) indicates the errored seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
Errored Seconds Path (ESP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.
Path Monitoring Errored Seconds Ratio (ESR-PM) indicates the errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-5
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
4-6
Table 4-2
Parameter
ESR-SM
ES-S
ES-SM
ES-V
FC-L
FC-P
FC-PFE
FC-PM
FC-SM
IOS
IPC
LBCL-MIN
LBCL-AVG
LBCL-MAX
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Section Monitoring Errored Seconds Ratio (ESR-SM) indicates the errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Section Errored Seconds (ES-S) is a count of the number of seconds when at least one section-layer BIP error was detected or an SEF or loss of signal (LOS) defect was present.
Section Monitoring Errored Seconds (ES-SM) indicates the errored seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Errored Seconds VT Layer (ES-V) is a count of the seconds when at least one VT Path BIP error was detected. An AIS Virtual Tributary (VT)
(AIS-V) defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an
LOP VT (LOP-V) defect can also cause an ES-V.
Line Failure Count (FC-L) is a count of the number of near-end line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS Line (AIS-L) failure is declared or when a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.
Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a Section Trace Identifier
Mismatch Path (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three-Bit (Enhanced)
Remote Failure Indication Path Connectivity (ERFI-P-CONN) for that path. The failure event ends when these failures are cleared.
Far-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-PFE) is a count of the number of near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a TIM-P failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports ERFI-P-CONN for that path. The failure event ends when these failures are cleared.
Path Monitoring Failure Counts (FC-PM) indicates the failure counts recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
Section Monitoring Failure Counts (FC-SM) indicates the failure counts recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Idle Ordered Sets (IOS) is a count of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
Invalid Packets (IPC) is the count of received packets that contain errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
Laser Bias Current Line—Minimum (LBCL-MIN) is the minimum percentage of laser bias current.
Laser Bias Current Line—Average (LBCL-AVG) is the average percentage of laser bias current.
Laser Bias Current Line—Maximum (LBCL-MAX) is the maximum percentage of laser bias current.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
Table 4-2
Parameter
LOFC
LOSS-L
NIOS
NPJC-PDET-P
NPJC-PGEN-P
OPR
OPR-AVG
OPR-MAX
OPR-MIN
OPT
OPT-AVG
OPT-MAX
OPT-MIN
OPWR-AVG
OPWR-MAX
OPWR-MIN
PJCDIFF-P
PJNEG
PJPOS
PPJC-PDET-P
PPJC-PGEN-P
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC)
Line Loss of Signal (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects.
Non-Idle Ordered Sets (NIOS) is a count of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal.
Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated
(NPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
Optical Power Received (OPR) is the measure of average optical power received as a percentage of the nominal OPR.
Average Receive Optical power (dBm)
Maximum Receive Optical Power (dBm)
Minimum Receive Optical Power (dBm)
Optical Power Transmitted (OPT) is the measure of average optical power transmitted as a percentage of the nominal OPT.
Average Transmit Optical Power (dBm)
Maximum Transmit Optical Power (dBm)
Minimum Transmit Optical Power (dBm)
Optical Power - Average (OPWR-AVG) is the measure of average optical power on the unidirectional port.
Optical Power - Maximum (OPWR-MAX) is the measure of maximum value of optical power on the unidirectional port.
Optical Power - Minimum (OPWR-MIN) is the measure of minimum value of optical power on the unidirectional port.
Pointer Justification Count Difference, STS Path (PJCDIFF-P) is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. That is, PJCDiff-P is equal to (PPJC-PGEN-P –
NPJC-PGEN-P) – (PPJC-PDET-P – NPJC-PDET-P).
Pointer Justification Negative (PJNEG)
Pointer Justification Positive (PJPOS)
Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal.
Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-7
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
4-8
Table 4-2
Parameter
PJCS-PDET-P
PJCS-PGEN-P
PSC
PSC-R
PSC-S
PSC-W
PSD
PSD-R
PSD-S
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET.
Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN.
In a 1 + 1 protection scheme for a working card, Protection Switching
Count (PSC) is a count of the number of times service switches from a working card to a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the working card. For a protection card, PSC is a count of the number of times service switches to a working card from a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the protection card. The PSC PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used.
In a four-fiber bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR), Protection
Switching Count-Ring (PSC-R) is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to a working line. A count is only incremented if ring switching is used.
In a four-fiber BLSR, Protection Switching Count-Span (PSC-S) is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to the working line. A count is only incremented if span switching is used.
For a working line in a two-fiber BLSR, Protection Switching
Count-Working (PSC-W) is a count of the number of times traffic switches away from the working capacity in the failed line and back to the working capacity after the failure is cleared. PSC-W increments on the failed working line and PSC increments on the active protect line.
For a working line in a four-fiber BLSR, PSC-W is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to the working line. PSC-W increments on the failed line and PSC-R or PSC-S increments on the active protect line.
Protection Switching Duration (PSD) applies to the length of time, in seconds, that service is carried on another line. For a working line, PSD is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line.
For the protection line, PSD is a count of the seconds that the line was used to carry service. The PSD PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used.
In a four-fiber BLSR, Protection Switching Duration-Ring (PSD-R) is a count of the seconds that the protection line was used to carry service. A count is only incremented if ring switching is used.
In a four-fiber BLSR, Protection Switching Duration-Span (PSD-S) is a count of the seconds that the protection line was used to carry service. A count is only incremented if span switching is used.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
December 2004
Table 4-2
Parameter
SASCP-P
SASP
SASP-P
SESCP-P
SEF-S
SESCP-P
SESCP-PFE
SES-L
SES-P
SES-PFE
SES-PM
SESP-P
SES-S
SES-SM
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
SEF/AIS Seconds CP-bit Path (SASCP-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path.
SEF/AIS Seconds (SASP) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path.
SEF/AIS Seconds Path (SASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path.
Severely Errored Seconds CP-bit Path (SESCP-P) is a count of seconds containing more than 44 CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS-S) is a count of the seconds when an SEF defect was present. An SEF defect is expected to be present during most seconds when an LOS or loss of frame (LOF) defect is present. However, there can be situations when the SEFS-S parameter is only incremented based on the presence of the SEF defect.
Severely Errored Seconds CP-bit Path (SESCP-P) is a count of seconds containing more than 44 CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.
Severely Errored Seconds CP-bit Path (SESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects, or one or more 44 M-frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1.
Line Severely Errored Seconds (SES-L) is a count of the seconds containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies (BPV + EXZ >
44) and/or defects on the line.
Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An
AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an
LOP-P defect can also cause an SES-P.
Far-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-PFE) is a count of the seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An
AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, far-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also cause an SES-PFE.
Path Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds (SES-PM) indicates the severely errored seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
Severely Errored Seconds Path (SESP-P) is a count of seconds containing more than 44 P-bit parity violations, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.
Section Severely Errored Seconds (SES-S) is a count of the seconds when
K (see Telcordia GR-253 for value) or more section-layer BIP errors were detected or an SEF or LOS defect was present.
Section Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds (SES-SM) indicates the severely errored seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-9
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.4 Performance-Monitoring Parameter Definitions
Table 4-2
Parameter
SESR-PM
SESR-SM
SES-V
UAS-L
UASCP-P
UASCP-PFE
UAS-P
UAS-PFE
UAS-PM
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Path Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds Ratio (SESR-PM) indicates the severely errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
Section Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds Ratio (SESR-SM) indicates the severely errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Severely Errored Seconds VT Layer (SES-V) is a count of seconds when
K (600) or more VT Path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-V defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can also cause SES-V.
Line Unavailable Seconds (UAS-L) is a count of the seconds when the line is unavailable. A line becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ls, and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as SES-Ls.
Unavailable Seconds CP-bit Path (UASCP-P) is a count of one-second intervals when the DS-3 path is unavailable. A DS-3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive SESCP-Ps occur. The ten SESCP-Ps are included in unavailable time. After the DS-3 path becomes unavailable, it becomes available again when ten consecutive seconds with no SESCP-Ps occur. The ten seconds with no SESCP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.
Unavailable Seconds CP-bit Path (UASCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals when the DS-3 path becomes unavailable. A DS-3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive far-end CP-bit SESs occur. The ten
CP-bit SESs are included in unavailable time. After the DS-3 path becomes unavailable, it becomes available again when ten consecutive seconds occur with no CP-bit SESs. The ten seconds with no CP-bit SESs are excluded from unavailable time.
Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps, and continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as SES-Ps.
Far-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-PFE) is a count of the seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as
SES-PFEs, and continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as SES-PFEs.
Path Monitoring Unavailable Seconds (UAS-PM) indicates the unavailable seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval.
4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards
Table 4-2
Parameter
UASP-P
UAS-SM
UAS-V
UNC-WORDS
VPC
Performance-Monitoring Parameters (continued)
Definition
Unavailable Seconds Path (UASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals when the DS-3 path is unavailable. A DS-3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive SESP-Ps occur. The ten SESP-Ps are included in unavailable time. After the DS-3 path becomes unavailable, it becomes available again when ten consecutive seconds with no SESP-Ps occur. The ten seconds with no SESP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.
Section Monitoring Unavailable Seconds (UAS-SM) indicates the unavailable seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Unavailable Seconds VT Layer (UAS-V) is a count of the seconds when the VT path was unavailable. A VT path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Vs, and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as
SES-Vs.
Uncorrectable Words (UNC-WORDS) is the number of uncorrectable words detected in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval.
Valid Packets (VPC) is a count of received packets that contain non-errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
4.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards
The following sections define performance monitoring parameters for the EC1-12, DS1-14, DS1N-14,
DS3-12, DS3-12E, DS3N-12, DS3N-12E, DS3i-N-12, DS3XM-6, DS3XM-12, and DS3/EC1-48 cards.
4.5.1 EC1-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-1 shows signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-2 shows where overhead
bytes detected on the application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) produce performance monitoring parameters for the EC1-12 card.
Figure 4-1
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the EC1-12 Card
EC1 Signal
ONS 15454
Fiber
EC1 OC48
ONS 15454
OC48
EC1 Signal
EC1
PTE
EC1 Path (EC1 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-11
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.1 EC1-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-2
ONS 15454
Note The XX in
represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
PM Read Points on the EC1-12 Card
EC1 Card XC Card(s) OC-N
Tx/Rx
LIU
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on LIU
EC1 Side
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEFS-S
CV-L
SES-L
ES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
Framer
SONET Side
PPJC-Pdet
NPJC-Pdet
PPJC-Pgen
NPJC-Pgen
PMs read on Framer
BTC
Table 4-3 lists the PM parameters for the EC1-12 cards.
Table 4-3 EC1-12 Card PMs
Section (NE)
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEF-S
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
PPJC-PDET-P
NPJC-PDET-P
PPJC-PGEN-P
NPJC-PGEN-P
PJCS-PDET-P
PJCS-PGEN-P
PJC-DIFF-P
Line (FE)
CV-LFE
ES-LFE
SES-LFE
UAS-LFE
FC-LFE
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-3 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-3
PTE CSU
Monitored Signal Types for the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
DS1 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
DS1 Signal
PTE CSU
Fiber
FDL PRM
DS1 OC-N OC-N DS1
FDL PRM
DS1 FDL (DS1 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
DS1 Path (DS1 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
VT Path (XX-V) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-3 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
Figure 4-4 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring
parameters for the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 cards.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-13
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-4
ONS 15454
PM Read Points on the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
DS1 and DS1N Cards
Tx/Rx LIU
DS1 CV-L
DS1 ES-L
DS1 SES-L
DS1 LOSS-L
DS1 Rx AISS-P
DS1 Rx CV-P
DS1 Rx ES-P
DS1 Rx SAS-P
DS1 Rx SES-P
DS1 Rx UAS-P
DS1 Tx AISS-P
DS1 Tx CV-P
DS1 Tx ES-P
DS1 Tx SAS-P
DS1 Tx SES-P
DS1 Tx UAS-P
PMs read on LIU
DS1 Side
Framer
SONET Side
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
VT
Level
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on Framer
Path
Level
BTC
XC Card(s) OC-N
Table 4-4 describes the PM parameters for the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 cards.
DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card PMs Table 4-4
Line (NE)
Line
(FE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
CV-L
ES-L
Rx Path (NE) Tx Path (NE) VT Path (NE) STS Path (NE) Rx Path (FE) VT Path (FE) STS Path (FE)
AISS-P
CV-P
ES-P
SAS-P
SES-P
UAS-P
CSS-P
ESA-P
ESB-P
SEFS-P
AISS-P
CV-P
ES-P
SAS-P
SES-P
UAS-P
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
ES-PFE
ESA-PFE
ES-B-PFE
CV-PFE
CSS-PFE
SEFS-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
CV-VFE
ES-VFE
SES-VFE
UAS-VFE
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
Note Far-end DS1 performance monitoring values are valid only when the DS1 line is set to extended super frame (ESF).
4-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4.5.2.1 DS-1 Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring
Facility Data Link (FDL) performance monitoring enables an ONS 15454 DS1N-14 card to calculate and report DS-1 error rate performance measured at both the near-end and far-end of the FDL. The far-end information is reported as received on the FDL in a performance report message (PRM) from an intelligent channel service unit (CSU).
To monitor DS-1 FDL PM values, the DS-1 must be set to use extended superframe (ESF) format and the FDL must be connected to an intelligent CSU. For procedures on provisioning ESF on the DS1N-14 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
The monitored DS-1 FDL PM parameters are CV-PFE, ES-PFE, ESA-PFE, ESB-PFE, SES-PFE,
SEFS-PFE, CSS-PFE, UAS-PFE, FC-PFE, and ES-LFE. See
for detailed information and definitions of specific FDL DS1 PM parameters.
4.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-5 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3-12 and
DS3N-12 cards.
Figure 4-5
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3 OC-N OC-N DS3
PTE
DS3 Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-5 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-15
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-6
ONS 15454
PM Read Points on the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
LIU
DS3 & DS3N Cards
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
PMs read on LIU
Mux/Demux ASIC
DS3 Side SONET Side
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on Mux/Demux ASIC
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
XC Card(s) OC-N
The PM parameters for the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 cards are described in
.
Table 4-5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card PMs
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
4.5.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
4-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-7
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3E OC-N OC-N DS3E
PTE
DS3E Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Figure 4-8
Note The XX in
Figure 4-7 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
Figure 4-8 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring
parameters for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E cards.
PM Read Points on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
ONS 15454
DS3-12E & DS3N-12E Cards XC Card(s) OC-N
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
DS3 AISS-P
DS3 CVP-P
DS3 ESP-P
DS3 SASP-P
DS3 SESP-P
DS3 UASP-P
DS3 CVCP-P
DS3 ESCP-P
DS3 SESCP-P
DS3 UASCP-P
DS3 CVCP-PFE
DS3 ESCP-PFE
DS3 SASCP-PFE
DS3 SESCP-PFE
DS3 UASCP-PFE
PMs read on LIU
LIU
DS3 Side
Mux/Demux ASIC
SONET Side
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on Mux/Demux ASIC
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
December 2004
describes the PM parameters for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E cards.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-17
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.5 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-6 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card PMs
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
Path (NE)
AISS-P
CV-P
ES-P
SAS-P
2
SES-P
UAS-P
CVCP-P
ESCP-P
SASCP-P
SESCP-P
UASCP-P
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
Path (FE)
1
CVCP-PFE
ESCP-PFE
SASCP-P
SESCP-PFE
UASCP-PFE
1.
The C-bit PMs (PMs that end in “CP-P”) are applicable only if line format is C-bit.
2.
DS3(N)-12E cards support SASP only on the receive (Rx) path.
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
4.5.5 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-9
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3i-N-12 Cards
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3i-N-12 OC-N OC-N DS3i-N-12
PTE
DS3i Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3i-N-12 cards.
4-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.5 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-10 PM Read Points on the DS3i-N-12 Cards
ONS 15454
DS3i-N-12 Card
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
DS3 AISS-P
DS3 CVP-P
DS3 ESP-P
DS3 SASP-P
DS3 SESP-P
DS3 UASP-P
DS3 CVCP-P
DS3 ESCP-P
DS3 SASCP-P
DS3 SESCP-P
DS3 UASCP-P
DS3 CVCP-PFE
DS3 ESCP-PFE
DS3 SASCP-PFE
DS3 SESCP-PFE
DS3 UASCP-PFE
PMs read on LIU
LIU
DS3 Side
Mux/Demux ASIC
SONET Side
CV-P
ES-P
FC-P
SES-P
UAS-P
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
FC-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
PMs read on Mux/Demux ASIC
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
XC Card(s) OC-N
describes the PM parameters for the DS3i-N-12 card.
Table 4-7 DS3i-N-12 Card PMs
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
Path (NE)
AISSP-P
CVP-P
ESP-P
SASP-P
2
SESP-P
UASP-P
CVCP-P
ESCP-P
SASCP-P
SESCP-P
UASCP-P
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
Path (FE)
1
CVCP-PFE
ESCP-PFE
SASCP-PFE
SESCP-PFE
UASCP-PFE
1.
The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
2.
DS3i-N-12 cards support SASP only on the Rx path.
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-19
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.6 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4.5.6 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-11
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-6 Card
Muxed
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
Muxed
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3XM OC-N OC-N DS3XM
PTE
DS1 Path (DS1 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
DS3 Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
VT Path (XX-V) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-11 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3XM-6 card.
4-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.6 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-12
ONS 15454
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-6 Card
DS3XM-6 Card
LIU
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
DS3 AISS-P
DS3 CVP-P
DS3 ESP-P
DS3 SASP-P
DS3 SESP-P
DS3 UASP-P
DS3 CVCP-P
DS3 ESCP-P
DS3 SASCP-P
DS3 SESCP-P
DS3 UASCP-P
DS3 CVCP-PFE
DS3 ESCP-PFE
DS3 SASCP-PFE
DS3 SESCP-PFE
DS3 UASCP-PFE
PMs read on LIU
DS1 Side
DS1 AISS-P
DS1 ES-P
DS1 SAS-P
DS1 SES-P
DS1 UAS-P
Mapper Unit
SONET Side
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC
The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated.
VT
Level
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
XC Card(s) OC-N
lists the PM parameters for the DS3XM-6 cards.
DS3XM-6 Card PMs Table 4-8
DS3 Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
DS3 Path
(NE)
1
AISS-P
CVP-P
ESP-P
SASP-P
2
SESP-P
UASP-P
ESCP-P
SASCP-P
SESCP-P
UASCP-P
CVCP-P
DS1 Path (NE)
AISS-P
ES-P
SAS-P
SES-P
UAS-P
VT Path (NE)
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
1.
The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
2.
DS3XM-6 cards support SASP only on the Rx path.
DS3 Path
CVCP-PFE
ESCP-PFE
SASCP-PFE
SESCP-PFE
UASCP-PFE
VT Path (FE) STS Path (FE)
CV-VFE
ES-VFE
SES-VFE
UAS-VFE
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-21
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.7 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4.5.7 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-13
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-12 Card
Muxed
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
Muxed
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3XM OC-N OC-N DS3XM
PTE
DS1 Path (DS1 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
DS3 Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
VT Path (XX-V) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-13 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3XM-12 card.
4-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.7 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-14
ONS 15454
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-12 Card
DS3XM-12 Card
LIU
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
DS3 AISS-P
DS3 CVP-P
DS3 ESP-P
DS3 SASP-P
DS3 SESP-P
DS3 UASP-P
DS3 CVCP-P
DS3 ESCP-P
DS3 SASCP-P
DS3 SESCP-P
DS3 UASCP-P
DS3 CVCP-PFE
DS3 ESCP-PFE
DS3 SASCP-PFE
DS3 SESCP-PFE
DS3 UASCP-PFE
PMs read on LIU
DS1 Side
DS1 AISS-P
DS1 ES-P
DS1 SAS-P
DS1 SES-P
DS1 UAS-P
Mapper Unit
SONET Side
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC
The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated.
VT
Level
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
XC Card(s) OC-N
lists the PM parameters for the DS3XM-12 cards.
DS3XM-12 Card PMs Table 4-9
DS3 Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
DS3 Path
(NE)
1
AISS-P
CV-P
ES-P
SAS-P
2
SES-P
UAS-P
ESCP-P
SESCP-P
UASCP-P
CVCP-P
DS1 Path
(NE)
AISS-P
CV-P
ES-P
FC-P
SAS-P
SES-P
UAS-P
CSS-P
ESA-P
ESB-P
SEFS-P
VT Path
(NE)
CV-V
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
STS Path
(NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
1.
The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
2.
DS3XM-12 cards support SASP only on the Rx path.
CVCP-PFE
ESCP-PFE
SASCP-PFE
SESCP-PFE
UASCP-PFE
VT Path (FE)
CV-VFE
ES-VFE
SES-VFE
UAS-VFE
STS Path
(FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
BFDL (FE)
CSS
ES
SES
BES
UAS
LOFC
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-23
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.8 DS3/EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
4.5.8 DS3/EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-15
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3/EC1-48 Card
DS3 Signal
ONS 15454 ONS 15454
DS3 Signal
Fiber
DS3 OC-N OC-N DS3
PTE
DS3 Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-15 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3-EC1-48 card.
4-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.5.8 DS3/EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-16
ONS 15454
PM Read Points on the DS3/EC1-48 Card
DS3/EC1-48 Card
LIU
DS3 CV-L
DS3 ES-L
DS3 SES-L
DS3 LOSS-L
DS3 AISS-P
DS3 CVP-P
DS3 ESP-P
DS3 SASP-P
DS3 SESP-P
DS3 UASP-P
DS3 CVCP-P
DS3 ESCP-P
DS3 SASCP-P
DS3 SESCP-P
DS3 UASCP-P
DS3 CVCP-PFE
DS3 ESCP-PFE
DS3 SASCP-PFE
DS3 SESCP-PFE
DS3 UASCP-PFE
PMs read on LIU
Mapper Unit
SONET Side
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
Path
Level
BTC
ASIC
PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC
The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated.
XC Card(s) OC-N
lists the PM parameters for the DS3/EC1-48 cards.
Table 4-10 DS3/EC1-48 Card PMs
DS3 Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
LOSS-L
DS3 Path (NE)
1
AISS-P
CVP-P
ESP-P
SASP-P
2
SESP-P
UASP-P
ESCP-P
SASCP-P
SESCP-P
UASCP-P
CVCP-P
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
CVCP-PFE
ESCP-PFE
SASCP-PFE
SESCP-PFE
UASCP-PFE
1.
The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
2.
DS3/EC1-48 cards support SASP only on the Rx path.
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-25
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards
4.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards
The following sections define performance monitoring parameters and definitions for the ONS 15454
E-Series, G-Series, and ML-Series Ethernet cards.
4.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
CTC provides Ethernet performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical Ethernet statistics. The E-Series Ethernet performance information is divided into the Statistics, Utilization, and History tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window.
4.6.1.1 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
The Ethernet Statistics window lists Ethernet parameters at the line level. The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown. The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero. The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics. Auto-Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs.
Table 4-11 defines the E-Series Ethernet card statistics parameters.
Table 4-11
Parameter
Link Status
Rx Packets
Rx Bytes
Tx Packets
Tx Bytes
Rx Total Errors
Rx FCS
Rx Alignment
Rx Runts
Rx Shorts
Rx Oversized + Jabbers
Tx Collisions
E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
Tx Late Collisions
Definition
Indicates whether link integrity is present; up means present, and down means not present.
Number of packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset.
Total number of receive errors.
Number of packets with a frame check sequence (FCS) error. FCS errors indicate frame corruption during transmission.
Number of packets with alignment errors; alignment errors are received incomplete frames.
Measures undersized packets with bad cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors.
Measures undersized packets with good CRC errors.
Measures oversized packets and jabbers. Size is greater than 1522 errors regardless of CRC errors.
Number of transmit packets that are collisions; the port and the attached device transmitting at the same time causes collisions.
Number of frames that were not transmitted since they encountered a collision outside of the normal collision window (late collision events should occur only rarely).
4-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-11 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters (continued)
Parameter Definition
Tx Excessive Collisions Number of transmissions that are consecutive collisions.
Tx Deferred Number of transmitted packets deferred.
4.6.1.2 E-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
The Utilization window shows the percentage of transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) line bandwidth used by the Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments. The Mode field displays the real-time mode status, such as 100 Full, which is the mode setting configured on the E-Series port. However, if the E-Series port is set to autonegotiate the mode (Auto), this field shows the result of the link negotiation between the E-Series and the peer Ethernet device attached directly to the E-Series port.
The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute,
15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets + inPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
Tx = (outOctets + outPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port (that is, 1 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for E-Series Ethernet cards is shown in
.
Table 4-12 maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
STS
STS-1
STS-3c
STS-6c
STS-12c maxBaseRate
51840000
155000000
311000000
622000000
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
Note The E-Series Ethernet card is a Layer 2 device or switch and supports Trunk Utilization statistics. The
Trunk Utilization statistics are similar to the Line Utilization statistics, but shows the percentage of circuit bandwidth used rather than the percentage of line bandwidth used. The Trunk Utilization statistics are accessed via the card view Maintenance tab.
4.6.1.3 E-Series Ethernet History Window
The Ethernet History window lists past Ethernet statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-13 . The parameters are defined in
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-27
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-13
Time Interval
1 minute
15 minutes
1 hour
1 day (24 hours)
Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval
Number of Intervals Displayed
60 previous time intervals
32 previous time intervals
24 previous time intervals
7 previous time intervals
4.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
CTC provides Ethernet performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical Ethernet statistics. The G-Series Ethernet performance information is divided into the Statistics, Utilization, and History tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window.
4.6.2.1 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
The Ethernet Statistics window lists Ethernet parameters at the line level. The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown. The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero. The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics. Auto-Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs. The G-Series Statistics window also has a Clear button. The Clear button sets the values on the card to zero, but does not reset the G-Series card.
Table 4-14 defines the G-Series Ethernet card statistics parameters.
Table 4-14 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Time Last Cleared
Link Status
Rx Packets
Rx Bytes
Tx Packets
Tx Bytes
Rx Total Errors
Rx FCS
Rx Alignment
Rx Runts
Rx Shorts
Rx Jabbers
Rx Giants
Definition
A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset.
Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal
(carrier) from the attached Ethernet device; up means present, and down means not present.
Number of packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset.
Total number of receive errors.
Number of packets with a FCS error. FCS errors indicate frame corruption during transmission.
Number of packets with received incomplete frames.
Measures undersized packets with bad CRC errors.
Measures undersized packets with good CRC errors.
The total number of frames received that exceed the 1548-byte maximum and contain CRC errors.
Number of packets received that are greater than 1530 bytes in length.
4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-14 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters (continued)
Parameter
Rx Pause Frames
Tx Pause Frames
Definition
Number of received Ethernet IEEE 802.3z pause frames.
Number of transmitted IEEE 802.3z pause frames.
Rx Pkts Dropped Internal
Congestion
Number of received packets dropped due to overflow in G-Series frame buffer.
Number of transmit queue drops due to drops in the G-Series frame buffer.
Tx Pkts Dropped Internal
Congestion
HDLC Errors High-level data link control (HDLC) errors received from SONET/SDH
(see
Rx Unicast Packets
Tx Unicast Packets
Rx Multicast Packets
Tx Multicast Packets
Rx Broadcast Packets
Tx Broadcast Packets
Number of unicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of unicast packets transmitted.
Number of multicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of multicast packets transmitted.
Number of broadcast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number or broadcast packets transmitted.
Note Do not use the HDLC errors counter to count the number of frames dropped because of HDLC errors, because each frame can fragment into several smaller frames during HDLC error conditions and spurious
HDLC frames can be generated. If HDLC error counters are incrementing when no SONET path problems should be present, it might indicate a problem with the quality of the SONET path. For example, a SONET protection switch generates a set of HDLC errors. However, the actual values of these counters are less significant than the fact that they are changing.
4.6.2.2 G-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
The Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments. The Mode field displays the real-time mode status, such as 100 Full, which is the mode setting configured on the G-Series port. However, if the G-Series port is set to autonegotiate the mode (Auto), this field shows the result of the link negotiation between the G-Series and the peer Ethernet device attached directly to the G-Series port.
The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute,
15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets + inPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
Tx = (outOctets + outPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port (that is, 1 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for G-Series Ethernet cards is shown in
.
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-29
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Note Unlike the E-Series, the G-Series card does not have a display of Trunk Utilization statistics, because the G-Series card is not a Layer 2 device or switch.
4.6.2.3 G-Series Ethernet History Window
The Ethernet History window lists past Ethernet statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-13 . The listed parameters are defined in Table 4-14 on page 4-28 .
4.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
CTC provides Ethernet performance information for line-level parameters and historical Ethernet statistics. The ML-Series Ethernet performance information is divided into the Ether Ports and
Packet-over-SONET (POS) Ports tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window.
4.6.3.1 ML-Series Ether Ports Window
Table 4-15 defines the ML-Series Ethernet card Ether Ports PM parameters.
Table 4-15 ML-Series Ether Ports PM Parameters
Parameters
Rx Bytes
Rx Packets
Rx Unicast Packets
Rx Multicast Packets ifInOctets rxTotalPkts ifInUcastPkts ifInMulticastPkts
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of unicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of multicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Rx Broadcast Packets ifInBroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets received since the last counter reset.
Rx Discards ifInDiscards Number of received frames dropped by MAC module.
Tx Bytes
Tx Packets
Tx Unicast Packets
Tx Multicast Packets
Tx Broadcast Packets
Rx Alignment Errors ifOutOctets txTotalPkts
Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
ifOutUcastPkts Number of unicast packets transmitted.
ifOutMulticastPkts Number of multicast packets transmitted.
Rx FCS Errors
Rx Runts ifOutBroadcastPkts Number or broadcast packets transmitted.
dot3StatsAlignmen tErrors
Number of received packets with alignment errors.
dot3StatsFCSError s etherStatsUndersiz ePkts
Number of packets with an FCS error.
Total number of frames received that are less than 64 bytes in length and have a CRC error.
4-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-15
Parameters
ML-Series Ether Ports PM Parameters (continued)
Rx Giants
Rx Jabbers
Rx Collisions
Port Drop Counts etherStatsOversize
Pkts
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets, and were otherwise well formed. Note that for tagged interfaces, this number becomes 1522 bytes.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of frames received that exceed the maximum 1548 bytes and contain CRC errors.
Number of transmitted packets that collided.
etherStatsCollissio ns etherStatsDropEve nts
Number of received frames dropped at the port level.
Rx Pause Frames
— rxPauseFrames
Rx Threshold Oversizes mediaIndStatsOver sizeDropped mediaIndStatsTxFr amesTooLong
Number of received pause frames.
Number of received packets larger than the ML-series remote monitoring
(RMON) threshold.
Number of transmitted frames that are too long.
4.6.3.2 ML-Series POS Ports Window
In the ML-Series POS Ports window, the parameters displayed depend on the framing mode employed by the ML-Series card. The two framing modes for the POS port on the ML-Series card are HDLC and
GFP-F (Frame-mapped Generic Framing Procedure). For more information on provisioning a framing mode, refer to Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide .
defines the ML-Series Ethernet card POS Ports HDLC parameters.
Table 4-16 ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode
Parameter
RFC MIB
Rx Bytes
Rx Packets
Tx Bytes
Tx Packets
Port Drop Counts hdlcPktDrops
Rx Runts
Tx Giants ifInOctets rxTotalPkts ifOutOctets tx TotalPkts etherStatsDropEvents rxPktsDropped
InternalCongestion mediaIndStatsRxFramesTru ncated mediaIndStatsRxFramesToo
Long
Definition
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets received.
Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of transmitted packets.
Number of received frames dropped at the port level.
Number of received packets dropped due to overflow in frame buffer.
Number of received frames with a length of 36 bytes or less.
Number of received frames that are too long. The maximum is the programmed maximum frame size (for VSAN support); if the maximum frame size is set to default, then the maximum is the 2112 byte payload plus the 36 byte header, which is a total of 2148 bytes.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-31
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-16 ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode (continued)
Parameter
RFC MIB hdlcErrors mediaIndStatsRxFramesBa dCRC
Rx Shorts
Rx Octets
Rx Abort Packets
Tx Octets mediaIndStatsRxShortPkts hdlcInOctets hdlcRxAborts hdlcOutOctets
Definition
Number of received frames with CRC errors.
Number of received packets that are too small.
Number of bytes received (from the SONET/SDH path) prior to the bytes undergoing HLDC decapsulation by the policy engine.
Number of received packets aborted on input.
Number of bytes transmitted (to the SONET/SDH path) after the bytes undergoing HLDC encapsulation by the policy engine.
Table 4-17 ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for GFP-F Mode
Parameter
RFC MIB
Port Drop Counts hdlcPktDrops etherStatsDropEvents rx
PktsDroppedInternalConges tion gfpStatsRxFrame Rx Frames
Tx Frames
Rx Octets gfpStatsTxFrame gfpStatsRxOctets
Tx Octets
Rx SBit Errors gfpStatsTxOctets gfpStatsRxSBitErrors
Rx MBit Errors
Rx Type Invalid
Rx CRC Errors
—
—
Rx Runts gfpStatsRxMBitErrors gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid gfpStatsRxCRCErrors gfpStatsLFDRaised gfpStatsCSFRaised mediaIndStatsRxFramesTru ncated
Description
Number of received frames dropped at the port level.
Number of received packets dropped due to overflow in the frame buffer.
Number of received GFP frames.
Number of transmitted GFP frames.
Number of GFP bytes received.
Number of GFP bytes transmitted.
Sum of all the single bit errors. In the GFP CORE HDR at the GFP-T receiver, these are correctable.
Sum of all the multiple bit errors. In the GFP CORE HDR at the
GFP-T receiver, these are uncorrectable.
Number of receive packets dropped due to Client Data Frame UPI errors.
Number of packets received with a payload FCS error.
Count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when the state machine goes out of frame.
Number of GFP Client signal fail frames detected at the GFP-T receiver.
Number of received frames that are too long. The maximum is the programmed maximum frame size (for VSAN support); if the maximum frame size is set to default, then the maximum is the 2112 byte payload plus the 36 byte header, which is a total of 2148 bytes.
4-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-17 ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for GFP-F Mode
Parameter
RFC MIB
Tx Giants mediaIndStatsRxFramesToo
Long
Rx Shorts
Description
Number of received frames with CRC errors.
mediaIndStatsRxShortPkts Number of received packets that are too small.
4.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
CTC provides Ethernet performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical Ethernet statistics. The CE-Series card Ethernet performance information is divided into Ether Ports and POS Ports tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window.
4.6.4.1 CE-Series Card Ether Port Statistics Window
The Ethernet Ether Ports Statistics window lists Ethernet parameters at the line level. The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown. The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero. The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics. Auto-Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs. The CE-Series Statistics window also has a Clear button. The
Clear button sets the values on the card to zero, but does not reset the CE-Series card.
During each automatic cycle, whether auto-refreshed or manually refreshed (using the Refresh button), statistics are added cumulatively and are not immediately adjusted to equal total received packets until testing ends. To see the final PM count totals, allow a few moments for the PM window statistics to finish testing and update fully. PM counts are also listed in the CE-Series card Performance > History window.
defines the CE-Series card statistics parameters.
Table 4-18
Rx Unicast Packets
Tx Unicast Packets
Rx Multicast Packets
Tx Multicast Packets
Rx Broadcast Packets
Tx Broadcast Packets
Rx Bytes
Tx Bytes
Rx Packets
Tx Packets
CE-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Time Last Cleared
Link Status
Definition
A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset.
Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal
(carrier) from the attached Ethernet device; up means present, and down means not present.
Number of unicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of unicast packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of multicast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of multicast packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of broadcast packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of broadcast packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset.
Number of packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-33
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-18
Parameter
Rx Errors
Rx Runts
Rx Jabbers
Rx Giants
Rx FCS Errors
CE-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters (continued)
Rx Alignment Errors
Definition
The number of inbound packets (or transmission units) that contained errors, preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad
FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check.
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
4.6.4.2 CE-Series Card Ether Ports Utilization Window
The Ether Ports Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the
Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments. The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute, 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets + inPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
Tx = (outOctets + outPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port (that is, 1 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for CE-Series Ethernet cards is shown in
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
4.6.4.3 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
The Ethernet Ether Ports History window lists past Ethernet statistics for the previous time intervals.
Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-13 . The listed parameters are defined in
.
4.6.4.4 CE-Series Card POS Ports Statistics Parameters
The Ethernet POS Ports statistics window lists Ethernet POS parameters at the line level.
defines the CE-Series Ethernet card POS Ports parameters.
4-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-19
Rx Packets
Tx Packets
Rx Frames
Tx Frames
Rx Octets
Tx Octets
Rx CRC Errors
Rx MBit Errors
Rx SBit Errors
Rx Type Invalid
Rx CID Invalid
CE-Series Card POS Ports Parameters
Parameter
Time Last Cleared
Link Status
Definition
A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset.
Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal (carrier) from the attached Ethernet device; up means present, and down means not present.
Number of packets received since the last counter reset.
Number of packets transmitted since the last counter reset.
Receive data frames.
Transmit data frames.
Received data octets.
Transmit data octets.
Receive data frames with Payload CRC errors.
Receive frames with multi bit errors (cHEC, tHEC, eHEC).
Receive frames with single bit errors (cHEC, tHEC, eHEC).
Receive frames with invalid type (PTI, EXI, UPI).
Receive frames with invalid CID.
4.6.4.5 CE-Series Card POS Ports Utilization Window
The POS Ports Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the POS ports during consecutive time segments. The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute, 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets * 8) / (interval * maxBaseRate).
Tx = (outOctets * 8) / (interval * maxBaseRate).
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port (that is, 1 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for CE-Series cards is shown in
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
4.6.4.6 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
The Ethernet POS Ports History window lists past Ethernet POS Ports statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-13 . The listed parameters are defined
in
.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-35
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards
4.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards
This section lists performance monitoring parameters for ONS 15454 optical cards, including the OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192.
Figure 4-17 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Figure 4-17
PTE
Monitored Signal Types for the OC-3 Cards
OC-3 Signal
ONS 15454
Fiber
OC-3 OC48
ONS 15454
OC48
OC-3 Signal
OC-3
PTE
STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-17 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the OC3 IR 4 SH 1310 and OC3 IR SH 1310-8 cards.
Figure 4-18 PM Read Points on the OC-3 Cards
ONS 15454
OC-3 Card
Pointer Processors
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEFS-S
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
PPJC-Pdet
NPJC-Pdet
PPJC-Pgen
NPJC-Pgen
PMs read on PMC
BTC
ASIC
STS CV-P
STS ES-P
STS FC-P
STS SES-P
STS UAS-P
STS CV-PFE
STS ES-PFE
STS FC-PFE
STS SES-PFE
STS UAS-PFE
Path
Level
PMs read on BTC ASIC
XC Card(s) OC-N
Note For PM locations relating to protection switch counts, see the Telcordia GR-253-CORE document.
4-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards
and
Table 4-21 list the PM parameters for OC-3 cards.
Table 4-20 OC3 Card PMs
Section (NE)
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEF-S
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
PSC (1+1)
PSD (1+1)
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
PPJC-PDET
NPJC-PDET
PPJC-PGEN
NPJC-PGEN
PPJC-PDET-P
PPJC-PGEN-P
PJC-DIFF
Line (FE)
CV-LFE
ES-LFE
SES-LFE
UAS-LFE
FC-LFE
1.
The STS Path (FE) PMs are valid only for the OC3-4 card on ONS 15454.
Table 4-21
Section (NE)
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEF-S
OC3-8 Card PMs
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
PSC (1+1)
PSD (1+1)
Physical Layer
(NE)
LBCL
OPT
OPR
STS Path (NE) Line (FE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
PPJC-PDET-P
NPJC-PDET-P
PPJC-PGEN-P
NPJC-PGEN-P
PJCS-PDET-P
PJCS-PGEN-P
PJC-DIFF-P
CV-LFE
ES-LFE
SES-LFE
UAS-LFE
FC-LFE
lists the PM parameters for OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards.
STS Path (FE)
1
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
STS Path (FE)
CV-PFE
ES-PFE
SES-PFE
UAS-PFE
FC-PFE
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-37
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.8 Performance Monitoring for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 4-22
Section (NE)
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEF-S
OC12, OC48, OC192 Card PMs
Line (NE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES--L
UASL
FC-L
PSC (1+1, 2F BLSR)
PSD (1+1, 2F BLSR)
PSC-W (4F BLSR)
PSD-W (4F BLSR)
PSC-S (4F BLSR)
PSD-S (4F BLSR)
PSC-R (4F BLSR)
PSD-R (4F BLSR)
STS Path (NE)
CV-P
ES-P
SES-P
UAS-P
FC-P
PPJC-PDET-P
NPJC-PDET-P
PPJC-PGEN-P
NPJC-PGEN-P
PJCS-PGEN-P
PJCS-PDET-P
PJC-DIFF-P
Line (FE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
4.8 Performance Monitoring for Transponder and Muxponder
Cards
This section lists performance monitoring parameters for transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, and TXP_MR_10E), and muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_25G_10E, MXP_MR_2.5G, and MXPP_MR_2.5G). See
“4.8.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Payload PM Parameters” section on page 4-40 for Payload
PM information for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards
shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs for the TXP_MR_10G card.
The signal types for the remaining transponder and muxponder cards are similar to the TXP_MR_10G card.
Figure 4-19
PTE
Monitored Signal Types
ONS 15454
10GE
LAN/WAN
OC-192 OC-192
Fiber
ONS 15454
OC-192
10GE
LAN/WAN
OC-192
PTE
OTN G.709 (XX-PM or XX-SM) and OTN FEC (XX) PMs
STS Path (STS XX-P)
PMs Near and Far End Supported
Note The XX in
Figure 4-19 represents all PMs listed in
with the given prefix and/or suffix.
4-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.8 Performance Monitoring for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Figure 4-20 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring
parameters for the TXP_MR_10G card. The remaining transponder and muxponder cards perform similarly to the following illustration.
PM Read Points for TXP_MR_10G card Figure 4-20
ONS 15454
TXP Card
Trunk
Tx/Rx
Client Tx/Rx
Sonet
10GE
Optics PMs
SONET PMs
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEFS-S
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
Client PMs
ASIC
OTN G.709 PMs
BBE-SM
ES-SM
SES-SM
UAS-SM
FC-SM
ESR-SM
SESR-SM
BBER-SM
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEFS-S
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L BBE-PM
ES-PM
SES-PM
UAS-PM
FC-PM
ESR-PM
SESR-PM
BBER-PM
OTN FEC PMs
Bit Errors
Uncorrectable Word
PMs read on trunk
Optics PMs
describes the PM parameters for the MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G,
TXPP_MR_2.5G, TXP_MR_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_2.5G, and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-39
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.8.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Payload PM Parameters
Table 4-23 Muxponder and Transponder Card PMs
SONET Layer
Far-End (FE)
1
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
2
SONET Layer
Near-End (NE)
OTN Layer
(NE and FE)
3
CV-S
CV-L
ES-S
ES-L
SES-S
SES-L
SEF-S
UAS-L
FC-L
ES-PM
ES-SM
ESR-PM
ESR-SM
SES-PM
SES-SM
SESR-PM
SESR-SM
UAS-PM
UAS-SM
BBE-PM
BBE-SM
BBER-PM
BBER-SM
FC-PM
FC-SM
Optics (NE)
LBC
OPT
OPR
4
8B10B (NE)
CGV
DCG
IOS
IPC
NIOS
VPC
5
BIEC
UNC-WORDS
1.
Applicable to OCH and CLNT facilities.
2.
For MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, these parameters are defines in Performance > Payload PM > SONET PM tabs with in the card view.
3.
Applicable to OCH facility.
4.
TXP-MR-2.5G/TXPP-MR-2.5G ESCON payload does not support optics PMs on the client port due to SFP imposed restriction.
5.
Applicable to TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards only.
4.8.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Payload PM Parameters
The MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G card Payload performance information is divided into Statistics,
Utilization, History, and SONET PM tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab Payload PM window.
4.8.1.1 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Statistics Window
The Payload PM Statistics window lists parameters at the line level. The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown. The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero. The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics. Auto-Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs. The Statistics window also has a Clear button. The Clear button sets the values on the card to zero. All counters on the card are cleared.
MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G card statistics parameters.
Table 4-24 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Statistical PMs
Parameter
8b/10b Errors
Running Disparity Count
Definition
A count of 10b errors received by the serial/deserializer (serdes
8b/10b).
A count of errors that affect the disparity of the received data stream.
4-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.8.2 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G History Window
Table 4-24
Rx Link Reset (Only for FC
Mode)
MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Statistical PMs (continued)
Parameter
Invalid CRC Error
Rx Frames
Tx Frames
Tx Bytes
Definition
A count of invalid cyclical redundancy checks.
A count of the number of frames received without errors.
A count of the number of transmitted frames.
A count of the number of bytes transmitted from the frame since the last counter reset.
A count of the received link resets.
4.8.1.2 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Utilization Window
The Payload PM Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the ports during consecutive time segments. The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute, 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets + inPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
Tx = (outOctets + outPkts * 20) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the port (that is, 1 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G cards is shown in
.
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
4.8.2 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G History Window
The Payload PM History window lists past statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-13 . The listed parameters are defined in
4.9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking
Cards
The following sections define performance monitoring parameters and definitions for storage access networking card, also known as the FC_MR-4 or Fibre Channel card.
CTC provides FC_MR-4 performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical statistics. The FC_MR-4 card performance information is divided into the
Statistics, Utilization, and History tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-41
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window
4.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window
The Statistics window lists parameters at the line level. The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown. The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero. The
Refresh button manually refreshes statistics. Auto-Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs. The Statistics window also has a Clear button. The Clear button sets the values on the card to zero. All counters on the card are cleared.
defines the FC_MR-4 card statistics parameters.
Table 4-25 FC_MR-4 Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Time Last Cleared
Link Status
Rx Frames
Rx Bytes
Tx Frames
Tx Bytes
8b/10b Errors
Encoding Disparity Errors
Link Recoveries
Rx Frames bad CRC
Tx Frames bad CRC
Rx Undersized Frames
Rx Oversized Frames
Definition
A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset.
Indicates whether the Fibre Channel link is receiving a valid Fibre
Channel signal (carrier) from the attached Fibre Channel device; up means present, and down means not present.
A count of the number of Fibre Channel frames received without errors.
A count of the number of bytes received without error for the Fibre
Channel payload.
A count of the number of transmitted Fibre Channel frames.
A count of the number of bytes transmitted from the Fibre Channel frame.
A count of 10b errors received by the serial/deserializer (serdes
8b/10b).
A count of the disparity errors received by serdes.
A count of the FC_MR-4 software initiated link recovery attempts toward the FC line side because of SONET protection switches.
A count of the received Fibre Channel frames with errored CRCs.
A count of the transmitted Fibre Channel frames with errored CRCs.
A count of the received Fibre Channel frames less than 36 bytes including CRC, start of frame (SOF), and end of frame (EOF).
A count of the received Fibre Channel frames greater than 2116 bytes of the payload. Four bytes are allowed for supporting VSAN tags sent.
GFP Rx HDR Single-bit Errors A count of generic framing procedure (GFP) single bit errors in the core header error check (CHEC).
GFP Rx HDR Multi-bit Errors A count of GFP multibit errors in CHEC.
GGFP Rx Frames Invalid Type A count of GFP invalid user payload identifier (UPI) field in the type field.
GFP Rx Superblk CRC Errors A count of superblock CRC errors in the transparent GFP frame.
4-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.9.2 FC_MR-4 Utilization Window
4.9.2 FC_MR-4 Utilization Window
The Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the ports during consecutive time segments. The Utilization window provides an Interval menu that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute, 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day. Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas:
Rx = (inOctets + inPkts * 24) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
Tx = (outOctets + outPkts * 24) * 8 / 100% interval * maxBaseRate
The interval is defined in seconds. The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the port (that is, 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps). The maxBaseRate for FC_MR-4 cards is shown in
Table 4-26 maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
STS
STS-24
STS-48 maxBaseRate
850000000
850000000 x 2
1
1.
For 1 Gbps of bit rate being transported, there are only 850 Mbps of actual data because of 8b->10b conversion. Similarly, for 2 Gbps of bit rate being transported, there are only 1700 Mbps (850 Mbps x 2) of actual data.
Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity.
4.9.3 FC_MR-4 History Window
The History window lists past FC_MR-4 statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in
Table 4-27 . The listed parameters are defined in
Table 4-27 FC_MR-4 History Statistics per Time Interval
Time Interval
1 minute
15 minutes
1 hour
1 day (24 hours)
Number of Intervals Displayed
60 previous time intervals
32 previous time intervals
24 previous time intervals
7 previous time intervals
4.10 Performance Monitoring for DWDM Cards
The following sections define performance monitoring parameters and definitions for the ONS 15454
OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x,
AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, OSCM, OSC-CSM, and 32WSS DWDM cards.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-43
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.10.1 Optical Amplifier Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
.
4.10.1 Optical Amplifier Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
The PM parameters for the OPT-PRE and OPT-BST cards are listed
.
Table 4-28 Optical PM Parameters for OPT-PRE, and OPT-BST Cards.
Optical Line
OPT
Optical Amplifier
Line
OPR
4.10.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Performance Monitoring
Parameters
The PM parameters for the 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32DMX, and 32DMX-O cards are listed in
.
Table 4-29 Optical PMs for 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards
Optical Channel
OPR
Optical Line
OPT
4.10.3 4MD-xx.x Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
The PM parameters for the 4MD-xx.x cards are listed in
.
Table 4-30 Optical PMs for 4MD-xx.x Cards
Optical Channel
OPR
Optical Band
OPT
4.10.4 OADM Channel Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
The PM parameters for the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x cards are listed in Table 4-31 .
Table 4-31
Optical Channel
OPR
Optical PMs for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards
Optical Line
OPT
4.10.5 OADM Band Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
The PM parameters for the AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x cards are listed in
.
4-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4.10.6 Optical Service Channel Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Table 4-32
Optical Line
OPR
Optical PMs for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards
Optical Band
OPT
4.10.6 Optical Service Channel Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Figure 4-21 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring
parameters for the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards.
Figure 4-21
ONS Node
PM Read Points on OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards
OSCM/OSC-CSM
OCEAN ASIC
FE
100BaseT
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEFS-S
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
OSC
(OC-3)
DCN to TCC2
2EOW to AIC
Other
Overhead
PMs read on OCEAN ASIC
December 2004
The PM parameters for the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards are described in
.
Table 4-33
Section (NE)
1
CV-S
ES-S
SES-S
SEF-S
OSCM/OSC-CSM (OC3) Card PMs
Line (NE/FE)
CV-L
ES-L
SES-L
UAS-L
FC-L
1.
Applicable to OC3
2.
Applicable to OTS facilities
Optics (NE)
2
OPWR
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
4-45
4.10.6 Optical Service Channel Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
Chapter 4 Performance Monitoring
4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
C H A P T E R
5
SNMP
This chapter explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by the
Cisco ONS 15454.
For SNMP setup information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.2 Basic SNMP Components, page 5-2
5.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement, page 5-4
5.4 SNMP Version Support, page 5-4
5.5 SNMP Message Types, page 5-4
5.6 SNMP Management Information Bases, page 5-4
5.7 SNMP Trap Content, page 5-6
5.8 SNMP Community Names, page 5-13
5.9 Proxy Over Firewalls, page 5-14
5.10 Remote Monitoring, page 5-14
5.1 SNMP Overview
SNMP is an application-layer communication protocol that allows ONS 15454 network devices to exchange management information among these systems and with other devices outside the network.
Through SNMP, network administrators can manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan network growth.
The ONS 15454 uses SNMP for asynchronous event notification to a network management system
(NMS). ONS SNMP implementation uses standard Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) management information bases (MIBs) to convey node-level inventory, fault, and performance management information for generic read-only management of DS-1, DS-3, SONET, and Ethernet technologies.
SNMP allows a generic SNMP manager such as HP OpenView Network Node Manager (NNM) or Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) NetExpert to be utilized for limited management functions.
The Cisco ONS 15454 supports SNMP Version 1 (SNMPv1) and SNMP Version 2c (SNMPv2c). Both of these versions share many features, but SNMPv2c includes additional protocol operations and 64-bit performance monitoring support. This chapter describes both versions and gives SNMP configuration parameters for the ONS 15454.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-1
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.2 Basic SNMP Components
Note The CERENT-MSDWDM-MIB.mib and CERENT-FC-MIB.mib in the CiscoV2 directory support 64-bit performance monitoring counters. However, the SNMPv1 MIB in the CiscoV1 directory does not contain 64-bit performance monitoring counters, but supports the lower and higher word values of the corresponding 64-bit counter. The other MIB files in the CiscoV1 and CiscoV2 directories are identical in content and differ only in format.
illustrates the basic layout idea of an SNMP-managed network.
Figure 5-1 Basic Network Managed by SNMP
5.2 Basic SNMP Components
In general terms, an SNMP-managed network consists of a management system, agents, and managed devices.
A management system such as HP OpenView executes monitoring applications and controls managed devices. Management systems execute most of the management processes and provide the bulk of memory resources used for network management. A network might be managed by one or more
management systems. Figure 5-2
illustrates the relationship between the network manager, SNMP agent, and the managed devices.
5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
Figure 5-2 Example of the Primary SNMP Components
Management
Entity
NMS
5.2 Basic SNMP Components
Agent Agent Agent
Management
Database
Management
Database
Management
Database
Managed Devices
An agent (such as SNMP) residing on each managed device translates local management information data, such as performance information or event and error information caught in software traps, into a readable form for the management system.
Figure 5-3 illustrates SNMP agent get-requests that transport
data to the network management software.
Figure 5-3
NMS
Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager
Network device get, get-next, get-bulk
SNMP Manager get-response, traps
MIB
SNMP Agent
The SNMP agent captures data from management information bases, or MIBs, which are device parameter and network data repositories, or from error or change traps.
A managed element—such as a router, access server, switch, bridge, hub, computer host, or network element (such as an ONS 15454)—is accessed through the SNMP agent. Managed devices collect and store management information, making it available via SNMP to other management systems having the same protocol compatibility.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-3
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement
5.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement
Since all SNMP requests come from a third-party application, the only external interface requirement is that a third-part SNMP client application can upload RFC 3273 SNMP MIB variables in the etherStatsHighCapacityTable, etherHistoryHighCapacityTable, or mediaIndependentTable.
5.4 SNMP Version Support
The ONS 15454 supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c traps and get requests. The ONS 15454 SNMP MIBs define alarms, traps, and status. Through SNMP, NMS applications can query a management agent for data from functional entities such as Ethernet switches and SONET multiplexers using a supported MIB.
Note ONS 15454 MIB files in the CiscoV1 and CiscoV2 directories are almost identical in content except for the difference in 64-bit performance monitoring features. The CiscoV2 directory contains two 64-bit performance monitoring counters, CERENT-MSDWDM-MIB.mib and CERENT-FC-MIB.mib. The
CiscoV1 directory does not contain any 64-bit counters, but it does support the lower and higher word values used in 64-bit counters. The two directories also have somewhat different formats.
5.5 SNMP Message Types
The ONS 15454 SNMP agent communicates with an SNMP management application using SNMP messages.
Table 5-1 describes these messages.
Table 5-1 ONS 15454 SNMP Message Types
Operation get-request
Description
Retrieves a value from a specific variable.
get-next-request Retrieves the value following the named variable; this operation is often used to retrieve variables from within a table. With this operation, an SNMP manager does not need to know the exact variable name. The SNMP manager searches sequentially to find the needed variable from within the MIB.
get-response Replies to a get-request, get-next-request, get-bulk-request, or set-request sent by an NMS.
get-bulk-request Fills the get-response with up to the max-repetition number of get-next interactions, similar to a get-next-request.
set-request trap
Provides remote network monitoring (RMON) MIB.
Indicates that an event has occurred. An unsolicited message is sent by an SNMP agent to an SNMP manager.
5.6 SNMP Management Information Bases
Table 5-2 lists the IETF-standard MIBs implemented in the ONS 15454 SNMP agents.
First compile the MIBs in the in Table 5-2 . Compile the
MIBs next.
5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.6 SNMP Management Information Bases
Caution If you do not compile MIBs in the correct order, one or more might not compile correctly.
Table 5-2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15454 System
RFC
1
Number
—
1213
1907
1253
1493
Module Name
RFC1213-MIB-rfc1213.mib
SNMPV2-MIB-rfc1907.mib
Title/Comments
Management Information Base for Network
Management of TCP/IP-based Internets: MIB-II
Management Information Base for Version 2 of the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2)
RFC1253-MIB-rfc1253.mib OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base
BRIDGE-MIB-rfc1493.mib Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges
(This defines MIB objects for managing MAC bridges based on the IEEE 802.1D-1990 standard between Local
Area Network [LAN] segments.)
2819
2737
2233
2358
2493
2495
2496
2558
2674
3273
ENTITY-MIB-rfc2737.mib
Base
Entity MIB (Version 2)
IF-MIB-rfc2233.mib Interfaces Group MIB using SMIv2
EtherLike-MIB-rfc2358.mib
PerfHist-TC-MIB-rfc2493.mib Textual Conventions for MIB Modules Using
Performance History Based on 15 Minute Intervals
DS1-MIB-rfc2495.mib Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1, E1, DS2 and E2 Interface Types
DS3-MIB-rfc2496.mib
Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like
Interface Types
SONET-MIB-rfc2558.mib
Definitions of Managed Object for the DS3/E3 Interface
Type
Definitions of Managed Objects for the SONET/SDH
Interface Type
P-BRIDGE-MIB-rfc2674.mib
Q-BRIDGE-MIB-rfc2674.mib
HC-RMON-MIB
Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic
Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions
The MIB module for managing remote monitoring device implementations, augmenting the original RMON MIB as specified in RFC 2819 and RFC 1513 and RMON-2
MIB as specified in RFC 2021
1.
RFC = Request for Comment
Each ONS 15454 is shipped with a software CD containing applicable proprietary MIBs.
lists the proprietary MIBs for the ONS 15454.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-5
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7 SNMP Trap Content
Table 5-3
4
5
2
3
6
7
MIB
Number
1
8
100
ONS 15454 Proprietary MIBs
Module Name
CERENT-GLOBAL-REGISTRY.mib
CERENT-TC.mib
CERENT-454.mib
CERENT-GENERIC.mib (not applicable to ONS 15454)
CISCO-SMI.mib
CISCO-VOA-MIB.mib
CERENT-MSDWDM-MIB.mib
CISCO-OPTICAL-MONITOR-MIB.mib
CERENT-FC-MIB.mib
Note If you cannot compile the proprietary MIBs correctly, log into the Technical Support Website at http://www.cisco.com/techsupport or call Cisco TAC (800) 553-2447.
Note When SNMP indicates that the wavelength is unknown, it means that the corresponding card
(MXP_2.5G_10E, TXP_MR_10E, MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_2.5G, or
TXPP_MR_2.5G) works with the first tunable wavelength.
5.7 SNMP Trap Content
The ONS 15454 generates all alarms and events, such as raises and clears, as SNMP traps. These contain the following information:
• Object IDs that uniquely identify each event with information about the generating entity (the slot or port; synchronous transport signal [STS] and Virtual Tributary [VT]; bidirectional line switched ring [BLSR], Spanning Tree Protocol [STP], etc.).
•
•
Severity and service effect of the alarm (critical, major, minor, or event; service-affecting or non-service affecting).
Date and time stamp showing when the alarm occurred.
5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.1 Generic and IETF Traps
5.7.1 Generic and IETF Traps
The ONS 15454 supports the generic IETF traps listed in
Table 5-4 ONS 15454 Traps
Trap coldStart warmStart authenticationFailure newRoot topologyChange entConfigChange dsx1LineStatusChange dsx3LineStatusChange risingAlarm fallingAlarm
From RFC No.
MIB Description
RFC1907-MIB Agent up, cold start.
RFC1907-MIB Agent up, warm start.
RFC1907-MIB Community string does not match.
RFC1493/ Sending agent is the new root of the spanning tree.
BRIDGE-MIB
RFC1493/
BRIDGE-MIB
RFC2737/
ENTITY-MIB
RFC2495/
DS1-MIB
A port in a bridge has changed from Learning to
Forwarding or Forwarding to Blocking.
The entLastChangeTime value has changed.
RFC2496/
DS3-MIB
RFC2819/
RMON-MIB
RFC2819/
RMON-MIB
The value of an instance of dsx1LineStatus has changed.
The trap can be used by an NMS to trigger polls. When the line status change results from a higher-level line status change (for example, a DS-3), no traps for the
DS-1 are sent.
The value of an instance of dsx3LineStatus has changed.
This trap can be used by an NMS to trigger polls. When the line status change results in a lower-level line status change (for example, a DS-1), no traps for the lower-level are sent.
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Each SNMP trap contains variable bindings that are used to create the MIB tables. ONS 15454 traps and
are associated with all of its variable bindings.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-7
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Table 5-5
Group
A
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings
Trap Name(s) Associated with dsx1LineStatusChange
(from RFC 2495)
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
(1) dsx1LineStatus
(2)
(3)
(4) dsx1LineStatusLastChange
B dsx3LineStatusChange
(from RFC 2496)
(5)
(1)
(2) snmpTrapAddress dsx3LineStatus dsx3LineStatusLastChange
(3)
(4)
(5) cerent454NodeTime cerent454AlarmState cerent454NodeTime cerent454AlarmState snmpTrapAddress
Description
This variable indicates the line status of the interface. It contains loopback, failure, received alarm and transmitted alarm information.
The value of MIB II’s sysUpTime object at the time this DS1 entered its current line status state. If the current state was entered prior to the last proxy-agent re-initialization, the value of this object is zero.
The time that an event occurred.
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The address of the SNMP trap.
This variable indicates the line status of the interface. It contains loopback state information and failure state information.
The value of MIB II's sysUpTime object at the time this DS3/E3 entered its current line status state. If the current state was entered prior to the last re-initialization of the proxy-agent, then the value is zero.
The time that an event occurred.
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The address of the SNMP trap.
5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Table 5-5
Group
C
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued)
Trap Name(s) Associated with
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
(1) cerent454NodeTime coldStart (from RFC
1907) warmStart (from RFC
1907)
(2) cerent454AlarmState
D1 newRoot (from RFC) topologyChange (from
RFC) entConfigChange (from
RFC 2737) authenticationFailure
(from RFC 1907) risingAlarm (from RFC
2819)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) snmpTrapAddress
—
—
— alarmIndex alarmVariable alarmSampleType alarmValue alarmRisingThreshold cerent454NodeTime
Description
The time that the event occurred.
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The address of the SNMP trap.
—
—
—
This variable uniquely identifies each entry in the alarm table.
When an alarm in the table clears, the alarm indexes change for each alarm listed.
The object identifier of the variable being sampled.
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single event is generated. A single event is also generated if the first sample after this entry is greater than or equal to this threshold.
The time that an event occurred.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-9
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Table 5-5
Group
D1 cont.
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued)
Trap Name(s) Associated with
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
(7) cerent454AlarmState
D2
E fallingAlarm (from RFC
2819)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) failureDetectedExternal
ToTheNE (from
CERENT-454-mib)
(8)
(1) snmpTrapAddress alarmIndex alarmVariable alarmSampleType alarmValue alarmFallingThreshold cerent454NodeTime cerent454AlarmState snmpTrapAddress cerent454NodeTime
Description
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The address of the SNMP trap.
This variable uniquely identifies each entry in the alarm table.
When an alarm in the table clears, the alarm indexes change for each alarm listed.
The object identifier of the variable being sampled.
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single event is generated. A single is also generated if the first sample after this entry is less than or equal to this threshold.
The time that an event occurred.
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The address of the SNMP trap.
The time that an event occurred.
5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Table 5-5
Group
E cont.
F
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued)
Trap Name(s) Associated with
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) cerent454AlarmState cerent454AlarmObjectType cerent454AlarmObjectIndex cerent454AlarmSlotNumber cerent454AlarmPortNumber cerent454AlarmLineNumber cerent454AlarmObjectName cerent454AlarmAdditionalInfo snmpTrapAddress cerent454NodeTime
Description
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The entity that raised the alarm.
The NMS should use this value to decide which table to poll for further information about the alarm.
Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table. This variable is the index of objects in each table; if the alarm is interface-related, this is the index of the interface in the interface table.
The slot of the object that raised the alarm. If a slot is not relevant to the alarm, the slot number is zero.
The port of the object that raised the alarm. If a port is not relevant to the alarm, the port number is zero.
The object line that raised the alarm. If a line is not relevant to the alarm, the line number is zero.
The TL1-style user-visible name that uniquely identifies an object in the system.
Additional information for the alarm object. In the current version of the MIB, this object contains provisioned description for alarms that are external to the
NE. If there is no additional information, the value is zero.
The address of the SNMP trap.
The time that an event occurred.
performanceMonitorThr esholdCrossingAlert
(from
CERENT-454-mib)
(10)
(1)
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-11
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings
Table 5-5
Group
F cont.
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued)
Trap Name(s) Associated with
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14) cerent454AlarmState cerent454AlarmObjectType cerent454AlarmObjectIndex cerent454AlarmSlotNumber cerent454AlarmPortNumber cerent454AlarmLineNumber cerent454AlarmObjectName cerent454ThresholdMonitorType cerent454ThresholdLocation cerent454ThresholdPeriod cerent454ThresholdSetValue cerent454ThresholdCurrentValue cerent454ThresholdDetectType
Description
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The entity that raised the alarm.
The NMS should use this value to decide which table to poll for further information about the alarm.
Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table. This variable is the index of objects in each table; if the alarm is interface-related, this is the index of the interface in the interface table.
The slot of the object that raised the alarm. If a slot is not relevant to the alarm, the slot number is zero.
The port of the object that raised the alarm. If a port is not relevant to the alarm, the port number is zero.
The object line that raised the alarm. If a line is not relevant to the alarm, the line number is zero.
The TL1-style user-visible name that uniquely identifies an object in the system.
This object indicates the type of metric being monitored.
Indicates whether the event occurred at the near- or far end.
Indicates the sampling interval period.
The value of this object is the threshold provisioned by the
NMS.
—
—
5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.8 SNMP Community Names
Table 5-5 ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued)
Group
F cont.
G
Trap Name(s) Associated with
(Variable
Binding
Number) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings
All other traps (from
CERENT-454-MIB) not listed above
(15)
(1)
(2) snmpTrapAddress cerent454NodeTime cerent454AlarmState
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) cerent454AlarmObjectType cerent454AlarmObjectIndex cerent454AlarmSlotNumber cerent454AlarmPortNumber cerent454AlarmLineNumber cerent454AlarmObjectName snmpTrapAddress
Description
The address of the SNMP trap.
The time that an event occurred.
The alarm severity and service-affecting status.
Severities are Minor, Major, and
Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
The entity that raised the alarm.
The NMS should use this value to decide which table to poll for further information about the alarm.
Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table. This variable is the index of objects in each table; if the alarm is interface-related, this is the index of the interface in the interface table.
The slot of the object that raised the alarm. If a slot is not relevant to the alarm, the slot number is zero.
The port of the object that raised the alarm. If a port is not relevant to the alarm, the port number is zero.
The object line that raised the alarm. If a line is not relevant to the alarm, the line number is zero.
The TL1-style user-visible name that uniquely identifies an object in the system.
The address of the SNMP trap.
5.8 SNMP Community Names
Community names are used to group SNMP trap destinations. All ONS 15454 trap destinations can be provisioned as part of SNMP communities in Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). When community names are assigned to traps, the ONS 15454 treats the request as valid if the community name matches one that is provisioned in CTC. In this case, all agent-managed MIB variables are accessible to that request. If the community name does not match the provisioned list, SNMP drops the request.
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004 5-13
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.9 Proxy Over Firewalls
5.9 Proxy Over Firewalls
SNMP and NMS applications have traditionally been unable to cross firewalls used for isolating security risks inside or from outside networks. Release 5.0 CTC enables network operations centers (NOCs) to access performance monitoring data such as RMON statistics or autonomous messages across firewalls by using an SMP proxy element installed on a firewall.
The application-level proxy transports SNMP protocol data units (PDU) between the NMS and NEs, allowing requests and responses between the NMS and NEs and forwarding NE autonomous messages to the NMS. The proxy agent requires little provisioning at the NOC and no additional provisioning at the NEs.
The firewall proxy is intended for use in a gateway network element-end network element (GNE-ENE) topology with many NEs through a single NE gateway. Up to 64 SNMP requests (such as get, getnext, or getbulk) are supported at any time behind single or multiple firewalls. The proxy interoperates with common NMS such as HP OpenView.
For security reasons, the SNMP proxy feature must be enabled at all receiving and transmitting NEs to function. For instructions to do this, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide .
5.10 Remote Monitoring
The ONS 15454 incorporates RMON to allow network operators to monitor Ethernet card performance and events. The RMON thresholds are user-provisionable in CTC. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide for instructions. Note that otherwise, RMON operation is invisible to the typical CTC user.
ONS 15454 system RMON implementation is based on the IETF-standard MIB RFC 2819 and includes the following five groups from the standard MIB: Ethernet Statistics, History Control, Ethernet History,
Alarm, and Event.
5.10.1 HC-RMON-MIB Support
For the ONS 15454, the implementation of the high-capacity remote monitoring information base
(HC-RMON-MIB, or RFC 3273) enables 64-bit support of existing RMON tables. This support is provided with the etherStatsHighCapacityTable and the etherHistoryHighCapacityTable. An additional table, the mediaIndependentTable, and an additional object, hcRMONCapabilities, are also added for this support. All of these elements are accessible by any third-party SNMP client having RFC 3273 support.
5.10.2 Ethernet Statistics RMON Group
The Ethernet Statistics group contains the basic statistics monitored for each subnetwork in a single table called the etherStatsTable.
5.10.2.1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable
The SetRequest PDU for creating a row in this table should contain all the values needed to activate a row in a single set operation, and an assigned status variable to createRequest. The SetRequest PDU object ID (OID) entries must all carry an instance value, or type OID, of 0.
5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.10.3 History Control RMON Group
In order to create a row, the SetRequest PDU should contain the following:
•
•
The etherStatsDataSource and its desired value
The etherStatsOwner and its desired value (size of this value is limited to 32 characters)
• The etherStatsStatus with a value of createRequest (2)
The etherStatsTable creates a row if the SetRequest PDU is valid according to the above rules. When the row is created, the SNMP agent decides the value of etherStatsIndex. This value is not sequentially allotted or contiguously numbered. It changes when an Ethernet interface is added or deleted. The newly created row will have etherStatsStatus value of valid (1).
If the etherStatsTable row already exists, or if the SetRequest PDU values are insufficient or do not make sense, the SNMP agent returns an error code.
Note EtherStatsTable entries are not preserved if the SNMP agent is restarted.
5.10.2.2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
Get requests and getNext requests for the etherStatsMulticastPkts and etherStatsBroadcastPkts columns return a value of zero because the variables are not supported by ONS 15454 Ethernet cards.
5.10.2.3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable
To delete a row in the etherStatsTable, the SetRequest PDU should contain an etherStatsStatus “invalid” value (4). The OID marks the row for deletion. If required, a deleted row can be recreated.
5.10.2.4 64-Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table
The Ethernet statistics group contains 64-bit statistics in the etherStatsHighCapacityTable, which provides 64-bit RMON support for the HC-RMON-MIB. The etherStatsHighCapacityTable is an extension of the etherStatsTable that adds 16 new columns for performance monitoring data in 64-bit format. There is a one-to-one relationship between the etherStatsTable and etherStatsHighCapacityTable when rows are created or deleted in either table.
5.10.3 History Control RMON Group
The History Control group defines sampling functions for one or more monitor interfaces in the historyControlTable. The values in this table, as specified in RFC 2819, are derived from the historyControlTable and etherHistoryTable.
5.10.3.1 History Control Table
The RMON is sampled at one of four possible intervals. Each interval, or period, contains specific
The historyControlTable maximum row size is determined by multiplying the number of ports on a card by the number of sampling periods. For example, an ONS 15454 E100 card contains 24 ports, which multiplied by periods allows 96 rows in the table. An E1000 card contains 14 ports, which multiplied by four periods allows 56 table rows.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-15
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.10.3 History Control RMON Group
Table 5-6 RMON History Control Periods and History Categories
Sampling Periods
(historyControlValue Variable)
15 minutes
24 hours
1 minute
60 minutes
Total Values, or Buckets
(historyControl Variable)
32
7
60
24
5.10.3.2 Row Creation in historyControlTable
The SetRequest PDU must be able to activate a historyControlTable row in one single-set operation. In order to do this, the PDU must contain all needed values and have a status variable value of 2
(createRequest). All OIDs in the SetRequest PDU should be type OID.0 type for entry creation.
To create a creation SetRequest PDU for the historyControlTable, the following values are required:
•
•
•
•
The historyControlDataSource and its desired value
The historyControlBucketsRequested and it desired value
The historyControlInterval and its desired value
The historyControlOwner and its desired value
• The historyControlStatus with a value of createRequest (2)
The historyControlBucketsRequested OID value is ignored because the number of buckets allowed for each sampling period, based upon the historyControlInterval value, is already fixed as listed in
The historyControlInterval value cannot be changed from the four allowed choices. If you use another value, the SNMP agent selects the closest smaller time period from the set buckets. For example, if the set request specifies a 25-minute interval, this falls between the 15-minute (32 bucket) variable and the
60-minute (24 bucket) variable. The SNMP agent automatically selects the lower, closer value, which is
15 minutes, so it allows 32 buckets.
If the SetRequest PDU is valid, a historyControlTable row is created. If the row already exists, or if the
SetRequest PDU values do not make sense or are insufficient, the SNMP agent does not create the row and returns an error code.
5.10.3.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
These PDUs are not restricted.
5.10.3.4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table
To delete a row from the table, the SetRequest PDU should contain a historyControlStatus value of 4
(invalid). A deleted row can be recreated.
5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.10.4 Ethernet History RMON Group
5.10.4 Ethernet History RMON Group
The ONS 15454 implements the etherHistoryTable as defined in RFC 2819. The group is created within the bounds of the historyControlTable and does not deviate from the RFC in its design.
5.10.4.1 64-Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable
64-bit Ethernet history for the HC-RMON-MIB is implemented in the etherHistoryHighCapacityTable, which is an extension of the etherHistoryTable. The etherHistoryHighCapacityTable adds four columns for 64-bit performance monitoring data. These two tables have a one-to-one relationship. Adding or deleting a row in one table will effect the same change in the other.
5.10.5 Alarm RMON Group
The Alarm group consists of the alarmTable, which periodically compares sampled values with configured thresholds and raises an event if a threshold is crossed. This group requires the implementation of the event group, which follows this section.
5.10.5.1 Alarm Table
The NMS uses the alarmTable to determine and provision network performance alarmable thresholds.
5.10.5.2 Row Creation in alarmTable
To create a row in the alarmTable, the SetRequest PDU must be able to create the row in one single-set operation. All OIDs in the SetRequest PDU should be type OID.0 type for entry creation. The table has a maximum number of 256 rows.
To create a creation SetRequest PDU for the alarmTable, the following values are required:
• The alarmInterval and its desired value
•
•
•
The alarmVariable and its desired value
The alarmSampleType and its desired value
The alarmStartupAlarm and its desired value
The alarmOwner and its desired value •
• The alarmStatus with a value of createRequest (2)
If the SetRequest PDU is valid, a historyControlTable row is created. If the row already exists, or if the
SetRequest PDU values do not make sense or are insufficient, the SNMP agent does not create the row and returns an error code.
In addition to the required values, the following restrictions must be met in the SetRequest PDU:
• The alarmOwner is a string of length 32 characters.
•
•
The alarmRisingEventIndex always takes value 1.
The alarmFallingEventIndex always takes value 2.
•
•
The alarmStatus has only two values supported in SETs: createRequest (2) and invalid (4).
The AlarmVariable is of the type OID.ifIndex, where ifIndex gives the interface this alarm is created on and OID is one of the OIDs supported in
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004 5-17
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.10.5 Alarm RMON Group
Table 5-7 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable
4
5
6
7
2
3
No. Column Name
1 ifInOctets
IfInUcastPkts ifInMulticastPkts ifInBroadcastPkts ifInErrors
OID
{1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10}
Status
—
{1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11} —
{1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.2} Unsupported in E100/E1000
{1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.3} Unsupported in E100/E1000 ifInDiscards {1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14} ifOutOctets {1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16}
Unsupported in E100/E1000
—
—
8
9 ifOutUcastPkts ifOutMulticastPkts
10 ifOutBroadcastPkts
11 ifOutDiscards
{1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17} —
{1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.4} Unsupported in E100/E1000
{1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.5} Unsupported in E100/E1000
{1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19} Unsupported in E100/E1000
12 Dot3StatsAlignmentErrors
13 Dot3StatsFCSErrors
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.2}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.3}
—
—
14 Dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.4} —
15 Dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.5} —
16 Dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions
17 Dot3StatsLateCollisions
18 Dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions
19 Dot3StatsFrameTooLong
20 Dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors
21 Dot3StatsSQETestErrors
22 etherStatsUndersizePkts
23 etherStatsFragments
24 etherStatsPkts64Octets
25 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
26 etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
27 etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
28 etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
29 etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
30 EtherStatsBroadcastPkts
31 EtherStatsMulticastPkts
32 EtherStatsOversizePkts
33 EtherStatsJabbers
34 EtherStatsOctets
35 EtherStatsCollisions
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.7}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.8}
{13.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.9}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.13}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.11}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.6}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.9}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.11}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.14}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.15}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.16}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.17}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.18}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.19}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.7}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.10}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.12}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4}
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.13}
—
—
—
—
Unsupported in E100/E1000
Unsupported in E100/E1000
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Chapter 5 SNMP
5.10.6 Event RMON Group
Table 5-7 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable (continued)
No. Column Name
36 EtherStatsCollisions
37 EtherStatsDropEvents
OID Status
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.8} —
{1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.3} Unsupported in E100/E1000 and G1000
5.10.5.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
These PDUs are not restricted.
5.10.5.4 Row Deletion in alarmTable
To delete a row from the table, the SetRequest PDU should contain an alarmStatus value of 4 (invalid).
A deleted row can be recreated. Entries in this table are preserved if the SNMP agent is restarted.
5.10.6 Event RMON Group
The Event group controls event generation and notification. It consists of two tables: the eventTable, which is a read-only list of events to be generated, and the logTable, which is a writable set of data describing a logged event. The ONS 15454 implements the logTable as specified in RFC 2819.
5.10.6.1 Event Table
The eventTable is read-only and unprovisionable. The table contains one row for rising alarms and another for falling ones. This table has the following restrictions:
• The eventType is always log-and-trap (4).
•
•
•
The eventCommunity value is always a zero-length string, indicating that this event causes the trap to be despatched to all provisioned destinations.
The eventOwner column value is always “monitor.”
The eventStatus column value is always valid(1).
5.10.6.2 Log Table
The logTable is implemented exactly as specified in RFC 2819. The logTable is based upon data that is locally cached in a controller card. If there is a controller card protection switch, the existing logTable is cleared and a new one is started on the newly active controller card. The table contains as many rows as provided by the alarm controller.
December 2004
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
5-19
5.10.6 Event RMON Group
Chapter 5 SNMP
5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
I N D E X
Numerics
1+1 protection
external switching commands
APS channel byte failure
APS invalid code condition
disable switching
far-end forced switch back to working condition
optimized 1+1 APS primary facility condition
A
AIP
MAC address location
MEA
air filter, replace
AIS
AIS-P condition definition
DS-3 card does not report 1-144
AISS-P parameter
AIS-V
alarm logical objects alarm index
definition list
alarms
alarms are indexed individually by name
alphabetical list
frequently used troubleshooting procedures
list of critical alarms
list of major alarms
December 2004 list of minor alarms
states
TL1
SNMP alarm troubleshooting
ALS
AMI coding
AMPLI-INIT
APC-CORRECTION-SKIPPED
APC-DISABLED
APC-OUT-OF-RANGE
APSB
APSCDFLTK
APSC-IMP
APSCINCON
APSCM
APSCNMIS
APSIMP
APS-INV-PRIM
APSMM
APS-PRIM-FAC
APS-PRIM-SEC-MISM
AS-MT-OOG
asynchronous mapping
AUD-LOG-LOSS
AUD-LOG-LOW
AU-LOF
AUTOLSROFF
automatic protection switching
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-1
Index byte failure
channel failure on protect card
channel mismatch
mode mismatch failure
path protection alarms
path protection switch (condition) 2-48
ring switch failure
automatic reset
AUTORESET
AUTOSW-AIS
AUTOSW-LOP (STSMON)
AUTOSW-LOP (VT-MON)
AUTOSW-PDI
AUTOSW-SDBER
AUTOSW-SFBER
AUTOSW-UNEQ (STSMON)
AWG-DEG
AWG-FAIL
AWG-OVERTEMP
AWG-WARM-UP
B
B8ZS
bandwidth
line percentage used by CE-Series Ethernet cards 4-34
line percentage used by E-Series Ethernet cards
line percentage used by G-Series Ethernet cards
line percentage used by MXP cards
line percentage used by the FC_MR-4 card
BAT-FAIL
BBE-PM parameter
BBER-PM parameter
BBER-SM parameter
BBE-SM parameter
BER
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-2 signal degrade condition
signal degrade PM condition
signal fail condition
signal fail PM condition 2-191
threshold range
verify threshold level
BER
BITS daisy-chained
errors
holdover timing
loss of frame
loss of signal
BKUPMEMP
BLSR change node ID number
change ring name
far-end protection line failure
improper configuration (alarms) 2-35
manual span condition
ring mismatch
ring switch failure
verify node visibility
BNC connector
browsers
applet security restrictions 1-134
does launch Java
reconfigure
reset
stalls during download
unsupported in 5.0
C cards
December 2004
Index
cross-connect cards
DS-N cards
MXP cards
OC-N cards
TCC2 card
TCC2P card
TXP cards
reseat
reset
CARLOSS cause of TPTFAIL
CE100T
E100T, E1000F
EQPT
FC
GE
TRUNK
see CARLOSS
CASETEMP-DEG
CBIT framing
CGV parameter
circuits
hairpin circuits
loopbacks
AIS-V alarm on DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 card
circuit state transition error
delete
effect of a node name change
generic procedures
identify circuit state
VT1.5 creation error
CLDRESTART
COMIOXC
COMM-FAIL
December 2004 conditions
conditions are indexed individually by name
characteristics
list of non-reported conditions
list of not-alarmed conditions 2-4
CONTBUS-B-18
CONTBUS-IO-A
cross-connect cards
LED activity during side switch 2-258
main payload bus failure
replace
switching matrix failure
cross-connect loopback clear an OC-N card loopback circuit
perform on a destination-node OC-N carrying an
perform on a source OC-N port
CSS parameter
CSS-P parameter
CTC applet not loaded
applet security restrictions
delete cache files
grey node icon
list of alarms
log-in errors
loss of TCP/IP connection
release interoperability problems
slow operation or login problems
username and password mismatch
verifying PC connection
CTNEQPT-MISMATCH
CTNEQPT-PBPROT
CTNEQPT-PBWORK
CVCP-PFE parameter
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-3
Index
CVCP-P parameter
CV-PFE parameter
CV-P parameter
CVP-P parameter
CV-S parameter
cyclic redundancy checking (CRC)
D database
out of synchronization
parameters that are not restored
DBOSYNC
DCC channel loss
connection loss
create or verify DCC terminations
delete a DCC termination
DCG parameter
default K alarm
diagnostics, retrieve
DS3-MISM
DS3XM-12 card
AIS-V alarm and unused VT circuits
clear a loopback circuit
facility loopback behavior
FEAC loopbacks
incomplete circuit from DS-3 card
terminal loopback behavior
DS3XM-6 card
AIS-V alarm and unused VT circuits
clear a loopback circuit
facility loopback behavior
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-4
FEAC loopbacks
incomplete circuit from DS-3 card
terminal loopback behavior
DS-N cards
DS3XM-12 card
DS3XM-6 card
EC-1 cards clear loopbacks
DS-3 idle condition
facility loopback behavior
facility loopback example
frame format mismatch
idle DS-3 signal
LOF
loopback facility alarm
loopback signal received
loss of signal
performance monitoring
terminal loopback alarm
terminal loopback behavior
test during a facility loopback
DSP-COMM-FAIL
DSP-FAIL
DUP-IPADDR
DUP-NODENAME
DWDM cards
OCH alarm object
OCHNC-CONN alarm object
performance monitoring
troubleshoot circuits with G.709 monitoring
E east
⁄ west mismatch alarm
EC-1 card loopback facility alarm
December 2004
Index
performance monitoring
terminal loopback condition
EHIBATVG
EIAs
facility loopback test 1-3, 1-10, 1-11
test during a facility loopback 1-14, 1-31
electrical cabling, test during a facility loopback
ELWBATVG
ENCAP-MISMATCH-P
EOC-L
EQPT
EQPT-DIAG description
EQPT-MISS
equipment diagnostic failure software or hardware failure on reporting card
equipment failure far-end DS-1 failure
far-end DS-3 failure
hardware failure on reporting card
missing fan-tray assembly
ERFI-P-CONN
ERFI-P-PAYLD
ERFI-P-SRVR
ERROR-CONFIG
ESB-P parameter
ESCP-PFE parameter
ESCP-P parameter
ES-L parameter
ES-PM parameter
ES-P parameter
ESP-P parameter
ESR-PM parameter
December 2004
ESR-SM parameter
ES-SM parameter
ES-S parameter
ES-V parameter
Ethernet
carrier loss
configuring VLANs
IOS configuration copy in progress condition
Tag/Untag port connectivity
Ethernet cards facility loopback behavior
LED test
performance monitoring
terminal loopback behavior
ETH-LINKLOSS
E-W-MISMATCH
EXCCOL
EXERCISE-RING-FAIL
exercise ring failure
EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL
EXT
external switching commands
BLSR Force Ring condition
BLSR Force Span condition
BLSR lockout protect span command
clear a 1+1 Force or Manual switch
clear a BLSR switching command
clear a lock on or lock out
clear a path protection span switch
disabled
initiate a 1+1 Manual switch
initiate a 1+1 Protection switch
initiate a 1:1 card switch command
initiate a BLSR exercise ring switch
initiate a BLSR Force ring switch 2-265
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-5
Index initiate a BLSR Force span switch
initiate a BLSR lock out 2-266
initiate a BLSR Manual ring switch
initiate a lock on
initiate a lock out
initiate a path protection Force switch
initiate a path protection lock out
initiate a path protection Manual switch
path protection Manual Ring condition
side switch a cross-connect card
EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT
F facility data link
facility loopback clear an OC-N looback circuit
definition
intermediate node G1000-4
perform on a destination-node DS-N port
perform on a destination-node Ethernet port
perform on a destination-node MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 card
perform on an intermediate node Ethernet port
perform on an intermediate node MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 card
perform on an intermediate node OC-N port
perform on a source-node Ethernet port
perform on a source-node OC-N port 1-47
perform on source-node TXP, MXP, and FC_MR-4 cards
test a source DS-N port
FAILTOSW
FAILTOSW-PATH
FAILTOSWS
FAN
fan-tray assembly
MEA
IN-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
missing unit alarm
replace
reseat
FC_MR-4 card clear loopbacks
FC-NO-CREDITS alarm
GFP-DE-MISMATCH alarm
GFP-EX-MISMATCH
GFP-NO-BUFFERS
GFP-UP-MISMATCH
LED test
performance monitoring
signal loss
transport failure
troubleshoot circuits with loopbacks 1-87
FC-L parameter
FC-NO-CREDITS
FC-PFE parameter
FC-PM parameter
FC-P parameter
FC-SM parameter
FEAC
FE-AIS
FEC-MISM
FE-DS1-MULTLOS
FE-DS1-NSA
FE-DS1-SNGLLOS
FE-DS3-NSA
FE-EQPT-NSA
FE-FRCDWKSWBK-SPAN
FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING
FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN
FE-IDLE
FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN
FE-LOF
FE-LOS
FE-MANWKSWBK-SPAN
December 2004
FE-MANWKSWPR-RING
FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN
FEPRLF
fiber and cabling errors
fiber-optic connections
FIBERTEMP-DEG
FC_MR-4 card
see FC_MR-4 card firewall firewall proxy with SNMP
invalid port number
flash manager
flow rate
FORCED-REQ
FORCED-REQ-RING
FORCED-REQ-SPAN
external switching commands forward error correction description
provision thresholds
FRCDSWTOPRI
FRCDSWTOSEC
FRCDSWTOTHIRD
2-112 free run synchronization 2-112
FRNGSYNC
FULLPASSTHR-BI
G
G.709 monitoring common trouble scenarios
description
provision thresholds
see Ethernet cards
GAIN-HFAIL
GAIN-LDEG
December 2004
Index
GAIN-LFAIL
GBIC, replace
GCC-EOC
GE-OOSYNC
GFP encapsulation mismatch
FC_MR-4 congestion
logical object
GFP-CSF
GFP-DE-MISMATCH
GFP-EX-MISMATCH
GFP-LFD
GFP-UP-MISMATCH
H hairpin circuit definition
perform on a destination-node electrical port
perform on source-node electrical port 1-15
HELLO
HIBATVG
HI-CCVOLT
HI-LASERBIAS
HI-LASERTEMP
HI-RXPOWER
HITEMP
HI-TXPOWER
I idle signal condition
IETF
I-HITEMP
improper card removal
IMPROPRMVL
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-7
Index
INC-ISD
INCOMPATIBLE-SW
INHSWPR
intermediate path performance monitoring
see IPPM
Internet Explorer, reset as default browser
interoperability
INTRUSION-PSWD
INVMACADR
IOSCFGCOPY
IOS parameter
IP connectivity
no connectivity exists between nodes
verify (ping)
IPC parameter
IPPM
J
Java
JRE browser does not launch
JRE compatibility by software release
incompatibility
launch failure
unsupported in 5.0
K
KB-PASSTHR
KBYTE-APS-CHANNEL-FAILURE
k bytes
L lamp test
IN-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
LAN (CAT-5) cable, crimp 1-149
LAN-POL-REV
LASER-APR
LASERBIAS-DEG
LASERTEMP-DEG
LBCL-AVG parameter
LBCL-MAX parameter
LBCL-MIN parameter
LCAS
LCAS-CRC
LED blinking STAT LED
cross-connect card side switch
test
traffic card after reset
2-258 traffic card during reset 2-258
traffic card insertion
line coding
line framing
line interface unit
line terminating cards
LKBKTERMINAL (G1000)
LKOUTPR-S
LOA
lock initiation
see external switching commands
LOCKOUT-REQ
external switching commands
LOF
BITS
EC1, EC-12
TRUNK
LOFC parameter
December 2004
Index logical objects alarm index
definition list
log-in errors applet security restrictions
browser login does not launch Java 1-124
browser stallls when downloading .jar file
no DCC connection
1-138 no IP connectivity 1-138
slow CTC operation
username/password mismatch
LO-LASERTEMP
LOM
loopback
cross-connect loopbacks
facility loopback
terminal loopback alarms
card view indicator
clear
LOP-P
LOP-V
LO-RXPOWER
LOS
2R
BITS
DS1
DS3
EC1
ESCON
FUDC
LOS-P (OMS)
LOS-P (OTS)
LOS-P (TRUNK)
MSUDC
OCN
December 2004
TRUNK
LOS-O
LOSS-L parameter
see LOF
see LOP
see LOS
LPBKCRS
LPBKDS1FEAC
LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD
LPBKDS3FEAC
LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD
LPBKFACILITY (DS1) 2-168, 2-172
LPBKFACILITY (DS3) 2-168, 2-172
LPBKFACILITY (EC1-12)
LPBKFACILITY (FC)
LPBKFACILITY (FCMR)
LPBKFACILITY (G1000)
LPBKFACILITY (ISC)
LPBKFACILITY (TRUNK)
LPBKTERMINAL (CE100T)
LPBKTERMINAL (EC1)
LPBKTERMINAL (ESCON)
LPBKTERMINAL (FC)
LPBKTERMINAL (FCMR)
LPBKTERMINAL (GE)
LPBKTERMINAL (ISC)
LPBKTERMINAL (OCN)
LPBKTERMINAL (TRUNK)
LWBATVG
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-9
Index
M
MAC address invalid
mismatch
major alarm list
management information base see
MIB
MAN-REQ
MANRESET
MANSWTOPRI
MANSWTOSEC
MANSWTOTHIRD
MANUAL-REQ-RING
MANUAL-REQ-SPAN
MEA (AIP)
MEA (BIC)
MEA (FAN)
MEA (PPM)
MEM-GONE
MEM-LOW
MFGMEM
MIB
minor alarm list
see MXP cards
MXP cards clear loopbacks
facility loopback behavior
line terminating cards
performance monitoring
terminal loopback behavior
troubleshoot circuits with loopbacks
N
Netscape Navigator clear cache
limit colors
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-10 network testing
see hairpin circuits see loopbacks
NIC card
NIOS parameter
NO-CONFIG
NOT-AUTHENTICATED
NOT-AUTHENTICATED (alarm)
NPJC-PDET-P parameter
NPJC-Pgen parameter
NPJC-PGEN-P parameter
O
OC-N cards
clear a loopback circuit 2-273
facility loopback behavior
line terminating cards
lockout request condition
OC-3 and DCC limitations
performance monitoring
terminal loopback behavior
terminal loopbacks
transmit and receive levels 1-154
ODUK-1-AIS-PM
ODUK-2-AIS-PM
ODUK-3-AIS-PM
ODUK-4-AIS-PM
ODUK-AIS-PM
ODUK-SF-PM
December 2004
ODUK-TIM-PM
OOU-TPT
OPR-AVG parameter
OPR-MIN parameter
OPT-AVG parameter
optical add/drop multiplexer cards see
DWDM cards
see DWDM cards
see DWDM cards optical transport networks
OPT-MAX parameter
OPT-MIN parameter
OPWR-HDEG
OPWR-HFAIL
OPWR-LDEG
OPWR-MAX parameter
OPWR-MIN parameter
OSRION
OTUK-AIS
OTUK-IAE description
OTUK-LOF
OTUK-SF
OTUK-TIM
OUT-OF-SYNC
P
PARAM-MISM
password
⁄ username mismatch
path protection
AIS alarm
December 2004
Index
PDI alarm
SD alarm
signal failure alarm
PDI-P
PEER-NORESPONSE
performance monitoring
DS1 and DS1N parameters
DS3/EC1-48 parameters
DS3-12E and DS3N-12E parameters
DS3 and DS3N parameters
DS3i-N-12 parameters
DS3XM-6 parameters
DWDM cards
EC1-12 card
Ethernet cards
FC_MR-4 card
G.709 optical transport network 1-103
IPPM
MXP cards
OC-N cards
parameter definitions
provision thresholds using TL1
thresholds
TXP cards
ping
PJCS-PDET-P parameter
PJCS-PGEN-P parameter
PJNEG parameter
PJPOS parameter
PLM-P
PLM-V
pointer justification counts
PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-HI
PORT-ADD-PWR-DEG-LOW
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-11
Index
PORT-ADD-PWR-FAIL-LOW
PORT-MISMATCH
power consumption
power supply problems
PPJC-Pdet parameter
PPJC-PDET-P parameter
PPJC-Pgen parameter
PPJC-PGEN-P parameter
PRC-DUPID
PROTNA
PSC parameter
PSC-R parameter
PSC-S parameter
PSC-W parameter
PSD parameter
PSD-R parameter
PSD-S parameter
PTIM
PWR-FAIL-A
PWR-FAIL-B
PWR-FAIL-RET-A
PWR-FAIL-RET-B
R
RAI
RCVR-MISS
receive levels
remote network monitoring (RMON)
RFI
RFI-L
RFI-P
RFI-V
RING-MISMATCH
RING-SW-EAST
RPRW
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-12
RUNCFG-SAVENEED
S safety summary
see FC_MR-4 card
SASP parameter
SASP-P parameter
SD (DS1)
SD (DS3)
SD (TRUNK)
SD-L
SD-P
SD-V
SEF-S parameter
service-affecting alarms
SESCP-PFE parameter
SESCP-P parameter
SES-L parameter
SES-PFE parameter
SES-P parameter
SESR-PM parameter
SESR-SM parameter
SES-S parameter
SES-V parameter
severities
SF (DS1)
SF-P
SFP, replace
SF-V
SH-INS-LOSS-VAR-DEG-HIGH 2-224
December 2004
SHUTTER-OPEN
external switching commands
SIGLOSS
simple network management protocol see
SNMP
SMB connector
SNMP community names
components
external interfaces
message types
overview
remote network monitoring (RMON)
trap content
SNTP-HOST
SPAN-SW-WEST
see synchronous payload envelope
SQM
SQUELCH
SSM
quality level degrade
synchronization traceability alarm
SSM-DUS
SSM-FAIL
SSM-LNC
SSM-OFF
SSM-PRC
SSM-PRS
SSM-RES
SSM-SDN-TN
SSM-SETS
SSM-SMC
SSM-ST2
SSM-ST3
December 2004
Index
SSM-ST3E
SSM-ST4
SSM-TNC
storage access networking card see
FC_MR-4 card
STSMON
switching
see automatic protection switching see external switching commands
SWMTXMOD
SWTOPRI
SWTOSEC
SWTOTHIRD
SYNC-FREQ
synchronization status messaging
see SSM synchronous payload envelope
SYNCLOSS
SYNCSEC
T
TCA common trouble scenarios
G.709 optical transport network 1-103
IPPM paths
provision optical TCA thresholds 1-107
TCC2 card communication failure (TCC2 to TCC2)
flash memory exceeded
jar file dowload problem 1-130
low memory
reseat
TCC2P card communication failure (TCC2P to TCC2P)
flash memory exceeded
jar file download problem
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-13
Index low memory
TCP/IP
Telcordia performance monitoring
signal degrade definition
signal failure definition
temperature fan-tray assembly alarm
high-temperature alarm
industrial high-temperature alarm
OC-192 alarm
TEMP-MISM
terminal loopback clear an OC-N loopback circuit
definition
perform on a destination electrical port
perform on a destination-node Ethernet port
perform on a destination-node MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 card
perform on a destination-node OC-N port
perform on an intermediate-node Ethernet port
perform on an intermediate-node MXP, TXP, or
FC_MR-4 card
perform on an intermediate OC-N port
perform on a source-node electrical port 1-40
perform on a source node Ethernet port
perform on a source-node MXP, TXP, or FC_MR-4 card
perform on a source-node OC-N port 1-49
see TCA thresholds performance monitoring
provision BBE/SES thresholds
timing alarms free running synchronization
loss of primary reference
loss of tertiary reference 2-240
synchronization
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-14 timing reference failure
timing reference
automatic switch to secondary source (condition) 2-237
automatic switch to third timing source
change
manual switch to internal source (condition) 2-178
manual switch to primary source (condition)
manual switch to second source (condition)
manual switch to third source (condition)
TIM-MON
TIM-P
TIM-V
TL1
TPTFAIL (CE100T)
TPTFAIL (FCMR)
TPTFAIL (ML1000)
TPTFAIL (ML100T)
transmission failure
transmit levels
TXP cards
TRMT
TRMT-MISS
troubleshooting
alarm troubleshooting
loopback alarm characteristics
frequently used procedures
severities
TX-AIS
TXP cards clear loopbacks
facility loopback behavior
line terminating cards
performance monitoring
December 2004
Index provision BBE or SES thresholds
provision FEC thresholds
provision G.709 thresholds
terminal loopback behavior
troubleshoot circuits with loopbacks
TX-RAI
U
UASCP-PFE parameter
UASCP-P parameter
UAS-L parameter
UAS-PFE parameter
UAS-PM parameter
UAS-P parameter
UASP-P parameter
UAS-SM parameter
UAS-V parameter
UNC-WORDS parameter
UNEQ-V
UNIX incorrect colors
UNREACHABLE-TARGET-POWER
username/password mismatch
UT-COMM-FAIL
UT-FAIL
V
VCG-DEG
VCG-DOWN
VOA-HDEG
VOA-HFAIL
December 2004
VOA-LDEG
VOA-LFAIL
see battery
VOLT-MISM
VPC parameter
VT1.5 creation error
W west or east misconnection alarm
WKSWPR
WTR
WTR (condition)
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
IN-15
Index
IN-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R5.0
December 2004
Downloaden
Openbare link bijgewerkt
De openbare link naar uw chat is bijgewerkt. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Openbare link document
Advertentie